Home

Cyclone 5.8.1

1. Cutplane Operations View Half Space Once the Cutplane has been positioned you can visually hide all geometry above the active Cutplane using the View Half Space command This produces a helpful visualization of the cross section and everything below It can be useful to see inside the surfaces that are left visible e 10 toggle the visibility of the geometry use the Flip Cutplane Normal icon in the Cutplanes dialog Slice It can be useful to create a slice around the active Cutplane beyond which all geometry is hidden The results of the View Slice command resemble a cross section that can be used for quick 2D plots directly from point clouds and surfaces e To set the thickness of the slice use the Set Slice Thickness command Create Lines The Cutplane can also be used to create polylines at the intersection of the active Cutplane with objects and meshes The polylines that result from using the Create Lines from Cutscommand are separate from the objects used to create them and can be manipulated independently Likewise changes to the source objects do not change the polylines once they have been created 77 Animation Fit Edge Cyclone s Fit Edge tool can be used to generate polylines describing a swept edge best fit to a point cloud The Fit Edge Process The following is an outline of a typical work flow a All edge fitting is done via the Fit Edge dialog which is in the Create Object submenu of t
2. 1 Multi select a breakline and the TIN to be extended Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh entry in this chapter 2 From the Tools menu point to Mesh then to Breakline and then select Extend TIN to Polyline The TIN is redrawn to include the vertices in the breakline Extend to Last Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extend Action Executes command Usage The Extend to Last Selection command extends selected objects to intersect with a reference object which is the last object in the multi selection This command is useful for creating piping tees or to extend a wall to a floor or ceiling To extend one object to another 1 Multi select the objects that you want to extend ending with the object that you want to serve as the reference object 2 From the Extend submenu select Extend to Last Selection The selected objects are extended to the planar or linear intersection with the reference object 280 Index Extend to Ref Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extend Action Executes command Usage The Extend to Ref Plane command extends selected objects to intersect with the active Reference Plane To extend objects to the Reference Plane 1 Multi select the objects that you want to extend 2 From the Extend submenu select Extend to Ref Plane The
3. Customize Toolbars Window ModelSpace Navigator Image Viewer Scan Control Registration Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage The Customize Toolbars dialog is used to customize all aspects of the toolbars that are available in Cyclone 223 Index Customize Toolbars Dialog O Customize Toolbars x Di lt Command O Toolbars Modes _ Mouse Modifiers Viewing Modeler s Tools Cloud Ops Insert Object Create Object Handles and Constraints Cutplane Edit Object Mesh Tools Reference Plane Drawing Tools VIEdit K EHRE lOO Coordinate System Measurement Point Cloud Rendering G Large Buttons A The Toolbars tab allows you to create new toolbars as well as elect whether to display new or existing toolbars The Commands tab allows you to add available buttons to visible toolbars B List of all available toolbars for the window from which the dialog was opened Select a toolbar name to display that toolbar in the current window C Check Large Buttons to display enlarged toolbar buttons D Click the New button to create a new toolbar You will be prompted to name the new toolbar Once you OK the name the toolbar is added to the list it is checked automatically and displayed in the current window without contents Use the Commands tab to add buttons E Use the Rename button to give new names to existing toolbars F The Reset button is
4. Show Images Window Scan Control Menu Image Action Executes command Usage The Show Images command toggles visibility of camera images in the Scan Control window a Having a valid image in the Scan Control window is not required for targeting the scanner or for scanning Show Incoming Points Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Incoming Points command toggles the display of scan data as they are captured It can be helpful to toggle this command OFF if modeling is being done in the same ModelSpace viewer 436 Index Show ModelSpace Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show ModelSpace command toggles the display of the destination ModelSpace in the active Scan Control window When ON any changes are displayed in the active Scan Control window when the window is refreshed The ModelSpace is displayed from the scanner s point of view in that ModelSpace In order to use this command the destination ModelSpace viewer must be opened See the Open ModelSpace Viewer command Show Object s Cloud Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Object s Cloud command toggles the display of the point cloud s that were used to create the selected object Viewing an object s points provides access to the points for visual comparison or verification When
5. a Insert at F F Closest Fitting Inserts a fitting at the end of a pipe fitting to fitting a Connect Pipes with Fitting Connects two intersecting pipes with a fitting elbow or tee Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Piping displays submenu commands used to establish and edit piping connections and annotations The following commands and dialogs are available from the Piping submenu Pipe Modeling Piping Mode Elbow Connectors Edit Elbow Bend Ratio Reducer Connectors Eccentric Reducer Connectors Miter Connectors Convert Elbow to Miter Create Branch Connect Piping Disconnect Shared Disconnect All Select Connected 350 Index Piping Mode Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Opens dialog Usage The Piping Mode dialog is used to assign piping specific information and preferences to modeled objects Piping Mode Dialog Z Piping Mode Ni Insulation Thickness Override 0 000 m Attribute Value g1 Flange Blind blank Elbow 90 and 45 Butt Reducing Elbow Reducing Elbow Compres Reducer Reducer Concentric Reducer Eccentric Reducer Eccentric S Valve Valve Check alternat Make Visible EAT Values from Selection 351 Index A Activate to specify the active insulation thickness applied to objects created via fitting and insertion while this dialog is open The valu
6. gt NO gas 99 Sections Manager Select a File for Data Input Output The first step in the Virtual Surveyor process is selecting a file for data input and output You can create a new file you can append or overwrite an existing file or you can skip selection of a file and continue with Virtual Surveyor you will be prompted for the file to save later To create a new file 1 From the Tools menu in the ModelSpace window select Virtual Surveyor The Select Virtual Surveyor Input Output dialog appears 2 Navigate to the desired folder enter a name in the File name field and click Save The Virtual Surveyor dialog appears To overwrite an existing file a Overwriting a file discards all existing data in the file 1 Fromthe Toolssubmenu in the ModelSpace window select Virtual Surveyor The Select Virtual Surveyor Input Output dialog appears Navigate to the desired file and click Save A confirmation prompt appears Click Overwrite A second confirmation prompt appears Click Overwrite All data in the current file is deleted The Virtual Surveyor dialog appears oF oN To append an existing file a Appending a file opens a file with current data intact 1 From the Toolssubmenu in the ModelSpace window select Virtual Surveyor The Select Virtual Surveyor Input Output dialog appears Navigate to the desired file and click Save A confirmation prompt appears Click Yes A second prompt appears Click Ap
7. 5 Index Select the object to which you want to attach an annotation When creating an annotation in the Image Viewer window select an existing vertex or pick a spot on the image When you want to annotate an area within the ModelSpace View rather than a specific object insert an info marker and then attach the annotation to the info marker From the Tools menu point to Annotations then Add Edit Annotations The Annotations dialog appears Click the New Annotation icon The New Annotation dialog appears Enter the key enter the value and select the desired type of annotation according to the field information provided below The Key field is used to identify the annotation e g pipe size and cannot be used twice for the same object However the same annotation key can be used by multiple objects For information on showing hiding annotation keys see the Show Annotation Keys entry in this chapter The Value field is the main information of the annotation For example if the annotation key is pipe size you can enter the actual pipe size in this field You may also attach a file of any type including executable files as an annotation value either by typing in the file name and location or by clicking the Browse button and selecting the desired file from the browser If you choose to attach a file you must select External Document for the Type field to enable additional functionality Note File and program
8. Index Resection Target List Dialog y fz rr eror use Acquire Type 5096 357 7603 169 99 190 1 896 0 003 O Scanner 5129 039 7592 835 101 584 1 172 0 003 LI 5113 986 7538 976 101 351 0 922 0 003 LI Calculate A Calculate the position and orientation of the scanner Apply the calculated scanner position to the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System o Display the Resection Result ModelSpace to visualize the Resection o Invoke the Resection Report which lists the results of the calculated Resection m Set the viewpoint in the Scan Control on the selected target F Invoke the Resection Compare Report which lists differences between the acquired target positions relative to the known or assumed coordinates G Acquire targets with a check mark in the Acquire column With at least two acquired targets the remaining targets can be automatically acquired without requiring a pick point H Create a new candidate target in the list l Add the new target to the list J The ID position and height of the scanner and targets Error is the difference between the calculated positions and the known or assumed coordinates Select Use to include the target in the calculation Select Acquire to mark the target for acquisition then push the Acquire toolbar button Select the Type of target to be acquired K The scanner parameters are displayed at the top of the list 287 L N O
9. Painting 2 Painting 2592 x 1944 Click to select and add an Image in the database Click to select and add a Project in the database containing cube map Image s Click to edit the selected texture map in the Texture Editor Click to delete the selected texture map s Click to copy the selected texture map s to the clipboard Click to paste the texture map s on the clipboard to the selected object If multiple point clouds and meshes are selected the list area will be blank but you will still be able to paste the copied texture maps to the selected objects This is a convenient way of propagating texture maps Click to align the viewpoint to the selected texture map Click to enable disable individual images within the selected cube map Click to create a Multi Image from the selected cube map texture maps The Multi lmage can be used as a background when publishing a TruView data set Click to replace the image for the selected texture map with another image in the database The replacement image can have different dimensions but it must have the same proportions as the current image Click to display information about the selected texture map 112 Sections Manager L Click to save the selected texture map s to the selected point cloud This replaces the colors displayed by Colors from Scanner for each point in the point cloud Points not in the current cloud are not re colored M Click to move the selec
10. To make a point cloud sub selection 1 Draw a rough fence containing all the points that you may want to use 2 Using the Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands create a temporary selection 3 Continue to refine the temporary selection add or subtract points by manipulating the viewpoint drawing a new fence and using subsequent Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands The points within the temporary subset can now be segmented fit or used for other processes Using Object Handles Most objects in Cyclone provide handles that can be used to adjust the object s position orientation and or dimensions Displaying Handles Handles are color coded as follows to indicate the type of handle behavior Red rotate Orange resize translate snap Blue translate snap When an object is selected the settings in the Handles submenu determine which handles are displayed a The Show Handles command toggles the display of handles This command overrides the Show Rotation Handles command The Show Rotation Handles command toggles the display of rotation handles a The Handles Always Visible command toggles the constant visibility of handles even when hidden from view by an object When this command is checked it allows convenient access to handles that are behind or inside of objects which would otherwise be hidden from view 63 Animation Using Handles to Translate Resize or Rotate Objects
11. Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Lighting displays submenu commands used to insert edit show or hide lights The following commands and dialogs are available from the Lighting submenu Edit Point Spot Light Edit Environmental Lights Insert Point Light Insert Spot Light Fog n For more information about lighting see the Lighting entry in the Modeling chapter Limit Box Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Limit Box command creates a boundary beyond which nothing is loaded into the ModelSpace View Note A limit box can be helpful when you want to work on a subset of objects in ModelSpace It can also improve performance because Cyclone does not need to load or draw objects outside of the limit box 319 Index Tip To resize the limit box click an edge of the displayed limit box to display resizing handles Use the blue handles to move the limit box Use the orange handles to resize the limit box Note Limit box parameters may also be edited from the Edit Properties dialog Limit Box On Off Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Limit Box On Off command toggles the use of the limit box in the ModelSpace View on or off Limit Box on Viewer 1 Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Executes command Usage The Limit Box on Viewer 1 command toggles the use of the limit box
12. compensator is toggled 271 Index Enable Output Box Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage When Enable Output Box is selected all command output from the current ModelSpace e g measurement results is written to the Output Box The output box can be viewed at any time by selecting Show Output Box from the View menu If Enable Output Box was checked before you took the measurements the measurement data is displayed in the output box in the order in which the measurements were taken See the Show Output Box command for more information Enable Tilt Sensor Window Scan Control HDS6000 Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage When Enable Tilt Sensor is selected the use of the tilt sensor is toggled End Caps Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to End Capsdisplays submenu commands used to add and remove end caps of different types The following commands are available from the End Caps submenu Add Flat Cap Closest to Pick Add Both Flat Caps Add Semi Elliptical Head Closest to Pick Add Both Semi Elliptical Caps Remove Cap Closest to Pick Remove Both Caps Enter Datum Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Datum Action Opens dialog Usage The New Datum dialog is used to enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the point through which the datum passes 272 Index To enter a new datum 1 From the Tools men
13. 1 Multi select a series of points 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and then select Polyline The polyline is created a A polyline is drawn from point to point in the same order in which the points were picked a To edit a polyline select it and then use the vertex handles to change its shape a To draw a polyline without the use of pick points see the Draw Polyline entry in this chapter Polylines Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Polylines displays submenu commands used to manipulate polylines with regards to mesh objects or vice versa The following commands are available from the Polylines submenu Project Polyline to TIN Extend TIN to Polyline Preferences Window ModelSpace Navigator Registration Scan Control Image Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Preferences dialog is used to set a variety of Cyclone settings Level Options SESSION These preferences are non persistent and last for the duration of the current session only The next time Cyclone is started these preferences are reset to default settings DEFAULT These preferences are persistent and apply to the current and all future sessions They may be temporarily overridden by making preference changes at the Session level 360 Index Units Tab Settings Units settings control the units used throughout Cyclone LINEAR UNITS Select the type of unit us
14. 2 Click Add The Add Scanner dialog appears 3 From the Scanner Model list select the model name of the scanner that you are adding For example select HDS4500 if the scanner is an HDS4500 4 Inthe Scanner Name field type a logical name for the scanner you are adding e g Scanner My Scanner Scanner 123 etc 5 The HDS4500 does not require an IP address as it is using Firewire Technology 6 Click OK The scanner is added e Toclose the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close To add a ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 or HDS6000 scanner 1 Fromthe Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears 2 Click Add The Add Scanner dialog appears 10 Quick Start 3 From the Scanner Model list select the model name of the scanner that you are adding For example select HDS3000 if the scanner is a HDS3000 HDS6000 if the scanner is a HDS6000 ScanStation if the scanner is a ScanStation or ScanStation 2 if the scanner is a ScanStation 2 4 Inthe Scanner Name field type a logical name for the scanner you are adding e g Scanner My Scanner Scanner 123 etc 5 Inthe IP Address field enter the IP Address for the scanner you are adding The IP address of the scanner is printed on the scanner s housing ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 or in the built in console HDS6000 6 Click OK The scanner is added e To close the Co
15. 3 Enter a value or use the Region Thickness slider to interactively adjust the thickness of the slice or partition near the active Reference Plane 4 Click OK The selected clouds are segmented Cut Sub Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Executes command Usage The Cut Sub Selection command segments a point cloud s into two subsets based on a point cloud sub selection a Foran overview of the segmentation process see the Point Cloud Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To cut a point cloud sub selection 1 Draw a fence around the points that you want to segment 2 Use the Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands to make an initial sub selection a You may continue to refine the selection via subsequent Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands See the Advanced Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter for more information 2 From the Create Object menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut Sub Selection The points within the sub selection are now a separate point cloud and can be selected independently 229 Index Cutplane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Cutplane displays submenu commands used to execute Cutplane operations and change settings The Cutplane is a 3D plane with the primary function of cutting through objects in a ModelSpace and producing a 2D cross section n
16. All object types in Cyclone can be translated resized and rotated using their handles To translate an object via its handles drag one of the object s blue handles or press and hold CTRL and then drag one of the object s orange handles To resize an object using its handles drag one of the object s orange handles To rotate an object using its handles drag one of the object s red handles When an object in a group is selected both that object s handles and the handles on the group s bounding box are displayed and available for manipulating the group as a whole When the group is selected in any other way e g by fence only the handles on the group s bounding box are shown Orange resizing handles are not available for objects in a group Resizing Steel Shapes To resize a steel shape s profile while maintaining the position of the face opposite the handle drag one of the object s handles To resize a steel shape s profile around its midline press and hold ALT while dragging one of the object s edge handles Constraining Handle Movement Object handle motion can be constrained to a specified axis or plane in two ways The first method is to set the constraint before manipulation via the Edit Object Handles Constrain Motion to submenu commands The second method cycles constraints during handle manipulation via keyboard modifiers Additionally object rotation via red handles can be restricted to user spec
17. Create ScanWorld Freeze Registration Window Registration Menu Registration Action Executes command Usage The Create ScanWorld Freeze Registration command uses the current registration to create a single ScanWorld that includes the registered component ScanWorlds in a unified coordinate system It also locks all constraints in place At this point constraints can no longer be modified unless the registration is unfrozen via the Unfreeze Registration command When this command is executed a ScanWorld appears in the Navigator in place of the Registration object which is made a child of the newly created ScanWorld For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter 216 Index Create Sections Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Opens dialog Usage The Create Sections dialog is used to generate sections along the selected alignment object For more information about alignments and the sections process see the Sections Manager chapter Create Sections Dialog Options INITIAL STATION Specify the distance along the alignment at which you want to place the first section END STATION Specify the distance along the alignment at which you want to place the last section SPACING Specify the interval between sections INCLUDE TRANSITION POINTS Select this option to also create a section at each transition point the point at which tw
18. Index The targets used by the Resection Calculate the position and orientation of the scanner Apply the calculated scanner position to the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System Close the dialog To perform a field setup using resection 1 2 OMNAA 10 Pick a cloud point on the target over the known point and push Acquire The backsight is 12 13 14 15 16 17 Set up the scanner Set up at least two targets over known points Connect to the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and enable the dual axis compensator or connect to the HDS6000 and enable the tilt sensor Import or add the known or assumed coordinates using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 From the Window menu select Field Setup The Field Setup panel appears in the control panel Select Resection from the Method control Select the Station ID from the list or enter a new ID Measure and enter the HI Select the Target ID from the list of known coordinates Measure and enter the HT Select the target Type acquired If the target already exists in the ControlSpace the target need not be re acquired Push the Add button to add the target to the resection target list Add at least one other target Push the Calculate button to invoke the Resection Target List dialog In the Resection Target List dialog push the Calculate button The position of the scanner is calculated Optio
19. L The vertical angle of the component in degrees 0 is along the up axis and 90 is lying in the horizontal plane Disabled for some Placement methods M The horizontal angle of the component in degrees 0 is along the Y axis Northing and 90 is along the X axis Easting Disabled for some Placement methods N The roll angle of the component about its centerline in degrees Disabled for some Placement methods and components O Push to display a graphical preview of the component P Push to flip the component to use the other end point for placement Q Push to create the component The created component is automatically picked so that the next component placed will be at the component s end point not used for placement If possible the created component is connected see the Connect Piping entry in this chapter with the previously selected component R Closes the dialog To model pipes 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Piping and then select Pipe Modeling The Pipe Modeling dialog appears Select a type of component to place from the toolbar Select a parts table Select an entry from the parts table Enter or select a Line ID from the pulldown menu Enter or select a Spec Select a Type SKEY from the pulldown menu An SKEY symbol key identifies a generic object e g a standard Cyclone flange as a specific piping component e g Slip on Flange The 2 4 characters at the end of the SKEY comprise
20. Sampling Points Current Import archive 4500 Project 1 ScanWorld 3 Scans Scan 1 2609066 1 4 E 14500 Project 2 ScanWorld 1 Scans Scan 1 863133 1 9 14500 Project 2 ScanWorld 1 Scans Scan2 618125 1 9 LI 4 SamplingSelect the percent reduction in number of points to be imported relative to the total available number Scan Displays the path to the scan in the Navigator Points Displays the approximate number of points that will be imported Current Displays the current sampling of the scan Import Select this check box to import the points Archive Select this check box to move the corresponding SC2 or ZFS scan file to the Archive subfolder Import Imports or archives the selected scans Cancel Cancels the import To re import ScanStation 2 HDS4500 and HDS6000 scans 1 Inthe Navigator window select the container under which ScanStation 2 HDS4500 and or HDS6000 Scans eligible for import are located The container can be a database Project ScanWorld Registration or Scan a You can select multiple containers In the Navigator window on the Tools menu select Re Import Scans The Re Import Scans dialog displays To select a Scan for import toggle ON the corresponding Import flag Select the Sampling level to be used when importing the Scans selected for import To remove a specific Scan from future consideration toggle ON the Archive flag Click Import The indicated Import and or Archive ac
21. The Animation Settings dialog appears 2 Set output options and then click OK Individual frames are saved to a series of files with a user defined prefix available for use with your animation software 94 Databases Databases Cyclone databases can reside on your local hard drive or on a remote server which can be a network server or another networked workstation The advantages to having a database stored on a networked server are many Multiple users can easily access the database and work concurrently Database integrity can be protected by limiting access to the host server Storing a database on a remote server puts the bulk of memory load on the server rather than on an individual s workstation Cyclone provides tools for remote Cyclone database administration and options for maximizing database storage and performance Unshared Database Server Databases added to the unshared server can only be opened by the local client but the performance of disk based operations e g loading points can be significantly improved Remote Administration Databases can be stored on a networked server and administered remotely from a user workstation using the Configure Database dialog This is a secure feature that requires the database administrator to log in by entering a password Once the login has been authenticated the administrator can not only add and remove databases from the remote server but can also destr
22. The following commands dialogs and submenus are available from the Appearance submenu Edit Color Material Add Edit Colors Add Edit Materials Randomize Color of Visible Objects changes to selected objects if any objects are selected Create Objects with Random Colors Apply Color Map Edit Color Map Global Color Map and Edit Global Color Map Append to Alignment Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Executes command Usage The Append to Alignment command adds a line polyline or arc to the end of an existing alignment 176 Index For more information about alignments and the sections process see the Sections Manager chapter To append to an alignment 1 Select the existing alignment to which you want to append 2 Multi select the line polyline or arc you want to append to the selected alignment 3 From the Tools menu point to Alignment and Section and then select Append to Alignment The new segment is added to the alignment and the station numbers from the original alignment are continued Apply Color Map Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Apply Color Map displays submenu commands used to adjust color map styles to the selected point cloud or mesh For an overview of color mapping in Cyclone see the Color Mapping entry in the Modeling chapter Apply Color Map Submenu Commands IMAGE TEXTURE MAP Draws t
23. acquired If the target already exists in the ControlSpace the target need not be re acquired Push the Add button The ScanWorld is added to the Traverse To end the traverse push the Close button instead The foresight ID must be that of a known coordinate If you want to close the traverse but push Add instead of Close click on the options button next to the Registration field and select Close with Last Station from the pop up menu To edit the settings for this position click on the options button next to the Registration field and select Modify Current Station Move the scanner to the next position advance to the next ScanWorld and repeat The previous station ID is now the backsight ID and the previous foresight ID is now the station ID 455 Index e Ifyou have closed the traverse already but need to add another station to the traverse and continue the traverse click on the options button next to the Registration field and select Append Current Station from the pop up menu Trim Edges Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Executes command Usage The Trim Edges command creates a new segment of the selected point cloud that consists of all the points near the cloud s boundary n For an overview of the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To trim the edges of the selected cloud 1 Select the cloud whose edges you want to trim 2 From the Create Objec
24. Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Segment Cloud displays submenu commands for subdividing a cloud of points into smaller subsets The following commands and dialogs are available from the Segment Cloud submenu Cut by Fence Cut by Intensity Cut Near Ref Plane Trim Edges Cut Sub Selection For more information on the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter 410 Index Segment by Polyline Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Segment by Polyline command splits faces in the selected mesh wherever the selected line or polyline crosses it If a line is selected the line is extended infinitely in each direction for purposes of this command effectively dividing the mesh into two pieces If a polyline is selected it is automatically closed into a polygon for purposes of this command The crossing is determined using the projection of the selected line or polyline to the active Reference Plane The mesh must be a TIN relative to the active Reference Plane To Segment Faces on a mesh Select the mesh es to be segmented Multi select the line polyline or polygon object that defines the boundary to use From the Tools menu point to Mesh then select Segment by Polyline The mesh is segmented using the projection of the selected line polyline or polygon to the active Reference Plane Segment Polyline Window ModelSpace Menu Crea
25. Constrain Motion to submenu Using Handles to Snap Objects Using Handles to Snap Objects Most objects in Cyclone provide one or more points lines and or planes that can be used in addition to its handles as snapping points when moving or resizing other objects via handles Note that some objects provide bounding box handles only Objects that are being manipulated snap to other objects whose handles or other snapping points lines and or planes come within the user specified snapping threshold The snapping threshold can be adjusted using the Snap to Object Threshold dialog To snap selected objects 1 Multi select the objects you want to snap 2 Press and hold SHIFT and drag the second object s handle towards the reference object to resize the object Press and hold SHIFT CTRL while dragging the second object s handle towards the reference object to translate the object When the dragged handle passes over one of the reference object s handles it snaps to that handle When any of the reference object s snapping points are within the snapping threshold specified in the Edit Snap to Object Threshold dialog the object being manipulated jumps to the snapping point defined by the reference object a When the snapping point is handle to handle the handles appear larger when they snap The dragged handle can be moved away from the snap when the cursor passes beyond the snapping threshold e To make the object you are mo
26. Convert Elbow to Miter Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Convert Elbow to Miter replaces the selected elbow connector with a mitered connector The command may also be used to change the value of an existing miter To convert an elbow to a mitered connector 1 Select the elbow you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu point to Piping and then select Convert Elbow to Miter The Number of Miter Segments dialog appears 3 Enter the number of segments you want to represent the miter and click OK The elbow is converted Coordinate System Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Coordinate System displays submenu commands used to set and show the current coordinate axes set the origin and save and edit user defined coordinate systems 202 Index Setting your own coordinate system as you begin modeling is helpful in maintaining your orientation The following commands submenus and dialogs are available from the Coordinate System submenu Save Edit Coordinate Systems Show Axes Set Origin Set From Points Set Using One Axis Set Using Two Axes Set ScanWorld Coordinate System Reset ScanWorld Coordinate System Coplanar Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Executes command Usage The Coplanar command aligns one or more selected objects so that they lie in the same plane as a reference object To make
27. Example gt oND o 10 11 Select a ScanWorld From the Edit menu select Copy Select a location in another database and then select Paste from the Edit menu A copy of the ScanWorld appears Change the name of either ScanWorld Notice that the name of the other ScanWorld is not updated Add edit or delete an annotation and a ModelSpace in the copied ScanWorld Select either ScanWorld For merging purposes this is the source ScanWorld From the Edit menu select Copy Select any location in the database containing the other ScanWorld For merging purposes this is the target ScanWorld which has the same identifier as the source ScanWorld Select Paste from the Edit menu The Merging ScanWorlds Resolve Differences dialog appears and displays discrepancies in the annotations Select the annotations you wish to have in the target ScanWorld and then click OK The Merging ScanWorlds Select ModelSpaces dialog appears Select the default ControlSpace and ModelSpaces you wish to have in the target ScanWorld and then click OK The source and target ScanWorlds are merged into the target ScanWorld s database 53 Modeling Overview Cyclone s tools analyze and extract information from point cloud data and convert point clouds to CAD object based line and surface models There are many advantages to using Cyclone for this purpose Most current CAD programs do not support massive cl
28. Exclusion Volume Action Toggles setting ON OFF Usage The Keep Collapsed command toggles the setting to keep the sides of the selected exclusion volume collapsed to the minimum dimensions needed to enclose its contents Keep Viewpoint Upright Window ModelSpace Registration Menu ModelSpace Viewpoint Registration Viewers Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Keep Viewpoint Upright command toggles the setting to keep the viewpoint in the ModelSpace window upright Toggling this option OFF allows you to rotate the viewpoint in any direction 315 Index Cyclone lets you pan rotate and zoom the viewpoint in 3D However some users prefer not to rotate the view with all three degrees of freedom roll yaw and pitch turned ON because it is not always clear which way is up Keep Viewpoint Upright disables the roll component of the viewer That is you can rotate left and right and up and down but you can t view a scene upside down A scene s up and down are defined by the current coordinate system and the Set Up Direction submenu To reset the up direction see the Set Up Direction command Launch Window ModelSpace Menu File Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Launch displays submenu commands used to open a second viewer for the current ModelSpace copy selected objects to a new ModelSpace and export and view the ModelSpace in a supported 3rd party application The follow
29. For a general overview of camera calibration see the Camera Calibration entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 chapter To import camera calibration info 1 The Scanner Control menu point to Camera Calibration and select Import Calibration Info The Import Calibration dialog appears 2 Browse to and select the calibration file 3 Click Open The calibration information is imported and overwrites any existing camera calibration information 308 Index Import Coordinate List Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000 Menu Project Action Opens dialog Usage The Import Coordinate List dialog is used to select an ASCII file to import as known or assumed coordinates that will be used in the Field Setup or Traverse procedures a The known or assumed coordinates are saved in the Known CoordinatesScanWorld under the current Project a For more information on Field Setup and Traverse see the Field Setup ScanStation ScanStation 2 and Traverse ScanStation ScanStation 2 entries in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 chapter or the Field Setup HDS6000 Traverse HDS6000 section in the Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 chapter To import known or assumed coordinates 1 From the Project menu select Import Coordinate List The Import Coordinate List dialog appears 2 Select the text file and click Open a f importing a custom file format the Import ASCII File Format
30. From the Scanner Control menu in the Scan Control window select Acquire Targets The Acquire Targets dialog appears From the Acquire Targets menu in the dialog select HDS Targets from Pick Points to mark potential HDS Targets in the ModelSpace viewer and list them in the Acquire Targets dialog select Black White Targets from Pick Points to mark potential black white targets in the ModelSpace viewer and list them in the Acquire Targets dialog select Spheres from Pick Points to mark potential sphere targets in the ModelSpace viewer and list them in the Acquire Targets dialog View each potential target to determine which ones you want Cyclone to attempt to acquire To center the ModelSpace viewpoint on a potential target select the potential target from the list in the Acquire Targets dialog To rotate the ModelSpace viewpoint around a potential target select the potential target from the list in the Acquire Targets dialog and then press the LEFT RIGHT ARROW keys To move up down the list of potential targets press the UP DOWN ARROW keys 6 Add an identifier or comment to potential targets to be acquired Na 00 MH To add an identifier or comment select the target click the ID or Comment field type an identifier or comment and press ENTER Identifiers function as registration labels and can be used for automatic registration Comments function as text annotations in the ModelSpace once a target is acquired Once you have v
31. If an individual breakline is picked only that breakline is removed 190 Index See the Project Polyline to TIN command for more information on creating a breakline Clearances Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Opens dialog Usage The Clearances command is used to measure the vertical and horizontal clearances to overhead and adjacent structures in a roadway overpass tunnel setting a This topic describes a typical workflow Your process may differ a The Clearances command requires e that the points from transient surfaces e g passing automobiles first be removed e that the road surface a This command requires selection of at least 2 points on the road surface to establish the travel lane s and 2 or 4 points on the lowest edge s of the overhead structure bridge sign structure The points must be selected in a specific order The pick points on the road surface must be along the travel lanes edge of pavement to edge of pavement to compute the minimum vertical clearance for traveling vehicles e The Lane Measurement Tolerance lt 1 0 m defines the width of a strip of points centered along each travel lane border The Overhang Measurement Tolerance lt 1 0 m is 2x the largest horizontal distance that the points picked on the overhead surface can be from the lowest edge The intersection of the Lane and Overhead tolerances determines the points on the road surface and the points on the overhead surfac
32. Select the Create check box to create an object in the ModelSpace to represent the samples Select the form of the sampling output to be generated Vertices Select Vertices to generate individual Vertex objects at each surface sample Point Select Point Cloud to create a Point Cloud whose points correspond to the surface Cloud samples Mesh Select Mesh to create a Mesh whose vertices correspond to the surface samples Output Select the Output Table check box to display the Sample Grid Results dialog that Table contains a table listing the individual sample points OK Click OK to sample the surfaces and generate the requested output Save Edit Viewpoints Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Opens dialog Usage The User Viewpoints dialog is used to save restore and delete user defined viewing positions 399 Index User Viewpoints Dialog D E iewpoints Default Viewpoint User ViewPoint 1 ser ViewPoint 2 User ViewPoint 3 le le List of saved viewpoints Double click to set the viewpoint Save the current viewpoint Delete the selected viewpoint Move the selected viewpoint up through the list saved coordinate systems Move the selected viewpoint down through the list saved coordinate systems To save the current viewpoint 1 2 3 From the Viewpoints menu select Save Edit Viewpoints The User Viewpoints dialog appears Click the Save icon The User
33. The angle between the two centerlines does not need to be perpendicular a To set preferences that determine whether or not a connection is made see the Piping Max Offset and Piping Max Angle settings in the Modeling tab of the Preferences entry in this chapter 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Piping and then select Connect Piping Any valid connections are established and selected objects that are not connected with any other selected object are deselected a Once connected two piping components can only be disconnected by executing the Disconnect Piping Shared or Disconnect Piping All commands or by changing the geometry of object such that the connection is automatically broken because the connection now exceeds the current Piping Max Offset and Piping Max Angle settings Note The Connect Piping command may take longer to finish depending on the number of objects selected Selecting more objects may greatly increase the time required to find the shared connections Constrain Motion to Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Handles Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Constrain Motion to displays submenu commands to select the plane or axis along which objects can be moved using their handles The following commands are available from the Constrain Motion to submenu User Coordinate System Object Coordinate System X Axis Y Axis Z Axis Screen Plane perpendicular to the current viewpoint X Y Plane X Z P
34. The second thing to look at is the shape of the error histogram When observing the histogram during the Optimize Cloud Alignment procedure the histogram normally begins as a horizontal line and then gradually tightens up to the shape of a vertical half bell curve The half bell curve shape indicates that the alignment has been optimized properly The width one sigma of the half bell curve should be approximately matching the accuracy of the scanner used to scan the cloud 6 mm for the HDS2500 HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 A histogram that remains flat indicates that the initial guess was too far away for the Optimize Cloud Alignment algorithm to align the clouds VIEW THE ALIGNMENT Finally viewing the results of the alignment will give you a good sense of the accuracy Select a cloud constraint and then select the View Interim Results command to open a temporary ModelSpace containing the aligned objects and clouds from the ControlSpaces of the two ScanWorlds Focus on corners and surfaces to check the alignment If you see any gaps between surfaces that were stationary during the scans you should use the Update Initial Cloud Alignment command and optimize again The Show Overlapping Points function in the Show Diagnostics dialog is another tool for viewing the alignment The Show Overlapping Points function creates a temporary ModelSpace containing four point sets blue dark blue green and dark green The dark blue and dark green
35. Untreeze Registration inside t neetseamesina yes 457 DON A A adipsia ves cal skint Sele A Dele a tape 458 Unity ClOUS 20 t2esc a tiene tracing aa EAEE EAA Haddin vavcdag E N R R Eran 458 Unify ModelSpace sccisiss vnvewieeten vii ree N tai dada 459 Update Gansta Ei ia 459 Update Initial Cloud Alignment cece cecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeneeseeaees 460 Update Original ModelSpace cceeeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeneeeeeeeneeeeeaees 460 Update Simulated Scanner PoSitiONn cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaneeeeeeees 461 Use Fit Constraints esaun p ied aids wend vie ica dia E 462 Use Parts Table ancad kacnira a rn A A a A aii 462 User Coordinate Syse aariin a e ER EER EET 462 User Feedbacks EA tect hee ee ae ete 463 Verify Camera Calibration 2 0 0 ceeeee cece cece ee cece ener tesa eeee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeneees 463 Very Ticos a A chee SN E tae S 464 Vertex From IntersectionS ooooncccconnnccccnonnnnnnnnannncnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnrncnnnnnnas 464 Vertex From Pick Points jce raian te dee S A ities di 465 MiGW ALE chasse Mico nct ade cceen E ici 465 View Hall Sp aCe ier sc oeo e A A a 465 View Interim RESUItS recoin a aae a e a AE Aa TA e Ea RT aea 465 VIGW LOCK A ined REAREA TERNE 466 View Mode oraria n AT A S T ied eee S E a S 467 View ModelS pab caiene a ti EA dota o
36. X Y or Z Axis in the direction you want along the positive or negative axis The active Cutplane is set on the pick point perpendicular to the selected axis The direction of the axis is the side that is hidden The active Cutplane and the View Half Space option are automatically enabled 419 Index Set Home ScanWorld Window Registration Menu ScanWorld Action Executes command Usage The Set Home ScanWorld command designates the Home ScanWorld for the current Registration The Home ScanWorld defines the reference coordinate system for the ScanWorld created from a successful Registration n By default the first ScanWorld added to the Registration is set as the Home ScanWorld The Home ScanWorld is displayed in bold type with red axis in its icon To set the Home ScanWorld 1 From the ScanWorlds Constraints tab or the ModelSpaces tab select the ScanWorld that you want to be the Home ScanWorld There must already be ScanWorlds added to the Registration before a Home ScanWorld can be chosen 2 From the ScanWorld menu select Set Home ScanWorld The Home ScanWorld is set and is displayed in bold type Set Limit Box by Cursor Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Set Limit Box by Cursor command lets the user drag the cursor to interactively define the extents of the limit box centered around the current focal point The limit box is aligned to the current viewpoint
37. all of the scans and images that are taken from one scanner position would go into one ScanWorld The scans and images from another scanner position would go into another ScanWorld possibly in another project The organization of the scans is managed by the user 17 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 To select a project for your scan data 1 When you open a Scan Control window the Select a Project dialog appears To select a different project when the Scan Control window is already open from the Project Setup tab in the Scan Control window select Select a Project e You can create a new project for your scan data by clicking Create and then selecting the created project that appears 2 Navigate to an existing project and then click OK Your destination project is selected a When the scanner is not busy you can select a different destination for the next set of scan data Note If you choose a new project a new ScanWorld is created and your previous ScanWorld is no longer the destination for subsequent scan data To select a ScanWorld for your scans and images 1 From the Project Setup tab in the Scan Control window select Select a ScanWorld The Select a ScanWorld dialog appears e You can create a new ScanWorld in the currently selected Project for your scan data by clicking Create and then selecting the created ScanWorld that appears 2 Navigate to an existing ScanWorld and then click OK Your destination Scan
38. distributed in space for better results Avoid picking only constraints that are clustered together or points on a single plane e Computation 2 When creating constraints in a cube map try to pick at least one point in each image e Computation 3 Disabling or deleting the constraint with the highest error may not lead to a lower overall error e Computation 4 A lower overall error is not necessarily a better texture mapping Always be sure to check the graphical results visually e Computation 5 When starting out increase the Texture Map Tolerance preferences The actual values can depend on the resolution of the image as well as the quality desired e Graphics Performance 1 Disable any texture maps that are not used in the point cloud or mesh For example if a point cloud is segmented such that only one of two textures is relevant in the segmented cloud turn off or delete the unused texture map For cube maps 111 Sections Manager disable individual images via the Enable Disable Cube Map Components toolbar button in the Texture Map Browser dialog Graphics performance 2 Meshes perform actual texture mapping where the interior of each triangle can have multiple colors Some graphics cards may not robustly support large texture maps Try selecting a software only OpenGL Mode for Cyclone Texture Map Browser Dialog Nnmuop gt CS mee e E ly T _0099 2592 x ae IMG_0099 2592 Area 5 2592 x 1942
39. point to Measure and then select Surface Area The measurements results are displayed in square units The measurement results are also displayed in the Output Box if it is enabled Surface Deviation Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Measure Opens dialog The Surface Deviation command displays a dialog used to specify what output is generated after measuring the differences in elevation between a TIN mesh and a reference surface The deviation is measured along the axis perpendicular to the active reference plane The reference plane must be perpendicular to one of the major axes of the current UCS The 448 Index mesh es must be TIN relative to the reference plane The reference surface may be the second TIN mesh selected or the active reference plane if only one TIN mesh is selected a f a polyline polygon is also selected only the area within the polyline polygon projected onto the active reference plane is measured To measure surface deviation 1 Select the TIN whose surface is to be subtracted from the reference surface e To measure surface deviation against the active reference plane select only one TIN e To measure surface deviation against another reference TIN select a second TIN surface to act as the reference surface e To measure surface deviation within a specific boundary multi select a polyline or polygon object 2 From the Toolsmenu in the ModelSpace window point to Mea
40. to add a database file name located at D Databases Example imp on the remote server Remote enter D Databases Example imp as the file name not REMOTE D Example imp Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Datum displays submenu commands used to measure the distance from a picked point to a specified datum The following commands are available from the Datum submenu Point Distance Set Datum to Pick Point Enter Datum Show Datum For Datum submenu command functionality see the individual command entries Decimate Contours Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Contours Action Opens dialog Usage The Decimate Contours dialog is used to reduce the number of vertices in a selected contour line When Cyclone reduces the number of vertices in a contour line it does so with the mandate of minimizing the deviation from the originating mesh Deviation is measured perpendicular to the contour s plane To reduce the number of vertices in a contour line 1 Select the contour you want to reduce a lf the contour is selected with pick points only lines on the picked elevations are decimated If the contour is selected by any other method e g by a fence all lines are decimated 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Contours then select Decimate Contours Deviations are initialized and then the Decimate Contours dialog appears 3 Set the maximum absolute deviatio
41. with the selected ScanWorlds For example if a ScanWorld is added to a registration and the user wants to automatically add cloud constraints involving only that ScanWorld the user would select that ScanWorld and select Auto Add Cloud Constraints and the search would ignore other possible ScanWorld pairings that do not involve that ScanWorld Another option for the user is to use the Add Cloud Constraint command which can be used to create a cloud constraint between a selected pair of ScanWorlds This command does not require initial alignment pick hints for the cloud constraint if the ScanWorlds are already aligned using other constraints Auto Add Constraints Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Auto Add Constraints command adds constraints between user specified ScanWorlds by matching registration labels and geometric shapes Cloud Constraints are not created by this command see the Add Cloud Constraint command for more information Geometric objects that are potential constraints must be manually added to the ControlSpace of each ScanWorld before they will be considered by the Auto Add Constraints command See the Copy to ControlSpace command for more information The Auto Add Constraints process uses any currently existing constraints if any then searches the ControlSpaces for objects with matching registration labels It then attempts to infer additional constraints from matching pairs o
42. 1 Make sure that the ModelSpace is in orthographic projection See Orthographic Perspective entry in the Commands chapter 2 Using the rectangular Fence tool fence the area from which you want to extract 2D lines 3 From the Toolsmenu point to 2D Extraction and then select From Fence Contents The 2D drawing is created and displayed in a new window 4 Save the new 2D drawing as a CAD file a To save the 2D drawing as a CAD file select Save as CAD file from the File menu and then use the browser that appears to select a name and location a The unit of measure in the exported file is scaled to match the current unit of measure in Cyclone From Intersections Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to From Intersections displays submenu commands used to create lines and vertices from the intersections of selected objects The following commands are available from the From Intersections submenu Curve Vertex From Pick Points Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to From Pick Points displays submenu commands used to connect a series of picked points with a variety of lines The following commands are available from the From Pick Points submenu Vertex Line Segment Polyline Arc 3 Points on Arc Arc Start Center End Cubic Spline 298 Index From Selection in Fence Window ModelSpace Menu Tools 2D Ext
43. Alignment command If you register two ScanWorlds using only a cloud constraint the error for the cloud constraint will be 0 The reason is that since there is no other constraint in the registration the global registration does not need to adjust the cloud alignment If you then add a HDS Target constraint and Register the global registration starts spreading the errors among the constraints and you should see a non zero error for the cloud constraint Underconstrained Constraints You will occasionally see constraints that generate a warning upon completing the Optimize Cloud Alignment command As described above these constraints are labeled aligned underconstrained in the Error Vector column This occurs when the overlap geometry of the clouds does not fully constrain the alignment in all six degrees of freedom In such cases an alignment was found but that alignment can slide along or rotate around one or more dimensions without affecting the cloud alignment error For example although we can align two scans of a flat floor we can also slide them around in the plane without affecting the alignment error In these cases the cloud constraint does the right thing it behaves numerically as a plane plane constraint and allows the global registration to slide the ScanWorlds relative to each other 51 Registration as long as they stay in the same plane Similarly you could scan a large cylinder from two locations and the cloud con
44. AutoCAD along with any objects contained in the file Cyclone defined layers are easily and cleanly translated COE not only uses the same naming protocol defined in Cyclone but it also translates layer settings and object assignment Once in place imported layers function as any other AutoCAD layer and can be used to make your modeling session more productive It is important to note that AutoCAD does not accept certain characters in a layer name lt gt 11 2 Ifthe import finds a layer name in a COE file with one of these characters in it it removes the invalid character and replaces it with an underscore _ The changed layer name is recorded in the log file and you are informed via a popup message at the end of the import that some layer names had invalid characters Limitations NO POINT CLOUDS We do not recommend using COEIN to bring large point clouds into AutoCAD If a Leica Geosystems HDS point cloud contains large quantities of points a lot of memory is used and an attempt to import a COE file containing a point cloud may lock up your system Instead we recommend that you use Leica Geosystems HDS s CloudWorx application to bring Cyclone point clouds into AutoCAD Translating Objects from AutoCAD to Cyclone Objects modeled within the AutoCAD environment can be exported to a COE file using the COEOUT command for subsequent import into Cyclone There are two primary reasons for translating objects from AutoCAD t
45. ControlSpaces ModelSpaces and or Constraints to view 2 From the Registration window select View Interim Results A ModelSpace appears displaying the content from the selected items a When a ScanWorld is selected the contents of the ScanWorld as defined by preferences set in the Initialization tab of the Edit Preferences dialog are shown in the temporary ModelSpace The current registration transformation for the ScanWorld determines its relative position in the new ModelSpace When a ModelSpace or ControlSpace is selected its contents are shown in the temporary ModelSpace The current registration transformation for the space s ScanWorld determines its relative position in the new ModelSpace When a constraint is selected all objects referenced by the selected constraint are shown in the temporary ModelSpace The current registration transformations for the objects ScanWorlds determine their relative positions in the new ModelSpace a When a single cloud constraint is selected the ControlSpaces of the constraint are shown using the current cloud constraint alignment to determine their positions relative to each other in the temporary ModelSpace This is the recommended method for visually checking the alignment of the cloud constraints before attempting global registration Similarly the initial alignment of a cloud constraint in not aligned state can be visually inspected before running the Optimize Cloud Alignment command on
46. Cross d Length and d Height are updated based on the target s current position relative to the stakeout point 26 Move the target in the indicated directions by the indicated offsets Repeat the process as needed until the target is over the stakeout point Standard Viewpoints Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Standard Viewpoints displays submenu commands used to view your ModelSpace from standard viewpoints including top bottom left right front back isometric and right isometric The following commands are available from the Standard Viewpoints submenu Top Bottom Left Right Front Back Isometric Right Isometric The Standard Viewpoints submenu commands are selfexplanatory Also see the Isometric and Right Isometric commands Station Data HDS3000 Window Scan Control Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Station Data command expands the Station Data tab in the Scanner Control Panel Station Data Tab Options HOME SCANWORLD Select a Home ScanWorld optional from the dropdown This ScanWorld is the repository of targets that can be selected in Station ID and in the Set Horizontal from Target dialog This ScanWorld also receives any new targets of known coordinates introduced during the geo referencing process STATION ID Enter an identifier for the station position or select an existing identifier from the dropdown HI Enter the measured heigh
47. DO NOT FIT INTO THE DGN DESIGN SPACE Check the resolution parameters in the Design File Settings dialog Settings Design File then select the Working Units category If the resolution parameters are set too high or the DGN units are set improperly e g DGN units are set to mm for a model that has a large area more appropriately measured in meters you will have a decreased design space though you will have more object precision Adjust these parameters to achieve the desired results How Objects Are Translated In most translations between Cyclone and MicroStation there are elements in one system that have no exact equivalent in the other The following tables show how COEIN and COEOUT translate objects 130 From Cyclone to MicroStation Cyclone Vertex Line Segment Circular Arc Elliptical Arc Polyline Steel Shapes Spline Curve Patch Extruded Patch Box Steel Section Cylinder Cyclone Object Exchange COE MicroStation Object Type 03 Line 17 Text when object contains annotation Text or Note 03 Line 15 Ellipse when curve is closed 16 Arc 15 Ellipse when curve is closed 16 Arc 04 Line String 04 Line String User Data Linkage StdShape 27 B spline curve 06 Shape 18 Surface when it is not fully capped 19 Solid when both side flat capped User Data Linkage PlanarPolylineExtrusion See PlanarPolylineExtrusion User Data Linkage RectangularBox See Pla
48. Extend to Cast Selection caida 280 Extend to Ret Plane aia ada 281 Extract Cloud from Selection neda a aa a n A E A N E 281 Extr de oni denia ee e ue adie dd Aa Pd A PEER T ened 281 Extrude Along AXiS e vse suse a is EN 282 Extrude Perpendiculare ici ee ea EE A EEEIEE AEA EE EEE AIET 282 Extrude to Last Picks aa 283 N 283 Ferice View Toggle eirian einn AE id liinda iria iban 284 Field Vi We vias A A A O O a Maven 284 Field Set pi nn A aaa 284 Fill Selected Hole Mesh eiii a aida 290 Fill Selected Hole Fateh n aaeeea in aa EEA ena Ke iar KAE ETA EREE 290 Find High EOW Policial dada 291 Ad e DO 291 Fit FONGOd O 294 Fitto Cloud asa ioe Hired del aie agi dens Gaia aweee i PE EN OS ESEAS PENAS 294 Fit to GloUd Options is 2s eas sheila Ses vaaie lidia 296 Flip Selected Edge coito iaa 297 O ded ete ehe nets Cost deat dene cence eater ats E EA 297 FLOM GuIVES prinde aano EEEE ANETA EE ERANA TREER NR EEROR AEE 297 From Fence Contents umi S A A N SNS A 298 From Intersections ocenenia Ea NEE E EA Do A TES E CE EACT ici 298 From Pick POIS iia 298 From Selection WM Fence iia iia 299 a NN 299 GetelIMAaGQe it A ad A ld Ab 299 Table Of Contents Get Preview cialis 300 A sauder sted AREARE AAA EEDE KARRIER 300 Global Texture Mapsen Sa AEO EEA EEO EAO Eh 300 Grid Settings esene ga aeria Tee ciate dee A AR a iaia ai i A E Ba e aa 301 Group Comand tata 301 Group Monu heera a e r E AA E 301 Had rosser ea a eenei Ae iii 301 Handles A
49. Extend submenu Extend to Last Selection Extend to Ref Plane Extend All Objects Extend All Objects Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extend Action Executes command Usage The Extend All Objects command extends the boundary of all selected objects to the planar or linear intersection with the other selected objects To extend all objects 1 2 Multi select the objects that you want to extend From the Edit Object menu point to Extend and then select Extend All Objects The boundaries of the selected objects are extended to the planar or linear intersection with the other selected objects If they are already overlapping the boundaries of the selected objects can be retracted to the planar or linear intersection with the other selected objects 279 Index Extend TIN to Polyline Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Polylines Tools Mesh Breaklines Action Executes command Usage The Extend TIN to Polyline command re shapes a mesh object to include the vertices contained in a selected polyline The mesh to be extended must qualified to be a TIN To extend a TIN to a polyline 1 Multi select a polyline and the TIN to be extended 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh then to Polyline and then select Extend TIN to Polyline The TIN is redrawn to include the vertices in the polyline and is moved along the up direction to create new edges along the polyline To extend a TIN to a breakline
50. FACE NORMALS MESH OBJECTS ONLY When selected each triangle contained within a mesh object is shaded separately based on its normal RAW POINTS POINT CLOUDS ONLY When selected points are displayed with no meshing BASIC MESH POINT CLOUDS ONLY When selected the cloud is displayed as a mesh with as many triangles as possible COMPLEX MESH POINT CLOUDS ONLY When selected the cloud is displayed as a mesh with only those triangles that are likely to form the actual surface CENTERLINE When selected only the object s centerline is displayed CENTER POINT SPHERES ONLY When selected only the centerpoint of the sphere is displayed Centerpoints are displayed graphically as a vertex 468 Index Other Options Choose any or all of the available options by checking the box The list varies depending on the object class selected in the Apply To field SHOW OBJECT S CLOUD Select this option to display the point cloud that defines the object POINT NORMALS POINT CLOUDS ONLY Select this option to display normals associated with scan points SHOW OBJECT S CENTERLINE Select this option to display an object s centerline SHOW SOLID VALVE VALVES ONLY Select this option to display valves as solid objects rather than as wireframe objects W O OBJECT S CENTER POINT SPHERES ONLY Select this option to view spheres as solids without displaying center point vertices SHOW ELEVATION LABEL CONTOURS ONLY Selec
51. Field Setup ScanStation ScanStation 2 and Traverse ScanStation ScanStation 2 entries in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 chapter or the Field Setup HDS6000 and Traverse HDS6000 section in the Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 chapter To add known or assumed coordinates 1 From the Project menu select Add Replace Coordinate The Add Replace Coordinate dialog appears Enter the coordinate ID and position and click Add to add a vertex with that ID and position to the Known Coordinates ScanWorld To edit or replace known or assumed coordinates 1 From the Project menu select Add Replace Coordinate The Add Replace Coordinate dialog appears Select the existing coordinate ID enter the new coordinate and click Replace to replace the existing vertex s coordinates in the Known Coordinates ScanWorld 166 Index Add ScanWorld Window Registration Menu ScanWorld Action Opens dialog Usage The Select ScanWorlds for Registration dialog is used to add ScanWorlds to the current Registration To add a ScanWorld to the current registration 1 From the ScanWorld menu select Add ScanWorld The Select ScanWorlds for Registration dialog appears The left side of the dialog contains a Navigator pane In the Navigator pane select the ScanWorld s that you want to add to the Registration and then click the Add icon The selected ScanWorld appears in the right hand pane C
52. For an overview of Cutplanes see the Cutplanes entry in the Modeling chapter The following commands and dialogs are available from the Cutplane submenu Add Edit Cutplanes Set on Object Set from Active Ref Plane Raise Active Cutplane Lower Active Cutplane Set Offset View Half Space View Slice Set Slice Thickness Create Lines from Cuts Set Half Space at Pick Set Slice from Picks Databases Window Navigator Menu Configure Action Opens dialog Usage The Configure Databases dialog is used to add remove destroy compact and optimize databases Note For detailed information on administering databases in Cyclone see the Databases chapter To add a database Select the server to which you want to add a database From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears Click Add The Add Database dialog appears In the Database Name field type a logical name as an identifier for your logical database The logical name is the name displayed in the Navigator In the Databases File name field type a file name for your database a The database file name is the name used for the database file which is saved in the Cyclona Databases directory by default a f you leave the Database File name field empty Cyclone bases the file name on the logical name you entered in the Databases Name field You may select a new location for the database file by clicking the Browse icon to th
53. Global Color Map is toggled ON The Minimum and Maximum settings typically range from O to 1 These values correspond to 253 Index the range from dark to bright red to blue for the Multi Hue setting For a greater difference in shades set a narrower range Color Map Parameters Dialog Options MODE From the drop down list select Image Texture Map Colors from Scanner Intensity Map Elevation Map or Single Color SCHEME From the drop down list select Multi Hue Rainbow Grayscale a topography based palette or a scaled individual color with which to display the intensity or elevation map for the corresponding Mode If the Mode is Image Texture Map or Colors from Scanner this scheme is used when the cloud mesh lacks per point color NUMBER OF COLORS Enter a value for the total number of colors that will be used by the color scheme REPEAT COLORS OUTSIDE RANGE Select this to use a cyclic color scheme For example if the Minimum is 0 and the Maximum is 1 a value of 1 3 would be same color as a value of 0 3 Otherwise values lower than the Minimum or Start are given the color at the low end of the selected color scheme and values higher than the Maximum are given the color at the high end of the selected color scheme GAMMACORRECTION Select this to enable gamma correction which can accentuate subtle differences in intensities A value of 1 0 is equivalent to disabling gamma correction APPLY TO Select what the
54. If the dual axis compensator state changes significantly e g a large amount of drift manual 189 Index adjustment of the tribrach or out of range for data integrity the current ScanWorld is automatically advanced to the next ScanWorld You may re select the previous ScanWorld for additional work but be sure that the data are consistent Circular Fence Mode Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Circular Fence Mode command enters Circular Fence mode and selects the Circular Fence mode cursor n For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a circular fence 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Circular Fence Mode The Circular Fence cursor appears 2 Drag the cursor around the area that you want to fence E The newly drawn fence can adjusted by dragging its sides or vertices with the Circular Fence cursor m To clear the newly drawn fence select Clear from the Fence submenu Clear Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Fence Action Executes command Usage The Clear command removes a fence from the screen but does not affect its contents For more information see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter Clear Breaklines Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Breaklines Action Executes command Usage The Clear Breaklines command removes breaklines from the selected mesh object
55. Modeling dialog is used to create pipes and piping related objects with piping specific information and preferences 347 Index Pipe Modeling Dialog D E Y Pipe Modeling d i gt RATA Component Pipe Table v Size v Line ID Po y Spec Po y Type fo Insulation Thickness 0 000 m v va 7 Placement Place at F F End of Pipe 0 000 m bd 7 0 000 Horiz Angle 0 000 v ats im PS A oe Distance Boll Angle 0 000 m v e Preview Eli Create Close e Lo Q R The type of piping component to be created The parts table The specific part from the table used to define the dimensions of the component The current Line Identifier used to identify a particular pipe run The current Specification used to place restrictions during piping design in Cyclone this is simply a text field F The current Symbol Key for each object type 348 Index G The method used to insert the component Push the button for instructions on how to use the method H The position of the component typically one of the component s end points Disabled for some Placement methods Il Define the position of the component as an offset from the pick point when the Placement method is Place at Delta Distance J The insulation thickness applied to components created by this dialog K Push to see instructions on how to use the Placement method
56. OK The measurement results are displayed in cubic units The measurement result is also displayed in the Output Box if it is enabled Acquire Targets Window Menu Action Usage Scan Control Scanner Control Opens dialog The Acquire Targets command displays a dialog that is used to acquire HDS Targets 6 diameter spherical targets or black white targets near user controlled picks in the current point cloud as well as to acquire HDS Targets or 6 diameter spherical targets from selected point clouds Once acquired HDS targets and sphere targets are automatically added to the ControlSpace 140 Index Acquire Targets Dialog Y Acquire Targets i x Acquire Rhine Dhaba amp Target ID TargetHt Comment Acquire Status To be acquir To be acquirec To be acquirec TO e AC a 1 en To be colo G9 oo oo DIDIDI5S 5 Waiting for user command Acquire Acquire Selects one of the following target acquisition options HDS Targets from Pick Points Spheres from Pick Points Black White Targets from Pick Points HDS Target from Fence Black White Target from Fence Sphere from Fence HDS Targets from Selected Cloud Spheres from Selected Cloud or Recheck Targets Click the Keep on Top icon to display this dialog on top of other open windows Click the Acquire HDS Targets from Picks icon to find potential HDS target candidates near user picked points Click the Acquire Blac
57. Point Cloud Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To make a point cloud sub selection 1 Draw a rough fence containing all the points that you may want to use 355 Index 2 Using the Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands create a temporary selection 3 Continue to refine the temporary selection add or subtract points by manipulating the viewpoint drawing a new fence and using subsequent Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands The points within the temporary subset can now be segmented fit or used for other processes Point Distance Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Datum Action Executes command Usage The Point Distance command measures the distance between a picked point and the datum Point Datum Distance Measurement Output Depending on the current up direction one of the X Y and Z distances is not shown HORIZONTAL DISTANCE The distance in the horizontal plane between the picked point and the datum X DISTANCE The distance along the X axis between the picked point and the X coordinate of the datum Y DISTANCE The distance along the Y axis between the picked point and the Y coordinate of the datum Z DISTANCE The distance along the Z axis between the picked point and the Z coordinate of the datum To take a measurement from the picked point to the datum 1 Pick the point from which you want to measure 2 From the Tools menu point to Measure th
58. Polyline Patch dialog is used to intelligently reduce the number of vertices in a polyline or patch preserving the original shape as much as possible Polylines provide a potentially compact representation of cross sections and other contours However some polylines may have vertices numbering in the hundreds if not thousands where tens of vertices may suffice Decimate Polyline Patch Dialog DU Decimate D Decimate Polyline Patch x VIVIERA DALIA ALA OUUU AUNOU OUUILONODIUUONONIUUOIONIUI CDINII IONIAN MMII O IV Auto Preview PA m Vertices 0 25 100 C ace Number fo of Original 25 DO nal Number E Max Error 0 000 m m Spacing x rio aye PU in A 3 fo000 fm 2 i I ar UB UL a a Cancel A Click to update the display in the ModelSpace viewer When clicked this button is replaced by the Auto Preview option and a slider bar see B and F below B When selected the display in the viewer is adjusted continually as the Decimation Percentage slider to the right of this option is moved C Displays the number of vertices resulting from movement of the slider or entry of a percentage in the of Original field You may also enter an exact number in this field Note that entering the target number automatically adjusts the value in the of Original field Note also that the value in this field is continually updated when the slider is used 235 Index D Displays the ori
59. Redlining Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Create Redlines command toggles Redline mode which is used to create 2D lines and add comments to a ModelSpace View s current viewpoint 215 Index Redlining behaves identically to 2D drawing except that 2D drawing is done on the active Reference Plane and Redlining is done on an imaginary plane that is perpendicular to and centered in the current ModelSpace View Redlines are tied to a specific viewpoint Loading a redline restores the viewpoint from which it was created When the viewpoint changes the redline is no longer visible you can restore visibility by reloading the redline To load and manage saved redlines see the Edit Redlines command To create a Redline 1 From the Tools menu point to Redlining and then select Create Redlines You are now in Redlining mode a Alternatively you can load a Redline from the Edit Redline dialog to enter the redline mode see the Add Edit Redlines entry in this chapter This allows you to add drawings to an existing set of redlines 2 Follow the procedures for 2D drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter to create your redlines a All lines and text created during one redlining session are saved and restored as a single redline in the redline list see the Add Edit Redlines entry in this chapter 3 From the Tools menu point to Redlining and then select Create Redlines to toggle it OFF and exit Redlining mode
60. Registration menu select Create ModelSpace The ModelSpace is created with the data from the selected component ModelSpaces a The ModelSpace is located beneath the registered ScanWorld in the Navigator window a To create and open a ModelSpace with a single command use the Create and Open ModelSpace 214 Index Create Objects with Random Colors Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Create with Random Colors command toggles the assignment of a random color to all created or fit objects When this command is checked an object is assigned a random color when it is created in order to make it stand out When unchecked objects are created with the default color Create Path Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Animation Action Executes command Usage The Create Path command creates a spline curve through the selected Camera objects following the order in which they were selected For an overview of the animation process see the Animation chapter Create Path Loop Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Animation Action Executes command Usage The Create Path Loop command creates a closed spline loop through the selected Camera objects following the order in which they were selected For an overview of the animation process see the Animation entry in the Modeling section of the Getting Started chapter Create Redlines Window ModelSpace Menu Tools
61. Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage Pointing to Resolution displays submenu commands used to set a standard interval between data points to be captured in the next scan operation The following intervals are available from the Resolution submenu 1x1 mm 1x1 cm 1x1 m 1x1 in 1x1 ft 1x1 yd For more information on the scanning process see the Scanning entry in the Getting Started chapter Resolution ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Window Scan Control Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Resolution command expands the Resolution tab in the Scanner Control Panel Resolution Tab Options RANGE Enter a representative distance from the scanner location to the scene to be scanned PROBE BUTTON Click to measure the Range in the direction of the targeting cross hair SAMPLE SPACING Displays spacing between sample points for the current Range and selected number of points PRESETS Select a preset sample spacing from the dropdown If sample spacing does not match the presets then it displays Custom Sample spacing can change by either direct editing or changes in the Number of Points field 393 Index NUMBER OF POINTS Displays total number of points in the Horizontal and Vertical directions based on the selected Range and Sample Spacing Note The dependencies are 1 Changing Range changes Number of Points based on Sample Spacing 2 Changing Sample Spacing changes Nu
62. Set Using One Axis Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Displays submenu Usage The Set Using One Axis command displays submenu commands used to reset the orientation of the X Y or Z coordinate system axis to match the axis of a selected object The following commands are available from the Set Using One Axis submenu X Axis Y Axis Z Axis To set a coordinate system axis 1 Select the object to which you want to align the chosen axis a The direction in which the axis is oriented is based on the location of the pick point on the reference object The axis is oriented towards the end of the reference object nearest the pick point 2 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then point to Set Using One Axis and select the axis you want X Y or Z Axis The axis in the command you select is aligned exactly to the axis of the reference object and the other two axes are made perpendicular to the set axis Multiple user defined coordinate systems can be saved and restored See the Save Edit Coordinate System entry in this chapter a To Specify new orientations for all three coordinate system axes see the Set Using Two Axes X then Y etc entry in this chapter Set Using Two Axes Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Set Using Two Axes displays submenu commands that are used to reset the orientation of the specified axes to match
63. Station Data tab entry in the Commands chapter for more information Field Setup ScanStation ScanStation 2 The default scanner coordinate system is based on an origin point within the scanner The Field Setup panel allows you to take advantage of the ScanStation s ScanStation 2 s dual axis compensator and use conventional surveying techniques to establish a relationship between the scanner and a known or assumed coordinate system The known or assumed coordinates are imported by the Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 commands or are added or replaced by the Add Replace Coordinate command See the corresponding entries in the Commands chapter for more information Field Setup can also be used to establish the backsight and station position of a new Traverse see below Field Setup Methods Resection from two or more targets over known coordinates Target over known point Target over ee EN known point a TA 2A Target over known point ScanStation ScanStation 2 with dual axis compensator enabled over unknown point Acquiring a target over a known coordinate from a scanner placed over a known coordinate Target over EX known point ScanStation ScanStation 2 with dual axis compensator enabled over known point 29 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 Entering an azimuth or bearing to a 3D point or in the direction that the scanner is facing Azimuth or
64. TARGET FRAME RATE Specify the desired frame rate to be maintained while manipulating the viewpoint LOAD MAX POINTS MILLIONS Set the maximum number of points that can be loaded at one time DISPLAY MAX POINTS MILLIONS Set the maximum number of points that can be drawn in a single view at one time DISPLAY SPACING LIMIT Enter an average distance between any two points displayed COMPUTATION MAX POINTS MILLIONS Enter a value for the maximum number of points that can be used in any computation COMPUTATION SPACING LIMITS Enter a value for the minimum average spacing between points used in various computations COMPUTATION CREATE TIN MAX POINTS MILLIONS Enter a value for the maximum number of points used to create a TIN SEGMENTATION PREVIEW MAX POINT COUNT THOUSANDS Enter a value for the maximum number of points that will be used to indicate the points that will be segmented by various operations including Segment Cloud Cut by Intensity Segment Cloud Cut Near Ref Plane and Measure Interfering Points POINT CACHE MAXIMUM CACHE SIZE MB Enter a value for the maximum size of physical memory used to cache points IMPORT COMPUTE MISSING NORMAL VECTORS Select YES to compute missing normal vectors when importing point clouds PTX data contains normals so this setting has no effect PTS data does not contain normals so imported PTS data with this preference turned OFF cannot be used for steel fitting cloud registratio
65. The shortest rotation possible is used to align the objects so objects may end up pointing in opposite directions though parallel 343 Index Window ModelSpace Navigator Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Paste command pastes the contents of the Cyclone clipboard into the selected location Objects pasted into a ModelSpace maintain their location and orientation relative to the current coordinate system in the destination ModelSpace Note The Navigator s clipboard behaves differently from the ModelSpace clipboard when Copy is selected the selected object is marked for copying however it is not actually copied until you initiate the Paste command Additionally you have a choice to create a Full Copy or a Reference The reference copy does not include point clouds or large numbers of image files Paste Link Window Navigator Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Paste Link command pastes a link to an item on the Cyclone clipboard in the selected location Links are intended to make navigation easier They allow you to create a shortcut to any Project ScanWorld ModelSpace or Image as well as allowing you to reference any object in multiple places To create a link Select the Project ScanWorld ModelSpace or Image to which you want to link From the Edit menu select Copy Select a location for the link Links can be pasted into ScanWorlds Scans ModelSpaces and Projects Fro
66. Users can then interact with these objects using the full range of AutoCAD s modeling functions COEIN also provides the means for exporting to a COE file from AutoCAD with Cyclone as the destination application Using COE to export AutoCAD modeled edited objects allows you take advantage of AutoCAD s advanced modeling functionality yet maintain a link to the original COE file created in Cyclone Drawings from AutoCAD may also be imported into Cyclone for various uses including interference checking and visualization This document describes the main features of the COE application along with any limitations A troubleshooting section is included to help resolve common problems Requirements a To use the COE import export feature you must be running AutoCAD 2000 or higher For information on system requirements consult the AutoCAD documentation Installation Installation is done via the Cyclone installer It is a one time process that consists of loading the COEIN ARX application making the following commands available COEIN This command is used to import COE files into AutoCAD COEOUT This command is used to export drawing contents to a COE file COEXPLODE This command is used to explode blocks and is similar to the AutoCAD Explode command a The Cyclone installer adds a COE menu and toolbars to the default AutoCAD user profile If you are using a different user profile you can add the COE menu by loading the menu file C
67. Viewpoint Name dialog appears Enter a name for the current viewpoint and click OK The viewpoint is saved To set the current viewpoint 1 2 From the Viewpoint menu select Save Edit Viewpoints The User Viewpoints dialog appears Double click the viewpoint you want to restore The selected viewpoint is restored To delete a saved viewpoint 1 From the Viewpoint menu select Save Edit Viewpoints The User Viewpoints dialog 400 Index appears 2 Select the viewpoint you want to delete and then click the Delete icon The selected viewpoint is deleted Save Measurements Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Save Measurements command toggles the saving of measurements as you take them When ON the current measurement and all new measurements are saved and can be viewed and edited from the Measurements dialog See the Edit Measurements entry in this chapter When OFF each new measurement replaces the previous unsaved measurement Save View Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Save View command functions identically to the Save View As command except that the view is not renamed Save View As Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Opens dialog Usage The Save ModelSpace View dialog is used to create a new ModelSpace View which is a collection of overriding settings for graphical viewing parameter
68. When a single object is selected the object must be picked near the end point at which the starting station is assigned When multiple objects are selected the objects must be geometrically connected in a single unbroken sequence The object picked last provides the end point at which the starting station is assigned Alignments may be horizontal skewed or a mixture of both but may not be vertical From the Toolsmenu point to Alignment and Section and then select Create Alignment The Create Alignment dialog appears Enter a Starting Station Number and click OK The alignment object is created Station numbers increase with the linear distance travelled along the alignment from the starting station Create Sections The next step is to create sections from your alignment object To create sections Select the desired alignment object From the Toolsmenu point to Alignment and Section and then select Create Sections The Create Sections dialog appears The Create Sections command can also be accessed from the Sections menu in the Sections Manager dialog Choose the desired alignment settings and then click OK The sections are created and the Sections Manager dialog appears Managing and Editing Sections The final step is managing and editing sections from the Sections Manager dialog 105 1 Sections Manager For existing sections select the alignment and then point to Tools Alignment and Section and se
69. a database or project 405 Index To create a new ScanWorld 1 Inthe Navigator window select the database or project into which you want to add a new ScanWorld 2 From the Create menu select ScanWorld The ScanWorld is created ScanWorld Explorer Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Opens dialog Usage The ScanWorld Explorer dialog is used to show and hide all scanners and scans registered in the current ScanWorld The ScanWorld Explorer contains three tabs Scanners Original Scans and Unified Clouds The different tabs contain a number of columns containing information about the scanners used scans taken and unification of point clouds To customize the ScanWorld Explorer dialog right click the column header Customization options appear ScanWorld Explorer Dialog Scanners Tab O Scan World Explo er Sconvorld 1 10 1 194 54 0 000 0 000 0 000 bg Scanners 22 Original Scans O Unified Clouds A Opens separate dialog where information about the selected scanner is displayed B Aligns the viewpoint in the ModelSpace View window so it matches the viewpoint of the selected scanner 406 Index C Refresh All D Customize columns E Segments the selected scan based on each point s distance to the scanner F The name of the ScanWorld containing the scan G Make Model ID column H Displays IP address for the selected scanner Il Scanner position in Mode
70. a license for your workstation Leica Geosystems HDS will create a license for all purchased components and return it to you by email Save the entire email as license dat in the installation directory the rest of the email information will be ignored If license dat already exists overwrite the existing file with the new file Installation Uninstalling Cyclone To uninstall Cyclone properly Open the Windows Control Panel Run the Add Remove Programs applet A list of installed programs appears Select Cyclone from the list Click the Add Remove button to uninstall Cyclone Note If a dialog appears asking to remove some components it is best to leave them They can be deleted later if they are truly unnecessary a Although the files installed by the Cyclone installation program are removed from your computer any Cyclone data files or work files created will remain You may delete those files at your discretion a If Cyclone does not appear in your Add Remove Programs applet re run the original installer and choose the Remove option PON gt Quick Start Launching Cyclone When you launch the Cyclone application the first window you see is the Navigator The Navigator is the main window of the application and serves as a road map for navigating databases on your local machine and remote servers The Navigator window is also used to connect to known scanners and to create objects such as Databases Projects ModelS
71. an object or its source points have changed significantly this command is not available To view an object s point cloud 1 Select the object whose point cloud s you want to make visible 2 From the View menu select Show Object s Cloud a f you want to be able to select and edit a copy of the point cloud used to create an object use the Insert Copy of Object s Points command instead Show Output Box Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage When Show Output Box is selected the Output Box is displayed until closed by the user 437 Index Each new measurement is recorded consecutively in the Output Box the data in this dialog is easily copied and pasted into other applications Selecting Show Output Box automatically turns the Enable Output Box option ON Note The Output Box can be docked to the side of the ModelSpace window Show Pick Points Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Pick Points command toggles the display of pick points as white points The points can be used later to create vertices line segments polylines arcs and splines n Pick points need not be visible to be used by other commands Show Pick Polyline Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Picked Polyline command toggles the display of a polyline along the current series of pick points This
72. and horizontal Distance to the stakeout point The elevation of the stakeout point is relative to the HI measurement mark on the scanner MANUAL ORTHOGONAL Enter the coordinates of the stakeout point TARGET ID Selects the target settings to display in the panel HT The height of the target above the stakeout point AZIMUTH The horizontal angle towards the stakeout point XYZ NEEL The position of the stakeout point 443 Index TYPE The type of the target to be acquired RODMAN INSTRUCTIONS Displays the instructions to relay to the rodman to reposition the target based on the target s current position D CROSS The distance to move the target left or right facing the scanner from its current position D LENGTH The distance to move the target towards or away from the scanner D HEIGHT The distance to move the target up or down from its current position COARSE TARGET SCAN Performs a coarse scan around the current pick point to pick up at least one point on the target ACQUIRE TARGET Acquires the target at the current pick point The Rodman Instructions are updated to reflect the new offsets To perform a stakeout 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Connect to the scanner ScanStation ScanStation 2 or HDS6000 and ensure that it is level Perform a Field Setup to establish the scanner s coordinate system The azimuth and coordinates of the target point are relative to
73. annotation text to the source object LEADER LINE ANGLE Enter the angle of the callout line Edit the desired settings and then click OK Your changes are made To delete an annotation 1 2 Select the object s in the Image Viewer window select a vertex containing the annotation s to be deleted From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Annotations The 151 Index Annotations dialog appears 3 Highlight the annotation key name of the annotation to be deleted and then click the Delete icon The annotation is deleted Add Edit Camera Images Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Annotations Action Opens dialog Usage The Camera Images dialog is used to add delete and view images associated with a camera object Camera Images Dialog Image List copy image 2 copy lmage 3 copy lmage 4 A Add image B Add image file C Open image D Delete image E Move the selected image one position higher in the list F Move the selected image one position lower in the list 152 Index To open an existing image 1 From the Camera Images dialog select the image you want to view from the Image List 2 Click the Open Image icon The image is opened in an Image Viewer window To delete an existing image 1 From the Camera Images dialog select the image you want to delete from the Image List 2 Click the Delete Image icon The image is deleted from the
74. are informed that the HDS6000 18 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 must be re levelled You can also manually check or re level the HDS6000 by selecting Check Re Level HDS6000 from the Scanner menu If the tilt sensor state changes significantly e g a large amount of drift manual adjustment of the tribrach or out of range for data integrity the current ScanWorld is automatically advanced to the next ScanWorld You may re select the previous ScanWorld for additional work but be sure that the data are consistent Capturing a Preview Scan Capturing a Preview Scan You can capture an Preview Scan of the scene from the point of view of the scanner and display itin the Scan Control window This Preview is useful for determining the field of view of the scanner as well as for targeting areas of the scene to be scanned While it can be very helpful for a number of reasons having a valid Preview Scan in the Scan Control window is not required for targeting the scanner To capture a Preview Scan of the scanner s current point of view 1 From the Scanner Control menu click the Preview button The scanner captures a Preview Scan corresponding to the scanner s view within the targeted region The Preview Scan is optionally displayed in the Preview window via the Show ModelSpace command and is saved in the corresponding ModelSpace under the destination ScanWorld a You can also capture Previews by selecting Get Preview from the Previ
75. available for standard Cyclone toolbars the Delete button is available for toolbars that you have added Use the Reset button to reset the configurations of the selected Cyclone toolbar to the default configurations Use the Delete button to permanently remove a user defined toolbar both from the toolbar list and from the current window 224 Index To display hide existing Cyclone toolbars 1 3 4 From the Edit menu of the window for which you want to display hide toolbars select Customize Toolbars The Customize Toolbars dialog appears In the Toolbars window of the Toolbars tab click on a checkbox to display hide the toolbar named If checked the toolbar is displayed if not the toolbar is hidden As you select deselect toolbar options the corresponding toolbars appear disappear from the current window display To rename a toolbar highlight the desired toolbar and click Rename Type in the new name and click OK The toolbar is renamed To reset a toolbar so that the original Cyclone contents are reinstated and all user edits are eliminated highlight the desired toolbar and click Reset The toolbar is returned to its default state Check Large Buttons to display larger versions of toolbars and button faces Click Close when done To create a new toolbar 1 From the Edit menu of the window for which you want to display hide toolbars select Customize Toolbars The Customize Toolbars dialog appears In the To
76. based on the direction of travel For purposes of this topic these edges are on an overhang From the Toolsmenu point to Measure and then select Clearances The Measure Clearances dialog appears Adjust the labeling that will be applied to the measurements and sections Each measurement and section generated by this command has a distinct name Enter the Base Label for the measurement names For example if the Base Label is A the first lane line is A the second is B the third is C etc By default each vertical measurement is named by appending the Base Label onto A for approach or D for departure incrementing the Base Label for each additional lane line Click next to the Base Label to invoke the Detailed Labeling dialog for custom labeling Click Update to apply changes to the labeling to the existing measurements and sections Adjust the Measurement Tolerances for the Vertical Clearance measurements The points within the Lane tolerance of the lane lines are used in the lane to overhang measurements The points within the Overhang tolerance of the overhang edges are used in the lane to overhang measurements Click Measure Vertical to measure the vertical clearances from the lower surface to the upper surface Two sets of vertical measurements are generated The vertical distance between each lane line and overhang edge where they cross in plan view The minimum vertical clearance
77. bearing gt lt 3D point or aimed direction ScanStation ScanStation 2 with dual axis compensator enabled over known point See the Field Setup entry in the Commands chapter for more information Traverse ScanStation ScanStation 2 The default scanner coordinate system is based on an origin point within the scanner the coordinates of the scanner in a global known or assumed coordinate system are not known The Traverse control allows you to take advantage of the ScanStation s ScanStation 2 s dual axis compensator to use conventional surveying techniques to perform a traverse establishing relationships between successive scanner positions within a known or assumed coordinate system Because the dual axis compensator automatically corrects scan data for vertical the traverse procedure does not require as many targets as regular target based registration Cyclone supports a linear traverse open or closed A closed traverse loops back on itself whereas an open traverse does not A traverse starts with the scanner over a known point The user acquires a backsight over a known point and a foresight which may be over an arbitrary point The known or assumed coordinates are imported by the Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 commands or are added or replaced by the Add Replace Coordinate command See the corresponding entries in the Commands chapter for more information ScanStation ScanStation 2 w
78. by typing the name of the COE layer followed by a oo followed by the MicroStation level number See the example below CXFIN LEVEL MAP Default 63 Piping 2 Walls 4 You may enter as many lines as necessary to map all the levels You can map multiple layers to the same MicroStation level if desired a f you don t want to use the mapping table you can comment the section name out or delete the entire CXFIN LEVEL MAP section from the coe ini file 3 Once you have set the layer level mapping as desired save the COE INI file Run COEIN as described in this document Limitations SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT Not all objects modeled in Cyclone are available in MicroStation Where there is not an exact object match the objects are represented by geometrical shapes or groups of shapes approximating the translated object For more information on how COE objects from Cyclone are translated into MicroStation entities see the section entitled How Objects Are Translated in this document POINT CLOUDS MicroStation uses a zero length line to represent a point and COEIN is capable of translating points from Cyclone via COE into such points However point clouds brought into MicroStation in this manner are limited to the first 500 000 points as performance and DGN file size are impacted significantly Unless you have a compelling reason we recommend that you not use COEIN to import points into MicroStation Note An alternative
79. can be automatically picked for the selected object type Catalog Parts Table Settings For more information on parts tables see the Using Parts Tables section in the Modeling chapter Select the Catalog Parts Table checkbox to enable table control The table control lists the known tables for the selected object type TABLE Select the appropriate table for the selected object type ITEM Select the desired part from the selected table This is the default part used in insertion it has no bearing on fitting to a cloud MATCH TABLE WITHIN Enter a value to determine the range of possible table matches that are evaluated and marked when an item is fit Fit Tolerances Settings Select the Fit Tolerances checkbox to access tolerance settings for the selected object type and enable fit tolerances for use in fitting objects 336 Index n If a fit that you are trying to make is beyond one or more of these limits a warning message appears MEAN ERROR Assign a value for the maximum allowable mean of the signed point to surface distances for all points The sign of the distance depends on which side of the surface the point lies STD DEVIATION Assign a value for the maximum allowable standard deviation of the signed point to surface distances MEAN ABSOLUTE ERROR Assign a value for the maximum allowable mean of the unsigned point to surface distances for all points ABSOLUTE STD DEVIATION Assign a value for
80. cites 198 Table Of Contents Collapse iss seve ese cose iii R 198 Collapse Limit Box Manager ccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeceaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeees 199 Collapse Limit BOX cos nn ria 199 CONNMCCE o ea lec ee edge eee he eee dae dee ria Teed E A AR a iara Jide cine leeds r ai 199 Connect PIPING a E E R 200 Gonstrain MotON O ica iii ads 200 CONOS A ida 201 Contours to Mesh Deviations ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeees 201 Convert Elbow to Miter c ooocoiicci a di deeds 202 Coordinate ys Mii A tias 202 COM ads 203 COPY Fai A A A A dl ss 203 Copy Limit Box Manager ccoocccooncccoccccnccnnononcnnccconnnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnncnncicnns 205 Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace cececceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeseeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaes 205 Copy Pick POInt S incio a a ees 206 Copy Selection to New ModelSpace cooocccoccconoccconccnnoncncnncncnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnncicnns 206 Copy to Controls pace siita n a aaa a aa aade aA aa aa aai ai 207 Create gt COntOuUrs s ear Ea etn A aia 207 Create Exclusion VOIUMEC cceceeeeececeeeeeeece ee eeeeceaaeeeeeeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeees 209 Create Limit Box Manager 0 2 2 0 cc ceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeceaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeseaaeeeeaaaaeees 210 Create AlignmM entenen na e A A N A R E A R a eria 210 Create and Op
81. clouds NUMBER OF POINTS WARNING THRESHOLD Enter a value for the number of points above which a warning appears before a fitting operation begins Modeling Tab Settings REGION GROWING TOLERANCE Enter a value between 0 001 meter and 0 1 meter which defines the initial tolerance for region growing FIT EDGE MIN STEP SIZE Enter a value for the minimum interval distance to fit templates to the surface of the point cloud A value of zero lets Cyclone automatically set this parameter FIT EDGE MAX STEP SIZE Enter a value for the maximum interval distance to fit templates to the surface of the point cloud A value of zero lets Cyclone automatically set this parameter FITTING ADJUST PATCH BOUNDARY Select Yesto display the Adjust Patch Boundary dialog automatically when fitting a concave patch 363 Index INTERFERENCE TOLERANCE Enter a value between 0 001 meter and 10 0 meters to define the initial tolerance used when determining if points are interfering with other geometry in a ModelSpace when using the Interference Points command in the Measure submenu TEXTURE MAP TOLERANCE MAXIMUM ERROR PIXELS Enter a value between 0 1 pixel and 100 0 pixels to set the maximum pixel error that any single texture map constraint can have for a valid texture map computation TEXTURE MAP TOLERANCE OVERALL ERROR PIXELS Enter a value between 0 1 pixel and 100 0 pixels to set the highest average pixel error that the texture
82. displayed in the order in which the points are picked CENTERLINE LENGTH This command calculates the length along the centerline of the selected object s When more than one object is selected this command sums the centerline length of each object You can use this command to measure the distance along a pipe run PIPING TAKEOFF This command calculates the takeoff for the selected piping run The piping takeoff is similar to the centerline length except that the length of an elbow or bend is not the arc length but rather the sum of the distances from each of its endpoints to where its endpoint tangents cross SURFACE AREA This command computes the surface area of the selected object s If more than one object is selected individual and collective measurement results are displayed VOLUME This command computes the volume of the selected object s If more than one object is selected individual and collective measurement results are displayed Mesh objects and point clouds viewed as a mesh do not contribute to this volume Surface Deviation Measure surface to surface differences in elevation between a TIN and the active reference plane or another TIN TIN Volume Measure cut fill volume between a TIN and the active reference plane or another TIN MESH VOLUME ABOVE BELOW REF PLANE This command computes the volume of a mesh to the active Reference Plane For example if you have a scan of a mound of dirt and need to know
83. file is brought into MicroStation these layers are mapped to MicroStation levels However MicroStation only supports 63 levels which are named by default numerically 1 to 63 with level 62 reserved by COEIN for auxiliary objects and piping extrusion centerlines and level 63 reserved as the default If you used numbering to identify your Cyclone layers COEIN can intelligently map the defined layers to corresponding MicroStation levels e g COE layer 22 is mapped to MicroStation level 22 Layers with names that do not conform to the numbering scheme are mapped incrementally to available MicroStation levels e g Walls layer is mapped to the next available MicroStation level for example level 12 If the number of COE layers exceeds the number of available MicroStation levels COEIN assigns excess COE layers to MicroStation level 63 default unless you have configured the mapping table to do otherwise 125 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Note When mapping layers to levels COEIN gives first priority to instructions given in the mapping table To customize the mapping table Note You should edit the mapping table before running COEIN 1 Use a file browser to locate the COE IN file open this file by double clicking Scroll down to find the mapping table which is defined in the CXFIN LEVEL MAP section Warning DO NOT modify the contents of the GENERAL section 2 Enter your customized mapping directives
84. file is one that is a Cyclone IMP file e This function is available to all users when administering their local machine it is available only to authorized users administering a remote server REMOVE The Remove button is used to remove a database from the Navigator window Note Activating this button does not remove or delete files it only removes the database object from the Navigator window Use the Add button to reinstate a database that has been removed e This function is available to all users when administering their local machine it is available only to authorized users administering a remote server DESTROY The Destroy button is used to remove a database from the Navigator window and delete the database file from the computer or server where the database resides Note Destroying a database is irreversible Use this function with caution e This function is available to all users when administering their local machine it is available only to authorized users administering a remote server COMPACT The Compact button rewrites the selected database from the ground up to a second file minimizing slack space in the new database file without increasing database size Note It is recommended that you create a backup copy of the database when prompted to do so Note Compacting a database can be a time consuming process depending on the size of the database Note Make sure you have enough free disk space to perform this ope
85. floors boxes and slabs when extruded CYLINDER vessels pipes flanges columns SPHERE vessels targets CONE lights funnels LINE SEGMENT conduit railing cabling ELBOW bend elbow CORNER three intersecting planes Box rectangular slabs crates shipping containers STEEL SECTION angle channel tee rectangular tube and wide flange Using Fit Tolerances Object types that support fitting can be tested against user specified tolerances in order to verify that the quality of a fit does not exceed the allowable quantities Fit quality tolerances can be set in the Object Preferences dialog for each object type that can be fit When fitting using tolerances a warning message appears if the statistical errors of a fit are beyond one or more of the set tolerances For example if the Std Deviation value is set to 4 mm for cylinders each time a cylinder is fit to a cloud of points the standard deviation of the fit vs the points in the cloud is compared with the Std Deviation fit tolerance for spheres if it is greater than 4 mm Cyclone warns that the fit may not be acceptable to the user e To enable fitting to tolerances first enable and set the tolerances within the Object Preferences dialog and then toggle the Check Fit Tolerances command ON from the Fit to Cloud Options submenu 57 Animation Using Fit Constraints Some object types that can be fit to a point cloud also support the constraining of the fitting pa
86. given ModelSpace to provide ready access to particular aspects of a ModelSpace or to provide a custom modeling environment for a modeler in a large multi person project All changes made to objects within the ModelSpace are immediately reflected in all of the ModelSpace s Views Multiple users may share a single view one user s changes to the shared View are visible to the other users of that View e To save ModelSpace Views use the Save View As dialog Note The View must be saved at least once before changes to the View are made persistent and before the View is available to other users e Torestore saved ModelSpace Views use the Switch to Views dialog or open them from the Navigator window To open a saved ModelSpace View 1 From the View menu select ModelSpace Views The Switch to View dialog appears 2 From the list of saved ModelSpace Views select the ModelSpace View you want to restore 3 Click OK The selected ModelSpace View replaces the current view Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Move Rotate dialog is used to rotate selected objects or move selected objects a specified distance along a specified axis Mouse Modifiers Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Edit Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Mouse Modifiers displays submenu commands used to toggle the effects of certain keyboard a
87. ici ocios 339 Open Temporary ModelSpace View ecececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeeees 339 OPTIMIZES ss seach ee A nat ee evan Dee wh eevee ean bet es ah A E E 339 Optimize Cloud AliQNMent oor ep area ea ee eect eee tees eee ALTE IUR i ATERT ekea ARATE at TA NA 340 Optimize Mesh iii aria 341 Orthographic PerspeSctive asen inienn aa aE REEERE ARRERA RA TAERE 341 Pan LOCK annes paa a S EEA ES AOS A Sarre easel 341 Pam Reference Plane econ drid Id Do a cuvivedag Dita de oi 342 NN 342 Panoramic Rectangle Fence Mode oocccccooccccononoccncnnnnconnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnancrcnnnanccnnns 342 Panoramic Scan Mode iicc s cvecneatvecanesvavasteasus Aee aaa eeta a AAEE aar ia a Aiet a a 343 Palla A ey dine A EN Aimee 343 xiii Table Of Contents PAStOreercc ts schense cote A th deken eteehe AA debated Cepek a its debts dakar dete ah oe 344 A sadenaosteeotaned swede senaeoedonsawede mssdedanedicenscenseogbor sadenaentetodans 344 Paste Reference mao orn Ae delay ae ad 345 NN 345 Patch SUBMENU ear a A E ca 345 Paus Eniya a e a A A e o od 346 PerpendicUl cio ada 346 Perspective Onna pE mii tb a a 346 Piek ModE oie due adie db PAD Pd Mabe Pa avd ee Ed de cai 347 PicK MUIIEPICK Vi Wicca ii ta 347 PIEK VION Toga Acne 347 Pipe Modelidd vuurciica saca ada 347 A e decoro Leo does eke 350 PIPING ModE egee eE sate deas AE dll litis 351 Piping Tak vivas Mave aire avian aaa aie areas Mavis 353 Point Cloud De
88. in Constraint Viewer 1 on or off Limit Box on Viewer 2 Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Executes command Usage The Limit Box on Viewer 2 command toggles the use of the limit box in Constraint Viewer 2 on or off Line Segment Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Pick Points Action Executes command Usage The Line Segment command creates line segments that connect a series of picked points To create a line segment 1 Pick two points 9 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and then select Line Segment The line segment is created 320 Index Load Image Window Scan Control Menu Image Action Executes command Usage The Load Images command is used to load previously captured camera images into the current Scan Control window This command does not apply to the HDS2500 Load Points within Fence Window Scan Control ScanStation 2 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Load Points within Fence command is used to load only those points in the current ScanWorld s partially imported scans that fall within the fence n The command can be used to selectively view a subset of the entire scan without having to load the entire scan which can take a significant amount of time For example use this command to load only the region of the partially imported scan that includes a black white target To load points within the fen
89. in the Output Box if it is enabled Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Zoom displays submenu commands used to zoom the viewpoint in or out or zoom into a fence The following commands are available from the Zoom submenu In Out Into Fence Into Selection Zoom Submenu Commands IN Zooms in so objects near the center of the ModelSpace View appear approximately 1 5 to 2 times larger OUT Zooms out so objects near the center of the ModelSpace View appear approximately 1 5 to 2 times smaller INTO FENCE Zooms in until the data fence fills the field of view INTO SELECTION Zooms in until the current selection fills the field of view 470 Index Zoom Lock Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint View Lock Action Toggles option ON OFF Usage The Zoom command toggles the ability to zoom the viewpoint in or out while in View mode When ON you cannot zoom the viewpoint 471
90. in the same database 3 Continue adding until all of the Registrations that you want to add appear in the right hand window and then click OK Each unique ScanWorld from all of the added Registrations is added once and each unique constraint is copied to the current Registration 310 Index Increase Point Width Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON Usage The Increase Point Width command increments by one pixel the thickness of each cloud point displayed in the ModelSpace View Info Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The Info command displays the parameters of the selected limit box Info ModelSpace viewer Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Info displays submenu commands used to view information for selected objects and windows The following commands and dialogs are available from the Info submenu Object Info ModelSpace Info ScanWorld Info Info Scan Control viewer Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Action Opens dialog Usage The Info dialog displays the current scanner s name and address Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Insert displays submenu commands used to insert a variety of objects 311 Index
91. intensity parameters a To set range parameters select the Min and or Max check boxes and enter values for the low high end of the range you want recorded to the database Next select Rectangular HDS2500 only or Spherical to designate distance measurements as either point to point distances directly to the scanner spherical or as a plane in front of the scanner rectangular a To set intensity parameters select the Min and or Max check boxes and enter values for the low high intensities of points you want recorded to the database 3 Click OK The dialog closes and filters are set for any subsequent scans using the current Scan Control window Set ScanWorld Coordinate System Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Executes command Usage The Set ScanWorld Coordinate System command sets the current ModelSpace View s coordinate system and up direction as the default for its parent ScanWorld After setting the ScanWorld coordinate system all new ModelSpaces derived from the ScanWorld are set to the new coordinate system and up direction Also if set as the Home ScanWorld in a Registration the ScanWorld s default coordinate system and up direction is used as the default coordinate system of the ScanWorld created from that Registration 424 Index Set Selectable Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Selectable command opens the Selectable Visible ta
92. intersection with the surface plane of the selected object For measurements surfaces are extended beyond the endpoint or boundary of the actual object to the nearest point of intersection For example a measurement to the surface of a patch is made to the nearest point on the underlying plane of the patch which is not necessarily a point within the boundary of the patch CENTER TO CENTER Calculates the distance between the center of the first selected object and the center of the second selected object The object type determines whether the measurement is to a centerline or a center point For example a sphere is measured to its center point and a cylinder is measured to its centerline POINT TO SCANNER Calculates the distance between the picked point s in a scanned point cloud and the selected scanner If a scanner object is not selected Cyclone determines the distance from the selected point to the scanner that was used to capture the point 242 Index To take a measurement Pick the point or object from which you want to measure a distance If necessary multi select a point surface or object with a center point or centerline if required by the command for the second point of the measurement From the Tools menu point to Distance and then select the appropriate command for the type of object to which you are measuring The measurement is calculated and displayed If there are more than two points or ob
93. is sampled To Sample Grid 1 Select the mesh es to be sampled e To Sample Grid within a specific boundary also multi select a polyline or polygon object 2 From the Toolsmenu in the ModelSpace window point to Mesh then select Sample Grid The Sample Grid dialog appears 3 Change the Grid Spacing of the active reference plane The samples will be taken on the reference plane grid with this spacing 4 Select the Create check box to create an object in the ModelSpace to represent the samples Select the form of the sampling output to be generated e Select Vertices to generate individual Vertex objects at each surface sample 398 Index e Select Point Cloud to create a Point Cloud whose points correspond to the surface samples Select Mesh to create a Mesh whose vertices correspond to the surface samples 5 Select the Output Table check box to display the Sample Grid Results dialog that contains a table listing the individual sample points 6 Click OK to sample the surfaces and generate the requested output e Where multiple meshes overlap the sample with the highest elevation relative to the measurement direction is used Sample Grid Dialog 2 Sample Grid x Grid Spacing 1 000 m y bo C Yerices Point Cloud Mesh J Output Table Cancel Grid Change the Grid Spacing of the active reference plane The samples will be taken on Spacing the reference plane grid with this spacing Create
94. it is a good idea to check acquired targets for accuracy It is also recommended that sub scans are merged prior to registration this applies to HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 data only See the Merge Sub Scans command for details 1 From the Navigator window create a Registration object in the project that you want to register 2 Open the Registration window and add the ScanWorlds that you want to register to the Registration Establish a Home ScanWorld containing a known coordinate system if available Add constraints between the component ScanWorlds Register the ScanWorlds and then check and adjust constraints as needed From a successful registration freeze the Registration and create a registered ScanWorld Create ModelSpaces from the registered ScanWorld NOP HW Creating a Registration Object The first step in the registration process is to create a Registration object for the project that you want to register This is done by selecting the desired project in the Navigator window and then selecting the Registration command from the Create menu The Registration object does not need to be created in the same project as the participating ScanWorlds but must be in the same database Adding ScanWorlds The next step in the Registration process is to add the ScanWorlds that you want to register to the Registration After opening the Registration object select participating component ScanWorlds via the Add Sca
95. its volume you can set the active Reference Plane to the ground level create a mesh object from the point cloud or view the point cloud as a mesh and compute the mesh volume 70 Animation INTERFERING POINTS This command is used to highlight and segment points that are within a user specified distance of a selected object If the selected object defines a volume the points contained inside the object are also highlighted and segmented MESH TO POINTS DEVIATIONS This command compares the faces in a selected mesh object with the points in the selected point cloud and uses the data to calculate deviations in accordance with user defined parameters This command is applicable to mesh objects only as opposed to a point cloud viewed as a mesh CONTOURS TO MESH DEVIATIONS This command compares the lines in a selected contour set with the faces in the selected mesh object and uses the data to calculate deviations in accordance with user defined parameters This command is applicable to contours and mesh objects only as opposed to a point cloud viewed as a mesh FIND HIGH LOW POINTS This command is used to locate the highest or lowest point in a point cloud within a specified area around a picked point Vertices can be created when high low points are found Linear Distance Measurements POINT TO POINT This command calculates the shortest distance between picked points a straight line as well as the component offsets alon
96. layer s color 1 Click the color box next to the layer for which you want to change the color The Color Picker appears 2 Make the desired adjustments to the layer s color 3 Click OK to close the View Properties dialog The layer s color is updated Assigning an Object Type to a Single Layer In some cases modeling efficiency can be improved by assigning all objects of a particular type to a single layer 87 Animation Lighting Surfaces in Cyclone are filled in and shaded with color and material which are in turn affected by light sources in the scene The default light sources in a scene are the head light which is tied to the viewpoint and the ambient lighting Additional light sources point lights and spot lights may also be inserted in 3D a Non surface shapes such as point clouds and thin lines do not respond to lighting The only material property that affects their appearance is the diffuse material property Default Light Sources Ambient Light This is the amount of natural light in the scene it has no position or direction and affects all surfaces The ambient light interacts with the ambient material property of an object The ambient light is a dim white light by default e To adjust ambient light color and intensity use the Light Settings dialog See the Edit Environmental Lights entry in the Commands chapter Head Light This is a light source with a position and direction matching those
97. list if a lookup list has been defined The custom annotation is created If you move the Annotations tab you will see the newly created annotation Note To edit or delete existing annotations see the Add Edit Annotations entry in this chapter for more information To populate and save a new lookup list Note These instructions are suitable for creating brief lookup lists You may prefer to use the Customize Lookup Lists command in the Navigator Edit menu to create more extensive lists Select the object s being annotated From the Tools menu select Annotations then Add Edit Custom Annotations The Annotations dialog appears with the Custom tab displayed Click in the cell in the object s row and in the column with the key name for which a list is to be created and type a list entry followed by ENTER Repeat this step for each list entry Notice that each time you click in the cell a list of previously entered selections appears with the most recent entry at the top of the list Also notice that as you type a new value the entry is auto completed for you continue typing press BACKSPACE to ignore the auto match or press ENTER to accept the auto match When you have entered all the desired lookup list options click the Add Custom Annotation Keys icon to display the Customized Annotation Keys dialog Highlight the key containing the list you just entered and click the Save this key s lookup list icon The Save Lookup Lis
98. map in Cyclone consists of one to six of these cube images Because of the nature and arrangement of the images cube maps provide a complete and convenient mapping of the full field of view The images are arranged in this manner 108 Up Sections Manager ac 1 Select one point cloud or mesh 2 Inthe Texture Map Browser click the Add Cube Map toolbar button 3 Browse to and select a Project that contains cube map images using the Select Project with Cube Map Images dialog e The cube map images must follow a naming convention There must be at most one image from each side of the cube in the Project and each image must have a name ending in _u d P b 1 or _r for Up Down Front Back Left and Right respectively e For convenience images can be imported into the database from this dialog Push the Import button then select one or more image files 4 Acube map texture map is added to the object with that Image The Texture Editor dialogs appear Editing and Computing a Texture Map Texture maps are defined by correspondences or constraints between points in 3D with pixels on the image Orthographic images need at least three constraints Perspective images need at least six constraints plus one for confidence for a minimum of seven constraints The Texture Editor dialogs provide access to constraint creation and management 1 Select one point cloud or mesh 2 Inthe
99. menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut with Fence The points within the fence are now a separate point cloud and can be selected independently Cut by Intensity Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Opens dialog Usage The Segment Cloud by Intensity Range dialog is used to segment the selected point cloud s based on each point s intensity value For an overview of the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To segment a point cloud by intensity 1 Select the point cloud that you want to segment 2 From the Create Object menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut by Intensity The Segment Cloud by Intensity dialog appears 3 Use the slider to interactively adjust the intensities at which you want to divide the point cloud a Shift Pick two points on the cloud before invoking this command to automatically establish the lower and upper bounds based on the intensities at those pick points 4 Click Reset to reinitialize this dialog based on any changes to the selection or pick points 5 Click OK The points above and below the indicated intensities are now separate point clouds that can be selected independently The points between those bounds are separated from the rest of the points in the cloud 227 Index Cut by Offset from Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Opens dialog Usage The Segment Cloud by Offs
100. object selected no matter how many annotations exist for that object Any number of columns may be defined by the user in addition to the default Name and Position columns which can t be deleted though they can be hidden Each column is equivalent to an annotation in the Annotations tab and each is headed by an annotation key In the cells below the annotation key column headers you can either enter new values or select from the pull down list for each key which lists the most recently entered values for re use Each newvalue entered is added to the pull down list Note The lookup lists used to populate these cells can be edited via the Customize Lookup Lists command in the Navigator Edit menu To add a custom annotation key column to the Custom tab 1 Select the object s to which you want to attach a custom annotation 2 From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Custom Annotations The Annotations dialog appears with the Custom tab displayed 3 Click the Add Custom Annotation Keysicon The Customized Annotation Keys dialog appears 4 Click the Create a new key icon 5 Enter a unique name in the Keyscolumn The same key name cannot be used more than once 6 Click in the Type column and select a value type from the pull down list External Document Decimal Integer or Text This cell is identical in functionality to the Type field in the Annotation tab 7 Click in the Lookup List column Leave t
101. of the viewpoint Wherever the view is pointing so is the head light The head light interacts with the diffuse material property of objects for natural shading effects and with the specular material property of objects for highlights The head light is a bright white light by default e To adjust head light color intensity and ON OFF state use the Light Settings dialog See the Edit Environmental Lights entry in the Commands chapter e To select the head light type directional or point source go to the ModelSpace tab in the Edit Preferences dialog 3D Light Sources Point Light A point light source emits light in all directions from a 3D point By default the light is bright white and does not dim with distance A point light s color attenuation position size and ON OFF state can be edited within the Light Propertiesdialog See the Edit Point Spot Light entry in the Commands chapter e To insert a point light From the Tools menu point to Lighting and then select Insert Point Light The point light is inserted at the current pick point If there is no pick point the point light is inserted at the current viewpoint Spot Light A spot light emits light within a cone from a 3D point The centerline of the cone determines the direction of the spot light source and the tip determines the origin The angle of the cone 88 Animation determines the spread of the spot light By default the light is bright white and doe
102. on surfaces facing away from the original scanner Window Navigator Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Open command launches the selected ModelSpace View Registration ControlSpace scan or image in a new window Individual scans can be viewed in a read only ModelSpace environment using the Open command In order to edit ModelSpace data you must create and open a new ModelSpace View 338 Index Open ModelSpace Viewer Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Open ModelSpace Viewer command opens a new ModelSpace viewer for the incoming scan data This ModelSpace is created in the ScanWorld chosen as your destination with the Select a ScanWorld command The incoming point cloud being acquired is visible in this ModelSpace viewer but is not selectable until the scan operation is completed or canceled Open New Viewer Window ModelSpace Menu File Launch Action Executes command Usage The Open New Viewer command launches a new viewer on the current ModelSpace View n Use this command to view the same ModelSpace View from a different viewpoint Open Temporary ModelSpace View Window Navigator Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Open Temporary ModelSpace View command creates and opens a ModelSpace View for the selected ModelSpace Unless it is saved the ModelSpace View is deleted when closed Window Navigator Menu Tools Action E
103. parameters affect When Mode is Image Texture Map Colors from Scanner or Intensity Map MINIMUM Enter a value for the lowest intensity to be mapped to the low end of the selected color scheme MAXIMUM Enter a value for the highest intensity to be mapped to the high end of the selected color scheme ACTUAL Displays the object s original minimum and maximum intensity values When Mode is Elevation Map START Enter a value for the elevation to be mapped to the low end of the selected color scheme 254 Index DELTA Enter a value for the difference in elevation represented by each color in the selected color scheme see Number of Colors earlier Edit Color Material Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Opens dialog Usage The Color and Material Editor dialog is used to change the appearance of the selected object Color and Material Editor Dialog TP 2 Color and Material Editor Ox Edit Selge Palette RGB Hsv Lo 00 MMS 00 a 500 Ambient Diffuse Specular z i A The color wheel allows you to select hue and saturation simultaneously B Click and drag the color picker to select any color on your screen including those outside of Cyclone The selected color appears in the current color swatch 255 Index When the current color swatch is changed any selected material swatches are also changed The current col
104. pick near the end of a cylinder centers the active Reference Plane at the closest endpoint and perpendicular to the centerline otherwise the active Reference Plane is aligned parallel to the cylinder s centerline and perpendicular to the tangent of the cylinder surface at the pick point Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Executes command Usage The Set Origin command sets the coordinate system s origin at the picked point To set the origin 1 In Pick mode click the point where you want to locate the origin 2 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then select Set Origin The origin is relocated to the pick point a Setting the origin does not affect the orientation of the coordinate axes 422 Index Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Animation Action Executes command Usage The Set Path command designates the selected spline or spline loop and optional Camera objects as the active path from which an animation can be created or restored For an overview of the animation process see the Animation chapter Set Plane Origin at Pick Point Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Executes command Usage The Set Plane Origin at Pick Point command sets the origin of the active Reference Plane at the picked point To set the Reference Plane to a picked point 1 Pick the point at which you want to set the origin of the active Reference Plane 2 From the Tool
105. point clouds in the ModelSpace Select Connected Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Select Connected command selects all of the piping components connected to the selected piping component This command can be useful for setting or copying the piping annotations for a selected pipe run putting the selected pipe run on a layer changing the material of the selected pipe run to distinguish it from the other pipe runs etc Select Fenced Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Executes command Usage The Select Fenced command selects every object and point cloud within or overlapping the drawn data fence 413 Index For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter Self Test Window Scan Control HDS4500 Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Self Test command performs an operational safety check on the scanner s laser Servers Window Navigator Menu Configure Action Opens dialog Usage The Configure Servers dialog is used to add remove and toggle visibility of servers To add a server 1 From the Configure menu select Servers The Configure Servers dialog appears 2 Click Add The Add Server dialog appears 3 Inthe Server Name field type the Microsoft Network name for the server to be added and then click Add The Configure Servers dialog reappears displaying the newly add
106. point in an unselected point cloud Thicker points may be easier to see NEW MODELSPACE VIEW POINT THICKNESS HIGHLIGHTED Specify the visual width and height in pixels of each point in a selected point cloud Thicker points may be easier to see and pick NEW MODELSPACE EXCLUDE POINT CLOUDS Select Yesto not populate a new ModelSpace with the existing point clouds available to the ScanWorld when creating a ModelSpace from that ScanWorld NEW MODELSPACE EXCLUDE TARGET OBJECTS Select Yesto not populate a new ModelSpace with the existing HDS Targets targets available to the ScanWorld when creating a ModelSpace from that ScanWorld NEW MODELSPACE EXCLUDE TARGET SCANS Select Yesto exclude the existing HDS Target sphere target point clouds available to the ScanWorld when creating a ModelSpace from that ScanWorld NEW MODELSPACE MAXIMUM POINTS BEFORE EXCLUDING Enter a value for the total number of points in a ScanWorld above which all scans are excluded when creating a ModelSpace Enter a value of 0 default to never exclude based on the number of points Create ModelSpace Exclude Point Clouds must be set to Yes for this option to take effect 370 Index Edit Preferences Dialog Edit Preferences xj Modeling ModelSpace Scan Paint Cloud Initialization Level 1 Resolution Measurements Registration Fitting session Linear Units Meters fault Imperial Types U S Survey Defaults A Click
107. selected breaklines remain intact no matter how much the mesh is decimated Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh entry in this chapter To reduce the number of triangles in a mesh 1 Select the mesh object that you want to reduce 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Decimate Mesh The Decimate Mesh dialog appears 3 Enter a decimation target either by triangle count in the Target Number of Triangles field or by percentage of original in the of Original field 4 Select whether to maintain vertices and how Cyclone should deal with boundary edges and breaklines during decimation 5 Click the Decimate button to preview the settings and display a slider tool which enables you to further adjust the mesh a f Auto Preview is selected as the slider is adjusted the mesh is adjusted in real time reflecting the value represented 6 Click OK when the mesh is displayed as desired The mesh is replaced by a subsampled version of the original mesh a To disregard changes and exit the dialog click Cancel Note If Maintain or Ignore check box is changed at any time while the dialog is open the Decimate button reappears as Cyclone needs to recompute the decimation 234 Index Decimate Polyline Patch Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Decimate
108. selected mesh relative to the active Reference Plane The Below Ref Plane command functions identically to the Above Ref Plane except that it is used to measure fill volume from the active Reference Plane down to the selected mesh 183 Index Breaklines Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Breaklines displays submenu commands used to manipulate breaklines with regards to mesh objects or vice versa The following commands are available from the Breaklines submenu Project Polyline to TIN Extend TIN to Polyline Clear Breaklines Black White Target Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Fit to Cloud Action Opens dialog Usage The Black White Target command fits a vertex at the center of a tie point When a tie point is created it is added automatically to the ControlSpace as well To fit an HDS tie point 1 Segment the point cloud to which you want to fit a tie point from the surrounding cloud points if any 2 Pick near the intersection of the black and whihte quadrants of the point cloud subset to which you want to fit a tie point 3 From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud and then select Black White Target The Tie Point ID dialog appears 4 Enter an identifier and a comment in the appropriate fields and then click OK A vertex is fit to the tie point Bubble Level Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000
109. shortcut menu select Add Color The current color is inserted into the Color Palette To replace a current saved color in the Color Palette 1 Inthe Color Palette select the color you want to replace 2 Create place the color you want in the Current Color swatch or if the Color and Material Editor is closed select the object whose color you want in the current ModelSpace 3 From the Color Palette shortcut menu select Replace Color To delete a color from the Color Palette 1 Select the color that you want to delete 2 From the Color Palette shortcut menu select Delete Color 154 Index Add Edit Custom Annotations Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Annotations Action Opens dialog Usage The Custom tab in the Annotations dialog is used to add edit and delete annotations for selected objects using a customizable framework The Annotations dialog contains two tabs the Custom tab and the Annotations tab See the Add Edit Annotations command for information on creating and editing annotations using the Annotations tab Though the Annotations and Custom tabs contain much of the same data the annotations are displayed and accessed differently In the Annotations tab each annotation is listed as a row each row contains a unique annotation key a value a type and a visibility toggle If there are ten annotations for one object they are all listed In contrast the Custom tab contains only one entry row for each
110. submenu 40 x 40 60 x 60 80 x 80 Redlining Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Redlining displays submenu commands used to create new redlines and manage saved redlines Redlines are used to create 2D lines and add comments to a ModelSpace n Redlining behaves identically to 2D drawing However drawing is done on the active Reference Plane whereas Redlining is done on an imaginary plane that is perpendicular to and centered in the current ModelSpace viewpoint Redlines are part of the ModelSpace View You can only view or edit redlines that were created in the current View The following commands and dialogs are available from the Redlining submenu Edit Redlines Create Redlines 382 Index Redo Window ModelSpace Navigator Registration Scan Control Image Viewer Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Redo command reverses the effects of the most recent Undo command A series of Undo commands can be reversed using a series of Redo commands unless a new action is performed at which time all changes that have not been redone are discarded Any action that can be undone with the Undo command see the Undo entry in this chapter can be redone with the Redo operation Reduce Point Cloud Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Reduce Point Cloud dialog is used to reduce the number of points in a cloud Reduce Point Cl
111. that exist in multiple ScanWorlds Cyclone can usually match the modeled objects to form your registration constraints without using registration labels or manually adding constraints provided that you have added those objects to the ControlSpace for each ScanWorld Auto Add Constraints During the Auto Add Constraints process Cyclone first incorporates all previously added Registration pairs and then searches for objects with matching Registration labels Cyclone also searches the ControlSpaces for geometrically consistent objects that can be used in registration constraints if the Auto Add Constraint Tolerance is set at a value greater than zero in the Registration tab of the Edit Preferences dialog Note The search only looks through objects in the ScanWorld s subordinate ControlSpace corresponding to the Registration Given that a large set of constraints is unlikely to occur randomly the search picks the largest mutually consistent constraints from the possible constraints If the Auto Add Constraints command gives an incorrect result this would usually be discovered during the actual Registration by a registration failure or by large errors undo the last operation manually add one or two constraints and then try again The Auto Add Constraints process is performed from the Registration window using the Auto Add Constraints command a After using the Auto Add Constraints commana it is recommended that you check to make sure that
112. that involves the ScanWorld 42 Registration Establishing the Home ScanWorld The home ScanWorld defines the reference coordinate system for the ScanWorld created from a successful registration By default the first ScanWorld added to the Registration is set as the home ScanWorld However the home ScanWorld can be re selected using the Set Home ScanWorld command The Home ScanWorld is displayed in bold face a f you have a known coordinate system set the ScanWorld containing that coordinate system as the Home ScanWorld A known coordinate system can be established within a ScanWorld via the Set ScanWorld Coordinate System command or by creating a new ScanWorld and inserting known coordinates Making a ScanWorld Leveled Depending on the source of the data in a ScanWorld the ScanWorld may considered to be leveled That is the data are known to be in a coordinate system where vertical is true vertical and up is in the positive direction of elevation A ScanWorld known to be leveled is registered such that its up vector remains the same To manually toggle a ScanWorld s leveled property select Toggle ScanWorld Leveled from the ScanWorld menu This command should be used with care since an incorrect property may adversely affect the registration results Adding Constraints Cyclone provides several methods for adding constraints If you have modeled a sufficient number of objects
113. the Create ScanWorld Freeze Registration command can be used to create a single ScanWorld that includes the registered component ScanWorlds in a unified common coordinate system It also locks all constraints in place At this point constraints can no longer be modified unless the Registration is unfrozen via the Unfreeze Registration command The Registration object is relocated beneath the new ScanWorld The new ScanWorld s default ControlSpace consists of all of the objects in each ControlSpace linked to this Registration for each ScanWorld used in the Registration Creating a ModelSpace from the Registration There are two ways to create a ModelSpace from a Registration depending on the desired content of the resulting ModelSpace A The ModelSpace is created using the Create ModelSpace command in the Navigator window A ModelSpace created in this manner includes only the original scan data and target objects from all of the registration s component ScanWorlds The current preferences determine which objects are included These settings are found in the ModelSpace tab of the Edit Preferences dialog None of the modeling done in any of the component ScanWorlds individual ModelSpaces is included in the new ModelSpace The same result is obtained by using the Create ModelSpace or Create and Open ModelSpace command under the Registration menu in the Registration window B The ModelSpace is created from the ModelSpaces tab of the Registr
114. the ModelSpace folder from which they were created Multiple views can be created from the same ModelSpace using this command ModelSpace View names can be changed select the ModelSpace View in Navigator select Rename from the Edit menu then type in the new name Create Branch Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Create Branch command creates an intersection of two or more selected pipes 211 Index The supported piping connectors are T Y and Cross The geometric arrangement of the selected pipes determine which if any branch is created To set preferences that determine whether or not a branch can be made see the Piping Max Offset and Piping Max Angle settings in the Modeling tab of the Edit Preferences dialog To create a piping connector 1 Select the pipes you want to connect A T consists of one pipe the run intersected but not crossed by another pipe the branch A Y consists of three non overlapping pipes intersecting at a shared point A Cross consists of two crossing pipes or one pipe the run intersected but not crossed by two other pipes the branches Open the Piping Mode dialog and select the SKEY appropriate for the type of branch to be created See the Piping Mode entry in this chapter From the Tools menu point to Piping and then select Create Branch If the geometric arrangement supports a connection a branch is c
115. the contents of the file to be imported and the impact of the different rules imposed upon it To import an ASCII file as vertices 1 ol E If you are in the Navigator window select the Database Project ScanWorld or ModelSpace into which you want to import the file From the File menu select Import for both the Navigator and ModelSpace windows In the Files of type field select All ASCII files or a specific text file format then navigate to the location of the desired text file and select the file to be imported If the text file has a TXT SVY or XYZ extension the Import ASCII File Format dialog is displayed If you have pre defined ASCII file formats available select the desired format from the Format pull down list and click Import Otherwise follow the steps outlined below Use the Import Rules to a File icon to import afr files if available Select either Fixed Width or Delimited display as appropriate If you select Delimited you are offered a variety of delimiter options Select the delimiter s used in your file A delimiter separates one column of data from the next If you select Fixed Width an extra row of numbers appears beneath the column headers e g 1 10 11 16 17 24 which represents the extents of each column Click a pair of numbers to set the left most border of that column note that the first column is adjusted by selecting the second column and editing the beginning number The Number o
116. the current candidate features click the arrow icon next to the X Y or Z field and enter the desired data All current candidate features are adjusted accordingly To lock the coordinate data for successive picks click the lock icon next to the desired coordinate A locked coordinate does not change in response to a new pick To change the feature code or note for all current candidate features enter a new code or note in the appropriate field The data for all candidate features are updated 101 Sections Manager To delete one of a series of current candidate features press and hold SHIFT and re pick the candidate feature you want to delete The candidate feature is deleted Note that other candidate features in the series are not renumbered which may result in gaps in the series However you may fill in the gap by entering the number of the feature that you deleted in the Number field and picking a new feature Click the Add Features from Picks button to add or confirm candidate features Confirmed features are displayed with an asterisk following the point number To revert added features to candidate features click the Undo button Candidate features can be added as they are picked by clicking the Auto Add Featuresicon Continue picking and adding sequential sets of features with the necessary feature settings until all features are added To edit added features The only features that may be deleted via Virtual Surve
117. the lawn of a golf course is smooth but not flat enough for Region Grow Patch In the Region Grow Smooth Surface dialog the Hardtop Surface check box enables improved performance when segmenting points on a road from points on passing vehicles When using this option you should use a fence to select only road points and associated noise points All other points curbs center dividers sign posts etc should be excluded from the selection A single pick point on the road surface is required For Hardtop Surface the Gap to Span defines the scale on which the road looks approximately flat When the segmentation is complete the noise can be removed from the ModelSpace 55 Animation Default region growing parameters can be preset to initial values in the Modeling tab of the Edit Preferences dialog Region growing can also be used to fit objects from parts tables See the Region Growentry in the Commands chapter for instructions Sometimes the scanner s line of sight to a surface is partially blocked by an obstruction another object Region growing stops when it encounters this type of occlusion unless there are multiple pick points on each part of the object separated by the shadow or other occlusion When region growing multiple clouds may be selected as long as there is at least one pick point When enabled the Limit Box can improve performance by reducing the amount of points processed only those visible points are used
118. the object ModelSpace the ModelSpace that want to merge into the target ModelSpace and click Open The ModelSpaces are merged Each object in the object ModelSpace now appears in the current target ModelSpace even if some of the objects are identical to objects that already exist in the target ModelSpace Objects that were duplicated via the Launch Copy Selection to New ModelSpace command are overwritten by the copy of the object in the ModelSpace from which you are merging The default data coordinate systems are used any user coordinate systems are ignored when merging the ModelSpaces To take user coordinate systems into account use the Copy Paste ModelSpace Viewer commands instead Merge Sub Scans Window Navigator Menu Tools Action Executes command Usage The Merge Sub Scans command combines all sub scans within the selected ScanWorld This command applies to HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 scans To adjust the limit above which new sub scans are created use the HDS3000 ScanStation ScanStation 2 Max Points Sub Scan preference in the Scan tab of the Edit Preferences dialog Note When working on a project that includes multiple large scans it may be more efficient to merge sub scans while subsequent scans are being captured 325 Index Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Mesh displays submenu commands submenus and dialogs used to create and manipulate mes
119. the original object for each new copy 13 Click Copy The copy appears e To create another copy using the current settings click Copy again 14 When you are finished creating copies of the object click Close to exit the dialog Copy Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The Copy command creates a new limit box that is a copy of the currently selected limit box The new limit box is automatically identified as a copy of the original limit o O Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace Window ModelSpace Menu File Launch Action Executes command Usage The Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace command creates a new ModelSpace copies the fenced object s into the new ModelSpace and opens a ModelSpace View for the new ModelSpace This command is very useful for editing objects in a separate ModelSpace containing only the objects with which you are currently working To copy fenced objects into a new ModelSpace for editing 1 Draw a fence around the object s or group you want to copy a The fence is projected forward in the view plane Partially fenced objects are included Partially fenced clouds are not segmented but only the points within the fence are copied 2 From the File menu point to Launch and then select Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace A new ModelSpace is created and a ModelSpace View containing the fenced objects is opened 3 Edit the objects as desired a T
120. this coordinate system If using the Orthogonal from Station method import or add the known or assumed coordinate of the stakeout point using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 From the Window menu select Stakeout The Stakeout panel appears in the control panel Select the stakeout Method Enter the Target ID For the Orthogonal from Station method the Target ID must match a known coordinate The Target ID is also applied to the acquired target Enter the HT of the target relative to the stakeout point Select the Type of the target to be acquired to establish the offsets to the stakeout point Enter the position of the stakeout point If using the Orthogonal from Station method the stakeout coordinates are already known If using the Manual Polar method enter the Azimuth and Distance to the stakeout point If using the Manual Orthogonal method enter the 3D coordinate of the stakeout point Set up the target in the general area of the stakeout point Perform a preliminary scan using the primary Scan command Pick a point in the preliminary scan that is close to the target Click Coarse Target Scan to perform a coarse scan to acquire at least one point on the target Repeat as needed 444 Index 25 Pick a point in the coarse scan that is on the target Click Acquire Target to perform a fine scan on the target followed by a target fit The Rodman Instructions d
121. to any picked point s in the ModelSpace using the Point Distance command the shortest distance from the point to the datum line is computed Working with Meshes A mesh is a series of triangles created using the points in a point cloud vertices polylines or any combinations of the three as vertices For each adjacent trio of points in a cloud a triangle is created This has the effect of generating a coherent visual surface from a point cloud Cyclone enables you to create dynamic mesh objects that can be manipulated extensively to achieve the visual results you need Triangles can be added edited or removed Mesh objects can be decimated using a dynamic real time interface that allows you to adjust and fine tune your mesh New vertices can be incorporated into the mesh from user drawn polylines and breaklines can be placed into the mesh to preserve geometric features during a decimation Sample Grid Resamples TIN meshes on a regular grid Creating a Mesh Object Mesh objects are created using the Create Mesh command Note If you merely wish to view the point cloud as a mesh it is recommended that you use the View Object As functionality to view the point cloud as a mesh See the View Object As entry in the Commands chapter for more information 72 Animation a f you are creating a TIN set the up direction as desired before creating a mesh object To create a mesh object 1 Select the point cloud vertices o
122. to follow up if necessary The Date and Time fields are populated automatically with the current date and time Enter a summary of the problem being reported in the Summary field followed by a description of the problem in the Detailed description field Provide as much detail as possible such as what your actions were prior to the problem occurrence whether you are able to duplicate the problem etc When possible include the text from any error message that appears To copy the text from an error message click the program icon in the top left corner of the message box and select Copy The text can then be pasted into the defect report Check the Include log files option to attach any log files generated by Cyclone along with information about your current computer configuration recommended Click Create Report to open the Save Report to File dialog enter a file name for the txt file or accept the default defect txt select the folder into which you want to save the file and click Save The report is created and saved to the designated file and location E mail the newly created txt file to support hds leica geosystems com Window ModelSpace Navigator Registration Image Viewer Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Delete command removes a selected object without placing it on the Cyclone clipboard Delete Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usa
123. toggle to determine whether to adjust the viewpoint so that the entire Section is visible in the current window FRONT VIEWPOINT This command is an ON OFF toggle to determine whether to adjust the viewpoint to Front view relative to the current UCS KEEP VIEWPOINT This command is an ON OFF toggle to determine whether to keep the current viewpoint when scrolling through the Sections in the Sections Manager The Alignment menu contains commands to edit and navigate through alignments DELETE ALIGNMENT This command deletes the selected alignment and all associated sections from the Sections Manager The original alignment is not removed from the ModelSpace RESTORE ALIGNMENT INTO MODELSPACE This command is used to restore an alignment that may have been deleted from the ModelSpace EXPAND ALIGNMENT This command displays the list of all sections associated with the selected alignment 107 Sections Manager COLLAPSE ALIGNMENT This command collapses the list of sections associated with the selected alignment To incorporate a polyline as a breakline into the temporary TIN mesh 1 Before using the Create Lines command select the polyline objects s 2 The TIN mesh is extended to the polyline The polyline is incorporated into the mesh the polyline vertices are added into the mesh and mesh triangles are redrawn as appropriate to accommodate the breakline Texture Mapping Texture mapping is drawing objects using color
124. toolbar button The texture maps to be copied do not need to be enabled or valid 3 Select one or more point cloud or mesh e Texture maps may be copy pasted to the same object This can be useful for keeping different texture mappings e f multiple objects are selected the Texture Map Browser s list will show only the texture maps shared in common by the selected objects 4 Click the Paste toolbar button The texture maps are copied to the selected objects Replacing the Image The image of a texture map can be replaced by another image The replacement image may have different dimensions from the current image but they must have the same proportions 110 Sections Manager Uses of image replacement include to have different images taken from the same position so they can use the same texture mapping but at different times e g a day time image versus a night time image to create the texture mapping using a lower resolution preview image and then replacing the image with a higher resolution version of the image 1 Select one point cloud or mesh with at least one texture map 2 Inthe Texture Map Browser select a texture map and click the Replace toolbar button Follow the same process for adding a new image The image is replaced in the texture map e When replacing the images for a cube map images are replaced by the corresponding Images in the selected Project and any new cube images are added to the cube map An
125. two objects involved in the constraint in the Constraint viewers When it is determined that a constraint s error is unexpectedly high it can be disabled see the Disable entry in the Commands chapter or deleted or its influence can be decreased see the 44 Registration Set Weight entry in the Commands chapter The constraint can also be disabled by making the constraint object invisible in the ControlSpace Possible reasons for a high error include incorrect constraint poorly fit objects poorly sampled objects or some motion of the scanner during data acquisition However a correct constraint may have a high error if the registration favored other incorrect constraints e g if the incorrect constraints all somehow agreed with each other Note The practice of decreasing the weight of all constraints with higher than average error is not recommended as it can lead to lower overall registration accuracy Decreasing the weight of a constraint should only be done if you have reason to believe that the measurement of one or both of the objects in the constraint is less accurate than other measured objects If the Auto Update command in the Registration menu is ON the registration is updated after each change to the system of constraints Otherwise use the Register command in the Registration menu to update the registration when ready Creating a Registered ScanWorld and Freezing the Registration After a successful registration
126. uppercase and lowercase exactly as indicated Below the list name and type enter your list contents with each entry appearing on a new line You can copy paste data into the document as long as the list conforms to the formatting instructions Save the txt document close the text editor and return to Cyclone Navigator If it is not already open open the Annotation Lookup Lists dialog and click the Import a lookup list file icon Find and select the txt file you just saved and click OPEN The newly created list is added and its contents are displayed in the Lookup List Contents window To edit lookup list contents 1 From the Navigator window open the Edit menu and select Customize Lookup Lists The Annotation Lookup Lists dialog is displayed Click the Export lookup lists to a text file icon in the toolbar The Select a file for export dialog is displayed Select a previously existing text file or type in a new file name in the File Name field Be sure to type in the txt extension as well Note All currently defined lists are exported when the Export lookup lists to a text file icon is selected it is not possible to export only a selected list However as long as you edit only your targeted list the other lists will remain unchanged when this file is imported back into Cyclone Select a destination folder for the file and click Save 222 Index 5 Open the newly created text file in the text editor of your c
127. vertices are connected by the curves of a cubic spline curve rather than by straight lines Also vertices cannot be added between existing vertices while drawing a cubic spline 246 Index Draw Cubic Spline Loop Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Cubic Spline Loop command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a cubic spline loop in the active Reference Plane n For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter The procedures for drawing a cubic spline loop are identical to those for drawing a cubic spline except that the first and last vertices are automatically connected Draw Ellipse Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Ellipse command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw an ellipse in the active Reference Plane n For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw an ellipse a An ellipse is drawn by first placing two vertices and then placing a third vertex to adjust the eccentricity of the ellipse The midpoint between the first two vertices becomes the center of the ellipse that passes through both points 1 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Ellipse The Drawing cursor appears 2 In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex 3 Click again to place a second vertex The midpoint between the
128. viewer remains open Object Coordinate System Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Handles Constrain Motion to Action Executes command Usage The Object Coordinate System command constrains the movement of objects relative to the specified axis of the coordinate system defined by the object itself For more information on using user coordinate systems see the Save Edit Coordinate Systems command n Some handles may not be able to move according to the constraints e g rotation and other custom handles For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter 334 Index Object Info Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Info Action Opens dialog Usage The Object Info dialog is used to view available information on the selected object The type of information displayed depends on the type of object selected To view object information 1 Select the object s about which you want information 2 From the Tools menu point to Info and then select Object Info The Object Info dialog appears When more than one object is selected information is displayed for each object in its own Object Info dialog When the Automatically Update box is checked the object information changes when the object changes If the box is unchecked the contents of the Object Info dialog for that object do not change 3 Click Close Object Info Navigator Window Window Navigator Me
129. viewpoint does not move G Use the current focal point for each frame regardless of the view points of the keyframe Camera objects H N O Cycle through keyframes Jump to the selected keyframe Current number of frames between the From and To keyframes Enter a value for the number of frames inserted between the From and To keyframes Jump to the designated time Enter a value for the increment to move forward backward in time Jump forward backward by the specified time delta Add a keyframe at the designated time To edit animations 1 From the Animation submenu select Animation Editor The Animation Editor dialog appears View keyframes and adjust viewpoints To jump to a specific keyframe enter the number of the keyframe in the To or From field and then click Go To adjust the viewpoint of a keyframe select the Camera object and use its handles to edit its orientation To maintain the current focal point throughout the animation select Keep Current Focal Point Add frames between keyframes To add frames between keyframes enter the numbers of the two keyframes in the To and From fields and then enter a value in the Number of Frames Between Keyframes field and click Set Any existing frames or keyframes between the two selected keyframes are removed Navigate through preview the animation To navigate through the animation select Auto Preview Frame Time and then click the left right ar
130. want to add a new ModelSpace 2 From the Create menu select ModelSpace The ModelSpace is created in the selected container ModelSpace Info Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Info Action Opens dialog Usage The ModelSpace Info dialog is used to view available information on the current ModelSpace n The type of information varies with the contents of the ModelSpace When the Automatically Update box is checked the ModelSpace information changes when the ModelSpace changes If the box is unchecked the contents of the ModelSpace Info dialog do not change ModelSpace View Window Navigator Menu Create Action Executes command Usage The ModelSpace View command creates a new ModelSpace View for the selected ModelSpace This command is active only when an existing ModelSpace is selected in the Navigator window Views created using this command are stored in the ModelSpace folder from which they were created 329 Index Multiple views can be created from the same ModelSpace using this command ModelSpace View names can be changed right click on the ModelSpace View in the Navigator window select Rename then type in the new name ModelSpaceViews A ModelSpace View is a collection of settings applied to a ModelSpace including the initial viewing position and settings for graphical viewing parameters that override the object s default parameters Multiple ModelSpace Views can be saved and restored for a
131. where the points on the upper surface come closest to the lower surface Only the points within the boundary defined by the picked points are used Optional Measure the horizontal clearances Click Create Lines to create a line segment for each clearance measurement These lines are available for manipulation export etc Click Report to display the Clearance Measurement Report dialog Close the dialog Click OK to keep the measurements and sections or Cancel to discard the measurements and sections To measure horizontal clearances 1 Before measuring horizontal clearances the vertical clearances must first be measured Measure the vertical clearances See earlier Specify the elevation at which the horizontal clearances will be measured in at Elevation Specify the Region Tolerance All points within this vertical distance of at Elevation will be used to measure the horizontal clearances Select the measurement options Select Left Clearance to measure the minimum distance to a point to the left of the left most lane Select Right Clearance to measure the minimum distance to a point to the right of the right most lane Select Perpendicular to measure distances perpendicular to each lane When not selected the distances are measured parallel to the edge on the upper surface Click the Measure Horizontal button to measure the horizontal clearances between the 193 Index lanes and optionally the left and right lateral c
132. 00 should not be used with data acquired with another HDS2500 Camera Calibration Process The HDS2500 camera calibration process requires HDS2500 firmware version 4 or later The process requires either a dimly lit or unlit room large enough to place the scanner at roughly 3 5 meters then at roughly 6 10 meters from a wall or ceiling or an exterior wall against which you can calibrate at night The view from the scanner to the wall should be unobstructed and the wall should be a light diffuse color for example white or beige the process may not work with red black or shiny surfaces Using a wall large enough to cover the entire scanner field of view at the second calibration distance about 7 meters on each side if 10 meters is used for the second calibration distance 4 meters on each side if 6 meters is used for the second calibration distance is recommended See the Calibrate Camera entry in the Commands chapter for step by step instructions Troubleshooting Camera Calibration The HDS2500 provides a 480x480 pixel camera image which is generally a lower resolution than most scans The camera calibration accuracy is typically within 2 pixels i e when texture mapped a scan point is textured within 2 pixels of its ideal pixel The combination of the image resolution and accuracy of camera calibration may result in slightly blurry texture maps The accuracy of the calibration may be better near the center of the image than near the
133. 226 Gut by FenCe cia ld aan 227 AN ibennteudbtatscarsetstacseradtuegdecttutebradedesgedstaaaerasteegans 227 Cut by Offset from Plane evo ease nailed nave eda ieee 228 Cut Near Ref Pla cocidas 229 CUT SUP SERENO att ta 229 A T PETE E T E E TATA 230 DatabaS OS vico ad dali 230 Dd a Oe 232 Decimate CONtQUIS oi A airada 232 Decimate Mesina a Pd S PE 233 Decimate Polyline Patch iii diia 235 Decrease Point Widtsicoonica add 236 Deotect Reporte carol 237 A toca se sidenansurcebanesscenstavatoepot ssaehenetivedans TTE TE 237 Delete Limit Box Manager coi ae 237 Delete Inside coto ia Ea de ieee de el awe cose dag DAA acaba edad deeded 238 Delete imei E toda 238 Delete A O 238 Delete Selected Inside oooonccccnnnnnccccononnccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnnnnnns 238 Delete Selected Outside coc a dite ean 239 vii Table Of Contents Delete Selection tera 239 A A sadenaorteeotaned swede eanaeoebongawede nosdedanedicenscedseogbor sadenanntetedsen 239 Deselect Fenced nes anano E ele Dad 240 Disable coi ive dae awed de rede Peel Aetna dida Aa Eta de cds 240 Piasso mola seien a TI io oe teemtecanen ce 240 Dd a art 241 Disconnect A iii dd 241 DISCONNMECE Sha tv rt a a 241 PESA E O 241 DIStAN civic as a A aid 242 Download HDS6000 SOINS uenee anA EE E A E IEEE EE AEEA EE EAEE 243 Draw Ate 3 Ponts ON ATC liura ada 243 Draw Arc Start Center ENA A a a a a a e Aaa naaa a aa aa aa iania Darajani 244 D
134. 82 Index all other picked objects and the results are displayed in the order in which they were picked Note When measuring the back angles to the faces of extruded patches the measurement is made from to the plane of the picked face rather than the centerline of the extrusion Batch Registration Window Navigator Menu Tools Action Executes command Usage The Batch Registration command executes the Register command for each selected Registration object and saves a log file to a specified folder Batch registration is used for performing multiple registrations without user intervention To perform batch registration 1 From the Navigator window select the Registration objects to be registered The Registration objects should be in a state where you could perform the final Register command The ScanWorlds should be added and the constraints should be created and edited as needed From the Tools menu select Batch Registration A browser prompt appears Use the browser to select a location for the log file To execute the batch registration without producing a log file clear the Save log file to check box When the registrations are complete the Batch Registration Logs dialog appears Registration logs can be viewed printed and saved Below Ref Plane Mesh Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Mesh Volume Action Opens dialog Usage The Below Ref Plane command is used to measure fill volume of a
135. A higher value makes the viewpoint move faster and a lower value makes the viewpoint move slower given the same mouse motion NAVIGATOR DOUBLE CLICK ACTION Select the desired result when double clicking a ModelSpace object in the Navigator window HEAD LIGHT TYPE Directional light is a light source infinitely far away such that all the rays of light are parallel Point source light default is a light source where all the rays of light emanate from a single 3D point the camera s position TIN OVERLAP THRESHOLD Specify the minimum distance between any two points on the horizontal plane If two or more points are within this threshold of each other the point with the lowest elevation is kept to make the TIN and the others are discarded Scan Tab Settings SCAN BACKUP DIRECTORY Enter the path to the location of the backup scanning scan and sc2 files These files are recorded while a scan is taking place and are automatically removed when the scan successfully completes when using the HDS2500 The data from a scan and sc2 file may be recovered by importing it into the Navigator HDS4500 HDS6000 SCAN DIRECTORY Enter the path to the location of the HDS4500 and HDS6000 scanning zfs files These files are recorded while a scan is taking place and are used for importing of HDS4500 and HDS6000 scans into the Cyclone database HDS3000 SCANSTATION SCANSTATION 2 MAX POINTS SUB SCAN Enter a value for the maximum number o
136. AEE EAEE OAA aS PEE ANEA TAEST 145 Activate Next Limit Box Manager oooooccccccnccccnnnnoccnnnnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnernnnnnnrrannnnnns 146 Activate Previous Limit Box Manager c ceeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaieeeeeaaeneees 146 A A O 146 Add Both Semi Elliptical Heads asuntona a a a 146 Add Cloud Constraint vicis aiviiecniis A A A EA a e iah 147 Add GONS AN E E E E di 148 Add Edit ANNO ca 149 Add Edit Camera Images cccccceeeececeeeeececeeeeeeeaaee sees aaaeeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeees 152 Add EIC OO seve tnt eres A SEA A E SC Phe 153 Add Edit Custom Annotations iii cias 155 Add Edit Cutplanes ison nisi nies Sainte hie aan 157 Add Edit Feature Golden aiii 159 Add Edit Limit BOXES tia did 160 Add Edit MaterialS nota od 161 Add Edit Reference PIANOS iena EEE ERNATEN EARR EEEN OR AARE REDE 161 Add Edit Registration Label m csrans aip RA A ES S i 163 Add Edit ScanWorld Annotations cccceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeees 163 Add Edit Target Hegn Seeria ic 164 Addict iia 165 Add Flat Cap Closest to PiCk ooooooccccnonnccccnnncccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnns 165 Add nsidS FONS A A td dete 165 Table Of Contents Add Outside Fence it ii eek 166 Add Replace Coordinate i cer cctscoretesngenecctiee r AAE cata ceedesenaede RNEER AARE A AEE 166 Add ScanWorld as ses nee a ie ee 167 Add Sem
137. AON From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Arc Start Center End The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex that serves as the first end point Click again to place a second vertex that serves as the center point Click a point or drag the cursor to place a third vertex that serves as the second end point A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The arc is drawn and you are ready to draw another arc To delete the newly created arc either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the arc and then select Delete from the Edit menu 244 Index Draw Arc Start End Center Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Arc Start End Center command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw an arc in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw an arc 1 PON From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Arc Start End Center The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex that serves as the first end point Click again to place a second vertex that serves as the second end point Click a point or drag the cursor to place a third vertex that serves as the c
138. Box as the active Limit Box Current Info Displays the parameters of the selected limit box Enable Select this check box to enable the current limit box Limitbox Show Select this check box to display limit boxes or clear this check box to hide limit boxes Limit Box Show All Select this check box to display all limit boxes or clear this check box to display only activated limit boxes When selected and all limit boxes are displayed the active limit box is highlighted with thick lines and the selected limit box is displayed with dashed lines Add Edit Materials Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Opens dialog Usage The Material Palette is used to save and restore material samples The Material Palette functions identically to the Color Palette See the Add Edit Colors command except that it handles materials combinations of color properties rather than colors Add Edit Reference Planes Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Opens dialog Usage The Reference Planes dialog is used to add edit and delete Reference Planes 161 Index Reference Planes Dialog ib Reference Plane s tm Origin Reference Plane O MN eference Plane 1 OZ A List of Reference Planes in current ModelSpace B Create a copy of the selected Reference Plane C Set the selected Reference Plane as the active Reference Plane which is used in all Reference Plane ope
139. C Anti aliasing Quality Select the level of anti aliasing in the ortho image A higher level helps smoothen jagged edges in the image D OK Click to accept the settings and export the ortho image E Cancel Click to cancel this operation Export Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Export command exports limit boxes to an LBX file If there are limit boxes selected only the selected limit boxes are exported 275 Index If no limit boxes are selected all limit boxes in the ModelSpace View are exported Export Calibration Info Window Scan Control Image Viewer Menu Scan Control Scanner Control Camera Calibration Image Viewer Image Calibration Action Opens dialog Usage The Export Calibration dialog is used to export camera calibration data to a text file For a general overview of camera calibration see the Camera Calibration entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 chapter To export camera calibration info 1 The Scanner Control menu point to Camera Calibration and select Export Calibration Info The Export Calibration dialog appears 2 Type ina file name in the File Name field 3 Select a destination folder for the file and click Save Export Customizations Window Navigator Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Export Customizations command saves Cyclone customizations as an XML file Customizations are m
140. CTIONS O 41 The Registration Process td ld 41 Cloud Registration ato ptr idad pci ito deck 46 Managing Scan World Copies ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeeeeaaaeeeesaaeeeess 52 Table Of Contents Modeling yr A A a R bers 55 AO A O O staan rough KAENA 55 Working with Objects 5 2 0 nineties alee een ec ap eee 55 Working with the ModelSpace ooccccoonnccccconncccononoccnonnnnccnnnnanccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncccnnnanccnnns 83 DAWNO Seti ae eerie Gees neds 89 Pipe Model ti a o 91 Piping Mode rnciomic iia ibi 92 AIN AS AS SAS te lanee 92 The Animation Process aune Gerisi eenei e A Siete de e APEE ENR T e id 92 Databases esri havea nadia R O N E a EAN EA OA OS A EET EE 95 Databases gerrie asea E A A E AEN 95 Unshared Database Server cceeccceeeececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeeaaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaa ees 95 Remote Administration burrada 95 OptimiZing a Databases cssccsisidecaisetencnseeedins phersactebeedacaisatabendenedie idea sect ebaadedaagadyhenseaedbee ides dt 97 Virtual SUVs in atid nr erie ene eerie ai les 99 The Virtual Surveyor ProCeSs ooooccccccoonnccconocnncnnnnnncnononnncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnenananenns 99 Sections Manage 104 The Sections PrOCOSS tai ia 104 Create Sections Dialog Options ococcoconcccccnonccccononocnnonnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrannnnnrs 106 Sections Manager Dialog Commands cccee
141. Click OK The clouds corresponding to the selected clouds are segmented Depending on the options some of the segmented portions may be deleted ScanWorld Info Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Info Action Opens dialog Usage The ScanWorld Info dialog is used to view available information about the ScanWorld s from which the current ModelSpace is derived The data contained in this dialog is a snapshot of the state of the ScanWorld at the time the dialog is displayed to update the information close the dialog and execute the command again 409 Index Sections Manager Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Opens dialog Usage The Sections Manager dialog is used to generate edit and manage cross sections along alignments Seek Mode Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Seek Mode command initiates Seek mode and displays the Seek mode cursor which is used to reset the focal point The viewpoint rotates around and zooms in out from a focal point The focal point is a point that is a certain distance in front of the center of the viewpoint To reset the focal point 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Seek Mode The cursor changes to the Seek Mode cross hair 2 Pick the point that you want as your new focal point The viewpoint is adjusted and the focal point is set Segment Cloud Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object
142. Cyclone 5 8 1 Table Of Contents INTOdU CI tesis ti aid 3 Cyclone Software INtroductiOn s re ier aree aa eee tree EEA EE EEA 3 A T N A E val aes cave a 5 Included Material via A A Aa AS AA 5 System Reguireme nS assesti a idroj irte i 5 Installing CY CIONG iii cas 6 Obtaining your Cyclone LICENSE oooccccconnccccnonoccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnanccnnnnnncrnnnnnncrnnnnnnrcnnnnnncrnnnnanccnnns 6 Uninstall CY CIONC 02 mecesedten cats E A thantecnti hh adja dol geen dedeatats shadend idee RE 7 QuickStart eerste E E 9 LAUNCHING CYCIONG 1 ccscecaseeedinaeenspetarsesganavensdesaneeedacaatece danse AA EEEE danse AARE EAA 9 User Configuration Management 0 cccceeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeees 9 Preferences sic awr ee aia 9 The Navigator WIN We cidade 10 Creating a Database ici rd AAE 12 SCA A acid 12 A e ed e a e e a 14 Model S PETEA EE EE T E Hnaenerebiedatout ing nereenuance pers 15 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 eee cece eee eres nace eres aaa eeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeees 17 PHE SCAMMING POCOS icc shies aia 17 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 The SCANNING PIOCOSS uc da 25 Scanning With the ADS 2D OO uccocicnios asado paltas dba ss 35 THE SCANNING PROCESS ii A ld acing 35 Camera Calibration eranen caved ni A Mi lie Aare 38 Scamer Simulation 40 Radis ys aa EA E AEAEE AE E E SEAE AA nadia ods 41 INTRODU
143. Direction of Move subdialog appears Specify the direction for the move using axes points or picks and then click OK The Direction of Move subdialog closes Click the arrow icon to the right of the Distance of Move row The Distance subdialog appears Specify the distance for the move using points picks or custom distance and then click OK The Distance subdialog closes In the Number of Copies field enter the number of copies you want to create If you are creating more than one copy the copies are moved so that each copy after the first is translated from the previous copy according to the current settings Select Copy Annotations to duplicate any annotations that are attached to the original object for each new copy Click Copy The copy appears To create another copy using the current settings click Copy again When you are finished creating copies of the object click Close to exit the dialog To place a copy of an object at a specific angle 1 2 10 11 Select the object you want to copy From the Create Object menu select Copy The Copy dialog appears If multiple objects are selected each object is labeled with a unique identifier such as cylinder 1 cylinder 2 etc in the ModelSpace to aid in differentiating objects and points on those objects Significant points i e the end points of a cylinder as well as current and subsequent pick points are numbered and displayed on the selected objects These n
144. Fit Edge dialog appears and displays the selected point cloud Manipulate the vewpoint so that the cross section is apparent Select the Draw Mode icon to draw a 2D template using the selected point cloud as a reference The template is later fit to the surface of the point cloud at intervals and used to determine the location of the polyline vertices The Min Step Size slider determines the minimum interval between consecutive samples A smaller Min Step Size will result in more samples but may take longer to compute A larger Min Step Size may skip some details but may be able to jump over gaps in the data For 2D drawing procedures see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter Also a complete list of the individual drawing commands can be found in the Drawing entry in the Commands chapter Panning and rotating the viewpoint does not move the template to make it easier to align the data with the template To save a template click the Save Template icon Templates can also be created in the ModelSpace using 2D drawing tools and saved via the Export Template command To load a saved template click the Open Template icon Click the Nodal Points Mode icon and add nodal points to the 2D template The nodal points indicate the position at which polylines are created and swept across the point cloud in the form of the template To add a nodal point at each vertex in the template drawing click the Add Nodal Points icon Hold the Alt ke
145. Fitting Objects A point cloud can be quickly best fit by using Cyclone s Fit Fenced to Cloud and Fit to Cloud submenu commands The fitters typically take only a few seconds to generate a best fit object The user indicates the type of surface to be fit for the selected point cloud and the fitting algorithms perform a multi dimensional minimization over the parameter space for the surface type For example a sphere in 3D has four parameters X Y Z coordinates and a radius so the algorithm finds the combination of X Y Z coordinates and radius values for a sphere that best fits the point cloud i e the average offset of the points to the sphere s surface is zero Object fitting can be adjusted by applying constraints and catalog parts tables via the Object Preferences dialog The user is notified of potentially bad fits based on the fit tolerances specified in the Object Preferences dialog After an object has been fit the point cloud s that were used to create the object can be displayed using the Show Object s Cloud command This provides access to the points for visual comparison or verification The point cloud used in the fit may be retrieved for additional use through the Insert Copy of Object s Points command Point clouds that have been automatically merged through the fitting process may be split into the component clouds via the Explode command 56 Animation Common Fitting Objects PATCH flat surfaces walls
146. GLE SPOT LIGHT ONLY Adjust the spot light s cut off angle which is the angle out from the spot light s direction beyond which the light ends AXIS SPOT LIGHT ONLY Adjust the X Z and Y vector for the spot light s direction HEIGHT SPOT ONLY Adjust the height of the spot light The height does not affect the light that it casts only its visualization and ease of picking ON OFF STATE Turn the selected light ON or OFF To set point spot light parameters Select the point or spot light you want to edit From the Tools menu point to Lighting and then select Edit Point Spot Lights The Light Properties dialog appears Make the changes you want to the various settings To exit without saving changes click Cancel 4 Click OK to complete the operation Edit Properties Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Object Properties dialog is used to edit the size and location of the selected object To edit object properties 1 2 Select the object you want to edit From the Edit Object menu select Edit Properties The Object Propertiesdialog appears The editable properties that appear depend on the type of object selected 264 Index a l more than one object is selected only those editable properties that are shared are available to be edited In addition if the shared properties of the selected objects differ you must check Value Override within the property that
147. IN mesh onto which the polyline will be projected 2 From the Tools menu point to Mesh point to Polylines and then select Project Polyline to TIN The polyline is projected onto the mesh To project a polyline onto a TIN and create a breakline within the mesh 1 Multi select a polyline and the TIN mesh onto which the polyline will be projected as a breakline 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh point to Breaklines and then select Project Polyline to TIN The polyline is duplicated then projected onto the TIN Its vertices are incorporated into the mesh as a breakline Project Setup Window Scan Control Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Project Setup command expands the Project Setup tab in the Scanner Control Panel 373 Index You must select a project before beginning a scan or getting an image The Select a Project dialog is displayed automatically when you open the Scan Control window Once you have selected a project Cyclone automatically assigns ScanWorlds as you create new scans and you only need to use Project Setup if you wish to manually select or create different projects and ScanWorlds Project Setup tab Options PROJECT Displays the current project Click the button to select a different project or to create a new project SCANWORLD Displays the current ScanWorld Click the button to select a different ScanWorld or to create a new ScanWorld NEXT SCAN Displays the name o
148. Image List To add a camera image from within Cyclone 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Annotations and then select Add Edit Camera Images The Camera Images dialog appears 2 Click the Add Image icon The Select Images dialog appears displaying a database browser in the left pane 3 Select the image you want and then click the Add icon between the panes The image appears in the right pane To add more images repeat this step a To remove images select the image in the right pane and click the left arrow icon between the panes 4 Click OK The added image appears in the Image List Note If the image being added is from a different database the image is prefixed by Copy to indicate that it has been copied into the local directory 5 Click Close To add a camera image from a file 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Annotations and then select Add Edit Camera Images The Camera Images dialog appears 2 Click the Add Image File icon The Import File dialog appears Navigate to the image file you want to import 4 Select Open The Camera Images dialog reappears and the imported file appears in the Image List 5 Click Close 9 Add Edit Colors Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Opens dialog Usage The Color Palette dialog is used to save and restore color samples The Color Palette can operate independently of the Color and Material Editor If the Color and Material Editor is c
149. Menu Scanner Action Opens dialog Usage The Bubble Level command is used to display a visualization of the current tilt of the scanner To display the bubble level 1 From the Scanner menu select Bubble Level The Bubble Level dialog appears To re calibrate the bubble level HDS6000 184 Index 1 From the Bubble Level dialog click the Find Zero button The scanner takes several readings and computes its actual offset from level To configure the appearance of the bubble level 1 From the Bubble Level dialog click the Configure button The Configure Bubble Level dialog appears Configure Bubble Level Dialog J configure Bubble Level x Thickness Line Fill Outer Circle E Hi Inner Circle E Bubble Circle E E Cancel A Outer Circle Specify the line Thickness Line color and Fill color of the circle that represents the outer fixed ring of the display B Inner Circle Specify the line Thickness Line color and Fill color of the circle that represents the inner fixed ring of the display C Bubble Circle Specify the line Thickness Line color and Fill color of the circle that represents the current position of the virtual bubble D OK Click to accept the settings and close the Configure Bubble Level dialog E Cancel Click to close the Configure Bubble Level dialog without keeping any changes made to the settings by Last Selection Window ModelSpace Men
150. ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Create Simulated Scanner command launches a Scan Control window for a simulated scanner 218 Index The Scan Control window created by this command operates identically to a Scan Control window connected to a real scanner For information on Scan Control commands see their individual entries For general information on the Scan Control window see the Scanning entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 chapter Cubic Spline Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Pick Points Action Executes command Usage The Cubic Spline command creates a cubic spline curve that passes through a series of picked points To create a cubic spline 1 Multi select a series of points 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and then select Cubic Spline The cubic spline is created a The cubic spline curve is drawn from point to point in the same order in which the points were picked a To edit a cubic spline select it and then use the vertex handles to change its shape Curve Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Intersections Action Executes command Usage The Curve command creates a line at the intersection of two planar objects To create a line at the intersection of objects 1 Select the planar objects at whose intersection you want to use to create a line 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Intersections
151. ModelSpace viewer Highlight the current feature in the ModelSpace viewer Show features options which affect how features are displayed Select to add a feature with each pick Change the viewpoint to view the current feature Adds one vertex to the ModelSpace for each feature Exports the features directly to LandXML Exports the features directly to the Leica System 1200 format Invokes the Layers command The prefix of the current feature The point number that will be assigned to the candidate feature created from the next pick Displays coordinate data for the current feature Click the arrow icon to edit the coordinate data Click the lock icon to keep that value constant Select a feature code library List of values for the available attributes The Create Lines area Select the creation of a polyline or polygon supply the Code Tags that will be prepended to each corresponding feature then click the Start button S Click to customize the attributes displayed N lt x lt lt C Invokes the Customize Lookup Lists command See the Customize Lookup Lists entry in the Commands chapter for information on managing the libraries Visibility of each attribute in the graphical window Click to select or enter a value for the desired attribute Undo last add features Commit the candidate features Click to export current added features Click to close the Virtual Surveyor Sect
152. Ny Foresight f C Backsight over known point After the scan data for the current scanner position have been acquired the user moves the scanner to the next position over the same point as the previous foresight D e x Foresight Backsight FO HDS6000 over previous Foresight The pattern is repeated Each time the scanner is moved to the foresight and the previous position becomes the new position s backsight The new position s foresight is where the scanner will be positioned next E D pa AT a Pa X G E ABI A E we ae G Eventually the traverse can end when the foresight is over a known point Any foresight can be a known point without ending the traverse The traverse is a closed traverse if the foresight is the same as the original backsight 22 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 The traverse workflow produces a Registration that tracks the backsight station and foresight of each scanner position ScanWorld This Registration can be frozen and used as is or may be supplemented with additional target and or cloud constraints See the Traverse entry in the Commands chapter for more information Scanning After defining the target region and adjusting the scan settings the next step is to begin the scan In the Scan Control window click the Scan button The scan is saved in the Scans folder under the current ScanWorld Using a Scanner Script It is often necessary to scan several
153. ON The translation vector for the alignment of the second cloud onto the first cloud ROTATION The rotation axis and angle for the alignment of the second cloud onto the first cloud OBJECTIVE FUNCTION VALUE The value of the overlap error function being minimized during alignment OVERLAP POINT COUNT The number of overlapping points between the two ScanWorlds RMS The root mean square value of the absolute errors of between overlapping points AVG The average value of the absolute errors between overlapping points 434 Index MIN The minimum value of the absolute errors between overlapping points MAX The maximum value of the absolute errors STD DEV The standard deviation of the absolute errors between overlapping points OVERLAP CENTER An estimate of the center of mass of all the overlapping points in the coordinate system of the first ScanWorld FILTER PARAMETERS The user preferences used during alignment STOPPING CRITERIA The user preferences used during alignment To view cloud constraint diagnostics 1 From the Constraint List tab select the cloud constraints you want to inspect 2 From the Cloud Constraint menu select Show Diagnostics The Cloud Constraints Diagnostics dialog appears displaying alignment accuracy data see the following descriptions a f more than one alignment has been performed accuracy data is displayed for each alignment starting from the most recent a To view a temporary Mo
154. Reducer Connect mica ire 384 Reference PANG oreinen EA id lince ela rita iaa 384 ENS rsisi entry en ohare nate en Haiti i hartge aE a 384 O NN 387 Registrate tits oi a o 387 Registration Moure liceos 388 Registration DIagnosticS aio dad dali 388 A A O Sa 388 Remove Both Caps viii A daba 390 Remove Cap Closest to Pick ocooonnccccconoccccnononnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnanannnns 390 REMOVE TOM GrOUp ec dia 390 Remove Inside Fente riciu renea a ETA en NATE RE E AEETI Ee RTE AEA A 391 Remove Outside FENCE arrira erea A e a aaaea Aa Kaea e Ea RNE 391 Remove Registration Label o ooonncccccononccccononnncnnnannncnnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananenns 391 ON 391 Reset Active Alignment exo Id Do a ada ta de cai 392 Reset Alq MENE oia E 392 Reset ScanWorld Coordinate SySteM oooonccccnonncccononoccnonnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnancrnnnnnnccnnns 392 Reset Target iia did 392 Resolution HDS2500 o a dade tidy edie A EN adit ae 393 XV Table Of Contents Resolution ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 ee 393 Resolution ADS4500 g riria ieni Eene ranse EEEE AEE AEE NERE NAER EA AEE 394 Resolution HDS6000 vicios A ea 394 Restore Default Cloud from Scan ooooccccnoncccccnnnnccnnnnnnccnonnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncrnnnnnncccnnnnnccnnns 395 Restore Original SMS tai N 395 O 395 FRIGIUISOMOUNIC iia ii 396 Rotate Reference Plane oocooonnccccconocnnccononoc
155. Refresh The new range of potential matches is shown Select the appropriate part from the list and click OK The selected parts table item is fit Note that a dimensional Fit Constraint may be overridden by the selected part If the point cloud varies too much from the shape of the object you are trying to create see the Fit Tolerances area of the Object Preferences entry in this chapter a Fit Quality warning message appears and gives you an option to keep or cancel the fit In this case it may help to further refine the point cloud see the Cloud Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter and retry the fit Fit to Cloud Options Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Fit to Cloud Options displays submenu commands used to toggle various fitting options The following objects and dialogs are available from the Fit to Cloud Options submenu Show Table Matches Use Fit Constraints Check Fit Tolerances For details see the individual command entries 296 Index Flip Selected Edge Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage When the Flip Selected Edge command is activated the bisecting line selected triangle edge of a four sided polygon with vertices A B C D is flipped from A D to B C connecting along the opposite diagonal Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a me
156. SNAP to Grid sen ccteve cess a EE 441 Snapping Grid eese cscceveesseeeeecede A i ee heeded ectaee iy A NA A N N a a erii 441 SIET E S AEE EE A E EAE TE EEE ETR EEE AT A EEE A E E EE A E 442 Sphere Tagata eee na ie etn eee tien eta ee ie eats 442 DIAKCOUT ces vase cess onde cent AEIR acts rA TOELAE titi ida 443 Standard VieWpoints aoea a a ee a A ok A A A ale ee 445 Station Data HDS3000 0 cesses cestete cee eden A erik 445 Steel Sgio sre ON 446 SubtractiErom Patch aan aes does ap nada nas EE pest anhe lv euang sues nad E A EE 448 Surac ALCS arrai ec dots A one oh A Aaa 448 surface DeviatiOn vecicesscrie dees beets idear 448 Switch Alignment Stam End wessiststocescstcesecsacohtaessceeciatatacgers sacred ieetans tideegiatateugenstdedeneaytetens 450 Synchronize ViEWEIS oes eevee ed ee ene en tee S Ai 451 FargetAlliiia E it iv dese ie de E day See egies Og cia 451 Texture Map Dro WS ia 451 Texture Map Browser Scan Control ocococonnccccncncccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncrnnnnnncrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnos 451 A sau AS TE I AA EENE 452 TIN VOM ita A A A A ta S 452 xix Table Of Contents Toggle ScanWorld Leveled ccccececccceeeececeeeeeee cee eeeeaaaeeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaeaaeeseaaaaeeeeaaaaeees 453 A aE AEEA AE ARAE cata eeebeee needs nan eted ERAEN REE AVAE 453 Tim Edges A lee 456 T ri ViQWDOIN roic aean a Swe ei ee arit ted Sted da riria Dai ieee 456 MMC e cicle A E E REE E EA E E coca 456 PS ore a A e A nee Sone a 457
157. See the Field of View Tab command for instructions Scanning After defining the target region and adjusting the scan settings the next step is to begin the scan In the Scan Control window click the Scan button When a scan is complete it is saved in the Scans folder under the current ScanWorld During the scan each increment of the number of points set via the Max Points Per Sub Scan preference in the Scan tab of the Edit Preferences dialog is saved as a new sub scan A sub scan can be selected and manipulated while the scan continues When the scan is complete sub scans should be merged via the Merge Sub Scans command With very large scans this can be a time consuming process To save time the previous sub scans can be merged while subsequent scans are being captured a f Cyclone or the scanner fails during a scan the scan data captured prior to the crash can be recovered By default it is located in the directory in which Cyclone is installed in A Databases temp scanX scan in the actual file the X is replaced by the date and time of the scan To recover the data import it using the Import command in the Navigator window Data can be imported directly into a project as a new ScanWorld by selecting the Project and then using the Import command It can also be imported into an existing ScanWorld to apply colors from the last multi image under the ScanWorld by selecting the ScanWorld and then using the Import command Note Target
158. Texture Map Browser select a texture map and click the Edit toolbar button or double click on the texture map The two Texture Editor dialogs appear e The two Texture Editor dialogs are linked Click the Close button in the Texture Editor to dismiss both 3 Identify and pick points in the 3D scene that correspond to pixels in the image then click the Add toolbar button in the Texture Editor Pick features that are easy to identify e g the corner of a room or sign rather than more vague features Constraints with higher correspondences result in better texture mapping e When adding multiple picks be sure to pick the 3D point and the corresponding pixel in the same order 4 To replace one or both of the picks in an existing constraint re pick one or both 3D point and or image pixel then click the Replace toolbar button 109 Sections Manager 5 With enough enabled constraints the Compute toolbar button becomes enabled Push the Compute toolbar button to compute the texture mapping parameters e If the Suggest Improvements option in the Texture Map Editor Options dialog is set to Yes after the computation is finished success or failure Cyclone searches for a subset of constraints that results in a lower overall error if available The process may be cancelled at any time If any improvements were found Cyclone displays the list of up to ten improvements e To visually verify the texture mapping results select the textur
159. The following objects and dialogs are available from the Insert submenu Vertex Line Segment Patch Box various Steel Sections Cone Cylinder Sphere Torus Elbow Reducing Elbow Welding Neck Flange Blind Flange Concentric Reducer Eccentric Reducer Valve Tee Camera Info Marker To edit default insertion parameters or select a default parts table see the Object Preferences command Object Insertion Rules The first object inserted into an empty scene is inserted at 0 0 0 f there is no selected object and no pick point when an object is inserted the size and alignment of the new object are defined in the Creation Initial Values area of the Object Preferences dialog The object is located in front of the current view at the focal point When an existing object is picked the picked object provides a plane direction and or vertex for the inserted object to base its initial position orientation and dimensions For example a patch readily defines a plane a direction plane normal and a point origin The rules can be sophisticated e g when inserting an object on a cylinder picking near the endcap inserts the object aligned with the endcap but picking away from the endcap inserts the object perpendicular to the cylinder s surface at the picked point Exception cameras are always inserted at the current viewpoint regardless of picks When inserting a series of objects the previous object provides a plane di
160. Tools Reference Plane Action Toggles option ON OFF Usage The Pan command toggles the pan function in Drawing mode which allows you to interactively position the active Reference Plane s origin within the plane without changing its orientation To pan the Reference Plane 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Reference Plane and then select Pan or click the Pan icon You are now in Drawing mode The cursor changes to the Drawing Tool cursor and the Pan function is ON 2 In the ModelSpace drag the Drawing Tool cursor to set the origin of the active Reference Plane 3 Release the mouse button The Reference Plane is moved Panoramic Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Set Fence Action Executes command Usage Pointing to Panoramic displays submenu commands used to select a preset panoramic fence size This command does not apply to the HDS2500 The following preset panoramic fences are available from the Panoramic submenu 360 x 40 360 x 60 360 x 80 360 x 90 Target All Panoramic Rectangle Fence Mode Window Scan Control Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Panoramic Rectangle Fence Mode command enters Panoramic Rectangle Fence mode and selects the Panoramic Rectangle Fence mode cursor This command does not apply to the HDS2500 342 Index To draw a panoramic fence 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Panoramic Rectangle Fence Mode The Panoramic Recta
161. View Settings dialog without accepting any changes to the TruView owner and publisher information Put at Angle Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Opens dialog Usage The Put at Angle dialog is used to align one or more selected objects at a specific angle to a reference object To align two objects at an angle 1 Multi select the objects you want to align a The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Put at Angle The Put at Angle dialog appears 3 Enter the angle you want and then click OK The selected objects are rotated so that their axes form the specified angle with the axis of the reference object Put at Distance Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Opens dialog Usage The Put at Distance dialog is used to set one object at a specific distance from a reference object To set two objects at a specified distance 1 Multi select the two objects you want to align a The last object selected is the reference object the one from which the other moves 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Put at Distance The Put at Distance dialog appears displaying the current distance between the objects in the Distance field 3 Enter a value in the Distance field and then click OK The first object selected is moved to the specified distance fro
162. World is selected e When the scanner is not busy you can select a different destination ScanWorld for the next set of scan data Note that if the new destination ScanWorld is in another project you must first select that project via the Select a Project dialog Preparing to Scan Once the destination Project and ScanWorld folders are chosen the next steps in a typical scanning process are Many of these steps are optional depending upon the requirements of your specific project 1 Capturing a Preview Scan Image of your scanner s field of view 2 Targeting within the scene to select areas of interest 3 Adjusting Scan Settings to specify the resolution probe the range of your scan and set scan filters Tilt Sensor HDS6000 The Leica HDS6000 supports a tilt sensor which detects how much the scanner tilts from perfectly level The tilt sensor does not automatically correct the data to be in a level coordinate system By default the tilt sensor is enabled To toggle the tilt sensor select Enable Tilt Sensor from the Scanner menu You may wish to disable the tilt sensor in some situations for example when the scanner is on an unstable platform such as a moving ship When enabled the tilt sensor monitors the inclination of the scanner while the amount of tilt is within the sensor s operating range If the scanner tilts beyond the sensor s operating range the current scanner operation is automatically cancelled and you
163. YCLONECOE MNC using AutoCAD menu customization Usage The COEIN feature allows you to use both Cyclone and AutoCAD to maximize your modeling capabilities Not only can you translate objects from Cyclone to AutoCAD but you can make changes to those objects and even model new objects which can then be translated back to Cyclone and incorporated into the source database 115 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Translating Objects from Cyclone to AutoCAD Objects modeled in a Cyclone environment can be exported to a COE file using the COE export feature The COE import feature can then be used to import COE files into any active AutoCAD drawing COE translates objects from the Cyclone environment by generating equivalent or near equivalent objects in the destination environment The following sections describe the process for exporting objects via COE from Cyclone and importing those objects via COE into AutoCAD Note This ARX application is designed primarily to translate modeled 3D objects between applications While it is possible to translate points via COE we recommend using CloudWorx for AutoCADwhen you need to bring Cyclone point clouds into AutoCAD Creating a COE File in Cyclone To export modeled objects to a COE file from Cyclone 1 Open the desired ModelSpace and use Cyclone s 3D modeling tools to create equipment piping vessels or other objects a f you want to isolate selected objects for export to the COE file mult
164. a of overlap in the two clouds and try to pick three points or more that cover as much of that area as possible i e pick one point near the front of the overlap one near the back of the overlap and one somewhere in between This ensures that the initial alignment aligns all the overlapping areas as closely as possible Note The order of the picks in each viewer does not matter as long as there are at least three asymmetric picks Using Cloud Constraints The optimal alignment of the two point clouds used in a cloud constraint must be determined before the cloud constraint can be used in global registration When creating a cloud constraint three or more matching pick points called Initial Alignment Hints on the clouds are specified in the Registration window These hints are used to determine the initial alignment of the clouds and to create the cloud constraint This initial alignment is used as a starting point for the optimal alignment Note that if the initial alignment is not accurate enough e g the initial alignment hints are not within the Cloud Reg Max Search Distance the optimal alignment search may fail Optimal alignment is computed by the Optimize Cloud Alignment command See the Optimize Cloud Alignment entry in the Commands chapter for details However if you are confident that your cloud constraints are set up properly you can immediately select the Register command Any cloud constraints marked as not aligned are align
165. a tab to access tab settings See above for descriptions of tab contents B Select a level for changes C Reset the selected preference tab to the default settings D Apply changes and continue working in the Edit Preferences dialog To edit preferences 1 2 From the Edit menu select Preferences The Edit Preferences dialog appears Select the level at which your changes take effect To select a level select Default or Session from the Level drop down list see Level Options following Select the tab that contains the settings that you want to change Change the appropriate settings and then click OK 371 Index Window Menu Action Usage Probe ModelSpace Image Viewer Scan Control File Opens dialog The Print command launches the standard Windows Print dialog to print the contents of the current window Window Menu Action Usage Scan Control Scanner Control Executes command The Probe command samples the range at the targeting cross hair Probe Tab HZ Displays horizontal angle of the probe direction Vv Displays height of probe point relative to the scanner s horizontal plane Hz and V can be set by entering values in the fields or by clicking ctrl left in target mode RANGE Displays distance from scanner to nearest object aligned to the probe point PROBE BUTTON Click to measure Range at the Hz and V angles To set the range manually enter a valu
166. ach constraint Constraint information is organized into columns Each column can be sorted From the Constraints tab you can select and view constraints enable disable and delete constraints set the Home ScanWorld adjust the weight of individual constraints and view information for each constraint ModelSpaces Tab The ModelSpaces tab displays each component ScanWorld s ModelSpace s and ControlSpace The main applications of the ModelSpaces tab are viewing ModelSpaces and ControlSpaces and adding constraints This tab can also be used to create a new ModelSpace using the objects from existing ModelSpaces after the registration has been frozen Modeling Cyclone s primary application is the conversion of point clouds to CAD object based line and surface models The various processes employed to this end are referred to collectively as modeling and are applied via the ModelSpace window Modeling Terms Several modeling related terms are very similar so becoming familiar with the following terms here may avoid confusion ModelSpace ModelSpace View ModelSpace Window Viewpoint ModelSpace A ModelSpace is a collection of geometry and information about the organization of the geometry A ModelSpace cannot be viewed directly To interact with the objects in a ModelSpace you must open an existing ModelSpace View create a new ModelSpace View or open a Temporary ModelSpace View ModelSpace View A ModelSpace View is a collec
167. act with Layers settings For an object to be visible both its layer and its class must be visible otherwise it is not drawn Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Opens dialog Usage The Cutplane Offset dialog is used to set the increment by which the active Cutplane is raised and lowered using the Raise Active Cutplane and Lower Active Cutplane commands in the Cutplanes submenu To set the offset for the active Cutplane 1 From the Tools menu point to Cutplane and then select Set Offset The Cutplane Offset dialog appears 2 Inthe Offset field enter a value for the distance by which the Raise Active Cutplane and Lower Active Cutplane commands raise lower the active Cutplane a A positive value indicates that the offset is in the same direction as the Cutplane s normal vector 3 Click OK The offset is set 421 Index Set on Object Cutplane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Executes command Usage The Set on Object command aligns the active Cutplane with the axis of the picked object through the pick point Set on Object Reference Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Executes command Usage The Set on Object command aligns the active Reference Plane with a picked object n The type of picked object and the location of the pick point determine various orientations for the active Reference Plane The rules can be sophisticated for example a
168. ad of refreshing the graphics each time 113 Sections Manager Click to access the Texture Map Editor Options dialog Click to access the Modeling tab of the Edit Preferences dialog The Texture Map Tolerance preferences are available in the Modeling tab The name of the constraint Click to rename it The difference in pixels between the location of the constraint s pixel vs where its 3D pick lands on the image for the texture mapping parameters Click to toggle the use of the selected constraint s during the texture mapping computation Constraints that are disabled do not constribute to the computation Texture Editor Image Dialog The Texture Editor Image dialog accompanies the Texture Editor dialog 1 2 Click in the image to zoom and pan to the pixel of interest then release to select a pixel Right click on the image for a context menu Single Pick Select this mode to have at most one pick at a time in the image Multi Pick Select this mode to have multiple picks at a time in the image It can be more efficient to make multiple picks and then add them in a single click Remove Last Pick This command discards the last pick made on the image Clear Pick Clear All Picks This command discards the picks made on the image Set Zoom This command invokes the Zoom Factor dialog to let the user enter the image magnification Back Down Front Left Right Up For a cube map select the image to activate in the im
169. age The Clear Path command clears the currently set animation path For an overview of the animation process see the Animation chapter Clear Target Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Clear Target command removes the current target box in the Scan Control window Clear Temporary Measurements Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Executes command Usage The Clear Temporary Measurements command deletes the last unsaved measurement taken Subsequent measurements are not considered temporary when the Save Measurements command is toggled ON Once saved a measurement is no longer temporary and cannot be cleared using this command Clear Undo Redo Window ModelSpace Navigator Registration Scan Control Image Viewer Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Clear Undo Redo command clears all previous actions that are subject to Undo and Redo from memory After the Clear Undo Redo command has been used the ability to Undo and Redo previous actions is lost for this viewer Subsequent operations may still generate Undo and Redo events 195 Index Clear Undo Redo can be used to free memory otherwise consumed by undo and redo events Close Window ModelSpace Image Viewer Registration Scan Control Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Close command closes the current window To exit Cyclone select Exit from the File menu in the Navig
170. age dialog Cancel This command dismisses the context menu Texture Map Editor Options Dialog The Texture Map Editor Options dialog provides access to several settings used by the Texture Editor dialogs The settings are saved Constraint Color Enabled Select the color used to display the enabled constraints Constraint Color Disabled Select the color used to display the disabled constraints Callout Length Enter the length in pixels of the line between the graphical constraint text and the picked point Callout Angle Enter the angle of the line from the picked point to the graphical constraint text Font Enter the name of the font to use for the graphical constraint text Font Size Enter the size in pixels of the font to use for the graphical constraint text Suggest Improvements This setting determines if Cyclone attempts to find a set of constraints from the enabled constraints that results in a lower overall error Disabled constraints are not used Image Render Mode Select Software only if your graphics card has trouble drawing the image in the Texture Editor Image dialog 114 Cyclone Object Exchange COE COE for AutoCAD Introduction COEIN an AutoCAD 2000 and higher ObjectARX application was developed to enable the translation of objects from Cyclone to AutoCAD and vice versa When used to import objects into AutoCAD COEIN generates 3D representations of objects imported from a Cyclone COE file
171. alculation To perform a field setup using a known azimuth or bearing to a 3D point 1 Set up the scanner over a known point Set up a target 2 Connect to the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and enable the dual axis compensator or connect to the HDS6000 and enable the tilt sensor 3 Import or add the known or assumed coordinates using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 4 From the Window menu select Field Setup The Field Setup panel appears in the control panel Select Known Azimuth 3D Point from the Method control Select the Station ID from the list Measure and enter the HI Select the Target ID from the list or enter a new ID Measure and enter the HT 10 Measure and enter the Azimuth or bearing from the scanner to the target 11 Select the target Type 11 Pick a cloud point on the target over the known point and push Acquire The backsight is acquired If the target already exists in the ControlSpace the target need not be re acquired a Optionally a pick point may be used without acquiring a target 12 Push the Calculate button to compute the actual orientation of the scanner towards the target s or pick point s position 13 Push the Apply button to set the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System based on the calculation O ONDA To perform a field setup using a known azimuth or bearing of the scanner 1 Set up the scanner over a known point Se
172. alog is used to manage and load saved redlines Redlines Dialog Buttons LOAD Loads the selected redline Redlines are tied to a specific viewpoint Loading a redline restores the viewpoint from which it was created When the viewpoint changes the redline is no longer visible n Loading a redline will toggle on Redline mode allowing you to add to the loaded redline The currently loaded redline set is denoted by active next to the name in the redline list 265 Index You can only load redlines that were created in the current ModelSpace View DELETE Deletes the selected redline The active Redline set cannot be deleted RAISE Move the selected redline one position higher in the list LOWER Move the selected redline one position lower in the list Edit Snap to Object Threshold Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Handles Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Handle Snapping dialog is used to set the distance at which handles snap to selected objects For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter To set the Snap to Object threshold 1 From the Edit Object menu point to Handles and then select Edit Snap to Object Threshold The Set Handle Snapping dialog appears In the Snap Handle to Object Threshold field enter a value for the distance at which a handle snaps to a selected object Click OK The threshold is set Window Scan Control Menu S
173. alue representing the extent of each selected limit can be entered as desired Contours extent values are represented by the same units as those selected for the distance between major contours D Check this box to display labels for each contour line E Select whether to use the Reference Plane or the current coordinate system as the base for contour measurements To create contours 1 Select the point cloud s or the mesh that you want to contour a Make sure that the clouds are displayed as a mesh See the View Object As entry in this chapter for more information 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Contours then select Create The Contours Parameters 208 Index dialog appears Set the distance between major contours the units by which that distance is measured and the number of minor contours to be drawn between major contours If you want to set boundaries within which to draw contours check Minimum and or Maximum in the Contours Extents box for the desired plane s then enter a value representing the extent of each selected limit optional Values entered in the Contours Extents fields are measured in units as defined in the Interval between Major Contours field Check the Label Contours box to display contour line labels Contour label properties can be edited by selecting the contour line then selecting Edit Properties from the Edit Objects menu You can change text color and size you can elect the type of notatio
174. am a histogram of the error between each point and its closest overlapping surface click Details To interrupt the optimization click Stop A confirmation dialog appears Select Stop Immediately to stop and discard any results for the current optimization The state of the cloud constraint is marked as not aligned the cloud constraint must still be aligned before use in global registration Select Stop Cleanly to stop the optimization and save the latest alignment with the cloud constraint Select Don t Stop to continue the alignment optimization When the optimization is complete the Optimize Cloud Alignment Results dialog appears and displays results and error statistics for each cloud constraint alignment Cloud constraints that need further adjustments before use in global registration are highlighted If any alignment searches are halted by the Cloud Reg Max Iterations preference see the Preferences entry in this chapter a warning dialog appears If any alignment is underconstrained e g two scans of a plane in which the alignment could be translated along the plane without changing the quality of alignment a warning dialog appears This case may still be usable for global registration but the alignment should be inspected and additional constraints should be added if possible 340 Index Optimize Mesh Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Optimize Mesh command may speed up working wit
175. an Control workflows e g Field Setup Traverse that require the scanner to be level HDS6000 TILT MAX DRIFT Enter a value for the maximum tilt change that the scanner can undergo from the start of the first scan in the ScanWorld before the scanner must be re leveled This is to ensure that scans in the same ScanWorld are in a consistent coordinate system SIMULATED SCANNER SPHERICAL NOISE Enter a value for the standard deviation of noise applied to each simulated sample SIMULATED SCANNER MAXIMUM RANGE Enter a value for the furthest sample that the simulated scanner will take SPHERE TARGET DIAMETER Enter a value for the diameter expected when acquiring sphere targets in the Scan Control window SPHERE TARGET SCAN DIMENSIONS Select Standard Medium or Low resolution target scan density for fine scans used when acquiring sphere targets in the Scan Control window RESECTION MAX ERROR Enter a value for the maximum error allowed for a valid resection This affects only the content of the Resection Report STAKEOUT HIDE PREVIOUS SCAN Select whether or not to hide the previous coarse scan acquired through the Stakeout panel in the Scan Control window Hiding the previous coarse scan can help improve visualization when acquiring several successive coarse scans during the stakeout workflow Point Cloud Tab Settings WORK DIRECTORY Enter the path to the location for temporary Cyclone files 367 Index INTERACTIVE
176. and blue respectively Show Current Transform Window Registration Menu ScanWorld Action Opens dialog Usage The Show Current Transform dialog displays the current transform for the selected ScanWorlds as computed by the latest registration The transform is a rigid six degrees of freedom transformation consisting of three rotation degrees of freedom roll pitch and yaw and three translation degrees of freedom X Y Z offset To show the current transform 1 From the ScanWorlds Constraints or the ModelSpaces tab select the ScanWorlds whose transforms you want to view 2 From the ScanWorld menu select Show Current Transform The Show Current 433 Index Transform dialog appears displaying the current transform Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Datum Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Datum command toggles the visibility of the current datum point The datum is represented visually by a callout line and a Datum label at the reference point of the datum Show Diagnostics Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Opens dialog Usage The Cloud Constraints Diagnostics dialog is used to view alignment accuracy data for the selected cloud constraint For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter Cloud Constraint Diagnostics Fields CLOUD MESH The name of the constraint TRANSLATI
177. and marks the selected constraint as OFF so that it is not used when computing the registration For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter To disable a constraint 1 In either the ScanWorlds Constraints or the Constraint List tab select the constraint you want to disable 2 From the Constraint menu select Disable The constraint is disabled and its status is marked as OFF Disassemble Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Exclusion Volume Action Executes command Usage The Disassemble command replaces an exclusion volume with its original component s To restore the contents of an exclusion volume 1 Select the exclusion volume 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Exclusion Volume and then select Disassemble The original component s reappear 240 Index Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Disconnect command disconnects Cyclone from the currently connected scanner Disconnect All Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Disconnect Piping All command breaks all connections to the selected object To connect piping see the Connect Piping and Piping Mode commands Disconnect Shared Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Disconnect Piping command breaks the connections shared between two or more selected objec
178. and sets the drawing tool to draw a square in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a square 1 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Square The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex on one corner of the square Click again to place a vertex at the second corner of the desired square This line segment determines the length of the sides of the square Click on either side of the line segment to place the remaining three sides The angle and length of the remaining three sides are determined by the first line segment 250 Index The final three sides can be moved by dragging either vertex of the first line segment A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The square is drawn and you are ready to draw another square To delete the newly created square either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the square and then select Delete from the Edit menu Draw Text Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Opens dialog Usage The Draw Text dialog is used to enter drawing mode and add text in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw text 1 From the Tools
179. and then select Curve The line is created a Even if the selected planes are not physically touching the line is created at the planar intersection 219 Index Customize Hotkeys Window ModelSpace Navigator Image Viewer Scan Control Registration Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage The Customize Hotkeys dialog is used to manage your hotkeys which allow you to activate commands by a simple key combination bypassing the toolbar and menu Customize Hotkeys Dialog g Customize Hotkeys Commands Menu Items Open Open Temporary ModelSpace View Create and Open ModelSpace View Update Original ModelSpace Press hotkey Or 7 Shift f Ctl Alt use X Cancel Apply A List of all commands in the selected category menu B List of windows C List of categories menus in the selected window D Description of the selected command E View any currently assigned hotkey s for the selected command F Click to view a list of all commands and assigned hotkeys by window 220 Index G Assign the entered hotkey to the selected command H Remove the selected current hotkey from the selected command I Use these fields to assign hotkey combinations to selected commands J Cancel hotkey changes K Click to save hotkey changes and continue working in this dialog L Click to save hotkey changes and close the dialog To assign a keyboard hotkey 1 From the Edit menu select C
180. anslated to Cyclone Troubleshooting SOME OBJECTS ARE NOT TRANSLATED OR ARE PARTIALLY TRANSLATED It may be that the non translated object is a type of complex 3D solid object that is not presently supported by the COE import export tool Try exploding the object before exporting to the COE file COEIN COEOUT PROCESS ABORTS PREMATURELY If you check the Create Log File option open the Log file to find the reason for the premature abort Knowing the reason may help you determine the appropriate resolution If you selected Use Default File Path you will find the Log file in the folder containing the active AutoCAD drawing It has the same name as the drawing but with a LOG extension Otherwise the Log file will be in the folder you specified during the import export COE FILE WILL NOT LOAD IN AUTOCAD SYSTEM LOCKS UP Does the COE file you are trying to import contain points If so try this 1 Return to Cyclone and multi select only the objects this is easy if you use the View Properties dialog to turn off the selectable option for points 2 Select all objects and copy them into a new ModelSpace by selecting File Launch Copy Selection to New ModelSpace 3 Create a new COE file from this ModelSpace and then import this new file into AutoCAD COEIN ARX IS NOT LOADED WHEN AUTOCAD IS REBOOTED Add the folder containing the file COEIN ARX to the Support File Search Pathin the AutoCAD Options dialog Note For
181. apping table in the COE INI file To customize the mapping table Note You should edit the mapping table before running COEOUT 1 Use a file browser to locate the COE INI file open this file by double clicking Scroll down to find the mapping table which is defined in the CXFOUT LEVEL MAP section Warning DO NOT modify the contents of the GENERAL section 2 Enter your customized mapping directives by typing the number or name of the MicroStation level followed by a followed by the Cyclone layer name See the example below cxfout level map 63 Default 2 Piping 4 Walls You may enter as many lines as necessary to map all the levels You can map multiple levels to the same Cyclone layer a l you don t want to use the mapping table you can comment the section name out or delete the entire CXFOUT LEVEL MAP section from the COE INI file 128 Cyclone Object Exchange COE 3 Once you have set the layer level mapping as desired save the COE INI file Run COEOUT as described in this document Importing a COE File into Cyclone To import a COE file into Cyclone 1 Open the Cyclone Navigator and select the database or project into which you want to import the COE file 2 Right click the database or project name and select Import or select File Import from the Navigator window The Import from File dialog appears 3 Locate the COE file to be imported and initiate the process A new ModelSpace is cre
182. apter aimed at the center of the wall Be sure that you have room to move the scanner back at least 3 to 5 more meters for the second position a The view from the scanner to the wall should be unobstructed and the wall should be a light diffuse color for example white or beige the process may not work with red black or shiny surfaces Using a wall large enough to cover the entire scanner field of view at 10 meters about 7 186 Index meters on each side is recommended 2 Open the Scan Control viewer and connect to the scanner See the Connect entry in this chapter 3 From the Scanner Control menu point to Camera Calibration and select Calibrate Camera The Camera Calibration dialog appears 4 Click Calibrate do not move the scanner When the first step is complete the dialog reappears 5 Move the scanner without disconnecting it back at least 5 more meters from the wall a f you have room to move it back to 15 meters from the wall do so although 10 meters from the wall will also work although if you use 10 meters in this step you should place it 5 meters from the wall in step 1 6 Click Continue 7 A dialog notifies you when a successful calibration is complete the scanner stores the calibration parameters used for future scans and images 8 Test the calibration with a few scans Alternately use the Verify Calibration command which automatically tests the accuracy of the calibration using the scen
183. aptured taking advantage of processing power not needed to carry out the scan e To merge sub scans In the Navigator window select the appropriate ScanWorld Then select Merge Sub Scans from the Tools menu All sub scans within the selected ScanWorld are combined To adjust the increment above which new sub scans are created use the Max Points Per Sub Scan preference in the Scan tab of the Edit Preferences dialog 33 Scanning with the HDS2500 The Scanning Process Scanning can be accomplished in a variety of ways but all scanning operations generally are divided into the following basic groups 1 Creating a Scanner using the Navigator window 2 Connecting to a scanner 3 Organizing Scan Data by selecting projects and ScanWorlds Cyclone prompts you to do this automatically whenever you open the Scan Control window 4 Preparing to Scan by capturing images targeting and adjusting scan settings 5 Executing the scan Creating a Scanner The first time that you want to use a scanner it is necessary to create a persistent entry for it Scanners are added from the Navigator window To add an HDS2500 scanner 1 From the Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears 2 Click Add The Add Scanner dialog appears 3 From the Scanner Model list select the model name of the scanner that you are adding For example select HDS2500 if the scanner is a HDS2500 4 In the Scanner Name field
184. arc 1 Multi select three non colinear points to define an arc The resulting circular arc passes through all three points in the order in which they are picked The first and last pick point serving as the endpoints 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and then select Arc 3 Points on Arc The arc is created Arc Start Center End Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Pick Points Action Executes command Usage The Arc Start Center End command creates a circular arc through three picked points To create an arc 1 Multi select three points to define an arc a The first and third pick points serve as the endpoints and must be equidistant from the second 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and then select Arc Start Center End The arc is created 178 Index Atmosphere Window Scan Control Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Atmosphere command expands the Atmosphere tab in the Scanner Control Panel Environmental conditions ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure can affect the range computations by a small amount Although differences are minuscule over the ranges and environmental tolerances supported by the HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 controls are provided to compensate for such atmospheric conditions The default values should be acceptable under most conditions Atmosphere Tab Options AMBIENT TEMPERATURE En
185. are drawn automatically From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The isometric polygon is drawn and you are ready to draw another To delete the newly created isometric polygon either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the isometric polygon and then select Delete from the Edit menu Draw Line Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Line command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a line segment in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw aline 1 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Line The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex that serves as first endpoint Click again to place a vertex for the second endpoint The second vertex may be moved by dragging or clicking in a new location A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The line is drawn and you are ready to draw another line To delete the newly created line either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the line and then select Delete from the Edit menu 248 Index Draw Polygon Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Polygon command enters dr
186. are opening a new drawing enter a new file name 3 Click Open MicroStation is launched a You can open a temporary file by clicking CANCEL a file will be created in your system s TEMP directory To save any work done in a temporary file be sure to save your drawing from MicroStation Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Exclusion Volume Action Executes command Usage The Minimize command orients and shrinks the sides of the selected exclusion volume to the minimum dimensions required to enclose its contents To minimize the volume of an exclusion volume 1 Select the exclusion volume 2 From the Tools menu point to Exclusion Volume and then select Minimize The exclusion volume is oriented and collapsed to the minimum volume required to contain its original contents 327 Index Minimize Limit Box Manager Window Menu Action Usage Limit Box Manager View Executes command The Minimize command resizes the limit box to the minimum volume required to contain the currently selected objects if any or to contain all objects if there is no selection The orientation of the limit box is adjusted as required to produce the minimum possible volume Minimize Limit Box Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace View Executes command The Minimize Limit Box command resizes the limit box to the minimum volume required to contain the currently selected objects if any or to contain all objects if there is no
187. areas within the same scene each with different scanning parameters In these cases it can be more efficient to use a scanner script The scanner script functions allow you to queue up a batch of scans and individually adjust targets and scan densities for each of the intended target areas before beginning the actual scans This saves you the time it would otherwise take to wait for a scan to finish before setting up the next scan or perform unattended scanning a For instructions on using a script see the Editor entry in the Commands chapter Importing HDS4500 and HDS6000 Scans When Cyclone completes the HDS4500 or HDS6000 scan the scan data captured is written to a ZFS format file This file is stored in the Database Project folder under the HDS4500 HDS6000 Scan Directory Note The HDS4500 HDS6000 Scan Directory is the folder location where HDS4500 and HDS6000 scan files are stored This folder location is specified in the HDS4500 HDS6000 Scan Directory setting in the Scan tab of the Edit Preferences dialog For quick data verification and visualization in the field use the Re Import Scans command under the Tools menu in the Cyclone Navigator to import a reduced subsample of the total available ZFS point cloud data in the Cyclone database 23 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 From the Sampling list select the subsampling level 1 4 skips every two points 1 9 skips every three points 1 16 skips every four points e
188. as they are acquired see the Show Incoming Points command Scans are saved in the Scans folder under the destination ScanWorld For an overview of the scanning process see the Scanning entry in the Getting Started chapter Window Scan Control Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Scan Filter command expands the Scan Filter tab in the Scanner Control Panel Points sampled by the scanner that fall outside the specified range and or intensity parameters are discarded without being recorded to the database 402 Index Scan Filter Tab Options RANGE To specify minimum or maximum range click the checkboxes Ranges can be entered directly using the fields or by selecting points in the ModelSpace viewer INTENSITY To specify minimum or maximum intensity click the checkboxes Ranges can be entered directly using the fields or by selecting points in the ModelSpace viewer Any point with intensity less than the minimum intensity is rejected any point with intensity greater than maximum intensity is rejected Intensities are from O to 1 More energy returned to the scanner for a given sample results in a higher intensity Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Scanner displays submenu commands submenus and dialogs to used to manage scan data set and restore point clouds and create and use a simulate scanner The following commands submenus and dialogs are available fr
189. at every 0 288 x 0 288 degree 1 250 samples in a 360 degree circle 394 Index Restore Default Cloud from Scan Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Restore Default Cloud from Scan command is used to restore the original point cloud to a ModelSpace including any points hidden using the Set as Default Cloud command To restore the original point cloud 1 Click any point within the point cloud Note This command is not available if there are no points to select 2 From the Tools menu select Scanner Restore Default Cloud from Scan The original point cloud is restored Restore Original Scans Window Navigator Menu Tools Action Executes command Usage The Restore Original Scans command replaces the default point clouds in the selected ScanWorld with the original point clouds from the scans under the ScanWorld This command is useful if you have unified your scan cloud data made the unified cloud the default for the ScanWorld and then want to revert to the original scan data Note Within a ScanWorld you are able to have a ModelSpace that is unified alongside a ModelSpace that is not unified Changing the ScanWorld default clouds does not affect existing ModelSpaces It only affects newly created ModelSpaces and new ControlSpaces if Add Cloud Constraint is used The Add Cloud Constraint command will place the default ScanWorld clouds in the ControlSpace if no clouds alread
190. ated in the selected database or project Limitations SHAPES If there is an unsupported shape it will be brought into Cyclone as a wireframe object but ONLY if you check the Unsupported objects options in the COEOUT Options dialog in MicroStation otherwise the unsupported objects are not translated Instead a message is displayed informing you of that the objects have not been translated and asking if you want to select the objects not translated MODELSPACES You cannot bring COE objects directly into an existing ModelSpace however you CAN multi select and copy objects from the ModelSpace created from the COE import and paste them to the desired ModelSpace Alternatively you can use the Merge from ModelSpace command to merge ModelSpace Views See the Merge from ModelSpace entry in the Commands chapter for more information ANNOTATIONS With the exception of tags annotations and measurements made in MicroStation are not translated to Cyclone Troubleshooting COEIN COEOUT Does Not Finish And an Error Is Displayed If you checked the Create LOG option in the COEIN COEOUT Options dialog recommended open the LOG file to check the reason You will find the LOG file in the same folder as the active DGN file it has the same file name as the DGN file but with a LOG extension 129 Cyclone Object Exchange COE SOME OBJECTS ARE NOT TRANSLATED TO THE DESTINATION ENVIRONMENT If you are translating objects from Cyclon
191. aths tessa teed is 423 Set Plane Origin at Pick POint ccccccecceeeece cece ce eeee ee eecaeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeseeeesaeeeseeeesaes 423 Set Points Selectable ita ie 423 Set Rotational Spacing ui iaa iia 423 Set Scan FINGI iia iia 424 Set ScanWorld Coordinate SySteM oooonccccnnncccccnonocnnonnnnnnncnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannncnnnnnnnnnnnns 424 xvii Table Of Contents Set Selecta ste cicsiasr he coh sets iii 425 Set ScanWorld Default ClOUdS 0 2 0 0 eee antea AEE A EAE ENR AREENA ARADEA KARRIERER S 425 Set Slice from PICKS o ann S aE AEOS AEA E EEO FEOEO PEN 426 Set Slice THIEKNOSS coimono dt divides A doc 426 Set Target Hei iaa a 426 Set to DEN XZ EZ PM iaa aa a a tesa ae teed lade anda 427 SO vei nees ei eer ta ee eatin eet tad ener eS 427 SOUC S sores a eae o et daniel cides Oat dente 427 Set tO VIOWPOIN ei sere hee Tee edna de aed ee dated adie EEAS ved E EAE E a EAR 427 Set Up Direction wee ccce lec eiee vee tee eine ene indeed ieee ancien eee ae 427 Set Using OA AMS ii 428 Set Using TWO AXES iia A dd 428 Sel Welt ira ATRN 429 Shade A tue iAenntee Mbtata careers A RE AAAA AAR 430 O 430 Shortcut in WiInNdOWS voir oca 430 Show Active Plane iia dit A 431 Show All Limit Box Manager ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeee centres eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaaaeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeees 431 Show Annotation KeyS ceccceeeeeceeeeeeece eee eeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeceaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeseaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeees 431 Sh
192. ation 1 Inthe Navigator window select the database or project for your new registration 2 From the Create menu select Registration The Registration is created Registration Tools Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Registration displays submenu commands used to add edit and delete Registration labels as well as to add objects manually to the ControlSpace for the current ScanWorld The following commands dialogs and submenus are available from the Registration submenu Add Edit Registration Label Remove Registration Label Set Target Height Copy to ControlSpace Elevation Check Registration Diagnostics Window Registration Menu Registration Action Opens dialog Usage The Registration Diagnostics dialog shows registration status and statistics for the current registration Re Import Scans Window Navigator Menu Tools Action Opens dialog Usage The Re Import Scans dialog is used to import reduced or full HDS4500 and HDS6000 scans as point clouds in the database replacing the corresponding cloud currently in the database Only ScanStation 2 scans that were not automatically imported as per the ScanStation 2 Max points Auto Imported preference and HDS4500 and HDS6000 scans that were not automatically imported as per the HDS4500 HDS6000 Max Points Auto Imported preference are considered 388 Index Re Import Scans Dialog 2 Re Import Scans x
193. ation values when not checked annotation keys are not shown although the annotation values are still displayed 431 Index Show Annotation Points Window Image Viewer Menu Annotation Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Annotation Points command toggles the display of annotation points When checked the annotation points are displayed on the image Show Annotations Window Image Viewer ModelSpace Menu Image Viewer Annotation ModelSpace Tools Annotations Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Annotations command toggles the display of annotations When checked annotations are shown in the window when not checked annotations are not shown Note The visibility of text added to the ModelSpace using Cyclones drawing tools is also toggled using this command Note Use the Add Edit Annotations command to make individual annotations visible an annotation must be individually visible and the Show Annotations command must be ON for the annotation to actually be displayed Show Constraint Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Show Constraint command displays the objects involved in the selected constraint in the Constraint Viewer panes For complete registration procedures see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter To display a constraint 1 From either the Constraint List or the ScanWorlds Constraints pane select the constrain
194. ation window by selecting all ModelSpaces containing objects you want to include in the resulting ModelSpace and then using the Create ModelSpace command The ModelSpace created in this manner includes ModelSpace data from each of the selected ModelSpaces a In each case individual scans can be added to the ModelSpace by dragging the desired scan onto the ModelSpace in the Navigator window Scans may also be restored using the ScanWorld Explorer a Ina ModelSpace containing a registered set of scans and a large number of point clouds performance is improved by the cloud unification process See the Unify Clouds entry in the Command Reference chapter 45 Registration Checking the Registration Mistakes can still happen even with acceptable registration metrics When QC quality control points are available the Elevation Check dialog can help discover mistakes by measuring the vertical deviation of each QC point from the registered cloud points in its neighborhood The QC points are typically measured on arbitrarily selected ground points with an independent survey instrument and placed in the same coordinate system as the Home ScanWorld With a good registration the QC points will be close in elevation to the registered point cloud See the Elevation Check entry in the Command Reference chapter Cloud Registration Cloud Registration supports the creation and management of cloud constraints between overlapping point clouds and meshes
195. atisfactorily but the geometry of the overlap area in the two clouds may not constrain all six degrees of freedom e g if the overlap area is a flat plane it would only constrain 1 translation and 1 rotation degree of freedom In these cases you may want to visually verify that it is indeed underconstrained or if the initial alignment guess was inaccurate Cloud Alignment Accuracy Although there is no fail safe method of determining if the cloud alignment result succeeded in finding the optimum alignment within accuracy limits of the data the following methods can be used to check for accuracy ALIGNMENT RMS ERROR One of the first things to look at is the RMS root mean square error of the alignment in the Error Vector column in the Constraint List tab If the RMS error value is in the 1 cm range for HDS data the alignment is likely to be good HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 data has an RMS of 6 mm in general but since the overlap measurement is often imprecise 49 Registration the alignment RMS is generally above 6 mm depending on the geometry of the scene For example if the scene contains large smooth surfaces the overlap measurement is very good and the RMS may be 6mm or lower However for scans of more complex geometry such as a leafy tree or a field of grass the RMS will be higher since the overlapping points may not always be from the same surface e g a nearby leaf or blade of grass ERROR HISTOGRAM
196. ator window When closing a ModelSpace View window that was created via the Copy to New ModelSpace command in the Launch menu you will be prompted whether to merge the ModelSpace View back into the original and whether to keep or remove the launched ModelSpace Cloud Constraints Wizard Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Opens dialog Usage The Cloud Constraints Wizard launches a series of wizard dialogs that guide the user through the process of creating cloud constraints For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter This is the recommended method for creating cloud constraints The Cloud Constraints Wizard guides you through the entire process of creating cloud constraints and can save considerable time compared to the other methods First specify which ScanWorld pairs are overlapping and then the Wizard steps through the process of creating a cloud constraint for each specified pair of ScanWorlds See the Cloud Constraints Wizard entry in the Commands chapter for detailed instructions The Cloud Constraints Wizard offers the following advantages a lt automatically copies all scan clouds except HDS Target clouds into the ControlSpace for the selected ScanWorlds a It automatically opens the ControlSpaces side by side in the Constraint viewers and advances to the next ScanWorld pair after the user has picked corresponding points and pushe
197. awing in progress move the cursor over the existing drawing the cursor changes shape and click This activates the other drawing All drawings in progress may be created or cancelled at the same time Pipe Modeling Pipe Modeling is used to insert piping components in a model without best fitting to a point cloud Placement of the components is typically performed using the point cloud as a reference Components can be inserted in sequence to create a run of connected piping components The components can be assigned information such as piping specification line ID insulation thickness and Symbol Keys This information can be exported and mapped to various plant design software applications e Pipe Modeling is accessed through the Pipe Modeling command See the Pipe Modeling entry in the Commands chapter A typical workflow is as follows 1 Select an existing object e g from region growing fitting or insertion to which a piping component is to be added or start with nothing selected to start a new sequence 2 Using the Pipe Modeling dialog insert the connected piping components with supplemental piping specific information in Cyclone 3 Export the ModelSpace to PCF 4 Using the I Convert from Alias Ltd converter process the PCF file into a format compatible with the target piping design package 91 Animation a l Convert currently supports PDS PDMS and AutoPlant Piping Mode Piping Mode is used to add
198. awing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a polygon in the active Reference Plane n For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter The procedures for drawing a polygon are identical to those for drawing a polyline except that the first and last vertices are automatically connected Draw Polyline Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Polyline command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a polyline in the active Reference Plane n For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a polyline 1 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Polyline The Drawing cursor appears 2 In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex at the first endpoint 3 Click again to place a vertex and create a line segment from the previous point To continuously add vertices as you move the mouse press and hold ALT and drag the cursor 4 Continue adding vertices as needed A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor a Vertices may also be added by clicking on an existing line segment 5 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The polyline is drawn and you are ready to draw another polyline a To delete the newly created polyline either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the polyl
199. b of the View Properties dialog which is used to set the visible and selectable properties for classes of objects To make a class of objects selectable select the check box in the Selectable column next to the object type To make a class of objects visible select the check box in the Visible column next to the object type Settings in the Selectable Visible tab interact with Layers settings For an object to be selectable both its layer and its class must be selectable Set ScanWorld Default Clouds Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Set ScanWorld Default Clouds command designates the current point clouds as the default point clouds that are loaded whenever a new ModelSpace is created from the parent ScanWorld This command is useful after deleting unwanted points from the point clouds or after using the Unify Clouds command e To revert to the original scan clouds as the default use Restore Original Scans command To set a default point cloud 1 After creating two or more point clouds through segmentation select a single point cloud 2 From the Tools menu point to Scanner and then select Set ScanWorld Default Clouds The selected point cloud is loaded whenever a new ModelSpace is created from the parent ScanWorld 425 Index Set Slice from Picks Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Set Slice from Picks di
200. bject insertion are impractical a There may be many Reference Planes in a given ModelSpace View however all drawing is done on the active Reference Plane The active Reference Plane does not need to be visible to perform 2D drawing Supported Shapes Line Polyline Square Rectangle Polygon Isometric Polygon Text Arc Circle Ellipse Cubic Spline Cubic Spline Loop 89 Animation Drawing 2D Objects In general 2D objects are drawn by selecting the type of object you want to draw from the Tools Drawing submenu which puts Cyclone in Drawing mode and then plotting a sequence of vertices in the active Reference Plane in the ModelSpace A drawing is completed by pointing to Drawing within the Toolsmenu and selecting Create Drawing Slight variations in the way that different shapes are drawn are documented in the individual command entries for each supported shape in the Commands chapter of this manual Plotting Vertices To place a vertex in the plane you can either click or drag the cursor while in Drawing mode If you click one vertex is created If you drag the cursor before releasing the new vertex tracks the cursor When you release the mouse button the vertex is inserted at the current position e For polylines and cubic splines hold the ALT key and drag the mouse to insert a stream of vertices along the path of the cursor e To align a vertex along a grid axis of the Reference Plane from the previous vertex first
201. bjects can be created by a variety of methods including via the 2D drawing tools If an arc or other open curvilinear object is selected the end points are connected for purposes of defining the data fence From the Edit menu point to Fence and then select Set from Selection The fence is created The resulting data fence can be used in all fencing operations Set Grid Spacing Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Snapping Grid Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Grid Spacing dialog is used to set the interval by which a handle can be moved or a vertex can be placed in Drawing mode when using the snapping grid To set grid spacing 1 From the Edit Object menu point to Snapping Grid and then select Set Grid Spacing The Set Grid Spacing dialog appears In the Grid Spacing field enter a value for the interval by which a handle can be moved when Snap to Grid is ON Click OK The grid spacing is set Set Half Space at Pick Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Set Half Space at Pick displays submenu commands to specify the active Cutplane as a half space based on the last pick point See also View HalfSpace and Add Edit Cutplanes To set the Cutplane half space a the pick point 1 2 Pick the point through which the active Cutplane will pass From the Toolsmenu point to Cutplane and then point to Set Half Space at Pick and select the axis you want
202. browse to their target objects Cyclone shortcuts are located only within the Cyclone Navigator and only function within Cyclone To create a shortcut in Windows 1 Inthe Navigator window select the object to which you want to create a Windows shortcut 2 From the Create menu select Shortcut in Windows submenu command The shortcut is added to the indicated location a The shortcut name is based on the name of the object the shortcut points to a lf there is already an existing shortcut with the same name it will be overwritten with the new shortcut You are prompted to confirm or cancel Show Active Plane Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Reference Plane Toggles menu item ON OFF The Show Active Plane command toggles the display of the active Reference Plane Show All Limit Box Manager Window Menu Action Usage Limit Box Manager View Executes command The Show All command toggles visibility of limit boxes between only the activated limit box and all limit boxes When all limit boxes are visible the active limit box is displayed is highlighted with thick lines and limit box selected in the list is displayed with dashed lines Show Annotation Keys Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Annotations Toggles menu item ON OFF The Show Annotation Keys command toggles the display of annotation keys in the window When checked annotations keys are shown with the annot
203. ca 467 VEV ODETTA Sae A A ia 467 VIEN SOE saa a A a e A eE 469 Virual SUVs 469 VOUE id A ar ea A A 470 XX Table Of Contents xxi Leica Geosystems HDS LLC provides complete documentation in an accessible HTML based help system The help system includes information on all of Cyclone s tools commands and features Leica HDS Technical Support Leica Geosystems HDS LLC 4550 Norris Canyon Road San Ramon CA 94583 925 790 2300 support hds leica geosystems com hds leica geosystems com Copyright Notice Copyright O 2005 2008 Leica Geosystems HDS LLC All rights reserved The Cyclone documentation is copyrighted and all rights are reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Leica Geosystems HDS LLC The document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from Leica Geosystems HDS LLC Trademarks Cyraxis a trademark of Leica Geosystems HDS LLC Other brands and their products are trademarks of their respective holders and should be noted as such Introduction Cyclone Software Introduction Most CAD and modeling programs construct geometry from only a few sample vertices and estimate the rest with design assumptions Design or modeling packages aid the user in creating entirely novel models from a conceptual model or i
204. can selected targets to judge if the scanner requires calibration To check the calibration of a connected scanner 1 Pick one or more black white targets in the Scan Control viewer or in the attached ModelSpace viewer 2 From the Scanner menu select Check Calibration 3 Each target is acquired from each side of the scanner and the distance between each is measured 4 The Calibration Check Results dialog displays the measurement results The distances should be within acceptable values Check Fit Tolerances Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Fit to Cloud Options Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Check Fit Tolerances command enables disables a warning message that appears if a cloud fit is beyond one or more of the tolerance limits 188 Index In order to use fit constraints the Fit Tolerances box must also be selected and tolerance values must be specified within the Object Preferences dialog for the type of object being fit See the Object Preferences command For an overview of fitting objects in Cyclone see the Modeling entry in the Getting Started chapter Check Re Level HDS6000 Window Scan Control HDS6000 Menu Scanner Action Opens dialog Usage The Check Re Level HDS6000 command opens the Check Re Level HDS6000 dialog which displays the angular tilt of the scanner To check or re level the scanner 1 From the Scanner menu select Check Re Level HDS6000 Th
205. canWorld to the Traverse This can used if the Traverse is closed prematurely MODIFY CURRENT STATION Displays the Modify Traverse Info dialog which is used to edit existing Station Backsight and Foresight settings REMOVE CURRENT STATION Removes the current ScanWorld from the Traverse This can be used if the ScanWorld has been erroneously added to the Traverse CLOSE WITH LAST STATION Closes the Traverse using the last ScanWorld added to the Traverse OPEN REGISTRATION Launches the Registration viewer for the current Traverse lt STATION BACKSIGHT FORESIGHT gt Selects the target settings to display in the panel ID The ID of the Station or Target Backsight or Foresight The ID is used to match against known assumed or acquired coordinates during Traverse HI HT The Height of Instrument Station or Height of Target Backsight or Foresight XYZ NEEL The position of the known or assumed coordinate with the matching ID in the Known Coordinates ScanWorld TYPE The type of the target to be acquired 454 Index ACQUIRE Acquires the target Backsight or Foresight at the current pick point ADD Adds the ScanWorld to the Traverse The Station Foresight and Backsight settings must be entered and the Foresight and Backsight targets must be in the ScanWorld s ControlSpace CLOSE Adds the ScanWorld to the Traverse and then closes the current Traverse The Station Foresight and Backsight sett
206. canner Control Script Action Opens dialog Usage The Editor command launches the Scanner Script window which is used to manage all scanner scripting functions Scanner Script Window Commands SCRIPT MENU COMMANDS Insert Insert the contents of a saved script 266 Save Save the contents of the current script RECORD MENU COMMANDS Targeted Scan Record the target position and scanner settings to the current script Scan Around Picked Point Record a detailed scan to the current script at a user specified size and spacing around a 3D point picked in the connected ModelSpace viewer Targeted Image HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 only Record the target image and settings to the current script CONTROL MENU COMMANDS Start Run the current script Stop Stop the currently running script Pause Pause the currently running script Scanner Script Dialog Script Record Control Commands Help age 0 000 45 000 360 000 90 000 Scan 0 000 45 000 360 000 90 000 1224 200 Index 267 Index A Script menus B Run Script C Pause Script D Stop Script To add a targeted scan to the current script 1 2 In the Scan Control window set the target box and scan settings you want to add to the current script From the Record menu in the Scanner Script window select Targeted Scan To insert a saved script into the current script 1 From the Script me
207. canner to match the current viewpoint of the ModelSpace from which it was launched use the Update Simulated Scanner Position command in the Scanner submenu of the original ModelSpace window Note The original ModelSpace that serves as the scene to be scanned is not the same as the ModelSpace that can be opened from the Scan Control window in order to view the incoming points 40 Registration Introduction Registration is the process of integrating a project s ScanWorlds into a single coordinate system as a Registered ScanWorld This integration is derived using a system of constraints which are pairs of equivalent objects or overlapping point data that exist in two ScanWorlds The objects involved in these constraints are maintained in a ControlSpace where they can be reviewed organized and removed they cannot be moved or resized in a ControlSpace to ensure data integrity The Registration process computes the optimal overall alignment transformations for each component ScanWorld in the Registration such that the constrained objects are aligned as closely as possible in the resulting ScanWorld The Registration Process Registering a set of ScanWorlds can be accomplished in a variety of ways The following series of steps represents a typical project Your specific projects may be better suited to an order of operations that is slightly different from the following general guidelines Note Before starting the Registration process
208. ce 1 Perform a scan that is only partially imported see the ScanStation 2 Max Points Auto Imported and HDS4500 HDS6000 Max Points Auto Imported preferences in the Scan tab of the Edit Preferences dialog 2 Set the fence to cover the area to be loaded A larger region may take more time to load 3 From the Scanner Control menu select Load Points within Fence The points in the fenced region are loaded e Anew scan is created from each partially imported scan that overlaps the fence e The points within the fence are fully loaded without subsampling Load Points within Fenced Selection Window Scan Control ScanStation 2 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Load Points within Fenced Selection command is used to load only those points in the current ScanWorld s partially imported scans that fall within the fence and that are also selected in the Scan Control The command can be used to selectively view a subset of the entire scan without having to load the entire scan or parts of other scans which can take a significant amount of time For 321 Index example use this command to load only the region of the partially imported scan that includes a black white target To load points from selected clouds within the fence 1 Perform a scan that is only partially imported see the ScanStation 2 Max Points Auto Imported and HDS4500 HDS6000 Max Points Auto Imported prefe
209. ce a target is acquired 7 Once you have viewed potential targets select the targets to be acquired by checking the box 00 in the fourth column for each target to be acquired To toggle the check box for a selected target press the SPACEBAR key Click Acquire The target acquisition process begins progress and results are displayed in the Status column During the target acquisition process Cyclone performs a coarse and then a fine scan on each potential target and then fits a vertex to the target If the coarse scan fails to find sufficient data to begin a fine scan the Status column in the Acquire Targets dialog displays Failed at Coarse If the fine scan fails to find sufficient data to place a target the Status column in the Acquire Targets dialog displays Failed at Fine Coarse and fine scans appear in the ModelSpace viewer Coarse scans are deleted upon successful acquisition Fine scans can be viewed by double clicking the scan item in the Navigator window Fine scans are saved in the HDS Target Scans folder of the parent ScanWorld To adjust the resolution of the fine scan see the use the Scan Control tab of the Edit Preferences dialog To acquire targets from selected clouds The process of acquiring targets is usually done after an initial scan of the scene which provides a general reference as to the location of targets in the scene From the Project menu in the Scan Control window select Open ModelSpace Vi
210. ck Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint View Lock Action Toggles option ON OFF Usage The Rotate command toggles the ability to rotate the viewpoint in View mode When ON you cannot rotate the viewpoint 396 Index Save Edit Coordinate Systems Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Opens dialog Usage The User Coordinate Systems dialog is used to save restore and delete user defined coordinate systems n Using multiple user defined coordinate systems can be very helpful in the navigation and analysis of large ModelSpaces You may find it useful to define temporary coordinate systems based on objects that provide necessary axes and origins of interest for use in the insertion or editing of objects with for instance the Rotate command User Coordinate Systems Dialog lt Default gt User Coordinate System 1 User Coordinate System 2 A List of saved coordinate systems Double click to set the coordinate system The current coordinate system is shown in bold face B Save the current coordinate system C Delete the selected coordinate system D Move the selected coordinate system up through the list saved coordinate systems E Move the selected coordinate system down through the list saved coordinate systems 397 Index To save the current coordinate system 1 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then select Save Edit Coordinate Systems The User Co
211. cloud Update Constraint Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Update Constraint command removes any constraints that have been deactivated constraint objects have been made invisible in the ControlSpace from the current Registration 459 Index In order to update constraints for a completed frozen Registration the Registration must be reactivated by invoking the Unfreeze Registration command For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter Update Initial Cloud Alignment Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Update Initial Cloud Alignment command recomputes the correspondences between the current pick points used in the selected Cloud Constraint and resets the initial cloud alignment n This command is useful if the Optimize Alignment function is unsuccessful because of an inaccurate initial alignment hint For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter To update initial cloud alignments 1 From the Constraint List tab select the cloud constraint to update then select Show Constraint from the Constraint menu The ControlSpaces of the constrained ScanWorlds are opened in the Constraint viewers and the pick points of the cloud constraint are displayed 2 Modify the set of pick points addin
212. clouds The current settings and Object Preferences for use of Parts Table Fit Tolerances and Fit Constraints are used in this fit 66 Animation Copy The Copy dialog is used to create a series of translated copies of the selected object s The Copy at Offset tab is used to specify the number of copies and the axis along which they are translated This option is commonly used to model ceiling beams pipe racks or stairs The Copy at Angle tab is used to make a series of copies of the selected object s rotated around a specified axis The number of copies the angle between each copy the center point and the axis of rotation can be specified in this tab This option can be used to model the bolts on a flange face for example Move Rotate The Move Rotate dialog is used to rotate or move one or more selected objects When moving an object the distance and axis of the motion are user specified When rotating an object the center point angle of rotation and axis around which the object is rotated are user specified Using a Fence A fence is a two dimensional rectangle or polygon that is used as a boundary to select and deselect objects and point clouds segment point clouds and other objects and create 2D line drawings Fences can be created in Rectangular or Polygonal Fence Mode or linear objects such as polygons ellipses arcs etc can be used to define the boundaries of a fence Creating a Fence To create a fence fr
213. clouds and meshes are used interchangeably in this topic without the need for targets The overall registration process remains the same see the Registration topic in this chapter the user may also create cloud constraints in addition to the geometric constraints between HDS Targets spheres cylinders planes etc Cloud constraint commands are found in the Cloud Constraint menu of the Registration window Cloud Constraints A cloud constraint is a user defined constraint between two ScanWorlds which indicates that the point clouds in the ControlSpace of the first ScanWorld overlap with the point clouds in the ControlSpace of the second ScanWorld Just as an object object constraint tells the registration to align the objects a cloud constraint tells the registration to align the overlapping areas of two or more point clouds It is possible to register two ScanWorlds together with a single cloud constraint if the overlapping points constrains the registration in all six degrees of freedom three translation directions and three rotation angles e g if the overlap is in a corner However two scans may only overlap in a single plane in this case the cloud constraint behaves much like a plane plane constraint with the unconstrained degrees of freedom inherent in a plane plane constraint Creating a Cloud Constraint Cloud constraints do not differentiate between clouds and meshes One ControlSpace can have a mesh while another has a cl
214. cnononnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnananenns 396 Rotate View Lock occire ta di ti ive dee Saba Dd APEE eave ue T de cai 396 Save Edit Coordinate System Sacce ian a i E o A N A 397 Se CEE a AEE iia 398 Save Edit Viewpoint ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeaaeeeeceaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaa Aa 399 Save Measurements e u a A ee cee ee cece N a Ee aea E AEN LEAKE e ar 401 DAVE VIEW ciinei e eR EEE AAA ERNEA A RE AAAA 401 SAVE VEW S avanes ratuna e a A uu 401 NN 402 Scam Ple stat it is 402 O 403 Scanner DiagnostiCS uti tt rta 403 Scanner Laser MOG cit Ii A ok A AA e 404 Scanner Range Mode tv ii c cticeciceecestete eae hee a A Aoi 404 Scanner Spee easca sede eee eee eee eek ne eee ete eat ites i dees ieee nee 404 SCANMMENS vce yee hace ah wate TE did 405 SCANWONG iii A doh abet solver Gane ia 405 Scan Word Expel vocacion 406 SCANWONI MiO aeeaiei n AEE EERE ARRERA TAERA 409 Sections Manager sos ana o e a T E S TA E S E S 410 SOCK Modera iire a tal Dota 410 SEGMEMt ClOU eea A A N E O 410 Segment py PONNE see e a iia 411 Segment POV NE sias atrata a ease a 411 Selecta PrOJOC Era A ark en E AN 412 Table Of Contents Selecta Scan Wonde circa ii 412 Select All etan anie ei EEE EAE EE EAE AEA ENAR AREARE AAEE KARRIER 413 Select All Point Cloud Sub Selection 2 0 2 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeee cece cece eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeeeees 413 Select Connected cecene Heese id it a coca 413 SelEct S ita aaa 413 SO sovace
215. command does not create a polyline It displays the order of the pick points n This may be useful for keeping track of the order of picks for operations like creating a cubic spline or a polyline from pick points Show Point Clouds Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Point Clouds command toggles the display of point clouds in the Constraint viewers in the Registration viewer 438 Index Show Rotation Handles Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Edit Object Handles Toggles menu item ON OFF The Show Rotation Handlescommand toggles the display and availability of object rotation handles n Rotation handles allow you to rotate an object around any of its principal axes n For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter Window Menu Action Usage Navigator View Toggles menu item ON OFF The Show Scanners command toggles the display of the Scanners folder in the Navigator Show Servers Window Navigator Menu View Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Servers command toggles the display of the Servers folder in the Navigator Window Menu Action Usage Navigator View Toggles menu item ON OFF The Show Shortcuts command toggles the display of the Shortcuts folder in the Navigator Show Table Matches Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Create Object Fit to Cloud Opt
216. constraints have not been added between ScanWorlds known to not overlap 43 Registration Constraints occurring in this manner should be deleted Matching Registration Labels When two ScanWorlds ControlSpaces contain objects with the same Registration label a constraint is automatically created relating each of these object pairs In most cases constraints that result from Registration labels come from HDS Targets that have been placed in overlapping areas of scans for the specific purpose of using them for Registration Some HDS Targets may have been imported from a reference coordinate system e g survey data Registration labels are created during the modeling process via the Add Edit Registration Label dialog in the ModelSpace window Manually Adding Constraints Manually adding a constraint establishes that two objects are equivalent For example a constraint formed from two patches found in two different ScanWorlds declares that the patches should lie in the same plane after the two ScanWorlds have been registered Constraints are manually added using the Add Constraint command The process involves viewing both ScanWorlds ControlSpaces and selecting the objects to be used in the constraint Note that both objects must be copied to their respective ControlSpaces before a constraint can be specified The types of geometry that can be used for constraints include Patch Line Vertex Sphere Cylinder and Steel Sections R
217. ct the level of anti aliasing in the site map image A higher level helps smoothen jagged edges in the image D TruView Settings Click to invoke the TruView Settings dialog E OK Click to accept the settings and publish the site map and TruView datasets F Cancel Click to cancel this operation TruView Settings Dialog x Image Resolution ozaaoza y Min Range 0 000 m gt Max Range 200 000 m z Encoding Error 200m 0 006 me Estimated File Size i 4 4 MB Jv Include Background Image Owner Info OK Cancel A Image Resolution The maximum resolution used in each of the six images generated fora TruView dataset The six images form a complete cube A higher resolution may improve image quality when zoomed in using TruView but it may also result in larger files B Min Range Points closer to the scanner than this value are not included in the TruView dataset C Max Range Points farther from the scanner than this value are not included in the TruView dataset Use this to avoid including points that are beyond the recommended range of the scanner or to limit the visualization to a local region D Encoding Error 200m The desired precision of the 3D point at each TruView pixel A higher precision may result in better measurements using TruView but it may also result in larger files E Estimated File Size The estimated size of the files in a typical TruView dataset generated with these
218. cts in the destination environment Some objects however may not be translated directly because a direct equivalent doesn t exist in MicroStation In such cases a group of shapes representing the unknown object may be used For more information on how COE objects from Cyclone are translated into MicroStation entities see the section entitled How Objects Are Translated in this appendix The following sections describe the processes both for exporting objects from Cyclone as well as importing COE objects into MicroStation Limitations to the COE functionality are also discussed along with a troubleshooting section Note This MDL application is designed primarily to translate modeled 3D objects between supported applications While it is possible to translate point clouds via COE we recommend using the Leica Geosystems HDS s CloudWorx application when you need to bring Cyclone point clouds into MicroStation Creating a COE File in Cyclone To export modeled objects to a COE file from Cyclone 1 Open the desired ModelSpace and use Cyclone s 3D modeling tools to create equipment piping vessels or other objects a If you want to isolate selected objects for export to the COE file multi select the desired objects then select File Launch Copy Selection to New ModelSpace 2 When you are ready to export click File Export The Export to File dialog appears 3 Identify a location for the file name the file to be created the
219. d a lt may take the scanner several seconds to acquire and transfer the image before it is displayed a lf the position or orientation of the scanner is changed select Get Image again to update the image Also a new ScanWorld should be selected for storing any new data Use the New Scanner Position command to automatically create a new ScanWorld Adjusting Scan Settings After determining the area of the scene that you want to scan the range sample spacing and number of points settings can be adjusted For an explanation of these settings see the preceding Scan Settings section Using Targets Targets are useful as constraints in the registration process If you are using either HDS Targets or spheres a good time to acquire the targets is after the initial scan of the scene For target acquisition procedures see the Acquire Targets command Once acquired Targets are automatically added to the ControlSpace Using a Scanner Script It is often necessary to scan several areas within the same scene each with different scanning parameters In these cases it can be more efficient to use a scanner script The scanner script functions allow you to queue up a batch of scans and individually adjust targets and scan densities for each of the intended target areas before beginning the actual scans This saves you the time it would otherwise take to wait for a scan to finish before setting up the next scan or perform unattended scan
220. d and the next ScanWorld in the sequence including the check box between the last and first ScanWorlds to complete the cycle Click Cancel to exit the Cloud Constraints Wizard without saving changes 4 Click Update The Cloud Constraints Wizard initiates the cloud constraint construction sequence for the selected ScanWorld pairs pairs with existing cloud constraints are skippea The ControlSpaces for the first selected ScanWorld pair are displayed in the Constraint viewers If the two ScanWorlds already have a cloud constraint the pick points if any of the cloud constraint are shown Multi pick two or more matching points in each ControlSpace of the ScanWorld pair If the ScanWorlds are already registered or the default ScanWorld coordinates are already specified in global coordinates then no pick points are needed See the Cloud Registration section in the Registration chapter for information on picking good points To preview the point cloud alignment based on the current picks click Preview A temporary ModelSpace opens and displays the alignment of the ScanWorld pair s point cloud meshes Close the temporary ModelSpace view to return to the Cloud Constraint Wizard To move on to the next ScanWorld pair in the sequence without creating a cloud constraint click Next To return to the previous ScanWorld pair in the sequence click Back To return to the first Cloud Constraints Wizard page click Return 6 Click Const
221. d constraint Click OK The objects involved in the constraint may be present in other ControlSpaces and ModelSpaces The corresponding objects are renamed wherever they are found under the constraint s ScanWorlds To add or edit the registration label of the object selected in a Constraint Viewer 1 2 Select the object in the Constraint Viewer Right click in the Constraint Viewer to invoke the context menu From the context menu select Add Edit Registration Label The Registration Label dialog appears Enter the registration label and click OK to assign the registration label to the selected object Click OK The selected object may be present in other ControlSpaces and ModelSpaces The corresponding objects are renamed wherever they are found under the constraint s ScanWorlds Add Edit ScanWorld Annotations Window Scan Control Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage The Add Edit ScanWorld Annotations command opens the Annotations dialog which is used to attach annotations to the current destination ScanWorld The Annotations dialog opened from the Scan Control window functions identically to the Annotations dialog opened from other windows See the Add Edit Annotations command 163 Index except that there is no visibility option there is no Custom tab and the ScanWorld itself is used as the object to which all annotations are attached To edit ScanWorld annotations 1 From the Edit me
222. d manipulate the active Reference Plane The Reference Plane is an infinite two dimensional plane used for creating shapes that are otherwise unavailable in Cyclone or for creating shapes where object fitting or insertion are impractical It is also used as a reference for several operations such as measuring a mesh volume or orienting the Cutplane The following commands and dialogs are available from the Reference Plane submenu Add Edit Reference Planes Show Active Plane Align View to Active Plane Edit Active Plane Set to Viewpoint Set to UCS Set to X Y Plane Set to X Z Plane Set to Y Z Plane Set on Object Set Plane Origin at Pick Point Pan Rotate Tilt Raise Lower n For information on 2D drawing procedures see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage The Region Grow submenu contains commands that are used to fit a patch cylinder or sphere to a shape within a point cloud without having to first segment the points It also contains the Smooth Surfacescommand which is used to segment a selected smooth surface in a point cloud and the Pipe Run command which is used 384 Index to grow a series of pipes connected by elbows When region growing a patch cylinder or sphere the points on the surface representing the selected object are replaced with the fitted geometry For the Smooth Surfacescommand the points representing the smooth
223. d scans Draw Arc 3 Points on Arc Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Arc 3 Points on Arc command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw an arc in the active Reference Plane 243 Index For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw an arc 1 PON From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Arc 3 Points on Arc The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex that serves as the first endpoint Click again to place a second vertex that serves as a point on the arc Click a point or drag the cursor to place a third vertex that serves as the second end point A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The arc is drawn and you are ready to draw another arc To delete the newly created arc either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the arc and then select Delete from the Edit menu Draw Arc Start Center End Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Arc Start Center End command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw an arc in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw an arc 1
224. d the Cloud Constraints Wizard s Create Constraint button a t provides a quick way to check for overlap between two ScanWorlds Pressing the eyeglass button in the Cloud Constraint Wizard s grid control displays the corresponding ScanWorlds ControlSpaces in the Constraint viewers 196 Index To create cloud constraints via the Cloud Constraints Wizard 1 Open a new or existing Registration window and add the ScanWorlds that are to be registered The registration may already have target or object constraints 2 From the Cloud Constraint menu select Cloud Constraints Wizard The first wizard page appears displaying a matrix of all ScanWorlds that have been added to the registration An initial check mark indicates that the corresponding pair of ScanWorlds already has an existing Cloud Constraint 3 Select the check boxes in the matrix to indicate that a Cloud Constraint should be created between the two ScanWorlds if one does not already exist and clear check boxes to remove any existing Cloud Constraints that are no longer needed from the Registration Click the View icon at the intersection of two ScanWorlds to see their ControlSpaces lf a ControlSpace has no point clouds or meshes all non target scans in the ScanWorld are automatically added to the ControlSpace To select all check boxes click Select All To clear all check boxes click Deselect All Click Select Cycle to select the check boxes between each ScanWorl
225. dary The closer the slider moves towards Tight Boundary the more rigidly the boundary of the new patch adheres to the points on the edge of the point cloud In some cases this adjustment may necessitate the creation of more than one patch To fit an object using parts tables 1 From the Object Preferences dialog enable and set the constraint and tolerance options for the object type that you want to fit See the Object Preferences dialog for details From the Object Preferences dialog select the Catalog Parts Table check box and then make a Table selection for each object type that you want to fit Some objects do not support fitting to parts tables 3 From the Object Preferences dialog enter a value in the Match Table Item Within field This value determines the range of possible table matches that are checked when the item is fit From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud Options and toggle Show Table Matches Use Fit Constraint and Check Fit Tolerances ON if you are using those options Tolerances and constraints can be used along with parts tables in different combinations depending on the object type Some objects do not support one or more of the cloud fitting options Select the point cloud s you want to use to fit a geometric shape For information on preparing point clouds for modeling see the Cloud Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter When multiple point clouds are selected the Multiple Point Cloud St
226. dea often having little to do with reality Cyclone provides a high performance environment for manipulating point cloud data captured by High Definition Surveying HDS systems Cyclone enables the user to accurately visualize navigate measure and model 3D objects and scenes See the Quick Start chapter for an introduction to the major concepts of the Cyclone software system Installation Included Materials CD ROM Cyclone 5 8 1 Installer Program On line help Documents System Requirements PROCESSOR 1 4 GHz Pentium M Centrino 2 GHz Pentium 4 or higher MEMORY 512 MB RAM 1 GB recommended HARD Disk 10 GB Storage Space or more VIDEO SVGA or OpenGL accelerated graphics card OPERATING SYSTEM Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Home Edition SP1 or higher Windows 2000 SP2 or higher ACCESSORIES Ethernet card for licensing and communication with scanner Installation Installing Cyclone For Cyclone to install correctly under Windows 2000 or Windows XP use an account with Administrator privileges or equivalent which allows certain system files be installed or updated Otherwise Cyclone may not install correctly Operation of Cyclone under Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT or Windows ME is currently unsupported if you are attempting to install Cyclone on a computer running Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT or Windows ME the installation will not proceed To Install Cyclone 1 Insert the Cyclone CD
227. delSpace containing the overlapping points click Show Overlap From the first ScanWorld overlapping points are colored blue and non overlapping points are colored dark blue From the second ScanWorld overlapping points are colored green and non overlapping points are colored dark green a To save the diagnostics as a text file click Save and use the dialog that appears to specify a name and location for the text file a To print the diagnostic click Print A standard print dialog launches a To view a graphical histogram of the errors of the overlapping clouds with lines indicating user preferences click Histogram See the Error Histogram entry in the Registration chapter for details Window Scan Control Menu Image Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Grid command toggles the display of the targeting grid in the Scan Control window 435 Index Show Handles Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Handles Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Handles command toggles the visibility of object handles Handles allow you to manipulate an object s position and shape in various ways For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter Show Hidden Clouds Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Show Hidden Clouds command displays cloud points that have been hidden using the Hide Selected Clouds or Hide Unselected Clouds command
228. dialog appears Configure the correct format and click Import a Each coordinate from the file is added as a vertex with an ID and that position to the Known Coordinates ScanWorld Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000 Menu Project Action Opens dialog Usage The Browse For Folder dialog is used to select a folder with a Leica System 1200 DB X database to import as known or assumed coordinates that will be used in the Field Setup or Traverse procedures a The known or assumed coordinates are saved in the Known CoordinatesScanWorld under the current Project a For more information on Field Setup and Traverse see the Field Setup ScanStation ScanStation 2 and Traverse ScanStation ScanStation 2 entries in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 chapter or the Field Setup HDS6000 and Traverse HDS6000 section in the Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 chapter To import known or assumed coordinates from Leica System 1200 DB X 1 From the Project menu select Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 The Browse For Folder dialog appears 2 Select the folder containing a Leica System 1200 DB X database and click OK a Each coordinate in the Leica System 1200 DB X database is added as a vertex with an ID and that position to the Known Coordinates ScanWorld 309 Index Import Customizations Window Menu Action Usage Navi
229. e Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Reference Plane Executes command The Align View to Active Plane command orients the ModelSpace viewer to a top down view of the active Reference Plane and centers the Reference Plane axes relative to the window borders 170 Index Alignment and Section Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Alignment and Section displays submenu commands used to generate and manage alignments and sections The following commands and dialogs are available from the Alignment and Section submenu Create Alignment Append to Alignment Switch Alignment Start End Create Sections Create Sections from Picks Sections Manager Set Active Alignment Reset Active Alignment For more information about alignments and sections see the Sections Manager chapter All in Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Slice Action Executes command Usage The All in Selection command cuts each selected object s by any intersecting object that is selected To slice all selected objects at their intersections 1 Multi select the objects that you want to cut 2 From the Create Object menu point to Slice and then select All in Selection All selected objects are cut at their intersections Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Executes command Usage The Angle command calculates the angle between the centerlines and or plane
230. e a To search for the low point within the current search range select Low Point a To increase decrease the search range an invisible sphere around the pick point use the Search Range slider or enter a value directly To reset the search using the current high low point as the center of the search range click Pick Point a To create a vertex at the current high low point click Create Vertex Window ModelSpace Menu Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Fit Edge dialog is used to generate polylines describing a swept edge best fit to a point cloud 291 Index Fit Edge Dialog Sano XF K VSTO d UU NO 038 Y Y Mit 0 144 m y Min Step Size 0 008 m ES Fit Cancel L A Open a saved template B Save the current template to a file C Enter View Mode D Enter Seek Mode E Enter Drawing Mode F Enter Nodal Points Mode G Add nodal points to each vertex in the current template H Clear the current template and all nodal points 292 J Index Adjust the radius of the circle drawn to show the scale of the edge Adjust the minimum interval between consecutive samples along the edge K Fit the template To fit an edge 1 0O On Select a point cloud along which you want to fit an edge For improved performance first subselect or segment the points around the curb from the rest of the point cloud From the Create Object menu select Fit Edge The
231. e Your image is saved Sphere Target Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Fit to Cloud Action Executes command Usage The Sphere Target command fits a 6 diameter sphere target to the selected point cloud When the sphere target is created it is added automatically to the ControlSpace as well To fit a sphere target 1 Pick the point cloud near the center of the area to which you want to fit a sphere target a tis assumed that the pick is on the surface of the target a Itis not necessary to segment the point cloud prior to fitting 442 Index 2 From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud and then select Sphere Target A sphere is fit to the spherical target Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000 Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Stakeout command expands the Stakeout tab in the Scanner Control Panel The Stakeout procedure requires Field Setup to first be applied to establish the scanner s coordinate system The Stakeout procedure is optimally executed with at least two personnel one person to operate the scanner and one person to set up and move the target until it is over the stakeout point Stakeout Tab Options METHOD Displays the current method used to determine the position of a specified point ORTHOGONAL FROM STATION Select a known coordinate in the Target ID field This known coordinate is the stakeout point MANUAL POLAR Enter the Azimuth
232. e Min and Max offsets 6 Use the slider to interactively adjust the offsets at which you want to divide the point cloud a Pick one point on the cloud before invoking this command to automatically establish the lower bound based on the distance to that pick point from the plane a Shift Pick two points on the cloud before invoking this command to automatically establish the lower and upper bounds based on the distance to those pick points from the plane 7 Click Reset to reinitialize this dialog based on any changes to the selection or pick points 8 Click Segment The points within the indicated offsets of the indicated plane are now a separate point cloud that can be selected independently Optionally these points are also segmented at regular intervals 228 Index Cut Near Ref Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Opens dialog Usage The Cut Near Ref Plane dialog is used to segment a point cloud into one cloud that contains points near the active Reference Plane and another cloud that contains all other points For an overview of the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To segment point clouds near the Reference Plane 1 Position the active Reference Plane and then select the point cloud s that you want to segment 2 From the Create Object menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut Near Ref Plane The Cut Near Ref Plane dialog appears
233. e Selected Objects Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Executes command Usage The Randomize Colors of Visible Objects command assigns random colors to all visible or selected objects n If any objects are selected this command changes from Visible to Selected objects and affects only those selected objects This command is useful when there is a large number of similarly colored objects that you need to quickly distinguish from each other Rectangle Fence Mode Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Rectangle Fence Mode command enters Rectangle Fence mode and selects the Rectangle Fence mode cursor For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter 381 Index To draw a rectangular fence 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Rectangle Fence Mode The Rectangular Fence cursor appears 2 Drag the cursor around the area that you want to fence a The newly drawn fence can adjusted by dragging its sides or vertices with the Rectangular Fence cursor a To clear the newly drawn fence select Clear from the Fence submenu Rectangular Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Set Fence Action Executes command Usage Pointing to Rectangular displays submenu commands used to select a preset rectangular fence size The following preset panoramic fences are available from the Rectangular
234. e Check Re Level HDS6000 dialog appears The TiltL and TiltR values indicate the degree of inclination from horizontal When both are 0 the ScanStation ScanStation 2 is perfectly level As long as the TiltL and TiltR are IN RANGE the HDS6000 can sense if the scanner inclination changes When the Tilt Sensor Status is OUT OF RANGE only the Cancel button is enabled If the tilt sensor state changes significantly e g a large amount of drift manual adjustment of the tribrach or out of range for data integrity the current ScanWorld is automatically advanced to the next ScanWorld You may re select the previous ScanWorld for additional work but be sure that the data are consistent Check Re Level ScanStation Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 Menu Scanner Action Opens dialog Usage The Check Re Level ScanStation command opens the Check Re Level ScanStation dialog which displays the angular tilt of the scanner To check or re level the scanner 1 From the Scanner menu select Check Re Level ScanStation The Check Re Level ScanStation dialog appears The TiltL and TiltR values indicate the degree of inclination from horizontal When both are 0 the ScanStation ScanStation 2 is perfectly level As long as the TiltL and TiltR are IN RANGE the ScanStation ScanStation 2 will compensate for the scanner s tilt When the Dual Axis Compensator Status is OUT OF RANGE only the Cancel button is enabled
235. e Constraint viewer windows are used to view and select the objects to add a manual constraint and to verify existing constraints View Object As Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Opens dialog Usage The View Object As command opens the View As tab of the View Properties dialog which is used to set various viewing and rendering properties Dialog Options APPLY TO Select the class of object to which you want to apply changes Each class of object has its own set of editable properties 467 Index RESET Click this button to reset the view as properties for the selected class COLOR MAP POINT CLOUDS AND MESH OBJECTS ONLY Click this button to invoke the Color Map Parameters dialog See Edit Color Map in the Commands chapter APPLY Click this button to apply any changes to the view as properties for the selected class View As Options Choose one from the list of available options The list varies depending on the object class selected in the Apply To field LOD FULL RANGE When selected the full set of low medium and high resolution level of detail LOD is displayed LOD HIGHEST COMPLEXITY When selected only high resolution LOD is displayed for maximum rendering detail LOD LOWEST COMPLEXITY When selected only low resolution LOD is displayed for faster rendering WIREFRAME MESH OBJECTS ONLY When selected mesh objects are displayed in wireframe mode rather than as a solid PER
236. e Modeling chapter When multiple point clouds are selected the Multiple Point Cloud Style setting in the Fitting tab of the Edit Preferences dialog determines the results If Fit Single Object default is selected the clouds are first merged and then a single object is fit to the resulting merged point cloud If Fit Multiple Objectsis selected an object is fit to each cloud individually From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud and then select the type of object you want to fit After some computation the object appears If the point cloud varies too much from the shape of the object you are trying to create see the Fit Tolerances area of the Object Preferences entry in this chapter a Fit Quality warning message appears and gives you an option to keep or cancel the fit In this case it may help to further refine the point cloud see the Point Cloud Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter and retry the fit Each object has a set of editable constraints see the Fit Constraints area of the Object Preferences entry in this chapter When used these constraints define various attributes of the fit object If the shape being fit is a corner the result is three patches with a vertex at their common intersection When using the Corner command it is not necessary to segment and fit the three planes individually If the shape being fit is a patch the Adjust Patch Boundary appears Use the slider to adjust the patch s polygonal boun
237. e To set the focal point at a selected point use the Seek mode e To cancel setting the limit box with the cursor click the right mouse button at any time Set Limit Box by Fencing Window ModelSpace Registration Menu ModelSpace View Registration Viewers Action Executes command Usage The Set Limit Box by Fencing command lets the user drag the rectangular fence to interactively define the extents of the limit box anywhere in the window The 420 Index center of the limit box is determined automatically in 3D The limit box is aligned to the current viewpoint e If the center of the fence falls over an object or cloud point the center of the limit box is set to that coordinate and the limit box is a cube Otherwise the limit box s depth is set to contain the objects within the fence e To cancel setting the limit box with the fence click the right mouse button while dragging the fence Set Object Visibility Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Object Visibility command opens the Selectable Visible tab of the View Properties dialog which is used to set the visible and selectable properties for classes of objects To make a class of objects visible select the check box in the Visible column next to the object type To make a class of objects selectable select the check box in the Selectable column next to the object type Settings in the Selectable Visible tab inter
238. e Views use the Save View As dialog Note The View must be saved at least once before changes to the View are made persistent and before the View is available to other users e Torestore saved ModelSpace Views use the Switch to Views dialog or open them from the Navigator window Orthographic Perspective Views A ModelSpace can be toggled between othrographic and perspective projection by clicking the Orthographic or Perspective icons or by selecting the Orthographic Perspective command in the Viewpoint menu a In orthographic projection parallel lines remain parallel though perceived angles may change It may be difficult to determine relative depth but this view is often preferred by architects and engineers in top down or side views The real world however is viewed in perspective a In perspective projection parallel lines may converge and relative depth may be easier to visualize 85 Animation Coordinate System When a ModelSpace is contained by a ScanWorld the default coordinate system is set to that of the ScanWorld After changing the active coordinate system in the ModelSpace View the default coordinate system can be restored by selecting the Default coordinate system in the User Coordinate Systems dialog see the Save Edit Coordinate Systems entry in the Commands chapter When working with larger and more complex ModelSpaces it can be helpful to define and save multiple coordinate systems for navigating and analy
239. e are no vertically overlapping faces TIN verification can only be performed on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is currently viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh command Vertex From Intersections Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Intersections Action Executes command Usage The Vertex command creates a vertex at the planar or linear intersection of either three selected planar objects or two linear objects To create a vertex at the intersection of objects 1 Select three planar objects or two linear objects a Objects such as cylinders that define a centerline are considered linear 2 From the From Intersections submenu select Vertex The vertex is created When creating a vertex at the intersection of three planes Even if the selected objects are not physically touching the vertex is created at the planar intersections of the selected objects a When creating a vertex at the intersection of lines If the lines do not intersect the vertex is placed at the midpoint of the closest approach of the linear objects 464 Index Vertex From Pick Points Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Pick Points Action Executes command Usage The Vertex command creates a vertex at a picked point To create a vertex at a picked point 1 Pick one or more points 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and then select Verte
240. e in front of the scanner Note Itis possible for the external camera in the 2500 to drift out of calibration over time If issues with the calibration are noted the camera should be recalibrated Cancel Drawing Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Cancel Drawing command discards the current 2D line drawing For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter Cancel Scan Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Cancel Scan command ends the current scan operation Any points collected before the scan s cancellation are inserted into the ScanWorld and destination ModelSpace and made available for modeling Center on Fence Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control 187 Index Action Executes command Usage The Center on Fence command centers the viewpoint on the current fence Centerline Length Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Executes command Usage The Centerline Length command calculates and displays the length of the centerline of the selected object s To measure centerlines 1 Select the object s you want to measure 2 From the Tools menu point to Measure and then select Centerline Length The measurement is displayed in the Output Box Check Calibration Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Check Calibration command is used to s
241. e intersects objects and meshes 1 Position the Cutplane to intersect the objects or meshes from which you want polylines 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Cutplane and then select Create Lines from Cuts Polylines are created where the active Cutplane intersects objects or meshes Create Mesh Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Create Mesh command creates a mesh object from the selected point clouds polylines vertices or meshes Mesh objects created using this command can be modified using commands in the Tools Mesh submenu For information on mesh editing see the Meshes section in the Modeling chapter or any of the Mesh submenu option commands The number of points used when creating a mesh from a point cloud is set via the Computation Create TIN Max Points setting in the Point Cloud tab of the Edit Preferences dialog To create a mesh object 1 Select the point clouds polylines vertices or meshes to be used for creating the new mesh object 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Create Mesh The Meshing Style dialog appears 213 Index 3 Select the type of mesh object you wish to create a Select Basic Meshing to create a basic mesh consisting of triangles drawn by using trios of adjacent points as triangle vertices Select Complex Meshing to create a mesh consisting of triangles drawn by using trios of adjacent points that are likely to lie in th
242. e into the Range field Window Menu Action Usage Navigator Create Executes command The Project command creates a new project folder in the selected location Project folders can be created in a database within another project folder or in a ScanWorld 372 Index To create a new project 1 Inthe Navigator window select the folder into which you want to add a new project 2 From the Create menu select Project The project is created Project Polyline to TIN Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Polylines Tools Mesh Breaklines Action Executes command Usage The Project Polyline to TIN command wraps a polyline onto a TIN object creating edges in the mesh based on the projection of the polyline vertically onto the mesh although the polyline itself is unchanged the edges are then stretched vertically to conform to the polyline s shape n If you select the Project Polyline to TIN command from the Breaklines submenu the polyline is converted to a breakline on the mesh If you select this command from the Polylines submenu the polyline will only be projected onto the mesh and the resulting line will be merely a geometric object Polylines are projected along the up direction of the current coordinate system The mesh onto which you are projecting a polyline must be qualified to be a TIN See the Verify TIN command To project a polyline onto a TIN 1 Multi select a polyline and the T
243. e lees rei ce sete on aera ec ke eet a deecd e te eee a ekent hs deed E 414 DOMVElS oeiee naes she e dee tide asteat deer nenasbek seid ans eat AET ta Beera Aere REAR Eea T eee nereteen ee 414 SetiActivo Al Mya a ee dd da adios 415 Set as Default Cloud iciociconioiic ii ti ta dica 415 Set Atmospheric Correction cccceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeceaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeees 416 Set Datum To Pick ROIs esses iia 416 Set Distance to Next VertOX ooocooooncccccoccccconononnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 416 Set from Active Ref Plane Cutplane oocococonnccccnonnccccnncnnnnnnnannncnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 417 Sel Fom PONS ersari a aE E sored tec dseesteudbtata careers tac sored teegdea that ebiadideesedataaaernstadeen 417 Set from Reference Plane ccececeeeeeceeeeeee A N E A A A tees 418 Set from Selection ccoo aca 418 SO opacidad td 419 Set HaltSpace at Picks rates 419 Set HOME Scan Word saori inc tt da 420 Set Limit Box by GUISO IA ok AA cle ee 420 Set Limit Box by Fencing siii Acc ia 420 Set Object Visibilty rn arian i ae oaiae an ara Te aee E a E A A SAE Oaa aia 421 DOL OMSET e A E AA EE 421 Set on Object Cutplane h ae ea atean as enr IAEE seaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeesaaaeeeeaaaa ees 422 Set on Object Reference Plane cccccececceeeeceeeee eee caeeeeaeeeeeaeeesaeeesaeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeesaes 422 O paedergd ied abe ETE 422 Det P
244. e map in the Texture Map Browser and click the Align toolbar button The 3D viewpoint should change to closely match the image Displaying a Texture Map Once a texture mapping has been computed the texture map is considered valid and can be used to color the point cloud or mesh 1 Enable texture mapping in the ModelSpace View by toggling ON the View Global Texture Map command 2 Select one point cloud or mesh In the Texture Map Browser select the texture map and toggle its Use checkbox ON 4 Use Edit Color Map or Edit Global Color Map to select the Image Texture Map mode Alternately select the Edit Object Appearance Apply Color Map Image Texture Map command 5 When a single cloud or mesh has multiplem enabled texture maps the texture maps may overlap Where two texture maps overlap the texture map that appears lower in the Texture Map Browsers list will be covered by the other texture map To change the order of the texture maps click the Raise and Lower toolbar buttons in the Texture Map Browser oo Managing Texture Maps Copy Paste Texture maps can be copy pasted between objects Creating a texture map for one object and then copying it to other objects can be an efficient way of propagating a texture map among different scans taken from the same position 1 Select one or more point cloud or mesh with at least one texture map 2 Inthe Texture Map Browser select one or more texture map and click the Copy
245. e re defined as desired in the Object Properties dialog see the Edit Properties entry in the Commands chapter a To select a triangle click on the desired triangle Picking triangles while holding the SHIFT key allows you to select multiple triangles If the selected triangle is adjacent to a hole in the mesh the hole is selected as well For operations that require selection of a vertex or a triangle edge in a mesh object the vertex edge closest to your pick on the mesh will be selected and used Using a Mesh to Create Other Objects Once a mesh is created it can be used for creating other objects Contours are drawn using a mesh as a basis the mesh can be either a mesh object or a point cloud viewed as a mesh For detailed instructions on creating contours see the Create entry in the Commands chapter In addition to contour lines you can use the Extract Cloud from Selection command to create a new point cloud containing the vertices in a mesh object The resulting point cloud is a newcloud it is not a retrieval of the original cloud s used in the creation of the mesh Note To retrieve the original point cloud from which a mesh object was created you can use the ScanWorld Explorer to make the points visible or you can use the Insert Copy of Object s Points command Using Cutplanes The Cutplane is a 3D plane with the primary function of cutting through objects in a ModelSpace to produce a 2D cross section There may be m
246. e reliable Optimize Cloud Alignment results The Optimize Cloud Alignment command can fail if the picked points do not provide good correspondences When picking the minimum of three points use the following guidelines a Pick points that are easily identified Good choices include corners intensity markings such as a painted sign on a wall the top of a pole and where a pole enters the ground Bad choices include the middle of a flat wall and a smoothly curving surface without an identifiable feature a Pick points that match the pick points in the other ScanWorld as closely as possible We recommend that your pick points in one cloud match their corresponding pick points in the other cloud within four inches which is the default Cloud Reg Max Search Distance You may increase this setting see the Registrationtab of the Preferences entry in the Commands chapter but doing so may decrease the speed and reliability of the Optimize Cloud Alignment command Avoid geometrically symmetric picks The three points should not form a symmetric shape such as a line equilateral triangle or isosceles triangle In these cases the initial alignment may rotate and still match the three points producing unexpected results In this case add a geometrically suitable fourth point to eliminate the symmetry a Spatially distribute the picks over a large volume Pick three or more points that form as large a triangle as possible Look at the entire are
247. e right of the Database Name field 6 Click OK The database is created Pon gl 230 Index To remove a database When a database is removed the database is removed from the list of databases available on the server however the database file is not deleted and may be restored using the steps to add a database above From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears From the list of databases select the database that you want to remove and then click Remove The database is removed To close the Configure Databases dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close To destroy a database When a database is destroyed the database is removed and its file is permanently deleted and cannot be recovered from within Cyclone From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears From the list of databases select the database that you want to destroy and then click Destroy The database is deleted To close the Configure Databases dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close To toggle database visibility 1 From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databasesdialog appears To toggle visibility select deselect the box below the Visibility icon next to the desired database To close the Configure Databases dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close To compact a database PON gt gl Select the serv
248. e same plane Select TIN Meshing to create a mesh wherein no two vertices share the same horizontal coordinates the current coordinate system determines the up direction for a TIN mesh Note Basic Meshing and Complex Meshing cannot be done with more than one point cloud a When there are multiple selections in Step 1 only the TIN Meshing option is available Basic Meshing and Complex Meshing can only be used with a single point cloud selection 4 Click OK The mesh object is created a Click Cancel to abort the command a To make the point cloud visible again use the ScanWorld Explorer See the ScanWorld Explorer entry in this chapter for more information Create ModelSpace Window Registration Menu Registration Action Executes command Usage The Create ModelSpace command creates a ModelSpace from the Registered ScanWorld created from a registered ScanWorld For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter The data contained in the resulting ModelSpace depends on which component ModelSpaces are selected in the ModelSpacestab when the Create ModelSpace command is executed To create a ModelSpace from a successful registration 1 Fromthe ModelSpacestab select the ModelSpaces whose data you want included in the new ModelSpace a f no ModelSpace is selected the resulting ModelSpace contains only the raw scan data from all of the component ScanWorlds 2 From
249. e specified overrides any insulation thickness values set in Object Preferences see the Object Preferences entry in this chapter B The current Specification used to place restrictions during piping design in Cyclone this is simply a text field C The current Line Identifier used to identify a particular pipe run D The current Symbol Key for each object type E Activate to display the Spec LinelD and SKEY associated with newly created objects F Activate to copy the Spec LinelD and SKEY from the last selected object into this dialog The SKEY copied is appropriate to the type of object selected G Sets the Spec LinelD and SKEY for the selected objects H Closes the dialog and exits Piping mode To apply piping annotations 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Piping and then select Piping Mode The Piping Mode dialog appears While the Piping Mode dialog is open the current Spec LinelD and appropriate SKEY is assigned to piping components created via the Fit to Cloud Region Grow Insert Object and Piping Connectors commands For example when an elbow is created using the Piping Connectors Elbow Connectors command it is assigned the current Spec and LinelD as well as the elbow SKEY a Also while the Piping Mode dialog is open connectivity is automatically established when inserting a piping component via a pick point on another piping component subject to the connection rules see the Connect Piping entry in
250. e to MicroStation it may be that the objects are not supported by COE and they may have not have been translated If you checked the Create LOG option in the COEIN COEOUT Options dialog recommended you can check the LOG file to confirm that this is the cause If you are translating objects from MicroStation to Cyclone double the check the following e Did you select the correct Export Objects option All Visible Selected in the COEOUT Options dialog e f you intended to export the entire DGN file contents did you deselect all objects before proceeding e lf you intended to export only visible objects did you have the correct levels turned on e lf you intended to export only selected objects were all the desired objects selected e Did you check the Unsupported Objects Smartsolid use wire Unknown surface use wire options in the COEOUT Options dialog THE APPEARANCE OF OBJECTS COLOR IS NOT AS DEFINED IN THE SOURCE ENVIRONMENT Objects translated via COE files are managed in layers Each layer has its own appearance override assigned color which is imported as level symbology in MicroStation OBJECT PRECISION IS INADEQUATE Check the resolution parameters in the Design File Settings dialog Settings Design File If the resolution parameters are set too low you will have decreased drawing precision though you will have more design space Adjust these parameters to achieve the desired results COE CONTENTS
251. e used to compute the vertical distance at each crossing e Additionally with 2 points picked on each of the approach and departure sides of the overhead structure the lines defined by each successive pair of picks enclose the area in which the minimum vertical clearance is measured 191 Index Area used for vertical distance at each crossing To measure vertical clearances 1 Shift Pick two points on your lower surface e g a road surface Pick the points such that the second pick point indicates the forward direction of travel from the first pick point Shift Pick additional pairs of points wherever a vertical clearance is to be measured e g on the edge of pavement or along a lane stripe Each pair should be roughly parallel to the line described by the first two pick points Each additional pair should be to the right of the previous pairs the first pair of pick points should be on the left most side For purposes of this topic the line described by each pair of pick points on the lower surface is a lane line Shift Pick two points on your upper surface e g an overpass or tunnel Pick the points such that the two pick points are close to the edge of the upper surface 192 ol E 10 Index Optional Shift Pick an additional pair of points on the opposite end of the upper surface The edges indicated on the upper surface are referred to as Approach and Departure The Approach is the first edge encountered
252. ecimal places for the display of unitless measurements such as direction vectors STATION PLUS DIGITS Sets the format used for station notation 361 Index Measurements Tab Settings Measurement settings allow you to adjust the display of measurements made in the ModelSpace window BODY COLOR Use the color picker to select the color to be used for the display of measurement lines LABEL COLOR Use the color picker to select the color to be used for the display of measurements FONT NAME Type the name of the font you want to use to display measurements The font must be currently installed on your workstation FONT SIZE Enter a value for the font size used to display measurements CALLOUT LINE LENGTH Enter a value for the length of callout lines CALLOUT LINE ANGLE Enter a value for the angle of callout lines TIN VOLUME FILL COLOR Use the color picker to specify the color of the TIN Volume Fill lines in the ModelSpace View TIN VOLUME CUT COLOR Use the color picker to specify the color of the TIN Volume Cut lines in the ModelSpace View Registration Tab Settings AUTO ADD CONSTRAINT TOLERANCE Enter a value between 0 0001 meter and 1 0 meter for the tolerance used for the Auto Add Constraint function This is the maximum distance used when considering which objects are geometrically close to each other MAX ITERATIONS Enter a value between 1 and 1000 for the maximum number of iterations performed by registratio
253. ecomes a text annotation Select this check box to mark the target for attempted acquisition If cleared Cyclone ignores the potential target during target acquisition Displays the ongoing status of target acquisition for each target ending with the final result of the attempted acquisition Type the maximum number of target candidates to be found by Cyclone when either the Search HDS Targets from Selected Cloud or Search Spheres from Selected Cloud commands are selected Begins the acquisition process of selected targets Stops the acquisition process of selected targets To acquire targets from picks a The process of acquiring targets is usually done after an initial scan of the scene which provides a general reference as to the location of targets in the scene 1 From the Project menu in the Scan Control window select Open ModelSpace Viewer or click the Open Viewer button on the right side of the Scan Control window A new ModelSpace viewer for the incoming scan data opens In order to make targets stand out from the scene make sure color mapping is turned ON See the View Object As entry in this chapter 2 In the ModelSpace window multi select the target locations Each pick should be within two 142 Index inches of the actual location If you have both HDS Targets and spheres in your scan select all the potential HDS Targets first and proceed through step 4 then select all the sphere targets and repeat steps 2 4
254. ect Origin to use the UCS origin Select Custom to manually enter a coordinate 4 Select Interval to enter the interval at which the cloud will be regularly segmented within the Min and Max distances 5 Use the slider to interactively adjust the distances at which you want to divide the point cloud a Pick one point on the cloud before invoking this command to automatically establish the lower bound based on the distance to that pick point from the central point a Shift Pick two points on the cloud before invoking this command to automatically establish the lower and upper bounds based on the distance to those pick points from the central point 6 Click Reset to reinitialize this dialog based on any changes to the selection or pick points 7 Click Segment The points within the indicated distance of the indicated point are now a separate point cloud that can be selected independently Optionally these points are also segmented at regular intervals 226 Index Cut by Fence Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Executes command Usage The Cut by Fence command segments the selected point cloud s into two subsets For an overview of the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To create a new segment of a point cloud 1 Draw a fence around the points that you want to segment See the Creating a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter 2 From the Create Object
255. ect another drawing command or select Cancel Drawing from the Drawing submenu e To remove a shape that you have just created select Undo from the Edit menu or select the object and then select Delete from the Edit menu When Snap to Grid is ON vertices jump to the next increment on the Reference Plane s grid as you plot them press and hold ALT to snap at angular intervals When OFF vertices are 90 Animation plotted moved independently of grid settings Inserting Vertices For polygons and polylines being drawn a new vertex can be inserted by holding the ALT key and clicking on an existing line segment within the active drawing Converting Drawings A drawing may be converted into another shape if appropriate For example a line may be converted into a polyline into an arc with the first two vertices defined etc An arc may be converted into a circle or ellipse but not into a line unless only one or two of its vertices have been plotted To convert a drawing into another type select the new type of drawing If conversion from the previous type of drawing into the new type of drawing is supported the Convert button is available Multiple Drawings More than one drawing can be in progress To begin drawing another shape select another drawing command of the same or different type If you have plotted at least one vertex the Keep button is available Only one drawing can be active To resume drawing another dr
256. ect insertion parameters can also be set via standard parts tables To insert objects from a parts table First enable Catalog Parts Table and make Table and Item selections within the Object Preferences dialog different tables and parts can be selected at the time of insertion Then toggle the Use Parts Table command ON from the Create Object menu Object Insertion Rules a The first object inserted into an empty scene is inserted at 0 O 0 a If there is no selected object and no pick point when an object is inserted the size and alignment of the new object are defined in the Creation Initial Values area of the Object Preferences dialog The object is located in front of the current view at the focal point When an existing object is picked the picked object provides a plane direction and or vertex for the inserted object to base its initial position orientation and dimensions For example a patch readily defines a plane a direction plane normal and a point origin The rules can be sophisticated e g when inserting an object on a cylinder picking near the end point inserts the object aligned with the cylinder s axis but picking away from the end point inserts the object perpendicular to the cylinder s surface at the picked point Exception cameras are always inserted at the current viewpoint regardless of picks a When inserting a series of objects the previous object provides a plane direction and or vertex for the in
257. ect the object that you want to cap a From the Edit Object menu point to End Caps and then select Add Both Semi Elliptical 146 Index Heads The caps appear To add a semi elliptical head to only one end see the Add Semi Elliptical Head Closest to Pick entry in this chapter To remove caps see the Remove Cap Closest to Picks entry or the Remove Both Caps entry in this chapter Add Cloud Constraint Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Add Cloud Constraint command creates a constraint between two ScanWorlds from two selected point clouds or meshes For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter You can create Cloud Constraints using Add Cloud Constraint without picking initial pick hints for the two following cases If you have registered your ScanWorlds with targets you are able to add cloud constraints to tighten the registration in areas where that have overlapping scan clouds but targets are not available If you have set the ScanWorld Default Coordinate system to a shared or global coordinate system for both ScanWorlds To add a cloud constraint 1 From the ModelSpacestab of the Registration window load both of the ModelSpaces that contain the objects you want to constrain To load a ModelSpace In the upper pane select the ModelSpace you want to view and then go to the ScanWorld menu and selec
258. ected layer License Manager Window Navigator Menu Help Action Opens dialog Usage This License Manager dialog is used to configure floating licenses for the current client Cyclone License Manager Dialog License UL Availa Cyclone MODEL Yes Yes Cyclone SURVEY Yes Yes Oyclone SCAN Yes Yes Cyclone REGISTER Yes Yes Cyclone SERVER Yes Yes Cyclone MODEL Upgradedto Yes Yes Cyclone SCAN Upgradedta Yes Yes Oyclone MANAGE Yes Yes BO Cyclone VIEWER JT Don t ask me again Check Usage Cancel A List of known licenses 318 Index B Cyclone will attempt to acquire the selected licenses when launched regardless of the Use selections or licenses available C Displays the availability of each license Yes means that there is currently a valid license available No means that the license is either invalid or in use by some other client D Licenses marked as Yes are floating licenses obtained from the floating license server No means that the license was acquired as a node locked non floating license N A means that the license could not be acquired so it is unknown if the license is floating or not E Select to open the next Cyclone session with the Cyclone Viewer only acquires no licenses F Displays a list of current users for the selected licenses G When selected the License Manager does not automatically appear when a new floating license is available Lighting
259. ected steel shape is fit directly to the selected cloud a 10 enable fit constraints fit tolerances or parts tables From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud Options and toggle Show Table Matches and or Check Fit Tolerances ON 2 Using one of the methods described below select one two or three points on the cloud of points you want to use to fit a steel section 446 Index All picks must be on major faces the tops and bottoms of flanges and the sides of webs Picks should not be on the edges of flanges or the top or bottom of webs or on the exposed cross section Method 1 Pick a point anywhere on the interior not near the edge of a face Method 2 Pick two points anywhere on the interior not near the edge of two perpendicular faces Method 3 Pick two points on the same face widely spaced and approximately along the steel section s axis Method 4 Pick three points on the same face The first two points should be picked as in Method 2 above and the third point can be anywhere on the same face provided that it is not in a line with the first two picks Note For tee shapes whose orientation is ambiguous the first pick is assumed to be on the web When multiple point clouds are selected the Multiple Point Cloud Style setting in the Fitting tab of the Edit Preferences dialog determines the results If Fit Single Object default is selected the clouds are first merged and then a single object is fit to the re
260. ects are selected the objects must be geometrically connected in a single unbroken sequence The object picked last provides the end point at which the starting station is assigned Alignments may be horizontal skewed or a mixture of both but may not be vertical From the Toolsmenu point to Alignment and Section and then select Create Alignment The Create Alignment dialog appears Enter a Start Station and click OK The alignment object is created Station numbers increase with the linear distance traveled along the alignment from the starting station 210 Index Create and Open ModelSpace Window Registration Menu Registration Action Executes command Usage The Create and Open ModelSpace command creates and opens a ModelSpace from the registered ScanWorld created from a successful registration The Create and Open ModelSpace command behaves identically to the Create ModelSpace command The data contained in the resulting ModelSpace depends on which component ModelSpaces are selected in the ModelSpaces tab when the Create ModelSpace command is executed For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter Create and Open ModelSpace View Window Navigator Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Create and Open ModelSpace View command creates and opens a ModelSpace View for the selected ModelSpace Views created using this command are stored in
261. ed While it can be very helpful for a number of reasons having a valid image in the Scan Control window is not required for targeting the scanner or for actual scanning Note that the colors in the acquired image are mapped to the point cloud upon creation so it is necessary to acquire an image prior to scanning in order have this visualization option 27 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 Targeting With a valid image in the Scan Control window you can decide which areas of the scene are of interest and how densely they should be sampled e To target the entire scene in the Scan Control window select Target All from the Scanner Control menu The scan target appears in the Scan Control window e To target only a portion of the scene create a target region by dragging one of the Target cursors over the area in which you are interested e A number of preset target modes can be selected from the Presets dropdown The horizontal and vertical settings for the selected mode are displayed in the fields below When you enter targeting settings manually the setting automatically changes to Custom e To quickly and roughly target an area for image acquisition and subsequent scanning click the QuickScan button The QuickScan dialog prompts you to manually aim the scanner to establish left and right limits for scanning and image acquisition You should aim the scanner by holding the plastic side covers avoid touching the
262. ed axis a To align to the XYZ axes the object will take the path of the least rotation s to make the axes coincide 169 Index Align to Selection Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Viewpoint Executes command The Align to Selection command orients the ModelSpace viewpoint to be parallel to the axis of the selected object To align the viewpoint to the selected object 1 Select the object to whose axis you want to align the viewpoint 2 From the Viewpoint menu select Align to Selection The viewpoint is moved the shortest possible distance in order to be parallel with the axis of the selected object If a point cloud is selected the viewpoint is oriented to match the orientation of the point cloud s scanner If a scanner object is selected the viewpoint is oriented to the view of the scanner when it took the scan For HDS3000 ScanStation and ScanStation 2 ScanWorlds this is a useful way to get to a photographic view of the scan data Align Vertices to Axes Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Drawing Toggles menu item ON OFF The Align Vertices to Axes command toggles the restriction of each vertex to be along the same X or Y axes as the previously plotted vertex After plotting the first vertex in a drawing the next vertex snaps to the same X or Y axis whichever is closer on the drawing plane as the previous vertex when Align Vertices to Axes is ON Align View to Active Plan
263. ed before global registration is performed 48 Registration Optimize Cloud Alignment Parameters In the Registration tab of the Preferences dialog the Cloud Reg Subsampling Percentage parameter specifies a speed versus accuracy trade off in the performance of the Optimize Cloud Alignment command The default is 3 which is effective and efficient for typical scan cloud sizes i e a point cloud with one million points In general a value of 100 may give results up to two times as accurate as a value of 3 but may take approximately ten times as long The recommended process is to 1 Align all cloud constraints using the default 3 parameter and check that global registration gives a satisfactory result 2 If you then desire more accuracy change the parameter to 100 or other value Select all the cloud constraints and then select the Optimize Cloud Alignment command Cloud Constraint Status In the Constraint List tab of the Registration window the Error Vector column for cloud constraints shows one of the three following values Create Sections Dialog Options NOT ALIGNED The Optimize Cloud Alignment command has not been run successfully on the cloud constraint ALIGNED The Optimize Cloud Alignment command has been executed satisfactorily and the cloud constraint constrains all six degrees of freedom between the two ScanWorlds ALIGNED UNDERCONSTRAINED The Optimize Cloud Alignment command has been executed s
264. ed for linear measurements IMPERIAL TYPES Select English or U S Survey English uses the factor of 25 4 millimeters inch while U S Survey uses 39 37 inches meter STATION NOTATION Toggle station notation ON OFF When this preference is ON and there is an active alignment alignment coordinates are displayed for pick points ALIGNMENT OFFSET NOTATION Select a style for horizontal offset notation when using station notation ANGULAR UNITS Select the type of unit used for angular measurements COORDINATE LABELS Select X Y Zor N E El Northing Easting Elevation coordinate labels for all dialogs menus and other occurrences of coordinate labels TEMPERATURE UNITS Select the unit used to display temperature measurements PRESSURE UNITS Select the type of unit used for pressure measurements Resolution Tab Settings Resolution settings allow you to adjust the resolution with which values are displayed throughout Cyclone by setting the number of decimal digits to be displayed For example with a Linear Units of meters setting the Decimal Digits Distance to 2 means that all distance measurements are displayed to a resolution with enough decimal places to represent one centimeter The Decimal Digits setting is also available for Area Volume Angle Temperature Pressure Time and Percentage Most resolution settings are seltexplanatory Those that are not are described below DECIMAL DIGITS UNITLESS Set the number of d
265. ed server 4 Click Close The server is created To remove a server 1 From the Configure menu select Servers The Configure Servers dialog appears 2 From the list of servers select the server that you want to remove and then click Remove The server is removed a To close the Configure Servers dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close To toggle server visibility 1 From the Configure menu select Servers The Configure Servers dialog appears a To toggle visibility select deselect the box below the Visibility icon next to the desired server a To close the Configure Servers dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close 414 Index Set Active Alignment Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Executes command Usage The Set Active Alignment command enables station notation on the selected point relative to the active alignment a Station notation values are only supported for alignments that lie completely in the horizontal plane a For more information about alignments and the sections process see the Sections Manager chapter Note Station Notation in Preferences must be set to On to display station notation To enable use of station notation for a selected alignment 1 Select an alignment a f you change the Up direction all station notations are relative to the new up direction except for existing measurements The alignment must be perpend
266. edges 38 Scanning with the HDS2500 Parallax Errors The HDS2500 laser scanner and internal camera do not share the same optical axis resulting in the phenomenon of parallax where the scene from the laser scanner s viewpoint is different from the scene from the camera s point of view The effects of parallax may manifest as a portion of the texture map that appears to be mapped incorrectly onto the points This may be more pronounced when there is a significant distance between foreground and background objects As the difference in distances increases the effects of parallax on the texture mapping increases Typically the background texture is projected onto a foreground object or vice versa depending on the arrangement of the objects in the scene e When there is a mismatch of texture map and points segment the point cloud into two pieces separating the points that are incorrectly mapped from the points that are correctly mapped Enable texture mapping only on the correctly mapped cloud Depending on the severity of the mismatch due to parallax this may or may not be necessary Advanced Use of Camera Calibration When Cyclone captures an image from the HDS2500 the image is stored in uncorrected form Images from a HDS2500 with a calibrated camera contain also the calibration parameters specific to that HDS2500 When the image is displayed distortion correction is automatically applied note that the Scan Control Show ModelSpace
267. ee the Field Setup ScanStation ScanStation 2 section in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 chapter or the Field Setup HDS6000 section in the Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 chapter The Field Setup procedure requires an enabled dual axis compensator ScanStation ScanStation 2 or enabled tilt sensor HDS6000 The scanner must be close to level Field Setup Tab Options METHOD Displays the current method used to determine the position and orientation of the scanner in a known or assumed coordinate system RESECTION Two or more targets with known or assumed coordinates are acquired to calculate the position and orientation of the scanner KNOWN BACKSIGHT A target at a known or assumed coordinate is acquired from a scanner position over a known or assumed coordinate to calculate the actual position of the scanner KNOWN AZIMUTH 3D POINT The direction to an arbitrary target or a pick point from a scanner position over a known or assumed coordinate is entered to calculate the actual orientation of the scanner KNOWN AZIMUTH AIM The azimuth of the direction towards which the user turns the scanner is entered to calculate the actual orientation of the scanner OPTIONS Displays a pop up menu with additional Field Setup operations RECHECK BACKSIGHT Re acquires the current backsight target to see if the scanner has drifted since the backsight was first acquired START TRAVERSE Cop
268. eeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeees 106 Texture Mapping carceris vied iene ieee ieee 108 The Texture Mapping Processa srani o pii e e EN E a EOE TSA S pE 108 Texture Mapping Hints and Tips ressursene E EE AEA EEEE 111 Texture Map Browser Dialog zsa idre aerieni ei Teat a Ea AATETTA a Aa 112 Text re Editor Dialog accio 113 Texture Editor Image Dialogi enie sE RENAE AARE AERAR EEEN RAEE 114 Texture Map Editor Options Dialog ccccooonccccnnnccccnnnncccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncrnnnnnncrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnns 114 Cyclone Object Exchange COE rrise nirii ieedit erian a Ea ATE EE T TAa 115 COB TOMAULOGAD inea a a a E indi N TRE 115 import Objects COSIN aranea tira 122 Explode Blocks COSXplOd8 occcoooonccccconococcconononcnonannncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnanannnns 122 Export ObjEctS COCOUL vii A fa 122 Table Of Contents COE or MictOStation ss1 cr3 feica E A id 123 OpenGL MOdES scssecsssrticoiascteceascets bose aa a Eaa a aA aa a A A AEn 137 OpenGL Modes Introduction iess a aa OEA E AEEA Eaa AEEA EE 137 Graphics mode CharacteristiCs 2 cccceceeecece cece ce estts ttr tt ttrt tten tt ntt nn trantran rtnn rran nnen nenn 137 Commana RETELENCE aora E AE R E T 139 20 Drawing ModE ici id 139 LONA id 139 ADOULCY CONE O A A at Oeil ately 139 Above Ref Plane Mesh Gerrinda r ti ved da dicas 140 ACQUITS Tar Gets ciar o id Da it 140 Activate Limit Box Manager aerei ea eaea EEE AE
269. eferences dialog From the Edit menu select Object Preferences The Object Preferences dialog appears From the Object Type list select the type of object with which you want to use auto picking Select the Automatically pick point on selection check box Make a selection from the drop down list which displays points that can be automatically picked for the selected object type 6 Click OK Auto picking is enabled for the selected object type a Fond Auto Update Window Registration Menu Registration Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Auto Update command toggles whether or not the Registration is recomputed after each change of a constraint or component ScanWorld AutoCAD Window ModelSpace Menu File Launch Action Executes command Usage The AutoCAD command launches the current ModelSpace View in AutoCADE2 using Cyclone Object Exchange COE 181 Index When this command is initiated objects in the current ModelSpace View are first transferred to a COE file which is then loaded into AutoCAD See COE for AutoCAD for information on working with COE files Before executing this command it is important to verify that AutoCAD and COE Data Transfer for AutoCAD are properly installed on your workstation To launch AutoCAD from a ModelSpace View 1 From the File menu point to Launch and then select AutoCAD You may be prompted to locate the AutoCAD executable ACAD EXE If this occurs na
270. egister After the constraints have been added the next step is to register the ScanWorlds using the Register command in the Registration menu The Registration command computes the optimal alignment transformations for each ScanWorld in the Registration so that all constrained objects are aligned as closely as possible Statistics for the successful Registration can be viewed using the Registration Diagnostics command in the Registration menu More constraints than are strictly required can be added and may improve results or be used to help check the registration i e if the extra constraints are disabled their errors are still computed they should have a low error under a good registration even if they were not used to compute the registration Adjusting Constraints Fine tuning a Registration for maximum accuracy is accomplished by reviewing and adjusting constraints After a successful registration the overall accuracy of the registration can be viewed from the Registration Diagnostics dialog where the error of each constraint is displayed in the Constraints tab of the Registration window The Error column displays the error for each constraint and can be used to sort constraints by error magnitude by clicking the column heading When a constraint is found with a larger than average error there are several possible courses of action First the constraint can be visually checked using the Show Constraints command which displays the
271. eing fit and then click OK Region Thickness defines a surface thickness outside of which points are excluded from the fit calculation Maximum Gap to Span defines a maximum distance between any two adjacent points included in the fit calculation Details displays the fitting error To region grow a smooth surface Select a point on the surface of the flat region of the point cloud that you want to segment Select a point near the center of the region When region growing multiple clouds may be selected as long as there is at least one pick point From the Create Object menu point to Region Grow and then select Smooth Surface The Region Grow Smooth Surface dialog appears Use the sliders to adjust the smooth surface parameters Region Thickness defines the smooth surface thickness outside of which points are not considered a part of the smooth surface Maximum Gap to Span defines the maximum distance that may exist between portions of the same smooth surface Details displays the number of points in the selected point cloud along with the number of points conforming to the parameters set in this dialog Click OK The point cloud is segmented When enabled the Limit Box can improve performance by reducing the amount of points processed only those visible points are used To region grow a pipe run 3 1 Pick a point on the first pipe in the run 2 Shift Pick the other pipes in the run in any order with one pick
272. either select a pre defined file format from the Format pull down list modify an existing file format or define a new format 304 Index Import ASCII File Format Dialog D Import ASCII File Format o i x Format Virtual Surveyor Default y Save As Fixed Width of columns 3 gt Delimited Space Other Comma fv Tab fv Semicolon Jv Merge consecutive delimiters Tex Qualifier Y As Point Cloud Options v Auto Preview Preview Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Rows to skip p lt Comment Marker Negative Value ee Unit of Measure Meters y a Create line seqments between pairs of vertices x Y Decimal Decimal FA Decimal A OG Format Fixed Width Delimited Click the Import icon to imports an ASCII rules file Click the Export icon to export a rules format to an external ASCII rules file afr Click the Delete icon to remove a previously saved rule from the Format list Displays previously created ASCII rules formats Click Save As to save the current settings as a format The newly saved format will be displayed in the Format drop down list box Select this check box to specify that the columns in the file to be imported have a fixed width clear this check box if delimiters are used to represent a column break Select Delimited and then complete the available options as appropriate You can s
273. el Point Cloud 03 Line individual zero length lines Annotation attached to object 37 Tag User Coordinate Systems 05 level 3 object Aux_coordinate From MicroStation to Cyclone Using COEOUT to translate objects to Cyclone is not as straightforward as the translation from Cyclone to MicroStation largely because MicroStation s advanced CAD capabilities allow users to create any number of unique objects which do not exist in Cyclone and thus cannot be translated by COEOUT However COEOUT can translate most standard objects to Cyclone In addition objects that were originally translated from Cyclone using COEIN are fully reversible whether the original COE file is referenced or not If the original COE file is referenced all non geometric parameters and Cyclone reserved parameters are kept intact The following table shows the translation protocol that COE uses when using COEOUT to translate objects back to Cyclone from MicroStation The Mapped column indicates whether the listed item can be mapped and to what extent by using the following codes Y fully mapped P mapping is possible but some complex objects are not supported F implementation may change in a future release 133 MicroStation Entity 02 03 04 05 06 07 12 14 15 Cell Header Line Line String Group Data Shape Text Node Complex Line String Complex Shape Ellipse Cyclone Object Exchange COE Map
274. elSpace View along with a number indicating the order in which the points were picked Drop down lists are available in each field in the dialog to choose the appropriate reference pick point In the Reference Point fields enter the coordinate for the reference point In the Azimuth Point field enter a value for the degrees to the azimuth point from the reference point In the Top Point and Bottom Point fields select the corresponding pick points from the drop down lists If known elevation points have been picked select the appropriate pick points from the drop down list in the Elevation Point 1 and 2 fields and then enter a value for the elevations 10 Click OK The new coordinates are applied and the horizontal and vertical axes are rotated Set from Reference Plane Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Executes command Usage The Set from Reference Plane command aligns the coordinate system of the ModelSpace to the active reference plane Set from Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Fence Action Executes command Usage The Set from Selection command uses the selected linear object such as an arc circle polyline polygon etc to define a data fence For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter 418 Index To create a fence from a linear object Select the linear object you wish to use to define a data fence Linear o
275. elect Select a ScanWorld The Select a ScanWorld dialog appears e You can create a new ScanWorld in the currently selected Project for your scan data by clicking Create and then selecting the created ScanWorld that appears 2 Navigate to an existing ScanWorld and then click OK Your destination ScanWorld is selected e When the scanner is not busy you can select a different destination ScanWorld for the next set of scan data Note that if the new destination ScanWorld is in another project you must first select that project via the Select a Project dialog 26 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 Preparing to Scan Once the destination Project and ScanWorld folders are chosen the next steps in a typical scanning process described below An alternate scanning method is described in the following QuickScan section Many of these steps are optional depending upon the requirements of your specific project 1 Capturing an Image of your scanner s field of view 2 Targeting within the scene to select areas of interest 3 Adjusting Scan Settings to specify the resolution probe the range of your scan set scan filters and compensate for conditions in the atmosphere that may affect the results of your scan 4 Entering Station Data to locate your scan data in a known or assumed coordinate system Dual Axis Compensator ScanStation ScanStation 2 The Leica ScanStation ScanStation 2 supports a dual axis co
276. elect one or more delimiters Type a Text 305 Index Qualifier default is quotation mark which parses as one item anything enclosed in it As Point Cloud Select As Point Cloud to import the coordinates in the file as points in a point cloud The reserved point cloud specific columns Red Green Blue Gray Intensity NormalX NormalY and NormalZ become available Options Click the Options button to customize the ranges used for color and intensity when importing as a point cloud of columns Type how many columns of data are in the file to be imported Rows to skip Type the number of rows to ignore beginning with row 1 such as header rows Comment Marker Type a comment marker When the marker entered into this field is encountered everything else after the indicator on that row is ignored not imported The default is a semi colon Negative Value Select the format used to specify negative values in the import file Unit of Measure Select the unit of measure used in the import file Create line segments Select this check box to tell Cyclone to draw lines between pairs of between pairs of vertices vertices which some users may use to aid in the registration process Auto Preview Select this check box to automatically update the contents of the preview window when settings are changed Click Preview to update the contents of the preview window Preview window Displays
277. elect the object s or group you want to edit From the File menu point to Launch and then select Copy Selection to New ModelSpace A new ModelSpace is created and a ModelSpace View containing the fenced objects is opened Edit the objects as desired To copy the edited objects back to the original ModelSpace see the Update Original ModelSpace entry in this chapter or close the launched ModelSpace viewer When finished editing close the ModelSpace The Closing ModelSpace Viewer dialog appears Select closing options for the copied ModelSpace and objects Select Merge into original ModelSpace to copy all objects that were either edited or created in the descendant ModelSpace back into the original ModelSpace Objects from the source ModelS pace that have not changed are not duplicated in the resulting merged ModelSpace Select Remove link from original ModelSpace to save the copied ModelSpace Select Delete after close to mark the current ModelSpace for deletion Click Close The copied ModelSpace is closed 206 Index Copy to ControlSpace Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Registration Action Executes command Usage The Copy to ControlSpace command adds the select object s to the designated ControlSpace s If there is are Registration specific ControlSpaces a dialog appears and allows you to choose the ControlSpace s to which the object is copied Note Many objects are added to the ControlSpace automatically such as
278. emits light within a cone from a 3D point The centerline of the cone determines the direction of the spot light source and the tip determines the origin The angle of the cone determines the spread of the spot light If there is a pick point on an object the object provides the location and in most cases the orientation for your spot light If there is no pick point the spot light is inserted at the current viewpoint By default the light does not dim with distance the fall off at the edge of the cone is immediate To customize spot light settings see the Edit Point Spot Lights command 7 For more information about lighting see the Lighting entry in the Modeling chapter Interfering Points Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Opens dialog Usage The Interfering Points dialog is used to highlight cloud points that are within a user specified distance of a selected object those points may be segmented from the rest of the point cloud To segment interfering points 1 From the Tools menu point to Measure and then select Interfering Points The Interfering Points dialog appears 2 Select the object and any nearby point clouds for which you want to indicate interferences 3 Enter a value in the Tolerance Value box or use the Interference Tolerance slider to interactively adjust the distance from the selected object within which points are highlighted The points within the specified tolerance are highli
279. en ModelSpace rsrcsdecars paea o a E eT EOE S E 211 Create and Open ModelSpace View ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeess 211 Greate Branch sis sc dovebec A A ate 211 Create Drawing ecc iii EEE NRS 212 Create Drawing from ODjeCt es ieaie riaan annee EERE ERRERA TAERE 212 Create Lines fom Cuts wv cessed eee E S AE E S E EA SS 213 Greate Mesh iiiictiescheccseedgnltede ciate dag cece ea NEARE ELECTA ESAN TEA OE E ENEE EA E a aaa 213 Greate ModelSpace vicio R A E 214 Create Objects with Random Colors ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeseeeeeaaeeeseeeesaes 215 Greate Pah oarre a aese nra aeta aAa ies 215 Create Path LOOp rocio til tacit ak den td N A 215 vi Table Of Contents Create RedlineS ici iii 215 Create ScanWorld Freeze Registration cc cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeees 216 EA pe A aO EAE tage ne dea ante esau gi pede sshd ve esau EROE does 217 Create Sections from PICKS ir cirai iarri e Ai da laias aiita A E Ba e eea 218 Greate Simulated Scanner iu 218 Cubic Spline coran o a a e r E feed E 219 QUVO A A ide 219 Customize HOKEY Sae steak ketene eae N Cee A A E det a 220 Customize Lookup Lists icono diese ruia tad dicas 221 Customize TOOIDAES vomita A A A 223 CD esa a E a EAE a a E es eet Aa EE 225 Cut by Distance from Point ccccccccceeece cece ce eeee cece ninian baaa darane kraniet daadaa nanii taataa ddaa
280. en point to Datum and select Point Distance The measurement is calculated and displayed in the Output dialog a Datum measurements cannot be saved However as long as the Output dialog remains enabled multiple subsequent measurements can be made and displayed a f multiple points are being measured the results are displayed in the order in which they were picked 356 Index Window Scan Control ScanStation 2 Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Pointing command expands the Pointing tab in the Scanner Control Panel Pointing lets you aim the scanner s laser at a specific point or in a specific direction The Pointing procedure supports several methods Depending on the method some controls cannot be changed Pointing Tab Options METHOD Displays the current method used to aim the scanner s laser ORTHOGONAL FROM STATION Select a known coordinate in the Target ID field This known coordinate is the starting point at which to aim the laser This method requires Field Setup to first be applied to establish the scanner s coordinate system MANUAL POLAR Enter the Azimuth and Distance to the point at which to aim the laser The elevation of the point remains the same when Azimuth and Distance are edited MANUAL ORTHOGONAL Enter the coordinates at which to aim the laser PICK POINT In the Scan Control viewer pick the point at which to aim the laser TARGET ID When Method is Orthogonal from Sta
281. enable Align Vertices to Axes then drag the cursor in the direction you want The second vertex snaps along the closest Reference Plane axis from the first vertex Editing Vertices At any time before a drawing object is complete vertices can be moved and deleted When deleting vertices the resulting shape depends on the order in which they were plotted For example an arc requires three vertices the first two define its endpoints and the third defines the point through which the curve of the arc passes If you have plotted all three and then delete the first vertex plotted the remaining two become the first and second endpoints Likewise if you have plotted all three and then delete the second the first and third then become the first and second endpoints respectively If the shape you are drawing already has enough vertices e g a line segment with two vertices plotting a new vertex replaces the last vertex placed e To translate the current drawing on the reference plane hold the CTRL key and drag the mouse e To delete a vertex hold the ALT key and click on the vertex without moving the mouse e To move a vertex drag it to the desired location Depending on the shape being drawn the other vertices may be moved accordingly For example moving one vertex of a square which already has four sides drawn moves the other vertices as necessary in order to maintain the integrity of the square e To cancel a drawing in progress sel
282. ence object to make objects coincident colinear coplanar parallel perpendicular or codirectional and placing selected objects at a specified distance or angle from each other Many common modeling tasks can be accomplished with Align submenu commands and dialogs e g making walls perpendicular to floors or making a ceiling parallel to a floor The Extend submenu commands extend a single object to the intersection with a reference object or extend the boundary of all selected objects to the planar or linear intersection with the other selected objects A common use would be extending a column to a floor Extrude The Extrude submenu commands are used to create an extrusion object from a patch or a face of an extrusion object The extrusion is created with a specified thickness either along a user specified axis along the patch s normal towards the viewpoint or towards a pick point An extrusion can be used to create a box from a patch to represent an electrical box for example Merge The Merge command combines two or more selected objects of the same type In the process of creating a single new object the merging function fills in soace between the selected objects Use this command to create objects such as wide floors and ceilings and long pipes This feature is particularly useful when filling areas that have not been scanned directly If the objects were created from point clouds the merged object is refit to the original point
283. enter point A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The arc is drawn and you are ready to draw another arc To delete the newly created arc either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the arc and then select Delete from the Edit menu Draw Circle 3 Points on Circle Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Circle 3 Points on Circle command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a circle in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a circle 1 Pon From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Circle 3 Points on Circle The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex at a point on the circle Click again to place a second vertex on the circle Click a point or drag the cursor to place a third vertex through which the circle must pass A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The circle is drawn and you are ready to draw another circle 245 Index a To delete the newly created circle either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the circle and then se
284. ept that the length of an elbow or bend is not the arc length but the sum of the distances from each of its endpoints to the intersection points of its endpoint tangents To measure piping takeoff 1 2 Multi select the sequence of piping including the connections you want to measure From the Toolsmenu point to Measure and then select Piping Takeoff The measurement is displayed in the Output Box 353 Index Point Cloud Density Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Registration ModelSpace View Registration Viewers Displays submenu Pointing to Point Cloud Density displays submenu commands used to adjust the automatic thinning of cloud points when rendering Increasing the level of reduction can improve performance and visualization Other computations are unaffected by this setting Point Cloud Density Submenu Commands NO REDUCTION Point clouds are drawn with full level of detail LOW REDUCTION Point clouds are drawn without some points MEDIUM REDUCTION Point clouds are drawn somewhat sparsely HIGH REDUCTION Point clouds are drawn sparsely HIGHEST REDUCTION Point clouds are drawn very sparsely Point Cloud Rendering Window Menu Action Usage ControlSpace ModelSpace View Displays submenu Pointing to Point Cloud Rendering displays submenu commands used to toggle different ways of drawing point clouds e The following modifiers are available from the Poin
285. er Control menu select Set Atmospheric Correction The Atmospheric Correction dialog appears 2 Edit the appropriate settings and click OK Atmospheric corrections are applied to adjust the range of each sampled point for subsequent scans within the session To set temperature and range settings select the appropriate radio button and enter values in the Ambient Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure fields The ppm Total parts per million is calculated a To set ppm Total directly click the ppm radio button and then enter a value in the ppm Total field To reset temperature or pressure defaults click the appropriate Default button Set Datum to Pick Point Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Datum Action Executes command Usage The Set Datum to Pick Point command sets the datum point at the picked point To set the datum at the picked point 1 Pick the point where you want to locate the datum point 2 From the Tools menu point to Measure and then point to Datum and select Set Datum to Pick Point The datum is relocated Set Distance to Next Vertex Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Opens dialog Usage The Distance to Next Vertex dialog is used in Drawing mode to set the distance between a vertex that has been plotted and the next vertex to be plotted n After plotting at least one drawing vertex the distance to the next vertex plotted can be set using the Distance to Next Vertex dia
286. er that contains the database you wish to compact From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears Select the database you wish to compact and click Compact A confirmation dialog appears Click Yes A dialog appears prompting you to create a backup before beginning the compacting process Click Yes to create a backup strongly recommended The compaction process begins When finished a notification dialog appears Click OK to resume working in Cyclone To optimize a database Pon Select the server that contains the database you wish to optimize From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears Select the database you wish to optimize and click Optimize A confirmation dialog appears Click Yes A progress meter appears as the database is optimized To remotely administer databases 1 Use the Set Server Password applet installed with Cyclone to set a password for local server From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears Select the database you wish to remotely administer and click Admin Login 231 Index 4 Enter the password set with the Set Server Password applet from a remote client in order to administer add remove etc databases on the remote database Note To add a database on a remote server the database file name must be entered using the server s drive letter and directories For example
287. erent in the point cloud are revealed e Only point clouds with valid surface normal vector estimates respond to the One Sided render mode e Points that are on estimated surfaces facing the viewer are opaque Points gradually become more transparent as the estimated surface is oriented to be perpendicular to the viewer 440 Index Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Slice displays submenu commands to cut selected object s using a patch ref plane or all selected objects The following commands are available from the Slice submenu by Last Selection by Ref Plane All in Selection Snap to Grid Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Snapping Grid Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Snap to Grid command toggles the snapping grid ON OFF The snapping grid is used to control object movement when using handles For 2D drawing the snapping grid is aligned to the active Reference Plane s origin and axes For object manipulation the snapping is an invisible 3D grid aligned with the coordinate system and spaced by the given spacing relative to the origin along all three axes When ON objects vertices jump to the next grid increment as you move them draw them and objects jump to the next interval when rotated using rotation handles When OFF objects move independently of grid settings To adjust grid spacing see the Set Grid Spacing command To ad
288. erent regions of point clouds based on shared characteristics For example points may be segmented because they are on the same pipe or on the same wall The points may also be segmented because they are unnecessary for subsequent modeling or visualization they may be stray or unnecessary points Simple Segmentation Simple segmentation involves using the fence tool to manually separate the points of interest The fence can be manipulated for the precise outline required to segment one set of points from another or to clear unwanted points Once the fence contains the desired points the Cut by Fence command creates at most two point clouds one inside and one outside the fence Simple segmentation is limited in that it uses a single fence from a single viewpoint to create segments and if further refinements are needed additional segments are created When more precise segmentation is needed use the sub selection function see Advanced Segmentation in the Modeling chapter and Point Cloud Sub Selection in the Commands chapter before creating segments Advanced Segmentation Advanced segmentation involves using multiple sub selections to refine a selection add or remove points before segmentation fitting or other processes are performed After the initial selection the viewpoint can be changed and a new fence can be drawn in order to make a more precise selection When the sub selection contains only the desired points the selected point
289. es acquired from the scanner If you do not select a ScanWorld before beginning a scan or getting an image a ScanWorld is automatically created in the parent project The Select a ScanWorld dialog can also be accessed by clicking the button to the right of the ScanWorld box in the Scan Control panel To select a ScanWorld for your scans and images 1 From the Project menu select Select ScanWorld The Select a ScanWorld dialog appears a You can create a new ScanWorld for your scan data by clicking Create you can then select the created ScanWorld 2 Navigate to an existing ScanWorld and then click OK Your destination ScanWorld is selected a Only ScanWorlds within the parent project can be selected 412 Index Window ModelSpace Image Viewer Menu Selection Action Executes command Usage The Select All command selects every selectable object currently loaded in the ModelSpace a Inthe Image Viewer window this command selects all annotation pick points a To deselect all objects press ESC Note An object will not be selected if the object has not yet been loaded nor if the Object Type has been set not selectable in the View Properties dialog See the Set Object Visibility entry in this chapter for more information Select All Point Cloud Sub Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection Action Executes command Usage The Select All command selects all selectable
290. et detente nel 183 Below Ref Plane MOSR enina oae AEn EE AEAEE EEEE TAE ENEE AEEA 183 BreaklinoS saan in S ROEA OE P EEEN ES ie ns 184 Black White Target occurri aae id indie A ba ad cias 184 BUDHO LGV eli oer a E E R A OES 184 by Last Selecto sra a a e e r E AA iaa 185 by Ref Plame ceran ear e eee este aetna iar aa eatin eet teint erties 186 Galibrate Came tate urn oa aa lo ee dd ahd dine 186 Cancel Drawing ciie freee aed tee de do a di cocida 187 Cancel San iii A ie era 187 Center On FOCO Bees eek ees nas net eae ey E nee ea ena ed evo panes GG ea EEIE 187 Centerline Length visi eccentrics A tind et nee Gein aes 188 Check Calibration score 188 e AA tee AARAA A RE AARAA AAA 188 Check Re Level HDS6000 eee cece eee rann ii N A a A A ees 189 Check Re Level ScanStation ccccccceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaeaaeeesaaaaeeeeaaaa tees 189 Gircular Fence Mode ryrie ia R E E RA AT 190 Glean ea ad 190 Glear BreaklidOS cuota 190 Ceara ETRE a AA IEA A A AI IS 191 Clear Calibration Info voice cias 194 Clear IMage iii eta 194 Clear LOCKS ici did 194 Clear Pati urea ea A A A A a 195 Clear Targa incaico ad 195 Clear Temporary Measurement ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeseaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeseaaaeeeeeaaneees 195 Clear Undo RedOees c ceie sieeve et 195 Olot ld Dota 196 Cloud ConstraintS WiZard civics tin cred nee ies 196 Codirectional ivi ina iaa 197 COINCIDENT ae 198 Colin ii A ad td a
291. et from Plane dialog is used to segment the selected point cloud s based on each point s offset from the indicated plane For an overview of the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To segment a point cloud by distance from a plane 1 Select the point cloud you want to segment 2 From the Create Object menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut by Offset from Plane The Segment Cloud by Offset From Plane dialog appears 3 Click the button next to the Point field to specify the coordinate through which the plane passes a Select Last Pick Point to use the last pick point a Select Last Pick Point Always to use the last pick point even when the pick point changes a Select Origin to use the UCS origin a Select Custom to manually enter a coordinate 4 Click the button next to the Normal field to specify the plane s normal vector a Select Up Direction to use the Up direction even when it changes a Select X Axis Easting to use the UCS X axis Easting a Select Y Axis Northing to use the UCS Y axis Northing a Select Z Axis Elevation to use the UCS Z axis Elevation a Select Reference Plane Normal to use the active reference plane s normal vector a Select Pick Point Normal to use the normal vector at the last picked point a Select Custom to manually enter a normal vector 5 Select Interval to enter the interval at which the cloud will be regularly segmented within th
292. etail via the View Object As command To preview the animation in the current window PON From the Animation submenu select Animate The Animation Settings dialog appears Select In Window Only Select All or designate a range of frames you wish to generate Click Animate The animation preview runs in the current ModelSpace window 173 Index Animation Editor Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Animation Action Opens dialog Usage The Animation Editor dialog is used to set and add keyframes specify the number of frames between keyframes and navigate through the animation by frame or parametric time For an overview of the animation process see the Animation entry in the Modeling chapter Animation Editor Dialog Keyframes unbe of Frames tt of Keyframes 10 etween Kepframes From a lt lt Go 1 To 2 a lt lt Go Hl Set B 6 Frame Number Parametric Time Mi lt lt Go 0000 Go v Auto Preview Frame Time Keep Current Focal Point Reset or Cancel AN A Selected keyframes B Jump to the designated frame C Current frame D Enter a value for the increment to move forward backward by frames E Jump forward backward by the specified delta in frames 174 F Index Select to move the viewpoint each time the time or frame number change When unselected a current frame time indicator moves along the animation path but the
293. ettings dialog without accepting any changes to the TruView color map settings 377 Index TruView Owner Information Dialog The TruView Owner Information dialog is used to supply information about the owner of the TruView datasets to be generated Information about the publisher of the TruView datasets is also entered in this dialog The TruView datasets include this information Truview Owner Information Campany PO Company URL FO Contact FO Copyright O Projet URL ss sS Publisher Publisher E mail Publisher URL A Company Enter the name of the company that owns the TruView dataset B Company URL Enter the URL for example http hds leica geosystems com of the company that owns the TruView dataset C Contact Enter the main contact information for the company that owns the TruView dataset D Copyright Enter the copyright notice for the TruView dataset E Project URL Enter the URL of the project to which the TruView dataset belongs F Publisher Enter the name of the company that is generating the TruView dataset G Publisher E mail Enter the e mail address of the main contact of the company that is generating the TruView dataset H Publisher URL Enter the URL of the company that is generating the TruView dataset Il OK Click to accept the TruView owner and publisher information and return to the TruView Settings dialog 378 Index J Cancel Click to return to the Tru
294. ew menu or by clicking the Get Preview icon on the Scan Control toolbar a lf the position or orientation of the scanner has been changed repeat step 1 to update the Previews Also a new ScanWorld should be selected for storing any new data Use the New Scanner Position command to automatically create a new ScanWorld Targeting With a valid Preview in the Scan Control window you can decide which areas of the scene are of interest and how densely they should be sampled e To target the entire scene in the Scan Control window select Target All from the Scanner Control menu The scan target appears in the Scan Control window e To target only a portion of the scene create a target region by dragging one of the Target cursors over the area in which you are interested e A number of preset target modes can be selected from the Presets dropdown The horizontal and vertical settings for the selected mode are displayed in the fields below When you enter targeting settings manually the setting automatically changes to Custom 19 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 Resolution After determining the area of the scene that you want to scan adjust the resolution for scanning Four different Resolution settings are available to the HDS4500 The HDS6000 has an additional Resolution setting Probe e To measure the range and horizontal and vertical direction from the scanner to a point position the target cross hair on the point and clic
295. ewer or click the Open Viewer button on the right side of the Scan Control window A new ModelSpace viewer for the incoming scan data opens In the ModelSpace viewer select the point cloud from which you want to acquire potential targets From the Scanner Control menu in the Scan Control window select Acquire Targets The Acquire Targets dialog is displayed From the Acquire menu in the dialog select HDS Targets from Selected Cloud to find potential HDS Targets in the selected point cloud and list them in the Acquire Targets dialog 144 O E No E 00 a Index select Spheres from Selected Cloud to find potential sphere targets in the selected point cloud and list them in the Acquire Targets dialog Cyclone searches the point cloud for characteristics indicative of HDS tie points or 6 sphere targets depending on which command is selected marks up to the maximum number of potential targets user defined and lists them in the dialog View each potential target to determine which ones you want Cyclone to attempt to acquire To center the ModelSpace viewpoint on a potential target select the potential target from the list in the Acquire Targets dialog To rotate the ModelSpace viewpoint around a potential target select the potential target from the list in the Acquire Targets dialog and then press the LEFT RIGHT ARROW keys To move up down the list of potential targets press the UP DOWN ARROW keys Add an identifier
296. f columns field is populated automatically based on your display choices in steps 3 and 4 You can change this value as necessary If you selected Delimited display enter a value in the Text Qualifier field default is a quotation mark Anything enclosed within the defined text qualifiers will be parsed as one 306 Index item For example you may have commas set as delimiters but in certain cases you may want commas to be imported enclosing the comma in quotation marks will qualify it as text and when encountered it is imported as text rather than as a qualifier 7 Deselect the As Point Cloud checkbox The column names reserved for use by point cloud import e g Intensity become regular column headings 8 Indicate any initial rows e g headers to be skipped during the import by entering a number in the Rows to skip field 9 If you have text in your file to be treated as commentary hence to be ignored upon import enter the qualifier in the Treat as Comment field As soon as the comment qualifier is encountered on a line in the file the rest of the line is ignored 10 Select the unit of measure represented by the numbers in your data table using the Unit of Measure field 11 Check the Create line segments between pairs of vertices option to create line segments between consecutive pairs of vertices Note The bottom half of the screen allows you to see the results of your settings selections immediately Co
297. f geometry in the involved ControlSpaces that are mutually consistent that would be accurate given the pre existing constraints and registration label constraint pairs In the case that several possible sets of pairs exist it chooses the set which aligns the largest number of objects For more information on the registration process and ControlSpaces see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter For instructions on adding a registration label see the Add Edit Registration Label command 180 Index Auto Pick Points Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Auto Pick Points command toggles the auto picking function for the current ModelSpace viewer The auto picking function allows the user to specify a significant point i e the end of a cylinder that is automatically picked when an object of that object type is selected When using auto pick the specified point is always the only picked point regardless of how the object was selected i e selected by fence or automatically selected after creation To use the Auto Pick function 1 From Selection menu toggle Auto Pick Points ON By default when an object is picked directly or a default pick is supplied by a command the Auto Pick setting is ignored in favor of the specified pick point To override the direct or default pick point select Use Auto Pick instead of Ignore Auto Pick from ModelSpace tab of the Edit Pr
298. f points allowed in any single sub scan Each time this limit is reached during scanning a new sub scan is created This preference also applies to ScanStation and ScanStation 2 scans SCANSTATION 2 MAX POINTS AUTO IMPORTED Enter a value for the maximum number of points for importing ScanStation 2 scans Use the Re Import Scans command to import the unimported points HDS4500 HDS6000 MAX POINTS AUTO IMPORTED Enter a value for the maximum number of points for importing HDS4500 and HDS6000 scans For the HDS4500 when the value is 0 a placeholder Scan is created but the scan is not imported to save time in the field Use the Re Import Scans command to import the unimported points For the HDS6000 when the value is 0 a placeholder Scan is created but 366 Index the scan is not downloaded from the scanner to save time in the field Use the Download HDS6000 Scans command to download the missing file HDS4500 HDS6000 KEEP AUTO IMPORTED ZFS FILE Select whether or not the HDS4500 or HDS6000 ZFS file will be kept after each scan If set to Yes only the ZFS files for scans that are completely imported that is those with fewer points than the HDS4500 HDS6000 Max Points Auto Imported preference will be deleted Otherwise all ZFS files produced by scanning will be kept on disk HDS6000 LEVEL TOLERANCE Enter a value for the maximum angle that the scanner can be from perfectly level but still be considered to be level by Sc
299. f the next scan in the current project and ScanWorld NEW POSITION Click to prepare a new ScanWorld for the next scan OPEN VIEWER Click to open a new ModelSpace viewer for the incoming scan data Note This ModelSpace is created in the ScanWorld chosen as your destination using the Select ScanWorld command Note The point cloud being acquired is visible in this ModelSpace viewer but is not selectable until the scan operation is completed or canceled Publish Site Map Window ModelSpace Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Publish Site Map command creates an HTML page with a snapshot of the current viewpoint with hot spots at the scanner positions The command also generates datasets for use by Leica TruView Also see the Using Cyclone Publisher document To publish a site map 1 Set the viewpoint in the ModelSpace viewer This viewpoint will be used for the site map image 374 Index a Any scanner locations contained in this viewpoint will be used to generate TruView datasets a If the viewpoint does not contain any scanner locations then no TruView datasets will be generated although the site map will still be generated 2 Adjust the visualization and graphics options of the ModelSpace View The site map image will use these settings 3 Inthe File menu select Publish Site Map The Browse for Folder dialog appears 4 Inthe Browse for Folder dialog select the folder to contain the site map
300. f those problematic modes the user has the option of reconfiguring Cyclone to use another graphics mode Note A particular graphics card drive combination may have additional settings that affect Cyclone s performance To set a new graphics mode 1 Launch the OpenGL Modesapplet e To launch the OpenGL Modes applet From the Windows Start menu point to Programs Leica HDS Cyclone 5 8 1 Utilities and then select OpenGL Modes The Supported OpenGL Modesdialog appears 2 Select a new graphics mode a The default graphics mode chosen by Cyclone has an asterisk next to it and the user selected graphics mode is enclosed in brackets To reset the mode to the user default click the User Default button This gives Cyclone the option of choosing the mode to use e To select a new graphics mode click a number in the Mode column and then click the Set Mode button The new mode is written to your registry a The Check Screen Saver checkbox controls Cyclones redrawing while a screen saver is active When enabled Cyclone does not redraw when the screen saver is active this can reduce load on the CPU over time e g when scanning If Cyclone does not render properly turn this option OFF and then restart Cyclone 3 Click Exit and then restart Cyclone to switch to the new mode a f you change your graphics card or graphics driver please be sure to test whether or not you still need that graphics mode or if in fact that mode still exi
301. files and TruView datasets The Select ScanWorlds dialog appears next 5 Inthe Select ScanWorlds dialog select the ScanWorlds for which TruView datasets will be generated Selecting a ScanWorld will also generate TruView datasets for its subordinate ScanWorlds One TruView dataset consists of only the scans specific to the original ScanWorld Registered ScanWorlds have no scans of their own The TruView dataset uses the original ScanWorld s default point clouds Use the Set ScanWorld Default Clouds or Set as Default Scan commands in the original ScanWorld to modify its default point clouds The coordinate system and up direction used in the site map are applied to each TruView In the Site Map Settings dialog select the options to use for the site map Click the TruView Settings button to customize how the TruView datasets are generated Click the OK button The site map is created Any TruView datasets that were generated are contained in sub folders ONO Site Map Settings Dialog J site Map Settings E xj Image Size Width jana pixels Height eoo pixels None C Medium High Anti aliasing Quality TruWiew Settings OK Cancel A Width Height The dimensions of the site map image B Keep Aspect Ratio When checked changing either the Width or the Height adjusts the other dimension proportionately 375 Index C Anti aliasing Quality Sele
302. first two vertices becomes the center of a circle that passes through both vertices 4 Click a point or drag the cursor to place a third vertex which adjusts the eccentricity of the ellipse a The third vertex can be moved by dragging or clicking in a new location A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor 5 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The ellipse is drawn and you are ready to draw another ellipse a To delete the newly created ellipse either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the ellipse and then select Delete from the Edit menu 247 Index Draw Isometric Polygon Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Isometric Polygon command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a polygon with a user specific number of symmetric sides in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw an isometric polygon 1 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Isometric Polygon The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex at the center of the isometric polygon The Isometric Polygon dialog appears Enter the number of sides to be drawn for the isometric polygon and then click OK Click again to place one vertex on the polyline The other vertices
303. following cloud constraint alignments were halted by the Cloud Reg Max Iterations limit This indicates that the Optimize Cloud Alignment command did not arrive at a solution before reaching the Cloud Reg Max Iterations limit This may be addressed by 1 Repeating the Optimize Cloud Alignment command this continues the optimization where it left off last In general you can run the Optimize Cloud Alignment command any number of times to improve the result if improvement is possible 2 Increasing the Cloud Reg Max Iterations preference and repeating the Optimize Cloud Alignment command 3 Improving your initial alignment hint as described above and repeating the Optimize Cloud Alignment command Notes on Global Registration with Cloud Constraints In general global registration treats cloud constraints just like any other type of constraint Several items related to global registration deserve more explanation described below Cloud Constraint Registration Error In the Constraint List the error column lists the error of each constraint after global registration In general this is the distance between two constraint objects after the optimal registration transform has been computed for their ScanWorlds For cloud constraints the error value indicates the increase in the error metric of the cloud alignment when offset by the global registration from the optimal pair wise alignment i e the alignment computed by the Optimize Cloud
304. for which to measure deviation from the original mesh object a Selecting one line effectively selects the entire contour line set to which the selected line belongs enabling you to measure deviations for the entire contour line set a Itis recommended that you hide the mesh so that only contour lines are visible This makes it 201 Index easier to see deviating line segments To hide the mesh see the Set Object Visibility entry in this chapter 2 Select the mesh object for which to take the deviation measurements If no mesh object is selected the mesh object used to create the contours is used 3 From the Toolsmenu point to Measure then select Contours to Mesh Deviations Initialization commences which culminates with the display of the Deviation Analysis dialog 4 Use the slider bar to set the threshold on which to measure deviations As the slider is moved the graphical display is adjusted continually to highlight only those line segments with deviations from the mesh object that fall above the threshold Note The Minimum and Maximum fields are display only and indicate the range for which deviations can be measured 5 Select whether to highlight line segments based on Maximum or Average deviation and whether to use Absolute values no positive or negative values or Signed values Note Deviation analysis results are displayed in the Details field 6 Click OK when you are done The Deviation Analysis dialog is closed
305. g or removing pick points as needed 3 From the Cloud Constraint menu select Update Initial Cloud Alignment The pick points and transformation of the cloud constraint are updated to match the new pick points if possible Update Original ModelSpace Window ModelSpace Menu ModelSpace File Launch Navigator File Action Executes command Usage Executing this command copies edited objects back to the ModelSpace from which the current ModelSpace was originally created Note This command is active only for ModelSpaces created via the File Launch Copy Selection to New ModelSpace or Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace commands To update the original ModelSpace from a subordinate ModelSpace View 460 Index 1 From the File menu point to Launch and then select Update Original ModelSpace A dialog appears 2 Choose whether or not to mark the current ModelSpace for deletion after the current and original ModelSpaces have been merged a f you select Yes the current ModelSpace is marked for deletion and the original ModelSpace is updated to reflect changes a f you select No the current ModelSpace is left intact and the original ModelSpace is updated to reflect changes a f you select Cancel the update process is aborted and you are returned to the current ModelSpace The updated source ModelSpace contains all objects that were either edited or created in the descendant ModelSpace i e objects from the source ModelSpace
306. g the major axes POINT TO CENTER LINE POINT This command calculates the distance between the first picked point and the center point or the nearest intersection with the centerline of the object selected last a If the second object is a sphere it does not matter where it was picked or if it was selected by other means since the center point of a sphere is its exact center If the measurement is to the centerline of the second object it does not matter where the object was picked or if it was selected by other means For measurements centerlines are extended beyond the endpoint or boundary of the actual object to the nearest point of intersection For example a measurement to the centerline of a cylinder is made to the nearest point on the underlying axis of the cylinder which is not necessarily a point within the length of the cylinder POINT TO UNBOUNDED SURFACE This command calculates the distance between the first picked point and the nearest intersection with the surface of the object selected last Since the measurement is to the unbounded surface of the second object it does not matter where it was picked or if it was selected by other means For measurements surfaces are extended beyond the endpoint or boundary of the actual object to the nearest point of intersection For example a measurement to the surface of a 71 Animation patch is made to the nearest point on the underlying plane of the patch which is n
307. gator Edit Executes command The Import Customizations command imports Cyclone customizations that have been saved as an XML file Customizations are modifications you have made to Cyclone s default toolbars and hotkeys Import Leica System 1200 Window Menu Action Usage Navigator File Opens dialog The Browse For Folder dialog opened by this command is used to select a folder containing the Leica System 1200 DB X database to be imported into a Cyclone Project or Database E Each Leica System 1200 job in the DB X database will be imported as a ModelSpace Points in the job will be imported as individual vertices Import Registration Window Menu Action Usage Registration Registration Opens dialog The Import Registration dialog is used to import one or more Registrations into the current Registration for the purpose of constructing a single inclusive Registration n The import process brings in all the ScanWorlds and constraints of the imported Registrations without duplication To import a registration 1 From the Registration menu select Import Registration The Select Registration s to Import dialog appears The left side of the dialog contains a Navigator pane 2 In the Navigator pane select the existing Registration that you want to add to the new Registration in progress and then click the Add icon The selected Registration appears in the right hand pane a All Registrations must be
308. ge The Delete command deletes the selected limit box 237 Index Delete Inside Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Fence Action Executes command Usage The Delete Inside command removes all cloud points polyline segments and mesh faces within the data fence For more information on working with fences see the Using aFence entry in the Modeling chapter Delete Line Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Contours Action Executes command Usage This command removes selected contour lines from the ModelSpace without affecting the remaining contour lines Note Attempting to delete a contour line using the Delete command in the Edit menu results in deleting the entire set of contours rather than just the selected contour line To delete a contour line 1 Pick the contour line to be deleted 2 From the Tools menu point to Contours and then select Delete Line The selected contour line is deleted from the ModelSpace Delete Outside Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Fence Action Executes command Usage The Delete Outside command removes all cloud points outside of a data fence Delete Selected Inside Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Fence Action Executes command Usage The Delete Selected Inside command removes all points in selected point clouds within a fence 238 Index For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter Delete Selected Outside Wi
309. ghted in white a lf the selected object defines a volume the points contained inside the object are also highlighted a The total number of points within the specified tolerance is displayed in the Interference Tolerance field 4 Click Segment The highlighted points are segmented from the rest of the point cloud 5 Click Close The Interfering Points dialog is closed Invert Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection Action Executes command Usage The Invert command inverts the point cloud selection set All selected points become unselected all unselected points become selected 314 Index Invert Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Executes command Usage The Invert Selection command toggles the selection status of every loaded object in the ModelSpace This command is particularly useful when you want to select all but a few objects because it allows you to first select the objects that you ultimately do not want selected and then invert the selection Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Standard Views Action Executes command Usage The Isometric command moves the current viewpoint to the standard isometric viewing position vector 1 1 1 at a distance where the entire scene is visible The Right Isometric command moves the current viewpoint to the standard isometric viewing position vector 1 1 1 Keep Collapsed Window ModelSpace Menu Tools
310. ginal number of vertices in the selected polyline object E Use this slider to set a maximum distance between each vertex along the decimated polyline F Use this slider to set a minimum distance between each vertex along the decimated polyline G Use this slider to adjust the percentage of decimation If Auto Preview is selected see B the viewer is continually updated as you move the slider H Displays what percentage of the original number of vertices in the polyline object by which the polyline object is to be decimated You may also enter an exact number in this field Note that entering a value in this field automatically adjusts the value in the Target Number field Note also that the value in this field is continually updated when the slider is used I Displays the largest distance measurement from any original vertex to the resulting decimated polyline J Enter a value for the maximum distance between each vertex along the decimated polyline K Enter a value for the minimum distance between each vertex along the decimated polyline To reduce the number of vertices in a polyline or patch 1 Select the polyline or patch you want to reduce 2 From the Edit Object menu select Decimate Polyline Patch The Decimate Polyline Patch dialog appears 3 Set the decimation parameters a To decimate by a percentage of original vertices use the slider or enter a value in the of Original field a To decimate by constraining t
311. gments and point clouds using commands in the Selection menu These commands do not segment selected objects a The Select Fenced command selects every object or point cloud the entire point cloud is selected entirely within or partially overlapping a fence In the case of a mesh object the entire mesh object is selected as are all triangles within or partially within the fence Subsequent commands performed on the selected mesh triangles may pertain to the entire mesh if the commands are not mesh specific e g Edit Delete and to the triangles if the commands are meshspecific e g Mesh Delete Selection In the case of contour lines and polylines line segments within or partially within the fence are selected a The Deselect Fenced command deselects every object or point cloud the entire point cloud is deselected entirely within or partially overlapping the fence Segmenting with a Fence A fence can be used as a boundary to segment the selected cloud mesh object contour line or polyline into two subsets using the Cut by Fence command More than one point cloud mesh object contour line or polyline can be segmented simultaneously For more information see the Point Cloud Segmentation section in the Modeling chapter Copy Fenced Objects to a New ModelSpace The Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace command is very useful for editing objects in a separate ModelSpace containing only the objects with which you are currently working Thi
312. group of connected shapes Cones Cylinders Extruded complex shape as an Extruded Patch COE tries to fit these into the following Leica HDS objects Extruded Patch always capped Steel Section only with Leica HDS label Sphere Torus Capped Elbow or Mitered Elbow or Reducing Elbow Capped Cone Cylinder Reducer Revolved complex shapes as a group of connected shapes Cones Cylinders Extruded complex shapes use Extruded Patch Cylinder capped or uncapped Cone capped or uncapped Flange only with Leica HDS label capped or uncapped Reducer capped or uncapped 135 Cyclone Object Exchange COE 27 B spline Curve P Spline Curve 37 Tag P Find associated element and add as an annotation Levels Y Layers Reads mapping tables from COE INI Current level mapped to Default Layer Other levels with objects to named external layers 136 OpenGL Modes OpenGL Modes Introduction The OpenGL Modes applet installed with Cyclone displays the available graphics modes supported by the graphics system of your computer It is intended for use with Cyclone to help the user choose an alternate graphics mode Each graphics mode has its own particular characteristics The relevant characteristics are described below Sometimes the graphics system does not fully support a particular mode or Cyclone may have odd interactions with a given mode In the case that Cyclone chooses one o
313. group to its original components To remove a single component without affecting the rest of the group see the Remove from Group command To restore the original components of a group 1 Select the group 2 From the Edit menu point to Group and then select Ungroup The components are restored and may be selected individually Unify Clouds Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays dialog Usage The Unify Clouds command displays the Unify Clouds dialog which combines multiple point clouds into a single efficient cloud The Unify Clouds command is typically used in a ModelSpace containing a registered set of scans and a large number of point clouds performance is improved by the cloud unification process After the point clouds are unified you will generally want to use the Set ScanWorld Default Clouds command to designate the point cloud as the default point cloud that is loaded whenever a new ModelSpace is created from the parent ScanWorld To unify clouds 1 From the Tools menu select Unify Clouds A warning prompt appears 2 Click Unify The Unify Clouds dialog appears 3 Select unification options and then click Unify Note Any points not included in the unification process are removed from the ModelSpace when the cloud is unified 458 Index e To reduce the number of points in the resulting unified cloud select Reduce Cloud Average Point Spacing and enter a value for the average distance be
314. h 1 Define the path Insert a series of Camera objects at intervals along the path you want the camera to follow in the final animation The Camera objects serve as key frames Create the path Multi select the Camera objects in the same sequence that you want the camera to move and then select Create Path or Create Path Loop from the Animation menu A spline curve or closed spline loop connecting the Camera objects is created Alternatively a path can be created via Cyclone s drawing tools by drawing a cubic spline or cubic spline loop instead of inserting Camera objects However for predictable results this method requires the camera to be oriented towards a single focal point throughout the animation The Keep Current Focal Point box should be selected in the Animation Settings dialog Using the camera objects method the focal point and viewpoint orientation are defined by each inserted Camera object Set the path With the spline and cameras selected select Set Path from the Animation menu A green spline with tangent manipulation handles appears connecting the Camera objects Once the path is set you may begin editing the animation Note The path is not saved with the database so each time a ModelSpace viewer is opened the path must be reset via the Set Path command in order to continue editing or generating frames Edit the path Use the handles connected to each point in the spline or spline loop to edit t
315. h meshes that have been subject to substantial editing e g deleting and adding faces moving vertices filling holes etc in the ModelSpace View Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh command To optimize a mesh object 1 Select the mesh object to be optimized 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Optimize Mesh Orthographic Perspective Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Toggles menu item Usage The Orthographic Perspective command toggles the ModelSpace View from Perspective to Orthographic In orthographic projection parallel lines remain parallel though perceived angles may change It may be difficult to determine relative depth but this view is often preferred by architects and engineers in top down or side views The real world however is viewed in perspective n In perspective projection parallel lines may converge and relative depth may be easier to visualize The real world is viewed in perspective Pan Lock Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint View Lock Action Toggles option ON OFF Usage The Pan command toggles the ability to pan in View mode which allows you to slide the viewpoint vertically or horizontally within the viewer When ON you cannot pan the viewpoint 341 Index Pan Reference Plane Window ModelSpace Menu
316. h objects The following commands and submenus are available from the Mesh submenu Vertex Flip Selected Edge Polylines Breaklines Optimize Mesh Verify TIN Mesh to Points Deviations Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Opens dialog Usage The Mesh to Points Deviations command compares the faces in the selected mesh object with the points in the selected point cloud or originating point cloud if no point cloud is selected and uses the data to calculate deviations in accordance with user defined parameters To calculate mesh to point cloud deviation 1 Select the mesh object whose deviation from the original point cloud you wish to measure a It is recommended that you view the mesh in Per Face Normals mode before executing the Mesh to Points Deviations command See the View Objects As entry in this chapter for more information 2 Select the point cloud for which to take the deviation measurements If no point cloud is selected the point cloud originally used to create the mesh is used 3 From the Toolsmenu point to Measure then select Mesh to Points Deviations Initialization commences which culminates with the display of the Deviation Analysis dialog 4 Use the slider bar to set the threshold on which to measure deviations As the slider is moved the graphical display is adjusted continually to highlight only those triangles with deviations from the point cloud that fall above the thresh
317. have not run this command you will receive an error message if the point cloud data cannot be accessed Use of this command gives you the option of creating a back up database on a local drive so that work can continue without needing to access the original database Note Executing this command may increase the size of the selected object s database 322 Index Make Circular Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Patch Action Opens dialog Usage The Make Circular command is used to make the selected patch circular while attempting to preserve the general dimensions of the original patch The program uses a circumscribing circle all of the patch s vertices are contained within the smallest possible circle To make a patch circular 1 Select the patch you want to make circular 2 From the Edit Object menu select Make Circular The Number of Sides dialog appears 3 In the Number of Sides field enter the number of sides you want to use to create a circular patch and then click OK The patch is transformed This command can be used to create various geometric shapes with equilateral sides Entering 3 creates a triangle entering 4 creates a square entering 5 creates a pentagon etc Make Rectangular Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Patch Action Executes command Usage The Make Rectangular command makes the selected patch rectangular while attempting to preserve the general dimensions of the
318. he ModelSpace window 1 Select one or more point clouds to which you want to fit an edge 2 From the ModelSpace window open the Fit Edge dialog and then manipulate the viewpoint so that the cross section of points is apparent 3 Draw a 2D template using the selected point cloud as a reference 4 Add nodal points to the 2D template a The nodal points indicate the position at which polylines are created and swept across the point cloud based on the fit a Hold the Alt key and click on a nodal point to delete it 5 Fit the results to the selected point cloud to create the swept polylines Fit Edges Using Simple Templates The following example of finding the edges of a street curb illustrates how complex structures may be effectively modeled in simple pieces Figure 1 shows a scan of a street corner within a limit box See Figure 1 In order to model the upper and lower edges of the curb one approach is to use the Create Object Fit Edge command to draw a polyline describing the cross section of the curb See Figure 2 However because the curb changes height at the wheel chair access ramp and at the drain this template only describes the points for a short distance To avoid this problem split the curb template split into two parts the upper edge and the lower edge See Figure 3and Figure 4 By using these two templates separately we are able to model the top edge over the drain and into the wheelchair access ramp 78 An
319. he Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears 2 Click Add The Add Scanner dialog appears 3 From the Scanner Model list select the model name of the scanner that you are adding For example select HDS3000 if the scanner is a HDS3000 ScanStation if the scanner is a ScanStation or ScanStation 2 if the scanner is a ScanStation 2 4 Inthe Scanner Name field type a logical name for the scanner you are adding e g Scanner My Scanner Scanner 123 etc 5 Inthe IP Address field enter the IP Address for the scanner you are adding The IP address of the scanner is printed on the scanner s housing 6 Click OK The scanner is added e To close the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close Connecting to a Scanner Connecting to a known scanner one that has been entered in the database is done from a Scan Control window To launch a Scan Control window 1 From the Navigator window expand the Scanners folder 2 Double click the scanner to which you want to connect The Scan Control window appears 25 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 To connect to a scanner 1 From the Scanner menu in the Scan Control window select Connect or click the Connect icon Connection progress is displayed at the bottom of the Scan Control window a A successful connection is made and the scanner is ready for commands from Cyclone when the Scanner Stat
320. he Info submenu The type of information displayed depends on the type of object selected When more than one object is selected information is displayed for each object in its own Object Info dialog These dialogs can be moved and closed individually a When the Automatically Update box is checked in the Object Info dialog the object information changes when the object changes If the box is unchecked the contents of the 81 Animation Object Info dialog for that object do not change Disabling the automatic update can be useful when performing a before and after comparison of values 82 Animation Working with the ModelSpace ModelSpace Navigation Changing the Viewpoint Changing the Viewpoint A viewpoint is a viewing position or camera angle used to simplify ModelSpace navigation Cyclone provides controls in View mode that allow you to manually zoom in out and rotate or pan around a focal point using a mouse The viewpoint can also be zoomed in out moved and rotated around the focal point by preset increments using the commands in the Zoom Move Viewpoint and Turn Viewpoint submenus located in the Viewpoint menu The focal point is a certain distance in front of the center of the viewpoint It can be reset in Seek mode and moved by panning the viewpoint Cyclone uses Level of Detail LOD reduction which allows for faster loading of points clouds and smoother interaction and movement within a view when you are pan
321. he Registration window add the ScanWorlds that you want to register Add constraints between the component ScanWorlds Register the ScanWorlds and then check and adjust constraints as needed From a successful registration create a registered ScanWorld Frozen Registration Create ModelSpaces from the registered ScanWorld and begin modeling For details on the registration process see the Registration chapter PAPPP The Registration Window The Registration window consists of a main pane divided into three tabs and two Constraint Viewer panes The three tabs of the main pane are ScanWorlds Constraints Constraints List and ModelSpaces Constraint Viewer Panes The Constraint Viewer panes are used to view constraints The constraints are selected and centered in each pane ScanWorlds Constraints Tab 14 Quick Start The ScanWorlds Constraints tab displays each ScanWorld in the registration Beneath each ScanWorld a pairing with every other ScanWorld in the Registration is displayed After constraints have been added constraints between each ScanWorld pair are displayed From the ScanWorlds Constraints tab you can select and view constraints enable disable and delete constraints set the Home ScanWorld adjust the weight of individual constraints and view information for each constraint Constraints List Tab The Constraints List tab lists each constraint in the registration and displays current information about e
322. he points vertices using the per point color if available If not it applies the hue based color map or a single color if there are no intensities In addition any active texture maps are then drawn over the other colors COLORS FROM SCANNER Draws the points vertices using the per point color if available If not it applies the hue based color map or a single color if there are no intensities INTENSITY MAP MULTI HUE Applies a multi hue red to blue color map INTENSITY MAP GRAYSCALE Applies a grayscale color map ELEVATION MAP Applies a color map based on elevation in the current UCS SINGLE COLOR Applies a single color to all points 177 Index Apply Multilmage Window Navigator Menu Context Menu Action Executes command Usage The Apply Multilmage command colors the Scans under the ScanWorld containing the selected Multilmage using the colors from the selected Multilmage To apply the colors from a Multilmage to the ScanWorld s Scans 1 Inthe Navigator window select the Multilmage that will provide the colors 2 From the right click context menu select Apply Multilmage The Scans under the ScanWorld containing the selected Multilmage are re colored using the colors from the Multilmage Arc 3 Points on Arc Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Pick Points Action Executes command Usage The Arc 3 Points on Arc command creates a circular arc through three picked points To create an
323. he range of distances between vertices use the Min and Max sliders and then click Decimate This method produces spacing between vertices along the polyline such that adjacent vertices are no closer or further than desired To exit the dialog without decimating click Cancel Click OK The number of vertices in the polyline or patch is reduced and the polyline or patch is redrawn Note In some cases it can be difficult to get a satisfactory reduction with a polyline lt may be helpful to break the polyline into several pieces using the Create Object Slice by Last Selection command and reduce each piece separately LD on Decrease Point Width Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON Usage The Decrease Point Width command decrements by one pixel the thickness of each cloud point displayed in the ModelSpace View 236 Index Defect Report Window All windows Menu Help Action Opens dialog Usage The Defect Report dialog is provided for users to report bugs limitations or other perceived defects in the Cyclone software To report a defect 1 2 on From the Help menu select Defect Report The Defect Report dialog appears Enter personal data name company email phone etc in the appropriate fields It is important that you provide this data so we can contact you
324. he shape of the curves in each section of the spline Use the camera translation and rotation handles to edit the viewpoint at each keyframe To clear the current path select Clear Path Editing the Animation The second step in creating an animation is defining the animation characteristics via the Animation Editor dialog 93 Animation To edit the animation 1 From the Animation submenu select Animation Editor The Animation Editor dialog appears e Set keyframes specify the number of frames between keyframes adjust other settings and then click OK For details on Animation Editor dialog settings see the Animation Editor command 2 Preview the animation with the current settings e Topreview the animation without the Camera objects or animation path use the Set Visibility command to turn visibility OFF for those object types e Fromthe Animation menu select Animate The Animation Settings dialog appears Select In Window Only and then click Animate The animation is displayed in the current ModelSpace window Or e From the Animation menu select Animation Editor The Animation Editor dialog appears Press the arrow icon by Frame or Parametric Time and then press and hold the ENTER key The animation is displayed in the current ModelSpace window Generating the Frames The final step is generating the actual frames for the animation via the Animation command 1 From the Animation submenu select Animation
325. he viewpoint in the ModelSpace viewer This viewpoint will be used for the ortho image e The ortho image will be centered in 3D on the viewer s focus point 2 Adjust the visualization and graphics options of the ModelSpace View The ortho image will use these settings 3 Inthe File menu select Export The Export to File dialog appears 4 Inthe Export to File dialog set Save as type to Ortho Image Tagged Image File Format tif and enter the filename 5 Click Save The Image Size dialog appears 6 Enter the ortho image settings and click OK The ortho image and corresponding TWF and TFW files are exported 274 Index e Programs that can read and use the additional positional information in the GeoTIFF specification will be able to automatically position the ortho image in 2D space Otherwise refer to the contents of the TWF and TFW parameter files e Programs that can read the TWF and TFW parameter files directly will be able to automatically position the ortho image in 2D or 3D space Otherwise refer to the contents of the files for the parameters Image Size Dialog imagesize ed Image Size Width jan0 H pixels Height eoo pixels m Anti aliasing Quality a None C Medium High OK Cancel A Width Height The dimensions of the ortho image B Keep Aspect Ratio When checked changing either the Width or the Height adjusts the other dimension proportionately
326. hing can be filled by using the Fill Selected Hole command However if a hole is not enclosed by the mesh e g it coincides with the outer edge of the mesh this command may not work as expected A good technique for filling these types of open ended gaps is to close off the gap at the edge of the mesh either by moving a vertex across the gap to close it in or by adding a face based on picks to either side of the open end of the gap Once the open end has been closed off the remaining hole can be filled using the Fill Selected Hole command Polylines and Meshes Polylines can be used to enhance a mesh object A common use for a polyline is to create a breakline in the mesh A breakline is a polyline that has been incorporated into a mesh object 74 Animation The vertices of a breakline are locked during decimation this can be a useful feature when you want to preserve a particular geometric feature of the mesh e g a curb edge In addition breaklines are exported with a mesh object when exporting a TIN using the Export command Note A polyline that is projected onto a mesh as a polyline is merely a relocation of that individual polyline It is not incorporated into the mesh as a breakline and it is not used during decimation To incorporate a breakline into a mesh object e g to preserve a curb edge 1 Identify the geometric feature to be preserved and multi select several points within the mesh along the edge of
327. his cell blank if you plan to define a new list or select a pre defined list from the pull down Note For information on editing lookup lists see the Customize Lookup Lists entry in this chapter 155 Index Use the Arrow icons to move keys up or down the list as desired The order from top to bottom in which keys are listed in this window dictates the order in which columns are displayed from left to right in the Custom tab of the Annotations dialog Use the Visibility toggle option to show hide this or any other key in the Custom tab 9 Click on Close to return to the Custom tab of the Annotations dialog The new column is displayed Column displays can be resized as desired by clicking and dragging the divider lines separating the column headers Additionally columns can be moved by picking up column headers and dragging them to a different location in the table Columns can be hidden by dragging the key off the header Hiding a column does not affect existing annotations Note To edit existing annotations see the Add Edit Annotations entry in this chapter for more information To add a custom annotation to an object Select the object s being annotated From the Tools menu select Annotations then Add Edit Custom Annotations The Annotations dialog appears with the Custom tab displayed Create a new annotation key Enter a value for each selected object under the newly created annotation key or pick a value from the
328. hoice e g Notepad Instructions for creating quick lookup lists are included in the text file Follow the directions precisely or you will be unable to import the file back into the Annotation Lookup Lists dialog 6 Scroll down the text in the file and search for the list you wish to edit then make changes as necessary keep in mind that you must comply with the formatting instructions or Cyclone will not be able to import the list 7 Save the txt document close the text editor and return to the Navigator window 8 If it is not already open open the Annotation Lookup Lists dialog and click the Import a lookup list icon 9 Find and select the txt file you just edited and saved and click Open You will receive a notice that a list already exists with the same name Select Overwrite to replace existing lists where the list name has not changed with new contents or Merge to keep the existing lists entries but also add entries from the new file that are not in the existing list New lists are added without prompting All lists in the window reflect the latest changes To delete an annotation lookup list 1 From the Navigator window open the Edit menu and select Customize Quick Lookup List The Annotation Lookup Lists dialog is displayed 2 Highlight the list to be deleted and click the Delete icon in the toolbar The lookup list is deleted a Deleting an annotation lookup list does not affect lists in use in other windows
329. hole in the mesh object to be filled a To select a hole click the border of the hole 2 From the Tools menu point to Mesh and then select Fill Selected Hole The selected hole is filled in with the least number of triangles using existing vertices along the border of the hole Fill Selected Hole Patch Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Patch Action Executes command Usage The Fill Selected Hole command fills a hole in a selected patch To fill a hole in a selected patch 1 Pick a point on the patch near the hole you wish to fill You may also draw a fence around the hole 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Patch and then select Fill Selected Hole The selected hole is filled 290 Index Find High Low Point Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Find High Low Point Action Opens dialog Usage The Find High Low Point dialog is used to locate the highest or lowest point in a point cloud within a specified area around a picked point Vertices can be created when high low points are found To find a high low point 1 In a point cloud pick a point near which you want to find a high or low point 2 From the Tools menu point to Measure and then select Find High Low Point The Find High Low Point dialog appears The points within the search range are highlighted and the highest point along the up axis is displayed by default 3 Continue searching for high low points When finished click Clos
330. i Elliptical Head Closest to PiCk oococononncccnnoccccnnnnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnonnncnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnns 167 RAUST EPOSU a R dn ited E aio ta 167 AUUStIMAT Si A ia 168 AMM A A A ada 168 AiG SUMACES ia O A E ld tal a 169 NN Seir Leg fied tind A aa id eee ede Sieve an nein 169 Align to Selection ky ied ecient ied hie aie bende aie 170 ANg V6rtices IMAXES Gui iia 170 Align View to Active Plane oooonccccconnccccnonoccnnnnonnnnnononcnnnonnnnnnnnnnncrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnernnnnnnrrannnnnenes 170 Alignment and Sci ima ri 171 A O 171 ANGIE odpisana ed nein ie R E nee tiie ied naan pies ieee 171 ANIM at ci A Denier cee ie Li dein eee ieee 172 Animation Editada nit diia 174 ANNOlallOns wire c heer crete ee ie vi eee ehh ie teehee eae cee totes 176 APDOAlANCe oresar e i tenna Reap r EET heeds li 176 Appena O Alignment aE A ates E ARE A tee A A 176 Apply Golor MaDaenrinnniannre iae A e A A E A e 177 Apply MUMIA gE naro ain A TEEN OES EE aie 178 Aro 3 FOME ON A dias 178 Are Start Center End umi li dad 178 Atmosphere ii od 179 Auto Add Cloud Constraints seciststececestceeecetecetebesscens sata tocaessnaeeensd ied abetideegiats ORA AREE 179 Auto Add Constraints A ae 180 Auto Pick POINtS eccrine Leeds iv lec ae ie eevee as See ee gees ag es ec 181 Autos pate a tien coet ph caeeiel aliieia nauk ices dead eouehenaidian tierce neues 181 AUTOCAD A Adonde 181 NN 182 Back Alli A A aie ed eter cele 182 Table Of Contents Batch Registration eiii le di
331. i select the desired objects then select File Launch Copy Selection to New ModelSpace 2 When you are ready to export click File Export The Export to File dialog appears 3 Identify a location for the file name the file to be created then select COE format coe from the Save as type field 4 Click OK to create the COE file All objects within the Cyclone ModelSpace are translated to COE format This step may take some time depending on the complexity of the ModelSpace being translated and your computer s capabilities BRINGING A COE FILE INTO AUTOCAD Once a drawing has been exported to COE format from Cyclone it can be imported into AutoCAD using COEIN To import a COE file into AutoCAD 1 From the menu bar select Cyclone COE Import COE Objects or type COEIN at the command line The Import Options dialog appears 2 Find and select the COE file to be imported into AutoCAD by clicking the Browse button below the File Name field 3 Select whether to import objects as ACIS solids or as Blocks IMPORT OBJECTS AS ACIS SOLIDS Select this option to bring in modeled objects as 3D ACIS solids 116 Cyclone Object Exchange COE IMPORT OBJECTS AS BLOCKS Select this option to bring in modeled objects as 3D blocks Use of this option results in the best compression rate as the objects are brought into the AutoCAD drawing In addition the blocks can be exploded once in AutoCAD Note All Xdata added t
332. ial frames will not flicker recommended blank sequential frames may obviously flicker sw This setting determines whether or not the graphics mode supports software rendering where the main CPU in the computer does all of the rendering which can be more correct than hardware rendering depending on the graphics driver but at the expense of rendering performance If none of the other graphics modes work correctly then try one of these Y rendering is done entirely in software blank some rendering tasks may be done by the graphics hardware HW This setting determines whether or not the graphics mode supports hardware acceleration where the graphics card does some or all rendering tasks which can be faster than software rendering Y supports rendering entirely in the graphics hardware blank some rendering tasks may be done by the graphics hardware OPENGL This settings determines whether or not the graphics mode supports the OpenGL API This must be set to Y 138 Command Reference 2D Drawing Mode Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The 2D Drawing Mode command enters Drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw the shape selected in the Drawing submenu in the Tools menu For 2D drawing procedures see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter 2D Extraction Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to 2D Extraction displays submenu c
333. ialog appears Highlight the key containing the file you want to open Click the Open a File Annotation icon If the annotation file is an executable file use the Launch an Executable File icon rather than the Open a File icon To launch an executable file attachment Select the object or point containing the executable file attachment to be launched From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Annotations The Annotations dialog appears Highlight the key containing the executable you want to launch Click the Launch an Executable File icon to launch the program To edit an annotation s properties 1 5 Select the object s for which the annotation properties are to be edited Hint Multi selecting like objects e g pipes and setting their annotations properties to identical values is a good visual tool for quickly distinguishing groups of annotations The Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Annotations The Annotations dialog appears Highlight the annotation key name of the desired annotation Click the Annotation Propertiesicon The Annotation Properties dialog appears containing the following settings TEXT COLOR Use the color picker to select the color used to display the annotation text and callout line FONT SIZE Enter a point value for the font size used to display the annotation text LEADER LINE LENGTH Enter the length in pixels of the line connecting the
334. icant points i e the end points of a cylinder as well as current and subsequent pick points are numbered and displayed on the selected objects These numbers can be used as references to move objects If multiple objects are selected you may specify a subset of the selected objects to be affected by the move from the Apply to list Click the arrow icon to the right of the Direction of Move row The Direction of Move subdialog appears Specify the direction for the move using axes points or picks and then click OK The Direction of Move subdialog closes Click the arrow icon to the right of the Distance of Move row The Distance subdialog appears Specify the direction for the move using points picks or custom distance and then click OK The Distance subdialog closes Click Move The object is moved the specified distance along the specified axis When you are finished moving the object click Close to exit the dialog Move Vertex Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Move Vertex command translates the selected vertex from its initial position to a new position within a mesh Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh command To move a vertex 1 2 To select the vertex to be moved pick a point on the mesh near the vertex you wish to move Multi select
335. ick the OK button to continue If also exporting the point cloud the Export Cyclone Il TOPO Point Cloud Information dialog appears Optionally inspect the point cloud statistics 1 The number of visible points out of the number of total points together with the number of original point clouds can provide a hint as to the overall performance of the point cloud in Cyclone Il TOPO Generally a larger ratio of visible to total points yields more efficient point cloud storage Consider unifying the point cloud first if the ratio is low given the total number of points Generally the fewer original point clouds are exported the better loading and rendering performance will be in Cyclone II TOPO Consider unifying the point clouds first if there are many point clouds Optionally check the Unify ModelSpace before exporting checkbox In some cases this option is disabled because Cyclone has determined that the ModelSpace must be unified Click the Export button to proceed If checked unifying happens first Deliver the exported files as indicated in the final status message Export Leica System 1200 Window ModelSpace Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Export Leica System 1200 command is used to export points lines and meshes to Leica s System 1200 format This command can be used to transfer existing conditions e g a decimated TIN of a roadway scan to a Total Station as a final design for use in stake o
336. icular to the current up direction for station notation to be available 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Alignment and Section and then select Set Active Alignment a All station notation values will be relative to the selected alignment except in Sections Manager a Existing measurements are not affected a The active alignment may be hidden a Ifthe active alignment is deleted the active alignment is reset Set as Default Cloud Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Set as Default Cloud is used to remove unwanted or unintended point samples from a selected point cloud within the current ScanWorld and any subsequent ScanWorld derived from the current ScanWorld Invoking this command prevents unwanted points from appearing as part of the point cloud even when a new ModelSpace is created or when the original point cloud is shown via the ScanWorld Explorer dialog Note Points are not actually deleted from the database when this command is activated rather they are hidden and can be restored using the Restore Default Cloud from Scan command 415 Index Set Atmospheric Correction Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Opens dialog Usage The Atmospheric Correction dialog is used to adjust the range of each sampled point to compensate for current temperature and pressure conditions while scanning To make atmospheric corrections 1 From the Scann
337. idual constraints used in registration The weight value can be set from 0 0 to 1 0 with 0 0 indicating that the constraint has no effect on the registration A constraint set to 0 5 has half the influence of a constraint set to 1 0 Note The practice of decreasing the weight of all constraints with higher than average error is not recommended as it can lead to lower overall registration accuracy Decreasing the weight of a constraint should only be done if you have reason to believe that the measurement of one or both of the objects in the constraint is less accurate than other measured objects To set a constraint s weight 1 In the ScanWorlds Constraints tab of the Registration window select the constraint you want to adjust From the Constraint menu select Set Weight The Set Constraint Weight dialog appears Enter a value between 0 0 and 1 0 in the Weight field and then click OK The weight is adjusted 429 Index Shaded Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Shaded command toggles the lighting of point clouds similar to meshes e Only point clouds with valid surface normal vector estimates respond to the Shaded render mode e The Point Cloud Rendering Front and Point Cloud Rendering Back commands affect which side of the cloud is lit Front shades po
338. ies the current Field Setup values e g Station ID Backsight ID etc to the Traverse panel A Traverse can then be performed to extend the initial Field Setup STATION ID Displays the ID of the current location of the scanner HI The height of the scanner above the ground lt TARGET ID gt Selects the target settings to display in the panel 285 Index HT The height of the target above the known point AZIMUTH For Method Known Azimuth 3D Point the horizontal angle towards the 3D Point For Method Known Azimuth Aim the direction in which the scanner is aimed XYZ NEEL The position of the known or assumed coordinate with the matching ID in the Known Coordinates ScanWorld TYPE The type of the target to be acquired ACQUIRE Acquires the target at the current pick point ADD For Method Resection adds the current target parameters to the Resection see the Resection Target List dialog below CALCULATE Calculates the position and orientation of the scanner based on the entered parameters For Method Resection the Resection Target List dialog appears see below For Method Known Azimuth Aim the user is first prompted to aim the scanner at the real world azimuth corresponding to the Azimuth APPLY For Method Known Backsight Known Azimuth 3D Point and Known Azimuth Aim sets the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System based on the calculated position and orientation of the scanner 286
339. iewed potential targets select the targets to be acquired by checking the box in the fourth column for each target to be acquired To toggle the check box for a selected target press the SPACEBAR key Click Acquire The target acquisition process begins progress and results are displayed in the Status column During the target acquisition process Cyclone performs a coarse and then a fine scan on each potential target and then fits a vertex to the target If the coarse scan fails to find sufficient data to begin a fine scan the Status column in the Acquire Targets dialog displays Failed at Coarse If the fine scan fails to find sufficient data to place a target the Status column in the Acquire Targets dialog displays Failed at Fine Coarse and fine scans appear in the ModelSpace viewer Coarse scans are deleted upon successful acquisition Fine scans can be viewed by double clicking the scan item in the Navigator window Fine scans are saved in the HDS Target Scans folder of the parent ScanWorld To adjust the resolution of the fine scan see the use the Scan Control tab of the Edit Preferences dialog To acquire a target from a fence The process of acquiring targets is usually done after an initial scan or image acquisition of the scene which provides a general reference as to the location of targets in the scene In the Scan Control window visually identify a potential target in the point cloud or image For each potential targe
340. ified angular intervals Constraining Before Manipulation To select the plane or axis along which the handle movement is restricted use the Edit Object Handles Constrain Motion to submenu commands The Screen Plane setting constrains motion to be perpendicular to the viewpoint while the other settings use coordinate system axes Handles can also be constrained to move by user specified increments by using the Snap to Grid command To constrain rotation handle movement the Snap to Grid command must be ON To set the rotation interval use the Set Rotational Spacing command 64 Animation Constraining During Manipulation e To constrain handle movement to an axis pick a handle and press the X Y or Z key The first time the key is pressed handle movement is constrained to be along the corresponding axis i e pick a handle and press X and handle movement is constrained along the X axis e To constrain handle movement to a plane pick a handle and press the X Y or Zkey a second time The handle is constrained to the plane that does not include the axis of the key pressed Pressing the X key a third time removes the constraint and reverts to the default behavior e To toggle the Screen Plane constraint ON OFF press S e To remove any active handle restraints pick a handle and press Spacebar Note Select either User Coordinate System or the Object Coordinate System axes for handle constraints in the Edit Object Handles
341. ights snenie ivi ne direc Saba id Pata Edad reeked 263 EGitPropertleS iio a ias Pi 264 Edit Properties Limit Box Manager areire onakoa Een anei EEE AEEA AaS PEE OINAS TARAIRE 265 Edit ROCIINGS vomita ada 265 Edit Snap to Object Threshold resres T E Ne are REA EAA EEEE 266 a iL EEPE E E E E EE E T E TIET E A E TT A ETETE EE E 266 ElDOW CONNECTOTS miccional Mave aii erie avian A in 268 Elevation A 269 Elevation Check r rire E E E E ak hooeiecdatetaaes 269 A oraaa a E T e Aa E cette ct A EEA oth aad 271 Enable Dual Axis COMpensator cccoconncccononoccnononnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnonnnnccnnnnnncrnnnnnncrcnnnnncrnnnnancccnns 271 Enable Output BO a hee teas 272 Enable Tilt SONSON n veces cessed eee A ce ceded eevee ered 272 End APS sien Meditate A id 272 Enter DATI a lidia 272 EXCIUSION Volume tad 273 A ANN 273 EXPlOdG cocodrilo ideal AR AEE 273 EXPO A aid 274 Export Limit Box Manager a a a a ad cid 275 Export GallbratiO TO lt E 276 Export CUSTOMIZATIONS ope dente 276 Export Cyclone Il TOPO Work Fil8 occcoooonccccconnccccnnnnccncnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnonnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncccnns 276 Export teica Systemi T200 ii A N R a ddteben 277 Table Of Contents EPIA ts cekct ts dobar detieehe eaea ret teach debates Coach teeter ts eats dakar ete i ae 278 Export Template isccisstodancdsccessaus restos irritar bebida 278 EXEN o A ed 279 Extend All ObjSCts oan tive dee haven dende Pe ct Pd de ida DA Slaven de ci 279 EXtend TINTO POVIE tai oleo 280
342. ility determines the speed with which the objects are brought in and displayed You may click Cancel at any time during the process to abort the process a lf an error message is displayed at any time during the import refer to the Troubleshooting section in this appendix Working with Imported Objects in AutoCAD Once objects have been loaded into an AutoCAD drawing from a COE file standard AutoCAD commands and functionality are fully available to view edit and manipulate the objects as needed You can also model new objects for later export back to Cyclone In addition to AutoCAD s powerful capabilities COEIN provides you with additional options which are discussed in the following sections 117 Cyclone Object Exchange COE EXPLODING OBJECTS You can use the COEExplode coeXplode command or AutoCAD s Explode command to explode objects imported as blocks Note All Xdata associated with the blocks by COEIN remains intact even when a block has been exploded by either command The major difference between the coeXplode command and the AutoCAD Explode command is that coeXplode actually deletes the exploded block and redraws it as an Acis Solid Otherwise the two commands behave similarly Note The coeXplode command requires the presence of the original COE file that created the object FULL LAYER TRANSLATION AND FUNCTIONALITY When you import a COE file you can elect to import layer settings as defined in Cyclone into
343. imation Fit Edges Illustration 1 Tr Madelipace MockelSpace ScanMorld 1 street E lalz Ele EM skam pe Mere Gereot EROA os Hele 120 lapl n ex SY ALELLA Ek ABO ra IA Fit Edges Illustration 2 Drege x SHINS XX K UITTAA NNUU 00 YY Edge Scale 0 203 Im Min Step Size 0 008 jm vj 79 Animation Fit Edges Illustration 3 SENS AKIK SUSO UU NN O Y Y Y Edge Scale 0 203 lm ov Min Step Size 0 008 lm vj 0 081 0 026 m Fit Cancel Fit Edges Illustration 4 Edge Scale 0 203 fm y Min Step Size 0 008 jm j 0 092 0 132 m Eit Cancel PA A 80 Animation Color Mapping In Cyclone the default color mapping scheme works as follows each cloud is assigned a range of intensities based on the highest and lowest intensity values of the sampled points These high and low values are mapped to the highest and lowest possible colors in the given scheme hue based grayscale etc producing the largest range of colors which aids visualization This is done for each individual point cloud A consequence is that two points of identical intensity value that appear in different clouds are often mapped and colored differently e To view a cloud mesh s color map select the point cloud mesh and point to Edit Object Appearance Apply Color Map and select the type of color map Or Select the point cloud mesh and select the desired color map from View As tab of the View P
344. imation path by inserting Camera objects along the path in which you wish to create an animation Create Object Insert Camera The Camera objects serve as keyframes 2 Create a path by selecting the Camera objects and then selecting the Create Path or Create Path Loop command A spline or spline loop connecting the Camera objects is created 3 Set the path via the Set Path command which associates the keyframe cameras with the spline and allows the animation tools to use the spline as the animation path Once the path is 92 Animation set you may begin the editing process Open the Animation Editor dialog and edit the animation by setting keyframes and specifying the number of frames between keyframes In the ModelSpace Viewer edit the animation by adjusting the spline shape and camera angles Preview the current animation via the Animate button in the Animation Settings dialog Tools Animation Animate For previewing the Output setting should be In Window Only When finished editing create animation frames by changing the Output setting to To File prefix in the Animation Settings dialog and then clicking the Animate button The specified sequence of frames is saved as numbered files in the specified folder and can be used in your animation software to create the final animation Creating a Path The first step in the animation process is creating a path along which the animation moves To create an animation pat
345. imuth horizontal orientation and up direction vertical orientation Layers As ModelSpaces become larger and more complex using layers can improve modeling efficiency Layers are used to organize objects into logical groups that can be hidden made selectable unselectable and colored uniformly Unlike grouping see the Group entry in the Commands chapter which causes several objects to act as a single object objects in layers maintain their individual properties One advantage to using layers is that the visibility of individual layers can be toggled ON OFF so certain layers can be hidden while others remain visible For example it is possible to have all of the pipes in a ModelSpace on one layer Turning OFF all other layers would then make it easier to focus on modeling or viewing only the pipes An added benefit to working on one layer at a time is that it may improve system performance because Cyclone does not need to render objects or point clouds on hidden layers It can also be useful to keep a layer visible but unselectable in order to use that layer s objects as a visual reference without being able to alter them while modeling 86 Animation Note Layer properties e g visibility and color settings are set at the ModelSpace View level and are not shared by other users working in the same ModelSpace This enables multiple users to use Layer settings to personalize their Views Basic Layer Functions La
346. ine and then select Delete from the Edit menu 249 Index Draw Rectangle Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Rectangle command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a square in the active Reference Plane For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a rectangle 1 o From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Rectangle The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex on one corner of the rectangle Click again to place a vertex at the second corner of the rectangle Click at the desired distance from either side of the line segment to determine the length and direction of the sides parallel to the first segment The angle and length of the fourth side matches the first line segment This segment can be adjusted by dragging or clicking in a new location A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The rectangle is drawn and you are ready to draw another rectangle To delete the newly created rectangle select Undo from the Edit menu or select the rectangle and then select Delete from the Edit menu Draw Square Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Square command enters drawing mode
347. ing commands are available from the Launch submenu Open New Viewer Copy Selection to New ModelSpace Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace Update Original ModelSpace AutoCAD MicroStation Layers Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Opens dialog Usage The Layers command opens the Layers tab of the View Properties dialog which is used to organize objects into layers Layers are user defined logical groupings of objects that can be used to simplify tasks in a crowded ModelSpace For an overview of layers see the Layers entry in the Modeling chapter 316 Index View Properties Dialog Layers Tab O 0 E Site a ja e y Stairs O ml Delete A Click to access the other View Properties tabs B Check to make the layer s objects visible C Check to make the layer s objects selectable D Check to use the layer s color for all the layer s objects E Click to use the color picker to choose a color for the layer F Create a new layer G Designate the selected layer as the current layer Any objects created in the ModelSpace are added to the current layer 317 Index H Create a single new layer from the selected layers If one of the layers is the current layer the new merged layer becomes the current layer I Assign the selected objects to the selected layer J Select all objects in the selected layer K Deselect all objects in the selected layer L Delete the sel
348. ing the object s attributes as text or graphically the dimensions are shown with the additional insulation thickness To edit object preferences 1 2 From the Edit menu select Object Preferences The Object Preferences dialog appears Select the object type you want to edit from the Object Type field Preferences that are not supported by the selected object type are disabled 3 Select the level at which your changes take effect To select a level select User Default Session or View from the Level drop down list see Level following The View level is not available when the dialog is opened from the Navigator window Click the check box next to each preference you wish to enabled when fitting creating or picking objects and then click OK To accept current changes and continue editing preferences for other object types click Apply One Sided Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The One Sided command toggles the hiding of cloud points estimated to be on surfaces facing away from the viewer Only point clouds with valid surface normal vector estimates respond to the One Sided render mode The Point Cloud Rendering Front and Point Cloud Rendering Back commands affect which side is hidden Front hides points on surfaces facing the original scanner Back hides points
349. ings must be entered and the Foresight and Backsight targets must be in the ScanWorld s ControlSpace To perform a traverse 1 SONO Pp 10 Select the target Type 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Set up the scanner over a known point Set up one target over another known point and another target over the next scanner position Connect to the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and enable the dual axis compensator or connect to the HDS6000 and enable the tilt sensor Import or add the known or assumed coordinates using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 From the Window menu select Traverse The Traverse panel appears in the control panel Select Station in the pull down Select the station ID from the list Measure and enter the HI Select Backsight in the pull down or push the gt button to advance to the Backsight entry Select the backsight ID from the list Measure and enter the HT Pick a cloud point on the target over the known point and push Acquire The backsight is acquired If the target already exists in the ControlSpace the target need not be re acquired Select Foresight in the pull down or push the gt button to advance to the Foresight entry Select the foresight ID from the list or enter a new ID Measure and enter the HT Select the target Type Pick a cloud point on the target over the known point and push Acquire The foresight is
350. instructions on adding a folder to the Support File Search Path refer to your AutoCAD documentation YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOAD COEIN ARX FILE Are the COEIN ARX and CyraCoeOut DLL files located in the same folder Search for both files and if they aren t both in the same folder copy the CyraCoeOut DLL file to the folder containing the COEIN ARX folder and try loading COEIN ARX again 121 Cyclone Object Exchange COE You Are Unable to Import a COE file into Cyclone COE files can only be imported into Cyclone via the Navigator window If you were trying to import via a ModelSpace View the COE option is not available Retry your import from the Cyclone Navigator If you are in the Cyclone Navigator and you are not seeing the COE option in the Files of Type field you cannot import a COE file into the selected Navigator level COE files can be imported only at a Database or Project level Commands Import Objects coein Window AutoCAD Menu Cyclone COE Action Opens dialog Usage The Import Objects coein command loads the Import Options dialog which is used to set parameters for importing COE files from Cyclone into AutoCAD Note This command can be activated by selecting it from the Cyclone COE menu by typing coein at the command line or by clicking the Import Objects icon in the toolbar Explode Blocks coeXplode Window AutoCAD Menu Cyclone COE Action Executes command Usage The Explode Blocks coeXplode co
351. into your CD drive If AUTORUN is enabled the installer runs automatically Otherwise open the Windows Start menu and select Run then type the letter of your CD ROM drive for example D followed by 1 SETUP EXE to run the installer Follow the directions in each window to proceed with the installation Default installation parameters should be reasonable for most systems advanced users may select different settings If you have an active firewall you may see messages about programs attempting to access the network For Cyclone to run properly these executables located in the Cyclone installation folder should be permitted access to the network Cyclone exe CyraLicense exe ptserv32 exe update41 exe and LRCServer exe located in the HDS4500 sub folder When the installation is complete reboot your workstation if needed and proceed with obtaining a license to run Cyclone see next section Obtaining your Cyclone License When you install Cyclone for the first time you must activate it with a license key If you are installing over an existing Cyclone installation it may not be necessary to re install your license Your workstation must have an Ethernet card properly installed and activated for the licensing to work To obtain your license 1 2 Before installing Cyclone run the Hostld exe program from the Cyclone CD Email the Host D txt file to Leica Geosystems HDS at mailto license hds leica geosystems com to request
352. ints on surfaces facing the original scanner Back shades points on surfaces facing away from the original scanner Window Navigator Menu Create Action Executes command Usage The Shortcut command creates a shortcut to the selected object in the Shortcuts top level folder A shortcut provides quick access to often used projects ScanWorlds ModelSpaces and Registrations that may be several layers down in the database structure To create a shortcut 1 Inthe Navigator window select the object for which you need a shortcut 2 From the Create menu select Shortcut The shortcut is added to the Shortcuts folder Shortcut in Windows Window Navigator Menu Create Action Displays submenu Usage The Shortcut in Windows command displays a submenu that creates a Windows shortcut to the selected object on the Windows Desktop Start Menu Quick Launch Bar or as a Windows Favorite A shortcut provides quick access to often used projects Scan Worlds ModelSpaces and Registrations that may be several levels down in the database structure When the shortcut is selected Cyclone will launch locate the target of the shortcut and open the appropriate dialog or viewer for it Windows shortcuts created with this command are different from Cyclone shortcuts created in the Cyclone Navigator Windows shortcuts may be placed anywhere within the Windows 430 Index operating system and function outside of Cyclone to launch Cyclone and
353. ions Toggles menu item ON OFF The Show Table Matches command enables disables the use of parts tables when 439 Index fitting objects In order to use parts tables when fitting Catalog Parts Table and Table must be selected within the Object Preferences dialog See the Object Preferences entry in this chapter For an overview of fitting objects in Cyclone see the Modeling entry in the Getting Started chapter Show Traverse Report Window Registration Menu Registration Action Opens dialog Usage The Traverse Report dialog is used to view the parameters and accuracy of a Registration created through Traverse For more information on the traverse process see the Traverse ScanStation ScanStation 2 entry in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 chapter or the Traverse HDS6000 section in the Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 chapter To view the traverse report 1 From the Registration menu select Show Traverse Report The Traverse Report dialog appears displaying the parameters and quality of the traverse Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Silhouette command affects the transparency of each cloud point based on the orientation of that point s estimated surface relative to the viewer such that outlines of surfaces inh
354. ions Manager The Sections Manager tool can be used to generate and manage sections of point clouds from a selected alignment The Sections Process Creating and editing sections can be accomplished in a variety of ways The following series of steps represents a typical project Your specific projects may differ from the following general guidelines All Sections commands and dialogs are accessed in the ModelSpace window from the Tools Alignment and Section submenu Create and select an alignment Open the Sections Manager dialog and create sections on the selected alignment using the Create Sections dialog 104 3 Sections Manager Use the Sections Manager tools to navigate through the sections modify section parameters delete sections collect the points that make up a section and create section lines Create an Alignment The first step in the process of creating sections is creating the alignment object you want to serve as the reference for your sections To create an alignment 1 Select the line polyline or arc you want to use as an alignment The object used to create an alignment can be imported from your CAD software via the COE exchange format see the Cyclone Object Exchange chapter The object may also be created in a variety of ways including using Cyclone s Drawing tools and creating the object via the From Pick Points submenu commands see the From Pick Points entry in the Commands chapter
355. ipe at either end of the pipe run 6 Make modifications or corrections to the region growing Some modifications require a Restart instead of a Continue a f the region grow algorithm fails to fit a pipe in the sequence the Details reports which pipe was not found and suggests the next steps a To include additional pipes in the pipe run Shift Pick additional points on the pipes adjacent to either end of the pipe run already grown then click Continue The additional picks must be in sequence That is pick the next pipe connected to one end then the next pipe in that direction and so on 7 Click OK The pipe run is fit and added to the ModelSpace Register Window Registration Menu Registration Action Executes command Usage The Register command is the step in the registration process during which the optimal alignment transformations are computed for each ScanWorld in the Registration such that the constraints are satisfied as closely as possible n For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter Registration Window Navigator Menu Create Action Executes command Usage The Registration command creates a new Registration in the selected location A Registration can be created in a database or project 387 Index For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter To create a new Registr
356. is facing Azimuth or bearing X 3D point or aimed direction HDS6000 with tilt sensor enabled over known point See the Field Setup entry in the Commands chapter for more information Traverse HDS6000 The default scanner coordinate system is based on an origin point within the scanner the coordinates of the scanner in a global known or assumed coordinate system are not known The Traverse control allows you to take advantage of the HDS6000 s tilt sensor to use conventional surveying techniques to perform a traverse establishing relationships between successive scanner positions within a known or assumed coordinate system Because the tilt sensor detects if the scanner is not level the traverse procedure does not require as many targets as regular target based registration Cyclone supports a linear traverse open or closed A closed traverse loops back on itself whereas an open traverse does not A traverse starts with the scanner over a known point The user acquires a backsight over a known point and a foresight which may be over an arbitrary point The known or assumed coordinates are imported by the Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 commands or are added or replaced by the Add Replace Coordinate command See the corresponding entries in the Commands chapter for more information 21 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 HDS6000 with tilt sensor enabled over known point
357. istance between any two adjacent points included in the fit calculation To restart the fit with the current settings click Restart 4 Click OK If the Fitting Adjust Patch Boundary setting in the Edit Preferences dialog is set to Yes the Adjust Patch Boundary dialog appears Use the slider to adjust the patch s polygonal boundary The closer the slider moves towards Tight Boundary the more rigidly the boundary of the new patch adheres to the points on the edge of the point cloud In some cases this adjustment may necessitate the creation of more than one patch To fit a cylinder or sphere using region growing 1 Select a point in the center of the region of the cloud that make up the interior of the object you want to segment and fit For best results pick three or four points no more than two collinear as far apart from each other as possible near but not on the edges of the object you want to fit When region growing multiple clouds may be selected as long as there is at least one pick point 385 Index If region growing is not performing adequately pick additional points as follows Cylinder Pick six or more points no more than three collinear Sphere Pick four or more points no more than three coplanar From the Create Object menu point to Region Grow and select the type of object you want to fit The Region Growing Sphere Cylinder dialog appears Use the sliders to adjust parameters for the object b
358. it 3 When finished close the temporary ModelSpace viewer A dialog appears with options for saving the temporary ModelSpace View Lock Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to View Lock displays submenu commands used to temporarily disable the ability to pan zoom or rotate the ModelSpace viewpoint The following commands are available from the View Lock submenu Pan Zoom Rotation Clear Locks 466 Index View Mode Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ModelSpace Edit Modes Registration Edit Modes ScanControl Viewers Executes command The View Mode command enters View mode and selects the View mode cursor which is used to manually adjust the ModelSpace viewpoint View ModelSpace Window Menu Action Usage Registration ScanWorld Executes command The View ModelSpace command is used to display a ScanWorld s ModelSpace in one of the Constraint viewer windows To view a ModelSpace 1 From the ModelSpaces tab select the ModelSpace you want to view 2 From the ScanWorld menu select View ModelSpace The ModelSpace appears in one of the two Constraint viewer windows a The first ModelSpace that you open appears in the subwindow on the bottom left side of the Registration window The next appears on the right and then each subsequently viewed ModelSpace is alternately loaded into the left and right windows a Th
359. ith dual axis compensator enabled over known point Foresight Backsight over known point 30 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 After the scan data for the current scanner position have been acquired the user moves the scanner to the next position over the same point as the previous foresight D nnn gt Foresight Backsight ScanStation ScanStation 2 over previous Foresight The pattern is repeated Each time the scanner is moved to the foresight and the previous position becomes the new position s backsight The new position s foresight is where the scanner will be positioned next Eventually the traverse can end when the foresight is over a known point Any foresight can be a known point without ending the traverse The traverse is a closed traverse if the foresight is the same as the original backsight 31 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 The traverse workflow produces a Registration that tracks the backsight station and foresight of each scanner position ScanWorld This Registration can be frozen and used as is or may be supplemented with additional target and or cloud constraints See the Traverse entry in the Commands chapter for more information QuickScan QuickScan is a convenient way of quickly initiating a scan when your field of view settings do not need to be precise and your other Scan Control settings are already satisfactory
360. ivating this command you are not required to pick near potential targets Cyclone locates and lists up to a maximum number of potential sphere targets in the point cloud with the maximum number defined in the Max field in this dialog Note The number of target candidates listed when you invoke either Search HDS Targets from Selected Cloud or Search Spheres from Selected Cloud is independent of the number of potential targets already listed in this dialog Click the Recheck Targets icon to automatically re acquire the checked targets and display a report of the deviations from the previous results In the dialog that appears specify the Recheck Tolerance the maximum distance that the target position is allowed to have changed and Target Prefix prepended to the names of the re acquired targets This can be used to detect if the scanner or targets have unknowingly changed location over some period of time The rechecked targets are placed on the special Target QA QC layer for reference The Target Number column displays target candidates that have been identified either by the user or by Cyclone using one of the icon commands Target ID Type a unique registration label for each potential target Target Ht Type the height for each potential target Comment Type notes or commentary about the potential target When this field contains data for Acquire Status Max Acquire Stop a target that is subsequently acquired the data b
361. jects selected multiple measurements are taken from the first point or object to the subsequent selection items i e first to second first to third etc Center points centerlines and surfaces are measured differently depending on the type of object selected and some measurements are not supported by all object types Download HDS6000 Scans Window Navigator Menu Tools Action Executes command Usage The Download HDS6000 Scans command is used to download ZFS files from the HDS6000 that were not automatically downloaded Only HDS6000 scans that were not automatically downloaded as per the HDS4500 HDS6000 Max Points Auto Imported preference are considered To download HDS6000 scans i w In the Navigator window select the container under which HDS6000 Scans eligible for download are located The container can be a database Project ScanWorld Registration or Scan You can select multiple containers Turn on the HDS6000 and physically connect it to the network This command does not need the Scan Control to be connected to the scanner In the Navigator window on the Tools menu select Download HDS6000 Scans If there are multiple HDS6000 scanners configured on the computer select the specific HDS6000 from which to download using the Download Scans from HDS6000 dialog that appears in this case The ZFS files are downloaded from the HDS6000 Use the Re Import Scans command to import the downloade
362. just rotational spacing see the Set Rotational Spacing command Snapping Grid Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Snapping Grid displays submenu commands used to toggle the snapping grid ON OFF and edit grid settings 441 Index The following commands are available from the Snapping Grid submenu Set Grid Spacing Set Rotational Spacing Snap to Grid The snapping grid is used to control object movement when using handles For 2D drawing the snapping grid is aligned to the active Reference Plane s origin and axes For object manipulation the snapping is an invisible 3D grid aligned with the active coordinate system and spaced by the given spacing in all three directions When ON objects vertices jump to the next grid increment as you move them draw them and objects jump to the next interval when rotated using its rotation handle When OFF objects move independently of grid settings Window ModelSpace Scan Control Image Viewer Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Save Snapshot to File dialog is used to save an image of the current ModelSpace Scan Control or Image To save a snapshot of the current window 1 From the File menu select Snapshot The Save Snapshot to File dialog appears 2 Select the file format you want from the Save as type box 3 Navigate to the desired destination directory type a name for the file and then click Sav
363. k White Targets from Picks icon to find potential black white target candidates near user picked points Click the Acquire Spheres from Picks icon to find potential sphere target candidates near user picked points Click the Acquire HDS Target from Fence icon to find a HDS target within the user defined fence The fence should be as small as possible no larger than the actual target centered on the target w Click the Acquire Black White Target from Fence icon to find a black white target within the user defined fence The fence should be as small as possible no larger than the actual target centered on the target Hp Click the Acquire Sphere from Fence icon to find a sphere target within the user defined fence The fence should be as small as possible no larger than the actual target centered on the target Bly E a 141 Index Click the Search HDS Targets from Selected Cloud icon to find potential HDS Target candidates in a selected point cloud You are only required to select a point cloud before activating this command you are not required to pick near potential targets Cyclone locates and lists up to a maximum number of potential HDS Target targets in the point cloud with the maximum number defined in the Max field in this dialog Click the Search Spheres from Selected Cloud icon to find potential sphere target candidates in a selected point cloud You are only required to select a point cloud before act
364. k the Probe button Scan Filter Range and or intensity parameters can be set via the Scan Filter control Points sampled outside these parameters are discarded without being recorded to the database Field Setup HDS6000 The default scanner coordinate system is based on an origin point within the scanner The Field Setup panel allows you to take advantage of the HDS6000 s tilt sensor and use conventional surveying techniques to establish a relationship between the scanner and a known or assumed coordinate system The known or assumed coordinates are imported by the Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 commands or are added or replaced by the Add Replace Coordinate command See the corresponding entries in the Commands chapter for more information Field Setup can also be used to establish the backsight and station position of a new Traverse see below Field Setup Methods Resection from two or more targets over known coordinates Target over _ amp known point Target over wee ee Lx known point a one Target over known point HDS6000 with tilt sensor enabled over unknown point 20 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 Acquiring a target over a known coordinate from a scanner placed over a known coordinate Target over Z N known point HDS6000 with tilt sensor enabled over known point Entering an azimuth or bearing to a 3D point or in the direction that the scanner
365. ked as visible in the Image Viewer or ModelSpace windows select Show Annotations from the Annotations submenu Annotation menu in the Image Viewer window To toggle the visibility of an individual annotation select the object with which the annotation is associated then open the Annotations dialog Select deselect the box in the Visibility column for the desired annotation The Show Annotations option in the viewer must be enabled before any annotation is drawn The Annotations dialog contains two tabs the Annotations tab and the Custom tab The Annotation tab lists all annotations for the current selection including annotations created in the Custom tab feature code annotations and registration labels See the Add Edit Custom Annotations command for information on creating and editing custom annotations Refer to the following text for directions on adding editing and deleting annotations using the Annotations tab of the Annotations dialog Note The procedures below refer to the menus and sub menus in the ModelSpace window for accessing the Annotations dialog If you are in the Navigator or Image Viewer windows substitute the appropriate menus To create a new annotation Note In addition to the procedure described below you can create new annotations from the Custom tab when you are in a ModelSpace View For information on creating custom annotations see the Add Edit Custom Annotations entry in this chapter 149
366. lSpace Menu Tools Info Action Opens dialog Usage The Object Info dialog is used to view available information on the current image Image Resolution Window Scan Control Menu Image Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Image Resolution displays submenu commands to select High 1024x1024 Medium 512x512 or Low 256x256 resolution for image acquisition This command does not apply to the HDS2500 Window ModelSpace Navigator Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Import From File dialog is used to import images objects and point data into Cyclone from a variety of common image and text file formats For instructions on importing COE files into Cyclone see COE for AutoCADor COE for MicroStation of this manual Note Importing a file into a project via the Navigator window generally reconstructs the most objects e g ScanWorld with Registration Scans ModelSpace with ModelSpace View Importing a file into a ModelSpace recovers only the geometry from that file n Some ASCII files have pre established formats and are imported directly into Cyclone the data contained in the files is represented by point clouds or vertices in the resulting ModelSpace Other text files do not import directly Instead an Import ASCII File Format dialog is displayed prompting you to define map the format of the file so that Cyclone can read or parse it correctly and extract the relevant information You can
367. lSpace J Display a scanner object in ModelSpace representing the selected scanner K Display boundary of the maximum Field of View of the selected scanner L Set Field of View color for the selected scanner ScanWorld Explorer Dialog Original Scans Scanvvorlds Scanvvorld 1 scant 2999x1999 4sose53 M0 985 051 ho 4 Scanners 40 Original Scans ES Unified Clouds A Opens separate dialog where information about the selected scanner is displayed B Aligns the viewpoint in the ModelSpace View window so it matches the viewpoint of the selected scanner 407 Index C Refresh All D Customize columns E Segments the selected scan based on each point s distance to the scanner F Displays the name of the scan G Displays the actual dimensions of the selected scan H Displays the number of points contained within the selected scan l Toggles display of selected scan s point cloud in ModelSpace J Toggles display of the Field of View boundary for the selected scan K Displays Field of View s Near Extent for the scan L Displays Field of View s Far Extent for the scan ScanWorld Explorer Dialog Unified Clouds ay amp Scan World Explo er 16 0 23 Scanvorlds Scanvvorld 1 Unified lt 12746 gt 1779725 A Opens separate dialog where information about the selected scanner is displayed B Aligns the viewpoint in the ModelSpace View window so it matches the viewpoin
368. lSpace including counts of selected objects the layer of the object selected last the distance between the last two picks if available the angle between the last two picks if appropriate and the progress of the loading of objects Basic Viewpoint Controls Cyclone provides controls in View mode that allow you to manually rotate pan and zoom the viewpoint using the mouse The viewpoint rotates around and zooms in out from a focal point The focal point is a point that is a certain distance in front of the center of the viewpoint The distance is controlled by zooming the viewpoint The focal point can be reset via Seek mode and can be moved by panning the viewpoint e To rotate the viewpoint drag around the focal point while in View mode e To pan the viewpoint right drag press and hold the right mouse button while moving the mouse in the desired direction while in View mode e To zoom the viewpoint press and hold both mouse buttons and move the mouse down to zoom in and up to zoom out See the Changing the Viewpoint section in ModelSpace Navigation for more detailed information 16 Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 The Scanning Process Scanning can be accomplished in a variety of ways but all scanning operations generally are divided into the following basic groups 1 Creating a Scanner using the Navigator window 2 Organizing Scan Data by selecting Projects and ScanWorlds Cyclone prompts you to do this automa
369. lane Y Z Plane 200 Index This command limits handle motion to be along a specified axis or plane Constraining the object handles to move only along a certain plane or axis prevents you from moving the object in an unwanted direction Some handles may not be able to move according to the constraints e g rotation and other custom handles For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter Contours Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Contours displays submenu commands used to create and manipulate contour lines The following commands are available from the Contours submenu Create Decimate Contours Delete Line For Contours submenu command functionality see the individual command entries Contours to Mesh Deviations Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Opens dialog Usage The Contours to Mesh Deviations command compares the line segments in the selected contour set with the faces in a selected mesh or originating mesh if no mesh is selected and uses the data to calculate deviations in accordance with user defined parameters This command is active only for mesh objects that have been created from a point cloud as opposed to point clouds that are merely viewed as a mesh See the Create Meshcommand for more information on creating a mesh object To calculate contours to mesh deviations 1 Select a contour line
370. lative depth may be easier to visualize The real world is viewed in perspective In orthographic projection parallel lines remain parallel though perceived angles may change It may be difficult to determine relative depth but this view is often preferred by architects and engineers in top down or side views The real world however is viewed in perspective 346 Index Pick Mode Window ModelSpace Registration Scan Control Menu ModelSpace Edit Modes Registration Edit Modes ScanControl Viewers Action Executes command Usage The Pick Mode command enters Pick mode and selects the Pick mode cursor Pick mode is used to select and interact with objects Pick Multi Pick View Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Pick Multi Pick View command cycles between Pick mode Multi Pick mode and View mode a The main purpose of this command is to allow for a single hotkey to cycle through the modes To assign hotkeys see the Customize Hotkeys entry in this chapter Pick View Toggle Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Pick View Toggle command switches between Pick mode and View mode The main purpose of this command is to allow for a single hotkey to toggle between the two modes To assign hotkeys see the Customize Hotkeys command Pipe Modeling Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Opens dialog Usage The Pipe
371. lbow bend radius to pipe OD 4 Click OK to complete the operation Edit Environmental Lights Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Lighting Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Environmental Lights dialog is used to adjust Head Light and Ambient Light settings n For more information about lighting see the Lighting entry in the Modeling chapter Light Settings Dialog Options Head Light tab HEAD LIGHT COLOR Use the color picker to assign a color to the Head Light HEAD LIGHT INTENSITY Set the Head Light intensity from O dark to 1 bright HEAD LIGHT STATE Turn the Head Light ON or OFF 258 Index Light Settings Dialog Options Ambient Light tab AMBIENT LIGHT COLOR Use the color picker to assign a color to the Ambient Light AMBIENT LIGHT INTENSITY Set the Ambient Light intensity from 0 dark to 1 bright To adjust Light Settings 1 oO E From the Toolsmenu point to Lighting and then select Edit Environmental Lights The Light Settings dialog appears Make the changes you want to the various settings To return all options to factory default settings click Reset Click OK to complete the operation To see the changes immediately click Apply To exit without saving unapplied changes click Close Changes that have been applied are already saved Edit Global Color Map Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Opens dialog Usage The Global Color Map dialog is u
372. learances Up to three sets of horizontal measurements are generated a The horizontal distance between each lane line Optional The minimum horizontal clearance to the left of the left most lane line at the specified elevation Optional The minimum horizontal clearance to the right of the left most lane line at the specified elevation Clear Calibration Info Window Scan Control Image Viewer Menu Scan Control Scanner Control Camera Calibration Image Viewer Image Calibration Action Executes command Usage The Clear Calibration Info command is used to remove camera calibration data from the current image if the calibration seems to be incorrect For a general overview of camera calibration see the Camera Calibration entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 chapter Note Clearing the calibration disables the ability to texture map the current image onto point clouds or meshes and also removes the distortion correction of the image when viewed in the Scan Control or Image Viewer windows Clear Image Window Scan Control Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Clear Image command removes the image from the viewing window in the Scan Control window Clear Locks Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint View Lock Action Executes command Usage The Clear Locks command turns OFF all View Locks 194 Index Clear Path Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Animation Action Executes command Us
373. lect Delete from the Edit menu Draw Circle Point Center Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Circle Point Center command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a circle in the active Reference Plane n For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a circle 1 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Circle Point Center The Drawing cursor appears 2 In the ModelSpace click once to place a vertex at a point on the circle 3 Click again or drag the cursor to place a vertex that serves as the center point a A vertex can be moved by dragging it to a new position or deleted by clicking on it without moving the cursor 4 From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The circle is drawn and you are ready to draw another circle To delete the newly created circle either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the circle and then select Delete from the Edit menu Draw Cubic Spline Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Draw Cubic Spline command enters drawing mode and sets the drawing tool to draw a cubic spline in the active Reference Plane n For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter n The procedures for drawing a cubic spline are identical to those for drawing a polyline except that the
374. lect Sections Manager The Sections Manager dialog appears Use the Sections Manager dialog to create delete and edit sections When finished click Close To edit multiple sections simultaneously see below activate a single section and then multi select the desired sections from the sections list and make your edits Changes are applied to all selected sections Create Sections Dialog Options INITIAL STATION Specify the distance along the alignment at which you want to place the first section END STATION Specify the distance along the alignment at which you want to place the last section SPACING Specify the interval between sections INCLUDE TRANSITION POINTS Select this option to also create a section at each transition point the point at which two of the original curves or arcs connect that falls within the creation interval SECTION EXTENTS All Section Extents settings are relative to the direction from the start station towards the end station of the alignment CREATE LINES Select this option to create lines based on a temporary TIN mesh which is created from the points within each section More controllable results may be obtained by first creating the sections and then adjusting sections and creating lines afterward via the Create Lines at Section in the Sections Manager dialog COLLECT POINTS Select this option to introduce merged clouds from the points that fall within the boundaries of each section Thi
375. led property of a ScanWorld 1 Inthe ScanWorlds Constraints or ModelSpaces tab select one or more ScanWorlds 2 From the ScanWorld menu select Toggle ScanWorld Leveled The property is toggled for each selected ScanWorld Traverse Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000 Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Traverse command expands the Traverse tab in the Scanner Control Panel For an overview of the Traverse process see the Traverse ScanStation ScanStation 2 section in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 chapter or the Traverse HDS6000 section in the Scanning with the HDS6000 and HDS4500 chapter The Traverse procedure requires an enabled dual axis compensator ScanStation ScanStation 2 or enabled tilt sensor HDS6000 The scanner must be close to level Traverse Tab Options REGISTRATION Displays the current Registration that represents the Traverse OPTIONS 453 Index Displays a pop up menu with additional Traverse operations RECHECK BACKSIGHT Re acquires the backsight target to see if the scanner has drifted since the backsight was first acquired REPORT Displays the Traverse Report dialog which displays the parameters and quality of the traverse DISPLAY Launches the ModelSpace for Traverse ModelSpace viewer with a top down view of the current Traverse APPEND CURRENT STATION Re opens a closed Traverse and adds the current S
376. log The next vertex plotted will be exactly that distance 416 Index away from the previous vertex Some shapes and steps may not support this distance e g plotting the last vertex in a square Set from Active Ref Plane Cutplane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Executes command Usage The Set from Active Ref Plane command aligns the active Cutplane to the active Reference Plane For information on Cutplane attributes see the Add Edit Cutplanes command Set From Points Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Coordinate System from Pick Points dialog is used to set any or all of the following a reference point the azimuth horizontal orientation and the up direction vertical orientation To set the reference point only 1 In Pick mode click the point to use as the reference point 2 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then select Set from Points The Set Coordinate System From Pick Points dialog appears a Setting the reference point does not affect the current orientation of the coordinate axes 3 Enter the coordinate for the reference point and then click OK The new coordinate is applied To set the reference and azimuth 1 In Pick mode click the point to use as the reference point 2 Mult select the point you want to use for azimuth reference 3 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and the
377. lone lets you pan rotate and zoom the viewpoint in 3D However you may prefer not to rotate the view with all three degrees of freedom roll yaw and pitch turned ON For example it is not always obvious which way is up The Keep Viewpoint Upright command removes the roll component of the viewer in order to keep the up axis oriented upward in the viewer while rotating the viewpoint That is you can rotate left and right and up and down but you can t view a scene upside down A ModelSpace s up and down are initially defined by the current coordinate system By default up follows the same direction as the positive Y axis a A ModelSpace s up can be set via the Set Up Direction or the Set from Points command ModelSpace Views A ModelSpace View is a collection of settings applied to a ModelSpace including the initial viewing position and settings for graphical viewing parameters that override the object s default parameters Multiple ModelSpace Views can be saved and restored for a given ModelSpace to provide ready access to particular aspects of a ModelSpace or to provide a custom modeling environment for a modeler in a large multi person project All changes made to objects within the ModelSpace are immediately reflected in all of the ModelSpace s Views Multiple users may share a single view one user s changes to the shared View are visible to the other users of that View e To save ModelSpac
378. losed Color Palette operations interact directly with the ModelSpace 153 Index To apply a saved color from the Color Palette directly to selected object s in the ModelSpace In the current ModelSpace select the object s whose color you want to change Close the Color and Material Editor dialog if it is open From the Color Palette select the color that you want to apply From the Color Palette shortcut menu select Apply Color or double click the color you want from the Color Palette The color the diffuse and ambient properties of the selected object is changed Pon To apply a saved color from the Color Palette to the current color swatch in the Material Editor 1 Fromthe Color Palette select the color you want to apply 2 From the Color Palette shortcut menu select Apply Color or double click the color you want from the Color Palette The current color swatch changes to match the selected color in the Color Palette To save a color to the Color Palette from a selected object in the ModelSpace Open the Color Palette Close the Color and Material Editor dialog if it is open Select the object whose color you want to save From the Color Palette shortcut menu select Add Color The current color is inserted into the Color Palette Pon To save a color to the Color Palette from the Color and Material Editor dialog 1 Create place the color you want in the Current Color swatch 2 From the Color Palette
379. lumns can be resized as needed and the dialog box can be widened as necessary to view additional columns 12 When you are satisfied with the settings click the Save as button next to the Format field and enter a name for this ASCII file format This makes the format available for future use a To save this format to an external file for use on another machine click the Export Format to a File icon 13 To complete the import process click the Import button Each coordinate is imported as a vertex into the created ModelSpace The newly created vertices are also placed automatically into the ScanWorld s ControlSpace if importing into an existing or import created ScanWorld To import an ASCII file as a point cloud See To import an ASCII file as vertices for a description of the process Additionally select the As Point Cloud checkbox to enable the import of the coordinates in the ASCII file as a single point cloud instead of as individual vertices 1 Configure the column headings based on the contents of the ASCII file a lf the file specifies a red green blue color for each point assign the Red Green and Blue headings to the corresponding columns sf the file specifies a grayscale value for each point assign the Gray heading to the corresponding column a lfthe file specifies an intensity for each point assign the Intensity heading to the corresponding column If the file specifies a normal vecto
380. lways Visible i aeui eean er aa A R ia 302 Hide Point CloudS acur ria e EEA ea CTE Ea NR R ad ca 302 Home Positi Mnusnes ravene p aia E 302 HOST aE NEEE E a eer EE E er renee rere ern 303 Hide Selected Clouds dust dial db 303 Hide Unselected GloudS n in e a a ea A ees 303 Mage IO ts scessccscediecbidncaseeobiate A A EA iA AAEE ER ER E 304 image ROSQ UON ccoo ii bi lots 304 OO acond ee eerie 304 Import Limit Box Managen e E A E E 308 Import calibration If tire 308 Import Goordinate Lista riiit dci 309 Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 000oocccccoccccccnonoccnononaccnonnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnonnnnccnnns 309 Import CUSTOMIZATIONS seco A david 310 lmport Keica System 1200ra i vears Peel a a a ete 310 impon FREGISKHATOM aina a E ga ca ve ne E E E AE a EE 310 increase Point Wide ia lis 311 Info Limit Box Manage umi 311 Info ModelSpace Viewel occcoconnccccccnonocccononoccnonnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnennananenns 311 Info Scan Control VIEW inis tai 311 IMSEN seein tect Lege aiat ewes ee dag dees ENEAN EEE dee dae Sea EAEAN A TEN E dee ceed eee et 311 Insert Copy of Objects Ponts cocina iia cOA 313 I sert Font Litio iia 313 Insert Spot lO ias 313 Intertering PolMtS c A A pd dite ean 314 xi Table Of Contents VINWONT coven er tiks coc T EEES ts ENEA TT ET debates Coach cata EESE Saban dete ake oe 314 Invert SOlSCON ices ccssdodancdsceessasroabns sadeneentecodanedaceddcayanoebongawede neshedanedicen
381. m the Edit menu select Paste Link The link appears in the selected location Links are identical to their source object and renaming a link also renames the source object Links can only be pasted into the same database as the source object Note If you have copied multiple selections and then use the Paste Link command only the last object selected is linked U Na gt 344 Index Paste Reference Window Navigator Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Paste Reference command is used to paste an object e g a point cloud with references to the point cloud s data in the source database saving time and space by avoiding duplication of data When the destination database needs to access the point cloud s data the data is retrieved from the source database or another database that has that information the database that has the data must be accessible on the client s local server Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Curves Action Executes command Usage The Patch command creates a patch from a series of selected lines or curves To create a patch from intersecting curves 1 Select a sequence of lines or curves that form the outline of the patch you want to create a The lines or curves must be selected in a consistently clockwise or counter clockwise order 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Curves and then select Patch The patch is created Patch Submenu Windo
382. m the reference object a The direction of translation depends on the types of the objects being used 379 Index QuickScan command Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The QuickScan command is used to quickly initiate a scan when your field of view settings do not need to be precise and your other scan control settings are already satisfactory See also the Station Data tab entry in the Commands chapter To QuickScan 1 Non on gn In the Scan Control Window Field of View tab click the QuickScan button The Aim Scanner dialog appears The scanner motor disengages to allow you to rotate the scanner on its mount Rotate the scanner on its mount and aim it toward the left extent of the region you want to scan To accept the current left extent click the Skip button to proceed to step 4 To cancel QuickScan without changing any scanner settings click the Cancel button Press the multi purpose button on the scanner The Aim Scanner dialog prompts you to aim the scanner toward the right extent of the region you want to scan Rotate the scanner on its mount and aim it toward the right extent of the region you want to scan To accept the scanner s current position as the right extent click the Skip button to set the right extent Any dependent values e g number of points also update Press the multi purpose button on the scanner The target region s right ho
383. map s constraints can have for a valid texture map computation PIPING PIPE RADIUS Leave Radii Unchanged leaves each pipe radius at its current value and adjusts pipe centerlines so that sequential pipes are coplanar Force Uniform Radius forces all pipes to have the same radius If points are used when refitting the pipes each pipe s radius is set to the size that best fits all point clouds used in the fitting Otherwise each pipe s radius is set to the average of the initial pipe radii Refit Individual Radii optimizes each pipe s radius if points are used when refitting the pipe Otherwise the pipe s radius is left at its current value PIPING RE FITTING Ignore Points disregards points used in the original fitting of the pipe during connection by elbow and forces sequential pipes to be coplanar by minimal movement of their end points so that pipes are not refit Refit to Points refits pipes using points that were used in the original fitting PIPING MAX OFFSET LINEAR OF BRANCH CONNECTION Enter a value for the greatest distance allowed between the opposing center points for a linear connection and the greatest distance allowed between the center point of the branch to the centerline of the run when connecting piping PIPING MAX ANGLE LINEAR CONNECTION Enter a value for the greatest angle allowed between the tangents of the opposing faces when connecting piping A value of 0 means that the tangent vectors mus
384. mber of Points based on Range 3 Changing Number of Points changes Sample Spacing based on Range Resolution HDS4500 Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage Pointing to Resolution displays submenu commands used to set a standard interval between data points to be captured in the next scan operation The following intervals are available from the Resolution submenu Highest Sample at every 0 018 x 0 018 degree 20 000 samples in a 360 degree circle High Sample at every 0 036 x 0 036 degree 10 000 samples in a 360 degree circle Medium Sample at every 0 072 x 0 072 degree 5 000 samples in a 360 degree circle Low Preview Sample at every 0 288 x 0 288 degree 1 250 samples in a 360 degree circle Resolution HDS6000 Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage Pointing to Resolution displays submenu commands used to set a standard interval between data points to be captured in the next scan operation The following intervals are available from the Resolution submenu Ultra High Sample at every 0 009 x 0 009 degree 40 000 samples in a 360 degree circle Highest Sample at every 0 018 x 0 018 degree 20 000 samples in a 360 degree circle High Sample at every 0 036 x 0 036 degree 10 000 samples in a 360 degree circle Medium Sample at every 0 072 x 0 072 degree 5 000 samples in a 360 degree circle Low Preview Sample
385. me is the name displayed in the Navigator window In the Database Filename field type a file name for your database The database filename is the name used for the database file which is saved in the Cyclone Databases directory by default a lf you leave the Database Filename field empty Cyclone bases the file name on the logical name you entered in the Database Name field a You may select a new location for the database file by clicking the Browse icon to the right of the Database Name field 6 Click OK The database is created 7 Click Close to close the Configure Databases dialog Pon gl Scanning Scanning is the process of using the HDS system to sample take measurements from a scene in the real world Each individual measurement results in a 3D point An entire scan results in collections of these 3D points called point clouds These point clouds provide the basis for surface reconstruction or modeling which is the main application of Cyclone 12 Quick Start The Scanning Process Scanning Overview From the Navigator window add a scanner object to represent your scanner Open a Scan Control window and connect to the scanner Organize project folders for your scan data Adjust settings and target your scan Execute your scan For details on the scanning process see the Scanning chapters Oo PON Preparing for Scanning The first time that you want to use a scanner it is necessary to crea
386. menu point to Drawing and then select Draw Text The Drawing cursor appears In the ModelSpace click to select a point to anchor the text The 2D Drawing Text dialog appears In the Text to be Drawn field type the text you want and click OK The text can be moved by dragging or clicking in a new location From the Tools menu point to Drawing and then select Create Drawing The text is placed and you are ready to add more text To view the newly created text the Show Annotationscommand must be ON To delete the newly created text either select Undo from the Edit menu or select the text and then select Delete from the Edit menu Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Drawing displays submenu commands used to access a variety of drawing tools and settings The following commands and dialogs are available from the Drawing submenu Create Drawing Cancel Drawing Draw Line Draw Polyline Draw Square Draw Rectangle Draw Isometric Polygon Draw Polygon Draw Text Draw Arc 3 Points on Arc Draw Arc 251 Index Start End Center Draw Arc Start Center End Draw Circle 3 Points on Circle Draw Circle Point Center Draw Ellipse Draw Cubic Spline Draw Cubic Spline Loop Align Vertices to Axes Set Distance to Next Vertex Edit Drawing Parameters Create Drawing from Object Export Template n For complete more information see the individual entries in
387. method for bringing Cyclone point clouds into MicroStation is to use Leica Geosystems HDS s CloudWorx application 126 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Translating Objects from MicroStation to Cyclone Objects modeled within the MicroStation environment can be exported using the COEOUT command to a COE file for subsequent import into Cyclone There are two primary reasons for translating objects from MicroStation to Cyclone Simple export Objects modeled in MicroStation can be exported to a new COE file When this file is imported into Cyclone a new ModelSpace is created and populated with the MicroStation modeled objects contained in the COE file Data integration Objects modeled in Cyclone and imported into MicroStation via a COE file can be modified in MicroStation and then exported back into Cyclone all the while maintaining much of the original data e g annotations from the original COE file from Cyclone To do this COEOUT uses the original COE file as a reference when creating the COE file to be translated to Cyclone Note Although COEOUT functions in both MicroStation J and Micro Station SE the translation of complex surface solid type objects into Cyclone objects e g extrusions or revolutions of complex shapes or complex strings is more likely to succeed when using MicroStation J MicroStation modeled objects are translated by mapping to equivalent or near equivalent objects within Cyclone However some objects may n
388. mmand is used to explode objects imported as blocks from Cyclone a The coeXplode command is similar to the AutoCAD Explode command however the coeXplode command actually deletes the exploded block and redraws it as an Acis Solid Note The coeXplode command requires the presence of the original COE file from which the object was imported Export Objects coeout Window AutoCAD Menu Cyclone COE Action Opens dialog Usage The Export Objects coeout command opens the Export Options dialog which is used to set parameters for exporting COE files from AutoCAD to Cyclone 122 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Note This command can be activated by selecting it from the Cyclone COE menu by typing coeout at the command line or by clicking the Export Objects icon in the toolbar COE for MicroStation Introduction The Cyclone Object Exchange COE file format is a neutral file format created for the specific purpose of interchanging objects between Cyclone and major CAD systems including MicroStation COE files are accessible via two MicroStation command plug ins COEIN and COEOUT This chapter addresses how to use these plug ins in MicroStation as well as how to create new COE files and read imported COE files in Cyclone A troubleshooting section is also included to help you address some of the more common problems that may occur when working with COE files Requirements To use the COE import export feature you must be r
389. mpensator which automatically corrects scanner data for scanner tilt from perfectly level By default the dual axis compensator is enabled To toggle the dual axis compensator select Enable Dual Axis Compensator from the Scanner menu You may wish to disable the dual axis compensator in some situations for example when the scanner is on an unstable platform such as a moving ship When enabled the dual axis compensator automatically corrects scanner data while the amount of tilt is within the compensator s operating range If the scanner tilts beyond the compensator s operating range the current scanner operation is automatically cancelled and you are informed that the ScanStation ScanStation 2 must be re levelled You can also manually check or re level the ScanStation ScanStation 2 by selecting Check Re Level ScanStation from the Scanner menu If the dual axis compensator state changes significantly e g a large amount of drift manual adjustment of the tribrach or out of range for data integrity the current ScanWorld is automatically advanced to the next ScanWorld You may re select the previous ScanWorld for additional work but be sure that the data are consistent Capturing an Image You can capture an image of the scene from the point of view of the scanner and display it in the Scan Control window This image is useful for determining the field of view of the scanner as well as for targeting areas of the scene to be scann
390. n CONVERGENCE CRITERIA Enter a value to define the smallest improvement in registration error after which the registration optimization ends A smaller number may make registration take longer 362 Index CLOUD REG DEFAULT MAX SEARCH DISTANCE Enter a value for the maximum distance to be searched matching pick points during cloud registration Setting this value above the default four inches may decrease the speed and reliability of the optimal alignment CLOUD REG DEFAULT SUBSAMPLING PERCENTAGE Enter a percentage to specify the percentage of each cloud used with the Optimize Cloud Alignment This setting amounts to a speed versus accuracy trade off The default is 3 which is effective and efficient for typical scan cloud sizes i e point clouds with one million points In general a value of 100 may give results up to twice as accurate as a value of 3 but may take approximately ten times as long CLOUD REG DEFAULT MAX ITERATIONS Enter a value for the number of iterations above which a warning appears when the Optimize Cloud Alignment function has not converged on a solution CLOUD REG DEFAULT INITIAL GUESS METHOD Select a method to use as the starting point for cloud registration calculations Fitting Tab Settings MULTIPLE POINT CLOUD STYLE Fit Multiple Objects fits a separate object to each point cloud when more than one point cloud is selected Fit Single Object fits a single object to selected multiple point
391. n and region growing smooth surfaces Initialization Tab Settings CONTROLSPACE COLOR MAP MODE Select Colors from Scanner or Intensity Map to set the color map used in subsequently launched ControlSpaces Select Custom to keep the current color map when launching an existing ControlSpace This may be overridden by any global color mapping CONTROLSPACE COLOR MAP SCHEME Select Multi Hue Rainbow or Grayscale to set the color scheme used in subsequently launched ControlSpaces This may be overridden by any global color mapping 368 Index NEW MODELSPACE VIEW COLOR MAP MODE Select Colors from Scanner or Intensity Map to set the color map used in subsequently created ModelSpace Views This may be overridden by any global color mapping NEW MODELSPACE VIEW COLOR MAP SCHEME Select Multi Hue Rainbow or Grayscale to set the color scheme used in subsequently created ModelSpace Views This may be overridden by any global color mapping NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL COLOR MAP Select Enabled to initially use global color map settings when creating a new ModelSpace View NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL COLOR MAP MODE Select Colors from Scanner Color Map Elevation Map or Single Color to be applied when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL COLOR MAP SCHEME Select Multi Hue Rainbow Grayscale a topography based palette or a single scaled color with which to dis
392. n either by entering a value or by moving the slider a As this value is changed the values for absolute deviation maximum deviation and minimum deviation as well as the number of line segments change accordingly and are displayed in 232 the ower half of the dialog a To exit the dialog without decimating the contour line click Cancel 4 Click OK The number of vertices in the contour line is reduced and the line is redrawn Decimate Mesh Index Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Opens dialog Usage The Decimate Mesh dialog is used to reduce the number of triangles in a mesh object Decimate Mesh Dialog g Decimate Mesh x OD Decimate H Decimate Mesh Eq ee a a a a E 0 10 100 m Triangles NA Target Number 1878 of Original fia DEE Urna Humber eze e m Vertices gt r Boundary Edg s r Breakline Edges E Maintain C Ignore gnore Maintain Ghanan C Keep Exact Keep Exact DK Cancel A Click to perform the decimation When clicked this button is replaced by an Auto Preview option and a slider bar see B and F below B When selected the display in the ModelSpace viewer is adjusted continually as the Decimation Percentage slider to the right of this option is moved C Displays the number of triangles resulting from movement of the slider or entry of a percentage in the of Original field You may also enter an e
393. n for elevation values and whether or not to display elevation unit suffixes e g ft and you can change the alignment of the contour label text relative to the contour lines Select either Reference Plane or Current Coordinate System as the base from which to draw the contours Z 0 Click OK to create the contours Contours are drawn parallel either to the active Reference Plane or to the current coordinate system as defined in the previous step By default major contours are drawn with a heavier line weight than minor contours Use the Edit Propertiesdialog Edit Object Edit Properties to modify contour line properties Create Exclusion Volume Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Exclusion Volume Action Executes command Usage The Create command replaces an object or group of objects with a box containing the objects An exclusion volume is an object that encloses other objects It is typically used to contain clouds of points for which you need only a rough approximation of the volume occupied To create an Exclusion Volume 1 2 Select the object s or group you want to enclose From the Tools menu point to Exclusion Volume and then select Create The object s or group is replaced by a rectangular volume containing the objects To restore the contents of an exclusion volume select the exclusion volume and then select Disassemble from the Tools Exclusion Volume submenu 209 Index Create Limit Box Ma
394. n persistent preferences that last for the duration of the current execution of Cyclone only Quick Start DEFAULT These preferences are persistent and applied to the current and all future sessions a Several settings throughout Cyclone have a range of between 0 0 and 1 0 In these cases 0 0 denotes the lowest possible setting none and 1 0 denotes the highest possible setting See the Preferences entry in the Commands chapter The Navigator Window The Navigator window opens with three default folders Servers Shortcuts and Scanners Servers Folder The Servers folder maintains your list of database servers You can add and remove servers to and from this folder Your local machine is added as a server by default To add a server 1 From the Configure menu select Servers The Configure Servers dialog appears 2 Click Add The Add Server dialog appears 3 Inthe Server Name field type the Microsoft Network name for the server to be added and then click Add The Configure Servers dialog reappears and displays the newly added server 4 Click Close The server is created Scanners Folder The Scanners folder maintains a list of known scanners Add a scanner by entering a name of your choice and a scanner address IP address Double clicking the scanner icon opens a Scan Control window for that scanner To add an HDS4500 scanner 1 From the Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears
395. n select COE format coe from the Save as type field 4 Click OK to create the COE file All objects within the Cyclone ModelSpace are translated to COE format This step may take some time depending on the complexity of the ModelSpace being translated Note When you import the COE file into MicroStation you have the option of importing point clouds However be aware that bringing point clouds into MicroStation using COE can be a memory intensive process both when importing and when attempting to work with the imported points In addition because points consume so much memory COE will only bring in the first 500 000 points For these reasons we recommend using the CloudWorx application to view Cyclone point clouds in MicroStation Bringing a COE File into MicroStation Once a ModelSpace has been exported to COE format from Cyclone it can be imported into MicroStation using the COEIN MDL application 124 Cyclone Object Exchange COE To import a COE file into MicroStation 1 Open a new or existing MicroStation drawing created from a 3D seed file 2 If you do not currently have a command line interface available select Key in from the Utility menu to display the Key in dialog Enter the command MDL LOAD COEIN at the command line From the file dialog select the COE file to be imported The COEIN Options dialog appears Select your desired options which are described as follows oa a FPF Q Choose your desi
396. n select Set from Points The Set Coordinate System from Pick Points dialog appears The pick points are displayed in the ModelSpace View along with a number indicating the order in which the points were picked Drop down lists are available in each field in the dialog to choose the appropriate reference pick point 4 Inthe Reference Point fields enter the coordinate for the reference point 5 Inthe Azimuth Point field enter a value for the degrees to the azimuth point from the reference point 6 Click OK The new coordinates are applied and the horizontal axes are rotated a Setting the origin and azimuth does not affect the current up direction or axis 417 Index To set the reference azimuth and up direction In Pick mode click to use as the reference point Click the point you want to use for azimuth reference Mult select a pair of points known to be in vertical alignment for the up direction reference Pick points used for either an azimuth or reference origin can also be used as part of an up direction pair These point pairs can come from a Leica Geosystems HDS dual target pole or another structural feature If there are any points with known elevation multi select them as well to aid in vertical accuracy From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then select Set from Points The Set Coordinate System from Pick Points dialog appears The pick points are displayed in the Mod
397. n the Constraint Viewer 2 Right click in the Constraint Viewer to invoke the context menu From the context menu select Add Edit Target Height The Set Target Height dialog appears 3 Enter the target height and click OK to assign the target height to the selected object 4 Click OK The selected object may be present in other ControlSpaces and ModelSpaces The target height of the corresponding objects are set wherever they are found under the constraint s ScanWorlds 164 Index Add Face Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Add Face command adds a new triangle to a mesh object by connecting existing vertices and or creating new vertices on the mesh Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh command To add a face to a mesh 1 Multi select three points in the ModelSpace View the points do not have to be on the mesh object If none of the first three points selected is on a mesh object a fourth selection must be made on a mesh object From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Add Face A new triangle is added Add Flat Cap Closest to Pick Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object End Caps Action Executes command Usage The Add Flat Cap Closest to Pick command creates a flat end cap on the selected object s end nearest to the picked
398. n the closest match in the table is used when creating the actual object To show matches from a different table select a new table from the Table field and then click Refresh New potential matches are shown Clicking Refresh without changing the table calculates any missing vs Cloud values To edit the range of potential matches enter a new value in the Match Table Items Within field and then click Refresh The new range of potential matches is shown 447 Index 5 Select the appropriate part from the list and click OK The select parts table item is fit Subtract From Patch Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Edit Object Patch Executes command The Subtract from Patch command is used to create a hole in a selected patch To create a hole in a patch 1 Draw a fence or draw and select a polyline or polygon in the shape of the hole you wish to create a The hole s edges cannot be selfintersecting and cannot cross the boundary of the patch Also holes cannot intersect each other 2 Select the patch in which you want to create a hole 3 From the Edit Object menu point to Patch and then select Subtract The hole is created Surface Area Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Measure Executes command The Surface Area command calculates and displays the total surface area of the selected object To measure surface area 1 Select the object you want to measure 2 From the Toolsmenu
399. nWorld command 41 Registration Using the ControlSpace A ControlSpace is similar to a ModelSpace View It is used as a container for all objects attached to its parent ScanWorld that are designated as constraint objects or possible constraint objects The ControlSpace is used to review organize or remove objects it is also used to add constraints manually However objects in the ControlSpace cannot be moved or resized When an object is removed from the ControlSpace it cannot be used in subsequent registrations When a ScanWorld is created a default ControlSpace is automatically created and placed within the ScanWorld in the Navigator window It cannot be moved copied or deleted When a ScanWorld is added to a Registration a ControlSpace linked to that specific Registration is created beneath the default ControlSpace In this manner a ScanWorld may contain a separate ControlSpace for each Registration that involves that ScanWorld Operations in a Registration i e adding or deleting constraints affect only the corresponding subordinate ControlSpace Objects are generally added to a ControlSpace in one of four ways When HDS Target or sphere targets are acquired via the Scan Control window When a registration label is added to an object in a ModelSpace under the ControlSpace s ScanWorld When the HDS Target or Sphere Target commands are used to manually fit a HDS Target or target sphere to a cloud When an object is co
400. nager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Displays dialog Usage The Create command displays the Create Limit Boxes dialog which is used to add new limit boxes with specified locations and size If more than one pick point is present the limit box is initialized to the minimum bounding box of the pick points This is useful for quickly isolating cloud data with a few picks Create Alignment Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Opens dialog Usage The Create Alignment dialog is used to generate an alignment object for a selected line polyline or arc For more information about alignments and the sections process see the Sections Manager chapter To create an alignment 1 Select the line polyline or arc you want to use as an alignment The object used to create an alignment can be imported from your CAD software via the COE exchange format see the Cyclone Object Exchange chapter The object may also be created in a variety of ways including using Cyclone s Drawing tools and creating the object via the From Pick Points submenu commands see the From Pick Points entry in the Commands chapter When a single object is selected the object must be picked near the end point at which the starting station is assigned If the start station is assigned to the wrong end use the Switch Alignment Start End command in the Tools Alignment and Section menu When multiple obj
401. nally Create and Add additional targets over known points for a more robust resection Re acquire targets with high Error or exclude them from the calculation by turning OFF the Use checkbox Push the Apply button to set the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System based on the resection calculation To perform a field setup using a known backsight 1 2 Set up the scanner over a known point Set up a target over another known point Connect to the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and enable the dual axis compensator or connect to the HDS6000 and enable the tilt sensor Import or add the known or assumed coordinates using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 From the Window menu select Field Setup The Field Setup panel appears in the control panel Select Known Backsight from the Method control Select the Station ID from the list 288 Index 7 Measure and enter the HI 8 Select the Target ID from the list of known coordinates 9 Measure and enter the HT 10 Select the target Type 11 Pick a cloud point on the target over the known point and push Acquire The backsight is acquired If the target already exists in the ControlSpace the target need not be re acquired 12 Push the Calculate button to compute the actual relation of the current setup to the known or assumed coordinates 13 Push the Apply button to set the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System based on the c
402. names paths that include spaces and or non standard characters e g commas semi colons must be enclosed by quotation marks The Type field identifies the type of data entered in the Value field The types available for annotation values are Text Integer Decimal and External Document Click OK to assign the annotation and return to the Annotations dialog To edit annotations Select the object for which you want to change the annotations From the Tools menu point to Annotations and then select Add Edit Annotations The Annotations dialog appears Make the desired changes to the Value Type or Visibility field the changes are applied immediately Note The Key field cannot be modified To attach a file as an annotation Select the object to which you want to attach a file From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Annotations The Annotations dialog appears Create an annotation and set the Type field to External Document Click the Browse File icon The Open dialog appears Find and select the desired file and click Open to return to the Annotations dialog The file that you selected is displayed in the Value field You can attach a text document or specify a command line executable 150 Index To open an external document Select the object containing the annotated file attachment to be opened From the Tools menu select Annotations then select Add Edit Annotations The Annotations d
403. narPolylineExtrusion User Data Linkage Steel User Data Linkage section type d bf tf tw 02 Cell Header Cone Caps when using cells 23 Cone for cone 131 Cone Flange Reducer Sphere Torus Elbow Reducing Elbow Valve Group Cyclone Object Exchange COE 18 Surface for semi elliptic hemispheric caps 15 Ellipse for flat caps See Cylinder See Cylinder User Data Linkage Flange See Cylinder User Data Linkage Reducer 18 Surface User Data Linkage Sphere 02 Cell Header Solid Caps when using cells 19 Solid for torus 18 Surface for semi elliptic hemispheric caps 15 Ellipse for flat caps User Data Linkage Torus 02 Cell Header Solid Caps when using cells 19 Solid or 18 Surface for torus 18 Surface for semi elliptic hemispheric caps 15 Ellipse for flat caps User Data Linkage Torus 02 Cell Header Cone Line Ellipse when using cells 23 Cone for valve admission and exhaustion 03 Line for stem 15 Ellipse for handle wheel User Data Linkage to 1st Cone Valve parameters 02 Cell Header 132 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Contours 02 Cell Header with LineString and Text User Data Linkage ContourObj Mesh 02 Cell Header w Shapes limit to 800 triangles User Data Linkage TriMesh V3 1 feature ExclusionVolume 02 Cell Header User Data Linkage ExclusionV olume User Data Linkage size x size y size z Layer Lev
404. nd copies it to the Cyclone clipboard 225 Index Note Cutting an object from a ModelSpace places it on the clipboard and removes it from its current location and from the database Though cutting a point cloud removes it from the ModelSpace it does not remove the original scan from the database Original scans are always recoverable via the ScanWorld Explorer dialog Note The Navigator s clipboard behaves differently from the ModelSpace clipboard when Copy is selected the selected object is marked for copying however it is not actually copied until you initiate the Paste command Cut by Distance from Point Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Segment Cloud Action Opens dialog Usage The Segment Cloud by Distance from Point dialog is used to segment the selected point cloud s based on each point s distance from a central point For an overview of the segmentation process see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter To segment a point cloud by distance from a point 1 Select the point cloud you want to segment 2 From the Create Object menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut by Distance from Point The Segment Cloud by Distance from Point dialog appears 3 Click the button next to the Point field to specify the central point s coordinate a Select Last Pick Point to use the last pick point a Select Last Pick Point Always to use the last pick point even when the pick point changes a Sel
405. nd location 5 E mail the newly created txt file to support hds leica geosystems com Verify Camera Calibration Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Camera Calibration Action Opens dialog Usage The Verify Camera Calibration dialog is used to test the accuracy of the current camera calibration For a general overview of camera calibration see the Camera Calibration entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 chapter This command is only available for the HDS2500 To Verify Camera Calibration 1 Place the scanner in a dimly lit room unlit is preferable 5 10 meters from the wall that the scanner is facing 2 Open the Scan Control window and connect to the scanner 463 Index 3 From the Scanner Control menu point to Camera Calibration and select Verify Camera Calibration A progress dialog appears describing accuracy as the process tests 50 points To cancel at any time during the process click Cancel For a reliable evaluation testing at least 20 points before canceling is recommended a Acceptable accuracies for HDS2500 camera calibration are average errors of around 2 pixels Max errors of 8 pixels may be common and acceptable depending on the scene Verify TIN Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Verify TIN command checks to see if the selected mesh conforms to the definition of a Triangulated Irregular Network TIN A TIN is a mesh in which ther
406. nd mouse buttons e The following modifiers are available from the Mouse Modifiers submenu 330 Index Shift Key Ctrl Key Alt Key Right Button Middle Button While toggled ON the corresponding key or mouse button is considered to be pushed when the primary left mouse button is clicked Mouse Modifiers have no effect on keyboard hotkeys Move Rotate Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Move Rotate dialog is used to rotate selected objects or move selected objects a specified distance along a specified axis To rotate selected objects 1 2 3 10 11 Select the object s you want to move From the Edit Object menu select Move Rotate The Move Rotate dialog appears Select the Rotate tab A graphical indicator appears in the ModelSpace viewer to illustrate the rotation angle and axis at the current settings If multiple objects are selected each object receives a unique identifier such as Cylinder 1 Cylinder 2 etc to aid in differentiating objects and points on those objects Significant points i e the end points of a cylinder as well as current and subsequent pick points are numbered and displayed on the selected objects These numbers can be used as references to move objects If multiple objects are selected you may specify a subset of the selected objects to be affected by the move from the Apply to list Click the arrow icon to the right of the Axis of R
407. ndow ModelSpace Menu Edit Fence Action Executes command Usage The Delete Selected Outside command removes all cloud points in selected point clouds outside of a data fence n For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter Delete Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Delete Selection command deletes selected triangles from a mesh To delete triangles 1 Multi select the triangles in the mesh object to be deleted Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh entry in this chapter 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Delete Selection The selected triangles are deleted Deselect Window ModelSpace Image Viewer Menu Selection Action Executes command Usage The Deselect command clears the current selection All objects can also be deselected by pressing ESC 239 Index Deselect Fenced Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Executes command Usage The Deselect Fenced command deselects every object and point cloud within or overlapping the drawn data fence For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter Disable Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Disable comm
408. nerate Select this check box to generate contours representing the cut fill regions Set the Contours Major Interval and Minors Major parameters The contour elevations represent the differences in elevation in the current UCS OutputTable Select this check box to display the Measure Surface Deviation Results dialog which contains a table listing the individual deviation measurements This measurement cannot be saved if this option is not selected Generate Select this check box to generate points whose coordinates and elevation in the Points current UCS correspond to the individual deviation measurements Contours If you select the Generate Contours check box to generate contours representing the cut fill regions set the Major Interval and Minors Major parameters The contour elevations represent the differences in elevation in the current UCS Switch Alignment Start End Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Executes command Usage The Switch Alignment Start End is used to switch the assignment of the start station from one end of the selected alignment to the other For more information about alignments and the sections process see the Sections Manager chapter 450 Index Synchronize Viewers Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Synchronize Viewers command toggles the synchronization of the two Constraint viewers for simultaneous view navigati
409. nfigure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close Shortcuts Folder The Shortcuts folder maintains a list of shortcuts to objects that you frequently use For instance you may create a shortcut to a ModelSpace or a particular ModelSpace View that is several folders deep in the database and thus enable instant access without having to navigate down to the actual folder location in the database To create a shortcut 1 Inthe Navigator window select the object for which you need a shortcut 2 From the Create menu select Shortcut The shortcut is added to the Shortcuts folder Using Links Links are provided to make navigation easier They allow you to create a shortcut to any Project ScanWorld ModelSpace or Image as well as allowing you to reference any object in multiple places in the same database To create a link Select the Project ScanWorld ModelSpace or Image to which you want to link From the Edit menu select Copy Select a location for the link Links can be pasted into ScanWorlds Scans ModelSpaces and Projects that are located in the same database as the original on gt 4 From the Edit menu select Paste Link The link appears in the selected location a Links are identical to their source object renaming a link also renames the source object a Deleting a link does not delete the source object deleting the source object does not delete any links to that object Only when the so
410. ng to copy all entries 4 Click the Copy Custom Annotations to Clipboard icon The selected contents of the custom tab are copied as tab delimited text to the Windows clipboard from which it may be pasted into another application e g Notepad Add Edit Cutplanes Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Opens dialog Usage The Cutplanes dialog is used to edit cutplanes and cutplane attributes 157 Index Cutplanes Dialog ATBECEDEE A Cutplane 3 ES El A sf fumes Tee Origin Cutplane Cutplane_2 Cutplane_3 L y gt Align x Axis v DT Offset p from Reference b y 0 100 fm Close A Create a copy of the selected Cutplane B Delete the selected Cutplane C Set the selected Cutplane as the active Cutplane which is used in all Cutplane operations D Add a Reference Plane on the selected Cutplane The new Reference Plane appears in the Reference Planes dialog E Flip the selected Cutplane normal in order to toggle the visibility of geometry above below the default Cutplane F Move the selected Cutplane one position higher in the list G Move the selected Cutplane one position lower in the list H View origin and normal coordinates for the selected Cutplane 158 Index Il Toggle the visibility of the Cutplane J Lock the Cutplane in place K Click to use the color picker to set material properties for the Cutplane L Select the axis to which you
411. ngle Fence cursor appears 2 Drag the cursor around the area you want to fence e Drag up down to define the vertical bounds of the fence e Drag clockwise to define a fence initialized at 0 degrees e Drag counter clockwise to define a fence initialized at 360 degrees Panoramic Scan Mode Window Scan Control HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage Pointing to Panoramic Scan Mode displays submenu commands used to select the scanning mode used for 360 degree scans Face 1 Scanmakes the scanner scan from the front performing a full 360 degree turn Face 1 and 2 Scan makes the scanner scan from both sides simultaneously performing a 180 degree turn The following panoramic scan modes are available from the Panoramic Scan Mode submenu Face 1 Scan Face 1 and 2 Scan Parallel Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Executes command Usage The Parallel command aligns the one or more objects so that their axes are parallel to a reference object To make objects parallel 1 Multi select the objects you want to make parallel The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the other aligns 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Parallel The objects are rotated to make their axes parallel to the axis of the reference object a This command is useful when modeling walls of a room in order to make sure opposite pairs are parallel a
412. ning a For instructions on using a script see the Editor entry in the Commands chapter 37 Scanning with the HDS2500 Camera Calibration Cyclone s camera calibration tool is used to calibrate the camera integrated with the HDS2500 Camera calibration provides the following benefits for HDS2500 users Correction of lens distortion of the image i e straight lines in the scene now appear to be straight in the corrected image Improvement of the accuracy of scan targeting on the image i e when you target on the image you generally get a scan of what you targeted versus the hit or miss targeting on an uncalibrated image Texture mapping of calibrated camera images on point clouds and meshes providing clearer visualization and navigation The following notes apply The HDS2500 requires at least one successful camera calibration before the additional camera functionality is enabled The camera calibration may need to be re calibrated periodically as well See the Calibrate Camera entry in the Commands chapter for step by step instructions a After a camera has been successfully calibrated point clouds and meshes can be texture mapped using the camera images associated with the source scan Select the point cloud in the ModelSpace viewer and then selecting Image Texture Map from the View Object As dialog a The camera calibration parameters are specific to each HDS2500 The calibration parameters from one HDS25
413. ning rotating or zooming e lf your display has automatic LOD reduction enabled for point clouds you can temporarily disable the LOD reduction by holding down the left SHIFT key while panning rotating or zooming Manual Viewpoint Controls a The ability to pan zoom or rotate can be disabled temporarily via the View Lock submenu commands This can be useful when you need to refrain from rotating the viewpoint for example ROTATE To rotate the viewpoint around the focal point drag press and hold the left mouse button while moving the mouse while in View mode PAN Right drag press and hold the right mouse button while moving the mouse while in View mode ZOOM Press and hold both mouse buttons and move the mouse down up to zoom in out Advanced Manual Viewpoint Controls ROTATE FOCAL POINT To rotate the focal point around the viewpoint hold CTRL and drag while in View mode 83 Animation ROLL To roll the viewpoint around the current forward direction similar to an airplane barrel roll hold CTRL and right drag while in View mode Viewpoint Keep Viewpoint Upright must be disabled to use this control ZOOM FOCAL POINT AND VIEWPOINT To move both the focal point and the viewpoint forward backward hold CTRL and both mouse buttons while dragging up down while in View mode To reset the focal point 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Seek Mode The cursor changes to the Seek Mode cr
414. nns 326 MicroSta lOs Sys chia coed eeoer een A AER tian RE 327 MINIMIZA o id 327 Minimize Limit Box Manager ccoooocccccnonncccononoccnononnccnnnnnncncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnncnnnnnnrcnnnnnnncnnnns 328 Minimize Limit BOX A aie ed ete eee ates 328 xii Table Of Contents Miter COnmectors cc secis cis Seco peta a a foo cote E chs Coot geen eterna 328 ModelSpacEiscerioicninnicion triciclos 329 ModelSpace IMa mimica ee el ee 329 ModelSpace Vi Wo cccociociiooiin lacada o dd cai 329 Modelo paca VOWS saarra Aa 330 Mouse Modei S reaa e A a fect e Sona a 330 Move Rota eerror eno derep uae iat diia 331 MOVE Vet ta A E a 332 Move Viewpoint ri AA ENER ea TE tl dc 333 Multi PickModE Sisi i vised nivel a eiia 333 Multi Pick View TOGOIE iire es e a EE aeS EE NA AEE EEI EEE NEEE ETAN 333 New Limit Box Manager ceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeneeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeees 333 New Scanner Position 334 Object Coordinate SYStemM sccssietscessetsrcesetettec heesseudbtataceyserstac sored RE AARAA AA 334 OBjeci MO ici ee ee ee ee ee ee 335 Object Info Navigator Window cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeceeeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeeeeaaaeeees 335 Object Preferences td 335 SN tee ect ee ie ian eee chien eet ee ie eet 338 POM yeas shes eea a ETT IR ace cedenel ida 338 Open ModelSpace Viewel cecceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaaaaeeeeaeaaeeeesaaaeeeeaaaa ees 339 Open New VieWEF
415. notation to the selected object s To delete a feature code annotation Select the object s with the feature code annotation to be deleted From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Annotations The Annotations dialog appears Select the feature code annotation from the list in the Annotations tab and click the Delete icon in the toolbar The feature code annotation is removed Add Edit Limit Boxes Window ModelSpace Menu View Add Edit Limit Boxes Action Opens dialog Usage The Limit Box Manager dialog is used to add delete and edit the properties of limit boxes in the current ModelSpace View Limit boxes are unique to the ModelSpace View in which they are defined and are not shared with other ModelSpace Views For information on specific Limit Box Manager commands see the individual command entries 160 Index Limit Box Manager Dialog Limit boxes are unique to the ModelSpace in which they are defined and are not shared with other views Name Displays the name of the Limit Box X Y Z Type topic text here W H D Displays limit box dimensions Align Indicates whether or not the limit box is aligned with the current user coordinate system axes New Creates a new limit box that is a copy of the currently selected limit box The new limit box is automatically identified as a copy of the original limit box Delete Deletes the selected limit box Set Sets the selected Limit
416. nsity A cde ceded be wee veered 354 Point Cloud Rendicion E lsat hetuetieldad ak he eietiataateest 354 Point Cloud Rendering Registration ooocccononnccccnoncccnnnonnccnnnonaccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncrnnnnnnccnnns 355 Point Cloud Rendering Scan Control oooonccccnonnccccnnnoccnnnnnaccnnnonnccnonnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnccconnnncccnns 355 Point Cloud Sub Selection 2 scree tate eae A ae ade 355 Point DISTANCE ici AA dave 356 PONING cies ene tent tens S A aie agave EE AES EEE E ARNO PE TEE OS EA SS RN 357 Polygonal Fence Moda mercee E E EE AEE a EE ER e 359 Polyline From CUNVOS oriasi aia 359 Polyline From Pick Poltica 360 POIVIINGS sstocdiesscosscstacodanctscensiaus teense cadens pilot eirnt n 360 Profr ii Radi del ete Ad SS a 360 Pri Evita E E Dd eee ewe E a Ea td eet 372 O O 372 A she scare dsy cots aeons a a A N donde ds cebe etl akan hs teecu a ROE 372 Project Polyline to Flia 373 Project Setu at A A 373 xiv Table Of Contents Publish Ste Map cian 374 Pub at Angle iuair arrie eitea s iE rail er ERA VAENE 379 Put at Distancias 379 QuickScan COMMAN niii Giara a cada 380 Rase Active CUPANG citaciones 380 Raso LOWE a 381 Randomize Colors of Visible Selected Objects oooooccccnonnccccnnncccncnonnccnnnnnaccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnns 381 Rectangle Fence Mode toi preto a 381 Rectangular voor td dr Parece Po de id Pda E de cai 382 FedIINING iia iras a is pierda 382 A A ideas ATT 383 Reduce Point Cloud ecos ad 383
417. nt to keep To add features 1 In Pick mode pick a point you want to designate as a feature The feature is considered a candidate until confirmed The current feature data are attached to the candidate feature The point number fora candidate feature is displayed in parentheses Until confirmed candidate features are removed with the next pick unless the next pick is made while holding the SHIFT key The Auto Pick function see the Auto Pick Points entry in the Commands chapter can be useful when adding features It allows you to specify a significant point i e the highest or lowest point on a cylinder that is automatically picked when that object type is selected When using auto pick the specified point is always the only picked point regardless how the object was selected i e selected by fence or picked at any other point on the object For example when fitting a cylinder the cylinder is automatically selected and its top most point may be auto picked Multi pick continue picking while holding the SHIFT key or while in Multi Pick mode to pick additional features with the current feature settings Features are sequentially numbered in the order in which they were picked To use a different prefix or starting number for the next candidate feature change the appropriate field and pick a new feature Previously picked candidate features are not affected Edit candidate features To edit the coordinate data for
418. ntains their feature code identity when exported To add a feature code annotation 1 Select the object to which you want to attach a feature code annotation a tis not possible to add a feature code annotation to an Info Marker Camera or similar 159 4 Index reference only object From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Feature Code The Add Edit Feature Code dialog appears Select a pre defined Features List and then assign a Feature Code to the selected object from the Feature list Alternatively you can enter a new Feature Code which is added to the selected Feature List Click OK to attach the feature code annotation to the selected object s Note Feature code annotations are listed in the Annotations dialog in addition to any other annotations which may have been added If you wish to edit feature code annotations do so from the Annotations dialog To edit a feature code annotation 4 Select the object for which the feature code annotation is to be edited From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Feature Code The Add Edit Feature Code dialog appears You may change the Feature List and or the Feature Code selected from the Feature List as desired Alternatively you may enter a new Feature Code which is then added to the selected Feature List Note The annotation key Feature Code may not be edited Click OK to attach the updated feature code an
419. nts in the point cloud that may interfere with the beam this command is used to identify and segment the interfering points For directions on identifying and segmenting interfering points see the Interfering Points entry in the Commands chapter Trim Edges Occasionally when scanning the laser strikes partially on and partially off the edge of an object s surface which can negatively impact the accuracy of the captured point The Trim Edges command creates a new subset that consists of all the points near the cloud s boundary The points left in the interior have fewer partial samples Inserting Objects Not all objects can be produced by fitting to a point cloud Sometimes the number of points sampled on the surface is insufficient for a good statistical fit the distribution of points is unbalanced or perhaps an object was never directly sampled Cyclone provides manual insertion of objects as an alternative to automatic fitting via the Insert submenu command in the Create Object menu Manually inserted objects behave identically to all other objects except they are not based on sampled points Object insertion parameters can be adjusted via the Creation Initial Values area of the Object Preferences dialog If there is a pick point or object selected in the ModelSpace some of these settings may be overridden The picked point or object serves as a reference 59 Animation for the inserted object s parameters Obj
420. nu Usage Pointing to Handles displays submenu commands used to set display and constraint options for handles The following commands dialogs and submenus are available from the Handles submenu 301 Index Show Handles Handles Always Visible Show Rotation Handles Edit Snap to Object Threshold Constrain Motion to For Handle submenu command details see their individual entries For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter Handles Always Visible Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Handles Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Handles Always Visible command toggles the constant visibility of handles even when hidden from view by an object When this command is checked it allows convenient access to handles that would otherwise be hidden from view behind or inside of objects When this command is unchecked handles that are inside or behind an object are not visible and cannot be selected for manipulation This command has no effect if Show Handles is OFF For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter Hide Point Clouds Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Hide Point Clouds command toggles visibility of point clouds This is equivalent to toggling the visibility of point clouds in the Selectable Visible tab of the View Properties dialog Home Position Window Scan Contr
421. nu View Collapse Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The Collapse Limit Box command resizes the limit box to the minimum volume required to contain the currently selected objects if any or to contain all objects if there is no selection without changing the orientation of the limit box e To obtain the minimum possible limit box size regardless of limit box orientation use the Minimize Limit Box command Connect Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Connect command is used to connect to the selected scanner To connect to a scanner Fromthe Scanner menu select Connect When a successful connection is made the Scanner Status box at the bottom of the Scan Control window reads Connected and Ready 199 Index Connect Piping Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Connect Piping command finds and establishes any valid connections among selected objects To connect piping 1 Select objects among which you want to establish a piping connection a Cyclone supports two types of connectivity linear end to end and branching An end to end connection may exist between two opposing piping components that share a common endpoint The diameters of the components need not match A branching connection may exist where one piping component s endpoint sits on the centerline of a pipe The branch s endpoint must lie within the extents of the run
422. nu View Action Opens dialog Usage The Object Info command displays relevant information for the selected object ModelSpace ScanWorld Registration Database etc The information displayed varies depending on the type of object selected Object Preferences Window Navigator ModelSpace Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage The Object Preferences dialog is used to set catalog parts table fit tolerances fit constraints picking and object creation initial value preferences For an overview of fitting and inserting objects using tolerances constraints and tables see the Modeling chapter 335 Index Object Preferences Dialog Options General Settings OBJECT TYPE Select the type of object for which you want to adjust default properties Each type of object has a unique set of editable properties which appear when the object is selected in the Object Type field LEVEL Select User Default Session or View The User Default preferences are restored the next time Cyclone is run Session preferences are in effect until Cyclone is closed and are applied whenever a new ModelSpace View is created View preferences affect the current ModelSpace View only DEFAULTS Reset the selected object type s preferences in the dialog to the hard wired settings Auto Picking Select the Automatically Pick checkbox to enable auto picking and then make a selection from the drop down list which displays points that
423. nu select Add Edit ScanWorld Annotations The Annotations dialog appears 2 Make the desired changes to the Value and Type fields and then click OK Add Edit Target Height Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Target Height dialog is used to add or edit a target height to the objects involved in the selected constraint or to the object selected in the Constraint Viewer a To edit the target height of the object selected in the Constraint Viewer right click in the Constraint Viewer and invoke this command from the context menu The command in the main menu applies to the selection in the Constraint List a For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter To add or edit the target height of the objects involved in a constraint 1 Select the constraint in the Constraint List 2 From the Constraint menu select Add Edit Target Height The Set Target Height dialog appears 3 Select the ScanWorld containing the object to be edited enter the target height and click OK to assign the target height to that object 4 Click OK The objects involved in the constraint may be present in other ControlSpaces and ModelSpaces The target height of the corresponding objects are set wherever they are found under the constraint s ScanWorlds To add or edit the target height of the object selected in a Constraint Viewer 1 Select the object i
424. nu in the Scanner Script window select Insert The Select a Script dialog appears displaying a list of saved scripts Select the script you want to insert and then click OK The saved script is inserted into the Scanner Script window at the current cursor location To scan around a picked point 1 From the Scan Control window select Open ModelSpace Viewer or click Open Viewer to open a ModelSpace viewer In the ModelSpace pick the point around which you want to scan From the Record menu in the Scanner Script window select StanAandAdedRat The Scan Around Pick Point dialog appears Make the desired adjustments and then click OK The scan is added to the script The Horizontal and Vertical Extent settings represent the size of the area around the pick that you want to scan The Horizontal and Vertical Points settings represent the number of lines to be scanned and the number of points that you want in each line of the scan Elbow Connectors Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Elbow Connectors command connects two selected pipes that do not necessarily have intersecting centerlines To connect pipes with an elbow 1 2 3 Pick a point on the first pipe near the end you want connected Multi select the second pipe near the end that you want connected From the Tools menu point to Piping and then select Elbow Connectors The pipes are 268 Index connected Elevati
425. o Cyclone 118 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Simple export Objects modeled in AutoCAD can be exported to a new COE file When this file is imported into Cyclone a new ModelSpace is created and populated with the AutoCAD modeled objects contained in the COE file Data integration Objects modeled in Cyclone and imported into AutoCAD via a COE file can be modified in AutoCAD and then exported back into Cyclone all the while maintaining much of the original data e g annotations from the original COE file from Cyclone To do this CoeOut uses the original COE file as a reference when creating the COE file to be translated to Cyclone Creating a COE file in AutoCAD 1 Do your modeling as desired in AutoCAD 2 From the menu bar select Cyclone COE Export COE Objects or type coeout at the command line The Export Options dialog appears 3 Enter a new file name and path in the Export File Name field or use the Browse button to find and select a path 4 Select an export process option from one of the two options listed EXPORT OBJECTS WITHOUT ORIGINAL COE REFERENCE FILE Select this option if you are creating a new COE file and do not want any reference or connection made to the original COE file you brought into AutoCAD EXPORT OBJECTS USING ORIGINAL COE FILE AS REFERENCE Select this option if you want to integrate data with the original COE file brought into AutoCAD When this new COE file is created references are made to
426. o copy the edited objects back to the original ModelSpace see the Update Original ModelSpace entry in this chapter or close the launched ModelSpace viewer 4 When finished editing close the ModelSpace The Closing ModelSpace Viewer dialog appears 5 Select closing options for the copied ModelSpace and objects a Select Merge into original ModelSpace to copy all objects that were either edited or created 205 Index in the descendant ModelSpace back into the original ModelSpace Objects from the source ModelS pace that have not changed are not duplicated in the resulting merged ModelSpace Select Remove link from original ModelSpace to save the copied ModelSpace Select Delete after close to mark the current ModelSpace for deletion Click Close The copied ModelSpace is closed Copy Pick Point s Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Copy Pick Point s command copies picked points to the Windows clipboard in text format Copy Selection to New ModelSpace Window ModelSpace Menu File Launch Action Executes command Usage The Copy Selection to New ModelSpace command creates a new ModelSpace copies the selected object s into the new ModelSpace and opens a ModelSpace View for the new ModelSpace This command is very useful for creating a smaller ModelSpace that contains only the objects with which you are currently working To edit selected objects in a new ModelSpace 1 2 S
427. o of the original lines or arcs connect that falls within the creation interval SECTION EXTENTS All Section Extents settings are relative to the current up direction and the direction of the alignment from the start station towards the end station CREATE LINES Select this option to create lines based on a temporary TIN mesh that is created from the points within each section More controllable results may be obtained by first creating and adjusting the sections and then creating lines afterward via the Create Lines at Section command in the Sections Manager dialog COLLECT POINTS Select this option to introduce merged clouds from the points that fall within the boundaries of each section This function can also be performed after sections have been created via the Collect Points in Section command in the Sections Manager dialog To create sections 1 Select the desired alignment object 2 From the Tools menu point to Alignment and Section and then select Create Sections The Create Sections dialog appears a The Create Sections command can also be accessed from the Sections menu in the 217 3 Index Sections Manager dialog Choose the desired alignment settings and then click OK The sections are created and the Sections Manager dialog appears Create Sections from Picks Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Opens dialog Usage The Create Sections dialog is used to create secti
428. o the blocks by COEIN will remain intact once a block has been exploded 4 Check Import Pointsets if point clouds are contained in the COE file a This option is not recommended for large point clouds Instead we recommend using Leica Geosystems HDS s CloudWorx application for bringing Leica Geosystems HDS point clouds into AutoCAD 5 Check Create Log file to generate a lt drawing name gt LOG file recommended This log file can help you identify problems and potential solutions if the COEIN process is aborted a f Use Default File Path is checked the log file is saved to the default folder the same folder as the current drawing You can specify a destination for the log file by deselecting this option and typing in or browsing to select the desired folder location for the log file 6 Select the units used in the current drawing from the pull down list in the Import Drawing Units field or select User defined and enter a user defined multiplier in the Scale Factor field to multiply all measurements including coordinates by this number a By default all COE objects are brought into AutoCAD from Cyclone using meters and radians to define size and position You need to define the units to which COEIN will convert for your drawing by selecting the current drawing units from the pull down list 7 Click the OK button The COE file is loaded into the current drawing The complexity of the COE file as well as your computer s capab
429. objects coplanar 1 Multi select the objects you want to make coplanar The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Coplanar The selected objects are aligned to the plane of the reference object Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Opens dialog Usage The Copy dialog is used to make a copy or an array of copies of the selected object at a specific location relative to the original object To place a copy of an object at a specific location 1 Select the object you want to copy 2 From the Create Object menu select Copy The Copy dialog appears and a graphical indicator appears in the ModelSpace viewer illustrating the direction and distance of the move at the current settings a If multiple objects are selected each object is labeled with a unique identifier such as cylinder 1 cylinder 2 etc in the ModelSpace to aid in differentiating objects and points on those objects a Significant points i e the end points of a cylinder as well as current and subsequent pick points are numbered and displayed on the selected objects These numbers can be used as 203 9 10 Index references to move objects If multiple objects are selected you may specify a subset of the selected objects to be affected by the move from the Apply to list Click the arrow icon to the right of the Direction of Move row The
430. objects with registration labels HDS Targets and sphere targets The Copy to ControlSpace command provides you with a method for adding objects manually to a ControlSpace that should be considered by the Auto Add Constraints command For more information on the ControlSpace and its use in the registration process see the Registration section in the Getting Started chapter Create Contours Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Contours Action Opens dialog Usage The Contours Parameters dialog is used to generate and customize contours parallel to either the active Reference Plane or the current coordinate system as defined by the user 207 Index Contours Parameters Dialog g Contours Parameters x Interval between major contours 4 000 m Number of minor intervals per major interval example enter 4 for three minor contour lines between each pair of major contours m Contours Extents Minimum Maximum o Cf Yoh rp a a Measure Elevation From D S Label Contours C Reference Plane Current Coordinate System Cancel A Enter a value representing the distance between major contour lines and select the units of distance desired B Enter a value representing the number of minor contours to be displayed between each major contour C Set boundaries within which to generate contours by checking Minimum and or Maximum for the desired plane s A v
431. odifications you have made to Cyclone s default toolbars and hotkeys Export Cyclone Il TOPO Work File Window ModelSpace Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Export Cyclone II TOPO Work File command saves the current ModelSpace View as a Cyclone Il TOPO Work File and corresponding point cloud data files for use in Leica Cyclone II TOPO 276 Index To export a Cyclone II TOPO Work File 1 In the ModelSpace viewer delete any cloud points that are not to be exported Only visible points are exported From the File menu select Export Cyclone Il TOPO Work File The Export Cyclone Il TOPO Work File dialog appears Enter the Project name This name is also the filename used for the folder and work file to be exported Enter the Project folder or browse to a selected folder This folder will contain a new folder named for the Project name Examine the resulting paths in the bottom half of this dialog box Optionally check Export point cloud if the visible cloud points will also be exported You may not want to export the point cloud if it has already been exported Click the OK button to continue The Export Cyclone Il TOPO Work File Information dialog box appears Enter the project information in the Export Cyclone II TOPO Work File Information dialog box 1 2 Enter the information as needed The Cyclone Il TOPO user will not be able to change some of these fields for example the Copyright field Cl
432. of scan data Note that if the new destination ScanWorld is in another project you must first select that project via the Select a Project dialog Preparing to Scan Once the destination project and ScanWorld folders are chosen the next step is usually to capture an image of the scene from the point of view of the scanner and display it in the Scan Control window This image is useful for determining the field of view of the scanner as well as for specifying areas of the scene to be scanned While it can be very helpful for a number of reasons having a valid image in the Scan Control window is not required for targeting the scanner or actual scanning Note that the colors in the acquired image are mapped to the point cloud upon creation so it is necessary to acquire an image prior to scanning in order have this visualization option 36 Scanning with the HDS2500 To capture an image of the scanner s current point of view 1 From the Scanner Control menu select Get Image or click the Get Image icon The image appears in the Scan Control window and is saved in the Images folder under the parent ScanWorld Additionally a link to the current image is created beneath the scan to help keep track of which images go with which scans a The prevailing lighting conditions can greatly affect the quality and usability of the image To compensate for the level of light in the scene adjust the image exposure via the Adjust Image Exposure comman
433. og is used to create an extrusion object along a specified axis from a selected patch or a picked face on an extruded object Extrude Along Axis Dialog Options AXIS SELECTION Select the current X Y Z or Customized axis along which you want to create an extrusion object Selecting Customize uses the axis defined in the Axis Value setting AXIS VALUE Define a custom axis along which you want to create an extrusion object Changing a value here selects Customized in the Axis Selection option MULTIPLIER Enter a factor by which the Axis Value is multiplied to arrive at the actual extrusion To create an extrusion object along a specified axis 1 Select the patch or pick the extrusion object face from which you want to create an extrusion object From the Edit Object menu point to Extrude and then select Extrude Along Axis The Extrude Object dialog appears Choose the axis and thickness for the extrusion and then click OK The selected patch or face is extruded Extrude Perpendicular Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extrude Action Opens dialog Usage The Extrude Perpendicular command is used to create an extrusion object towards the viewpoint and along an axis perpendicular to a patch or a picked face on an extruded object This command works with multiple selected patches or extrusion object faces 282 Index To create an extrusion object along a perpendicular axis 1 Select the patch o
434. oggles the display of a polyline along the current series of pick points This is useful for keeping track of the order of picks for operations like creating a cubic spline or a polyline from pick points It does not create a polyline it only displays the order of the pick points The Show Pick Points command toggles the display of pick points as white points The Invert Selection command can be particularly helpful for selecting all but a few objects in a ModelSpace This is accomplished by first selecting only the objects that you eventually do not want selected and then using the Invert Selection command The ability to select any object of a specified type can be toggled ON OFF from the Selectable Visible tab of the View Properties dialog See the Set Selectable entry in the Commands chapter The Auto Pick function see the Auto Pick Points entry in the Commands chapter allows you to specify a significant point i e the end of a cylinder that is automatically picked when that object type is selected When using auto pick the specified point is always the only picked point regardless of whether the object was selected by fence or picked at any other point on the object 61 Animation Object Selection Methods A In Pick mode click the object with the Pick mode cursor This is the only way to select objects that also allows you to indicate or pick a specific point on the selected object Picking is useful for indica
435. oint Picking is useful for indicating where an action might take place next and is required for some operations Multiple point clouds can be selected in Pick mode by holding SHIFT and clicking the point clouds you want to select or by entering Multi Pick mode and clicking objects with the Multi Pick mode cursor Holding SHIFT and clicking an object that is already selected produces additional pick points Holding CTRL and clicking an object toggles the selection state of the object without affecting the selection state of other objects Draw a fence and then use the Select Fenced Deselect Fenced commands to select deselect every point cloud within or overlapping the drawn rectangular data fence All point clouds can be selected deselected from the Selectable Visible tab of the View Properties dialog See the Set Selectable entry in the Commands chapter 62 Animation Point Cloud Sub Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection involves using multiple sub selections to refine an initial selection add or remove points before segmentation fitting or other processes are performed After the initial selection the viewpoint can be changed and a new fence can be drawn to add or subtract points with subsequent point cloud sub selection commands See the Point Cloud Sub Selection command entry When the sub selection contains only the desired points the selected points can be manipulated independently of other points in the ModelSpace
436. oise may be slightly different for each mode Scanner Range Mode Window Menu Action Usage Scan Control HDS4500 Scanner Control Displays submenu Pointing to Scanner Range Mode displays submenu commands Normal and Close In used to configure the power of the laser resulting in different minimum and maximum ranges Normal achieves the maximum range of the scanner but there is a minimum range within which samples are ignored Close In is useful when objects are closer to the scanner than the Normal mode s minimum range because it decreases the laser power and has a shorter minimum range However Close In has half the maximum range of Normal The sampling noise may be slightly different for each mode Scanner Speed Window Menu Action Usage Scan Control HDS4500 HDS6000 Scanner Control Displays submenu Pointing to Scanner Speed displays submenu commands Default and Low used to configure the rotational speed of the scanner Low speed turns the scanner more slowly but the scan makes less audible noise and the scan may be more stable Some scanner resolutions support only one speed in which case this setting is ignored 404 Index Window Navigator Menu Configure Action Opens dialog Usage The Configure Scanners dialog is used to add and remove scanners To add a scanner From the Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears Click Add The Add Scanner dialog a
437. ol HDS6000 Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Home Position command turns the scanner back to its 0 azimuth position 302 Index HDS Target Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Fit to Cloud Action Opens dialog Usage The HDS Target command fits a vertex at the center of an HDS target When a HDS Target is created it is added automatically to the ControlSpace as well To fit an HDS target 1 Segment the point cloud to which you want to fit an HDS tie point from the surrounding cloud points if any 2 Pick near the bright center of the point cloud subset to which you want to fit a HDS Target 3 From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud and then select Tie Point The HDS Target dialog appears 4 Enter an identifier and a comment in the appropriate fields and then click OK A vertex is fit to the HDS Target Hide Selected Clouds Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Hide Selected Clouds command hides all selected cloud points Points hidden using this command can be recovered with the Show Hidden Clouds command Hide Unselected Clouds Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Hide Unselected Clouds command hides all cloud points in the ModelSpace except those that have been selected Points hidden using this command can be recovered with the Show Hidden Clouds command 303 Index Image Info Window Mode
438. ol menu in the Scan Control window select Adjust Exposure The Camera Exposure dialog appears 2 From the Setting list make the appropriate selection for the current lighting conditions Exposure times can range from 0 1 to 2000 milliseconds 3 Adjust settings for the option selected in the Setting field a To specify exposure time in milliseconds enter a value in the Exposure box a To view a preview image using the current settings click Preview 4 Click OK The current settings are applied to the entry in the Setting field These settings are persistent for the scanner object in the database 5 Acquire another image using the Get Image command to view the results of your adjustments Adjust Image Window Image Viewer Scan Control Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage The Adjust Image command launches the Brightness Contrast dialog which is used to adjust the brightness and contrast of the current image To adjust image viewer images 1 From the Edit menu select Adjust Image The Brightness Contrast dialog appears 2 Use the sliders or enter a specific value to set the brightness contrast levels and then click OK The image is adjusted a Toexit the Brightness Contrast dialog without saving changes click Cancel Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Align displays submenu commands submenus and dialogs to align objects in a variety of ways The follo
439. olbars tab click on New The New Toolbar dialog appears Enter a toolbar name and click OK The toolbar is added to the toolbars list it is automatically checked and displayed in the current window Click Cancel to exit this dialog without adding a new toolbar To add remove buttons from toolbars 1 From the Edit menu of the window for which you want to display hide toolbars select Customize Toolbars The Customize Toolbars dialog appears From the Command tab select the category for which you want available buttons displayed To the right a series of buttons is displayed It is not necessary to be in the Command tab to remove buttons from toolbars The available categories correspond to the available menus for the current window Click any button to see a description of that button s function 3 To add a button to a toolbar click the desired button and drag it from the dialog to the desired location You can add buttons to both existing and new toolbars To remove a button from a toolbar click the desired button in its present toolbar location and drag it out of the toolbar When you let go the button disappears You can use the click and drag method to move buttons from one toolbar to another Use the Reset button to restore the original contents of a Cyclone toolbar Cut Window ModelSpace Navigator Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Cut command deletes a selected object from its current location a
440. old Note The Minimum and Maximum fields are read only and indicate the range for which deviations can be measured 5 Select whether to highlight faces based on Maximum or Average deviation and whether to use Absolute values no positive or negative distances or Signed distances Note Deviation analysis results are displayed in the Details field 6 When finished click OK The Deviation Analysisdialog is closed 326 Index MicroStation Window ModelSpace Menu File Launch Action Opens dialog Usage The MicroStation command launches the current ModelSpace View in MicroStationE2 using the Cyclone Object Exchange COE intermediary functionality When this command is initiated objects in the current ModelSpace View are first transferred to a COE file which is then loaded into MicroStation See COE for MicroStation for information on working with COE files Before executing this command it is important to verify that MicroStation and Leica Geosystems HDS s COE Data Transfer for MicroStation are properly installed on your workstation To launch MicroStation from a ModelSpace View 1 From the File menu point to Launch and then select MicroStation You may be prompted to locate the MicroStation executable USTATION EXE If this occurs navigate to the folder containing the file and select it 2 If you want to open an existing file navigate to the appropriate folder and select the desired file if you
441. om a linear object a This function provides a convenient method for repeatedly creating the same fence h Select the linear object you wish to use to define a data fence a Linear objects can be created by a variety of methods including via the 2D drawing tools If an arc or other open curvilinear object is selected the end points are connected for purposes of defining the data fence 2 From the Edit menu point to Fence and then select Set from Selection The fence is created To draw a rectangular fence 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Rectangle Fence Mode The Rectangle Fence cursor appears 2 Drag the cursor around the area that you want to fence a The newly drawn fence can adjusted by dragging its sides or vertices with the Rectangle Fence cursor e To clear the newly drawn fence select Clear from the Fence submenu 67 Animation To draw a polygonal fence 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Polygonal Fence Mode The Polygonal Fence cursor appears 2 Click to place the first vertex a Drag to adjust the vertex position 3 Continue adding vertices as needed a A vertex can also be added by clicking anywhere along the line segment between existing vertices a An existing vertex can be deleted by clicking the vertex without moving the mouse a The newly drawn fence can adjusted by dragging its vertices with the Polygonal Fence cursor e To clear the newly dra
442. om the Scanner submenu ScanWorld Explorer Set As Default Cloud Restore Default Cloud from Scan Set ScanWorld Default Clouds Show Incoming Points Create Simulated Scanner Update Simulated Scanner Position Scanner Diagnostics Window Navigator Menu View Action Opens dialog Usage The Scanner Diagnostics command displays scanner diagnostics related to the selected object When Cyclone connects to an HDS3000 ScanStation or ScanStation 2 Cyclone queries the scanner for the scanner s initialization diagnostics Cyclone stores the diagnostics with the scanner object marked with the current date and time s When Cyclone starts a scan or acquires an image the initialization diagnostics obtained at the time of connection are stored with the destination ScanWorld Also the current scanner parameters are retrieved from the scanner and stored with the resulting Scan Image 403 Index Scanner Laser Mode Window Menu Action Usage Scan Control HDS6000 Scanner Control Displays submenu Pointing to Scanner Laser Mode displays submenu commands Normal Power and Low Power used to configure the power of the laser Normal Power may detect darker surfaces farther away and the minimum range is 30 cm Low Power is useful when objects are closer to the scanner than 30 cm because its minimum range is 0 cm However Low Power may not detect darker surfaces The maximum range is the same in each mode The sampling n
443. ommands used to create 2D drawings from the contents of a rectangular data fence The following commands are available from the 2D Extraction submenu From Fence Contents From Selection in Fence a For 2D Extraction submenu command and dialog details see the individual command entries About Cyclone Window All Windows Menu Help Action Opens dialog Usage The About Cyclone dialog displays a splash screen containing the version number of the Cyclone software To exit the About Cyclone dialog click OK 139 Index Above Ref Plane Mesh Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Measure Mesh Volume Opens dialog The Above Ref Plane command is used to measure the cut volumes of a selected mesh relative to the active Reference Plane To measure the fill volume of a mesh see the Below Ref Plane Mesh command for more information To measure the cut volume of a mesh down to the active Reference Plane 1 Select the mesh whose cut volume you want to measure a The cloud must be viewed as a mesh See the View Object As entry in this chapter 2 From the Tools menu point to Measure Mesh Volume and then select Above Ref Plane The Sampling Step dialog appears 3 Enter a value for the interval by which the Reference Plane is divided into a grid for measurement Don A smaller interval may yield more accurate results but may take longer to compute Click
444. on For more information on working with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter 283 Index Fence View Toggle Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Fence View Toggle command switches between Fence mode and View mode a The main purpose of this command is to allow for a single hotkey to toggle between the two modes To assign hotkeys see the Customize Hotkeys entry in this chapter Field of View Window Scan Control Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Field of View command expands the Field of View tab in the Scanner Control Panel Field of View Tab Options QUICKSCAN Click to aim your scanner manually using the scanner s QuickScan button PRESETS Select a preset rectangular or panoramic scan mode from the dropdown If target settings do not match the presets then it displays Custom HZ WINDOW Displays left and right targeting extents V WINDOW Displays top and bottom targeting extents relative to the scanner s horizontal plane SCANNER HZ Displays the current horizontal orientation of the scanner s front window Field Setup Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000 Menu Window Action Expands Tab Usage The Field Setup command expands the Field Setup tab in the Scanner Control Panel 284 Index For an overview of the Field Setup process s
445. on Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Measure Executes command The Elevation command calculates distance between picked points and the origin of the current coordinate system along the current up vector To measure elevation 1 Pick the point you want to measure 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Measure and then select Elevation The elevation is displayed The results are also displayed in the Output Box if it is enabled a f multiple points are being measured the results are displayed in the order in which they were picked Elevation Check Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Registration Opens dialog The Elevation Check dialog is used to measure the vertical distance between a QC quality control point and the cloud points in the vicinity Use this command after Registration to verify that QC points measured independently on the ground are close in elevation to the neighboring cloud points 269 Index Elevation Check Dialog T210 0 174 m Auto T301 N A Auto T309 0 001m Auto T1441 0 001m Auto spot check T1445 0 003 m Auto spot check Search Distance 0 500 m Max Elevation Error 0 010 m MeanDev 0 002 m RMSDev 0 002 m Process A Import the QC points to check from an ASCII or LandXML file B Import the QC points to check from a Leica System 1200 DB X database C Hide QC points with Error less than the Max Elevation Er
446. on n When ON viewpoint changes in one Constraint viewer are tracked in the second viewer This is useful when adding pick point hints to create or update the initial alignment hints for cloud constraints Target All Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Target All command targets the entire image in the Scan Control window Using the Target All command allows you to target the whole field of view in the Scan Control window without having to draw a target box manually To target the whole field of view in the Scan Control window 1 From the Scanner Control menu select Target All or click the Target All icon The scan target appears in the Scan Control window Texture Map Browser Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Opens dialog Usage The Texture Map Browser invokes the Texture Map Browser dialog which provides access to the texture maps of the selected point cloud or mesh e For information on the texture mapping process see the Texture Mapping chapter Texture Map Browser Scan Control Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS2500 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Project Action Opens dialog Usage The Texture Map Browser invokes the Texture Map Browser dialog which 451 Index provides access to the texture maps of the selected point cloud or mesh in the attached ModelSpace viewer launching the viewer is needed For inf
447. on Image command is incompatible with a calibrated image selecting this option automatically hides the image Cyclone supports the Import and Export of images and calibration parameters An image its calibration parameters and the point cloud or geometry may each be exported and then converted for use in a third party application that provides additional texture mapping capabilities See the Export Calibration Info entry in the Commands chapter for instructions on exporting calibration parameters See the Export Image entry in the Commands chapter for instructions on exporting an image a The user can import an image and or a set of calibration parameters and texture map the calibrated image on a point cloud or mesh See the Import Calibration Info entry in the Commands chapter for step by step instructions 39 Scanning with the HDS2500 Scanner Simulation Cyclone provides a scanner simulation for the purpose of familiarizing yourself with scan settings and procedures Any ModelSpace can be used to launch a Scan Control window for a scanner simulation by using the Create Simulated Scanner command The ModelSpace from which the Scan Control window is launched serves as the scene to be scanned the viewpoint in the ModelSpace is the initial viewpoint of the simulated scanner The Scan Control window created by this command operates identically to a Scan Control window connected to a real scanner e To change the position of a simulated s
448. ons between sequential pairs of pick points The sections created are managed in the Sections Manager To create sections from pick points 1 Pick the point at the left most end of the section to be created Shift Pick the point at the right most end The section will pass between these two points When the section is activated in the Sections Manager its Left and Right are determined by the order in which the points were picked Shift Pick any additional pairs of points From the Toolsmenu point to Alignment and Section then Create Sections from Picks The Create Sections dialog appears Select how the Top and Bottom parameters of each section are set Select Automatic Top and Bottom to set the Top and Bottom parameters of each section based on the highest and lowest points within that section Select Specify Section Elevation to set the Top and Bottom parameters of each section based on user specified absolute elevations relative to the current UCS Enter the Depth of the section This is the distance between the Front and Back parameters of the section Select the Create Lines checkbox to create cross section lines within each section Select the Collect Points checkbox to introduce merged clouds from the points that fall within each section Click OK The sections are created and added to the Sections Manager The cross section lines and points are optionally processed Create Simulated Scanner Window
449. ontinue adding ScanWorlds until all of the ScanWorlds that you want to add to the Registration appear in the right hand window and then click OK The ScanWorlds are added to the Registration Add Semi Elliptical Head Closest to Pick Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object End Caps Action Executes command Usage The Add Semi Elliptical Head Closest to Pick command creates a semi elliptical head on the selected object s end nearest to the picked point To add a semi elliptical head to the selected object 1 2 Pick a point on the object near the end that you want to cap From the End Caps submenu select Add Semi Elliptical Head Closest to Pick The cap appears To add semi elliptical heads to both ends of the selected object see the Add Both Semi Elliptical Heads entry in this chapter To remove flat caps see the Remove Cap Closest to Picks entry or the Remove Both Caps entry in this chapter Adjust Exposure Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Opens dialog Usage The Adjust Exposure dialog is used to adjust the exposure time used when capturing images from the HDS2500 scanner 167 Index When acquiring an image in the Scan Control window using the Get Image command the prevailing lighting conditions can greatly affect the quality and usability of the image To compensate for the level of light in the scene adjust the image exposure To adjust image exposure 1 From the Scanner Contr
450. or comment to potential targets to be acquired To add an identifier or comment select the target click the ID or Comment field type an identifier or comment and press ENTER Identifiers function as registration labels and can be used for automatic registration Comments function as text annotations in the ModelSpace once a target is acquired Once you have viewed potential targets select the targets to be acquired by checking the box in the fourth column for each target to be acquired To toggle the check box for a selected target press the SPACEBAR key Click Acquire The target acquisition process begins progress and results are displayed in the Status column During the target acquisition process Cyclone performs a coarse and then a fine scan on each potential target and then fits a vertex to the target If the coarse scan fails to find sufficient data to begin a fine scan the Status column in the Acquire Targets dialog displays Failed at Coarse lf the fine scan fails to find sufficient data to place a target the Status column in the Acquire Targets dialog displays Failed at Fine Coarse and fine scans appear in the ModelSpace viewer Coarse scans are deleted upon successful acquisition Fine scans can be viewed by double clicking the scan item in the Navigator window Fine scans are saved in the HDS Target Scans folder of the parent ScanWorld To adjust the resolution of the fine scan see the use the Scan Control tab of
451. or custom annotations creation for all databases residing on the local server For example a custom lookup list created for one project is also visible in all other projects 221 Index To create a quick lookup list 1 From the Navigator window open the Edit menu and select Customize Lookup Lists The Annotation Lookup Lists dialog is displayed To create a text file you can use as a template for proper formatting of a list file click the Export a sample quick lookup list file icon in the toolbar The Select a file name for example lists dialog appears Type a file name in the File Name field be certain to type in the txt extension as well Select a folder destination for the file and click SAVE Use the text editor of your choice e g Notepad and open the newly created text file Instructions for creating lookup lists are included in the text file Follow the directions precisely or you will not be able to import the file back into the Annotation Lookup Lists dialog Note Below the instructions you may see previously defined lists if they exist Because these lists are in the proper format you may opt to use one as a template for your list Enter your new list name using the following format List Name enter list name List Type enter list type text integer or decimal Note List Name and List Type should be typed exactly as shown put spaces where indicated and none where they are not Use
452. or swatch can be edited by using the color picker the color wheel the HSV and RGB sliders or any of the four material buttons click the button to copy the color in the material s swatch to the current color swatch C The current color swatch displays the color settings from the color wheel and the HSV and RGB sliders When a change is made to any of the HSV or RGB sliders the current color swatch or the color wheel the change is reflected in all three areas D Open Close the lower portion of the Color and Material Editor dialog which contains material editing controls When the lower portion is closed color changes affect only diffuse and ambient properties equally E Use this slider to adjust the amount of shine or glare that an object reflects This setting interacts with the Specular setting Values range from 0 dull to 1 glossy F Use this slider to adjust the degree to which you can see through an object Values range from 0 opaque to 1 invisible G Click to access sliders that edit the mix of red green and blue that define the current color Values range from 0 to 1 H Click to access sliders that edit the mix of hue saturation and value that define the current color Values range from 0 to 1 Il Displays the current material J When checked the associated material property is linked to the current color swatch so that any changes made to the current color are duplicated in the selected material
453. or the grid Edit Clipping Planes Window ModelSpace Menu View Action Opens dialog Usage The Clipping Planes dialog is used to set the near and far boundaries of what is visible in the ModelSpace View Clipping planes are the boundaries that determine the visible volume of a scene The six default boundaries are the top bottom left right near and far clipping planes The top bottom left and right planes are at the corresponding edges of the ModelSpace window the near and far clipping planes automatically update to contain the scene but may be adjusted by the user To set near and far clipping planes 1 From the View menu select Edit Clipping Planes The Clipping Planes dialog appears 2 Choose values for the near and far clipping planes a To set custom clipping planes select the Use Custom Clipping Planes box and then enter values in the Near Clipping Plane and Far Clipping Plane boxes a To reset near and far clipping planes to their default values select the Use Default box and then click Apply 3 Click OK The near and far clipping planes are set Edit Color Map Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Opens dialog Usage The Color Map Parameters dialog is used to specify color and range settings for the selected color map For an overview of color mapping in Cyclone see the Color Mapping entry in the Modeling chapter Settings made in this dialog are overridden if
454. ordinate Systems dialog appears 2 Click the Save icon The Coordinate System Name dialog appears 3 Enter a name for the current coordinate system and then click OK The current coordinate system is saved To restore a saved coordinate system as the current coordinate system 1 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then select Save Edit Coordinate Systems The User Coordinate Systems dialog appears 2 From the list of saved coordinate systems double click the coordinate system you want to restore The selected coordinate system is restored To delete a saved coordinate system 1 From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then select Save Edit Coordinate Systems The User Coordinate Systems dialog appears 2 Select the coordinate system you want to delete and then click the Delete icon The selected coordinate system is deleted Sample Grid Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Opens dialog Usage The Sample Grid command displays a dialog that indicates how the surface of the selected mesh es will be sampled over a regular grid a The sampling is performed along the axis perpendicular to the active reference plane The reference plane should be perpendicular to one of the major axes of the current UCS The mesh es must be TIN relative to the reference plane a f a polyline polygon is also selected only the area within the polyline polygon projected onto the active reference plane
455. ore than one Cutplane cutting through the ModelSpace although only one is the active Cutplane at any given time The active Cutplane is the only Cutplane affected by user commands The Cutplane can be used to create polylines from its intersections with objects and meshes and the active Cutplane can be used to hide all geometry above itself or to hide all geometry beyond a user specified distance from its plane a The Cutplanes dialog is used to create delete and edit Cutplanes Positioning the Cutplane Raising and Lowering The Cutplane can be raised lowered by user defined increments using the Raise Active Cutplane and Lower Active Cutplane commands The increment by which the active Cutplane 76 Animation is raised and lowered using these commands is set in the Cutplane Offset dialog This offset is used each time you raise or lower the Cutplane Tip When manipulating a Cutplane repeatedly it can be more efficient to assign hotkeys see the Customize Hotkeys entry in the Commands chapter to the Raise Active Cutplane and Lower Active Cutplane commands Aligning The active Cutplane can be aligned to the active Reference Plane using the Set from Ref Plane command The Cutplane can also be aligned to a reference object using the Set on Object command This command aligns the active Cutplane through a pick point and along the axis of the selected object for point clouds the surface normal of the picked point is used as the axis
456. original patch n All of the original patch s vertices are contained within the smallest possible rectangle To make a patch rectangular 1 Select the patch you want to make rectangular 2 From the Edit Object menu select Make Rectangular The patch is made rectangular Manage Window Scan Control Script Menu Scanner Control Action Opens dialog Usage The Manage command launches the Scanner Scripts window which is used to view add and delete scanner scripts 323 Index Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Measure displays submenu commands used to save edit and take various measurements The following commands submenus and dialogs are available from the Measure submenu Edit Measurements Save Measurements Clear Temporary Measurement Distance Datum Elevation Angle Back Angle Centerline Length Piping Takeoff Surface Area Volume Mesh Volume submenu Interfering Points Mesh to Points Deviations Contours to Mesh Deviations Find High Low Point Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Executes command Usage The Merge command combines two or more selected objects into one object If the objects were created from point clouds the merged object is refit to the original point clouds Objects of different types cannot be merged This command is useful for merging point clouds especially after many segmenting and cutting operations Thi
457. ormation on the texture mapping process see the Texture Mapping chapter Tilt Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Toggles function ON OFF Usage The Tilt command toggles the tilt function in Drawing mode which allows you to interactively tilt the active Reference Plane around one of its major in plane axes To tilt the Reference Plane 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Reference Plane and then select Tilt or click the Tilt icon You are now in Drawing mode The cursor changes to the Drawing Tool cursor and the Tilt function is ON In the ModelSpace drag the Drawing Tool cursor to tilt the active Reference Plane The initial click in the ModelSpace determines which axis is tilted Click close to the axis you want to tilt The active Reference Plane is tilted around the other major axis Release the mouse button The Reference Plane is tilted TIN Volume Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Opens dialog Usage The TIN Volume command displays a dialog that indicates how the prismoidal volume between a TIN mesh and a reference surface will be computed The volume is measured along the axis perpendicular to the active reference plane The reference plane must be perpendicular to one of the major axes of the current UCS The mesh es must be TIN relative to the reference plane The reference surface may be the second TIN mesh selected or the active reference plane if only one TIN mesh is selec
458. orrectness of the tables should be checked to the user s satisfaction 60 Animation Fitting and Inserting Objects from Parts Tables Many object types support the use of tables for insertion some support the use of tables in fitting to clouds For those object types that support the use of tables the Catalog Parts Table area of the Object Preferences dialog is activated when that object is selected in the Object Type field To enable object fitting from a parts table First open the Object Preferences dialog and then enable Catalog Parts Table and make Table and Item selections Next toggle the Show Table Matches command ON from the Fit to Cloud Options submenu See the Fit to Cloud entry in the Commands chapter for specific procedures To enable object insertion from a parts table First open the Object Preferences dialog and then enable Catalog Parts Table and make Table and Item selections these selections can be changed at the time of insertion Next toggle the Use Parts Table command ON from the Create Object menu See the nsert entry in the Commands chapter for specific procedures Selection Selection Basics Generally speaking an object is selected when you have indicated in some way that it will participate in the next command operation Selected surface objects are indicated with a checkerboard texture overlay while point clouds and lines temporarily become thicker while selected The Show Pick Polyline command t
459. oss hair 2 Pick the point that you want as your new focal point The viewpoint is adjusted and the focal point is set Standard Viewpoints Your viewpoint can be switched at any time to one of several standard viewpoints using the Standard Viewpoints submenu commands Standard viewpoints include top bottom left right front back isometric and right isometric See the corresponding commands in the Commands chapter Aligning the Viewpoint to Objects The viewpoint can be aligned to a reference object in the ModelSpace with the Align to Selection command This command moves the viewpoint the shortest possible distance in order to be parallel with the axis of a selected object a Fora selected point cloud the viewpoint is aligned with the position of the scanner that scanned the point cloud if available Zoom Control In addition to manual zoom controls described above Cyclone provides commands to zoom the viewpoint in or out by preset increments from 1 5 to 2 times larger or smaller or to zoom to fill the view with a fence or selection Saving and Restoring Viewpoints The ability to save and restore several viewpoints can be helpful in the navigation of larger ModelSpaces User defined viewpoints can be saved deleted and restored using the User Viewpoints dialog You can save viewpoints that are useful for modeling or provide a specific viewpoint for later restoration 84 Animation Maintaining Up Direction Cyc
460. ot necessarily a point within the boundary of the patch CENTER TO CENTER This command calculates the distance between the centers of the first selected object and the nearest intersection with the center of the second selected object The object type determines whether the measurement is to a centerline or to a center point e g a sohere is measured to its center point and a cylinder is measured to its centerline It does not matter where the objects were picked or if they were selected by other means POINT TO SCANNER This command calculates the distance between a picked point and the selected scanner If a point cloud is picked and a scanner object is not selected Cyclone determines the distance from the picked point to the scanner that was used to capture the point cloud This can be used to get a sense of the depth of a scanned scene and whether or not the point is within the calibrated range of the scanner Datum Measurements A datum is a user defined vertical line used to take measurements of other objects and features You create a datum by picking a point in the ModelSpace and selecting the Set Datum to Pick Point command or by selecting the Enter Datum command then entering the X Y Z coordinates of the desired point the datum is created as a vertical line passing through that point Until a datum is defined by the user the default datum passes through the point 0 0 0 You can measure the distance from the datum
461. ot be translated as objects but may instead be translated as a collection of lines and arcs To bring a COE file into Cyclone 1 Open the Cyclone Navigator window and select the database or project into which you want to import the COE file 2 Right click the Database ModelSpace name and select Import or select File Import from the Navigator window The Import from File dialog appears 3 Locate the COE file to be imported and initiate the process A new ModelSpace is created in the selected project Limitations SHAPES If there is an unsupported shape it will be brought into Cyclone as a wireframe object but ONLY if you check the Unsupported objects options in the COEOUT Options dialog in MicroStation otherwise the unsupported objects are not translated Instead a message is displayed informing you of that the objects have not been translated and asking if you want to select the objects not translated MODELSPACES You cannot bring COE objects directly into an existing ModelSpace however you CAN multi select and copy objects from the ModelSpace created from the COE import and paste them to the desired ModelSpace Alternatively you can use the Merge from ModelSpace command to merge ModelSpace Views See the Merge from ModelSpace entry in the Commands chapter for more information 120 Cyclone Object Exchange COE ANNOTATIONS With the exception of tags annotations and measurements made in AutoCAD are not tr
462. ot have equivalent or near equivalent objects in the destination environment in these cases the objects are represented by geometrical shapes or groups of shapes approximating the translated object For more information on how COE objects from Cyclone are translated into MicroStation entities see the section entitled How Objects Are Translated in this appendix The following sections describe the process for exporting objects from MicroStation as well as importing COE objects into Cyclone Limitations to the functionality are included as well along with a troubleshooting section Note This MDL application is designed primarily to translate modeled 3D objects between Cyclone and MicroStation While points can be translated from Cyclone to MicroStation both your DGN file size and your system performance will be greatly impacted As an alternative we recommend using Leica Geosystems HDS s CloudWorx application to view point clouds in MicroStation Creating a COE file from MicroStation Note You must be in a 3D environment i e an active DGN file initialized using a 3D seed file to run this command To perform an export to a COE file 1 Do your modeling as desired in MicroStation using a 3D seed DGN file a f you plan to export the entire DGN file contents make sure all objects are deselected before proceeding If you plan to export only objects that are visible e g objects in levels that are turned on and viewable make su
463. otation row The Axis of Rotation subdialog appears Specify the axis around which you want to rotate using the available axes points or picks and then click OK The Axis of Rotation subdialog closes Click the arrow icon to the right of the Center of Rotation row The Center of Rotation subdialog appears Specify the center point around which you want to rotate using the available points or picks and then click OK The Center of Rotation subdialog closes From the Rotate tab click the arrow icon to the right of the Angle of Rotation row The Angle of Rotation subdialog appears Specify the angle you want to rotate using the available axes points or custom values and then click OK The Angle of Rotation subdialog closes Click Rotate The object is rotated according to the specified axis center and angle To rotate the object from its new position according to the current settings click Rotate again When you are finished rotating the object click Close to exit the dialog 331 Index To move selected objects Select the object s you want to move From the Edit Object menu select Move Rotate The Move Rotate dialog appears and a graphical indicator appears in the ModelSpace viewer to illustrate the move axis and offset of the current settings If multiple objects are selected each object receives a unique identifier such as Cylinder 1 Cylinder 2 etc to aid in differentiating objects and points on those objects Signif
464. ote that additional information columns such as the delta X Y Z and Horizontal Vertical and projected measurements are not displayed by default To copy Measurement values to the Windows clipboard 1 Select the measurement s you want to copy 2 Click the Copy to Clipboard icon The measurement value s are copied as tab delimited text to the Windows clipboard from which it may be pasted into another application e g Notepad Measurements Dialog G Measurements IA A E Name SS Type Value Point Point 1 Distance 40 540 m Point Point 2 Distance 38 155 m Point Point 3 Distance 41 845 m A Highlight the selected measurement in the ModelSpace window B Center the selected measurement in the ModelSpace window C Delete the selected measurement 261 Index D When the button is toggled OFF each new measurement replaces the prior in the ModelSpace and no measurement data is added to this dialog When the button is toggled ON all measurement data taken while the button is active is displayed in this dialog and all measurements are displayed in the ModelSpace unless individual measurements are made invisible see F below E Copy selected data to the clipboard F List of measurements in current ModelSpace G Toggle visibility of the selected measurements H Measurement type I Measurement value J Move the selected measurement up in the list K Move the selected measurement down in
465. oud or any combination thereof This means you can use cloud constraints to align a cloud with a mesh model For best results the mesh should be sampled similarly to the density of the point cloud The three methods of creating a cloud constraint are 1 assisted creation via the Cloud Constraints Wizard 2 manual creation via the Add Cloud Constraint command and 3 addition of cloud constraints to an existing registration post registration or to geo referenced ScanWorlds using either the Add Cloud Constraint command or the Auto Add Cloud Constraints command Note Cloud constraints are not created by the Auto Add Constraints command This is the recommended method for creating cloud constraints The Cloud Constraints Wizard guides you through the entire process of creating cloud constraints and can save considerable time compared to the other methods First specify which ScanWorld pairs are overlapping and 46 Registration then the Wizard steps through the process of creating a cloud constraint for each specified pair of ScanWorlds See the Cloud Constraints Wizard entry in the Commands chapter for detailed instructions The Cloud Constraints Wizard offers the following advantages lt automatically copies all scan clouds except HDS Target clouds into the ControlSpace for the selected ScanWorlds It automatically opens the ControlSpaces side by side in the Constraint viewers and advances to the next ScanWorld pair after the use
466. oud Dialog Fields HORIZONTAL SAMPLING Enter the ratio of original to subsample horizontal points VERTICAL SAMPLING Enter the ratio of original to subsample vertical points POINT COUNT Enter a specific value for the number of points you want in the resulting point cloud PERCENTAGE OF ORIGINAL Enter a percentage by which to reduce the number of points ORIGINAL POINT COUNT Displays the number of points in the original cloud To reduce the number of points in a cloud 1 Select the point cloud that you want to reduce 2 From the Edit Object menu select Reduce Point Cloud The Reduce Point Cloud dialog appears 3 Select the sample rate by horizontal and vertical ratio point count or percentage of original and then click OK The point cloud is replaced by a subsampled version of the cloud 383 Index Reducer Connectors Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Reducer Connectors command connects two roughly parallel selected pipes To connect parallel pipes 1 Pick a point on the first pipe near the end you want connected 2 Multi select the second pipe near the end that you want connected 3 From the Tools menu point to Piping and then select Reducer Connectors The pipes are connected with a reducer Reference Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Reference Plane displays submenu commands used to display hide an
467. ouds of points gracefully a Modeled objects can provide dimensions and measurements that the clouds cannot provide directly e g the outside diameter of a pipe or the radius of a pipe bend a A form of data compression can be realized since a pipe has only a few parameters as compared with hundreds or thousands of points sampled on the surface of the pipe a Best fit objects are often more accurate than the individual point samples since the fitting tends to average out the individual sampling noise Working with Objects Region Growing The Region Grow submenu commands are used to fit a patch cylinder or sphere to an appropriate group of points within a point cloud without first having to segment the points This is done by picking one or more points within the region that contains a supported shape patch cylinder or sphere and then choosing the Region Grow submenu command appropriate for that shape For example if there is a wall behind an assortment of conduit and control boxes in the ModelSpace you can pick a few points on the wall and direct the program to fit a patch via region growing The algorithm determines the plane of the wall and ignores the points on the conduit and control boxes since they do not fit to the plane The Region Grow submenu also contains the Smooth Surface command Rather than fitting an object to a group of points this command is used to identify points on a connected smooth surface For example
468. ow Annotation POS yr A ok ee A le ee 432 Show Annotations mimo acid 432 Show Consain asacs rasne a ene te een ete ei 432 Show Constraint Viewer 1 2 eiee a E EEE Ea A E EER 433 Show Coordinate System AXES usrisriiicrarnorrririnide toar iedia ta dida ianari kaide ke ardeii tinai iiia a 433 Show Current Transform esin ne a aae a e a eA ites EE NRT ae 433 SHOW DANIM vrier adine inaa AEE EEEN EAER RERAN TENN 434 Show Diagnostics rs anne eed eee E S E E S E E 434 SNOW Grid PESE EEEE A E AA T 435 Se Aee a e e E A EE E E E E EE E R 436 Show Hidden Clouds eonenn da oia eh dean ida 436 SHOW Images iia A ia 436 SHOW INCOMING POINTS sey iaa A At A 436 xviii Table Of Contents show ModelSpace miii iia 437 Show Object S CIOU ieina ienei AEAEE AEEA AA ENAR AREARE AAEE KARRAR S 437 SNOW Output BOX saor ann S aE O AEOS EA EEO EEEO evel 437 Show Piek Pontec ceuen ii a a A AR a a dci 438 SHOW PICK Poly ota e 438 Show Port Cloud oricca iii 438 Show Rotation Handles ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeceaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeesaaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaaaaeees 439 SHOW SCAN St lo Cee d dat ali 439 SNOW SOIvVels eod iia id dived ta di a AEEA 439 SHOW SNOMCUS ii A ee ado 439 Shows Table Matches ci ia 439 Show Traverse Report ccccceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeaeaaeeeeseaaeeeeaaaa sees 440 SIMOUCTIO out ire 440 A tue ideentee Mbtata careers tac sored tegdecttubebradiderpede tae aerattnedien 441
469. ow See the Enable Output Box entry in this chapter for more information on Output Boxes VIEWER SAVE LAST VIEWPOINT Select Yesto save the current viewpoint within the ModelSpace View when closing the ModelSpace window Select No if you want to retain the initial viewpoint VIEWER POINT SELECTION TRANSPARENCY Enter a value between 0 not transparent and 1 completely transparent to affect how unselected point clouds are displayed when other point clouds are selected VIEWER BACKGROUND COLOR Use the color picker to specify the background color of the 3D graphics viewers including ModelSpace viewer Registration Constraint viewers etc VIEWER DRAW TEXT ON TOP Select Yesto always draw all graphical text on top of any 3D graphics within the ModelSpace View VIEWER MAX MULTI IMAGE MEMORY Enter a value for the maximum amount of memory that can be used to load multi images VIEWPOINT MANIPULATION SENSITIVITY DEFAULT Enter a value between 001 and 10 0 to determine the speed of viewpoint manipulation A sensitivity of 1 0 is the default a higher value makes the viewpoint move faster and a lower value makes the viewpoint move slower given the same mouse motion 365 Index VIEWPOINT MANIPULATION SENSITIVITY ALTERNATE Enter a value between 001 and 10 0 to determine the speed of viewpoint manipulation with ALT pressed and held A sensitivity of 0 1 makes the viewpoint moves ten times more slowly than the default of 1 0
470. ox Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The New command creates a new limit box and automatically sizes it to the objects selected in the ModelSpace The new limit box is aligned to the current UCS axes 333 Index If no objects are selected the new limit box is auto sized to all objects in the ModelSpace 7 If more than one pick point is present the limit box is initialized to the minimum bounding box of the pick points This is useful for quickly isolating cloud data with a few picks New Scanner Position Window Scan Control Menu Project Action Executes command Usage The New Scanner Position command resets the Scan Control window settings and prepares a new ScanWorld for the next scan To reset for a new scanner position 1 After repositioning the scanner or if you simply want to scan into a new ScanWorld select New Scanner Position from the Project menu a The New Scanner Position command is also available as the New Position button in the control panel on the right hand side of the Scan Control window 2 The following occur automatically a A new ScanWorld is prepared within the same project to contain the subsequent scans and images acquired from the scanner The current image in the Scan Control window is cleared a f an attached ModelSpace viewer opened from the Scan Control window to view incoming scan data is open it is detached and a new one is opened the previous ModelSpace
471. oy and compact databases on the remote server a Access to databases by other users can be restricted by toggling the visibility of selected databases in the Configure Database dialog To set up a server or networked workstation for remote administration Note This feature is applicable within Cyclone only and does not permit you to perform functions beyond those defined in this section 1 From the server console where the database resides run the password utility 2 From the Windows Start menu point to Programs Leica HDS Cyclone 5 8 1 and then click Set Server Password The Set Cyclone Server Password dialog appears 3 Set the password e To set the password type the desired password and click OK At the confirmation prompt type the password again and click OK e To remove any existing password leave the field blank and click OK 95 Databases To log on to a remote server 1 From the Navigator window open the Configure Databasesdialog 2 Select the Admin Login button A Login dialog appears 3 Enter the password as configured on the remote server The Configure Databasesdialog is redisplayed with all buttons active a See the Database entry in the Commands chapter for more detailed information on the use of the buttons in the Configure Databases dialog Configure Databases Dialog Options ADD The Add button is used to add a database to the selected server in the Navigator window Note A valid database
472. paces ModelSpace Views ScanWorlds and Registrations The Navigator window is used to manage and organize all of your data It is also used to exit the application To launch Cyclone 1 From the Windows desktop click the Start button 2 Point to Programs and then point to Leica HDS Cyclone 5 8 1 then select Cyclone The Navigator window appears User Configuration Management User Configuration Management helps keeps your Cyclone related files organized The first time you run Cyclone or CloudWorx the Cyclone User Configuration Manager appears Follow the prompts to specify the locations for your working library and log files Each user account has its own personal configuration The Cyclone User Configuration Manager can be run at any time but you should first exit Cyclone and CloudWorx before launching the Cyclone User Configuration Manager To launch Cyclone User Configuration Manager 1 From the Windows desktop click the Start button 2 Point to Programs and then point to Leica HDS Cyclone 5 8 1 then point to Utilities then select Cyclone User Configuration Manager The Cyclone User Configuration Manager appears Preferences In each Cyclone window the Preferences command in the Edit menu opens the Edit Preferences dialog which is used to manage preferences throughout the system Preferences can be edited for the current session only or for the current and all future sessions SESSION These preferences are no
473. ped Cyclone Object COE tries to fit these into the following Leica HDS objects Valve only with Leica HDS label Cylinder with caps only with Leica HDS label Flange with caps only with Leica HDS label Cone with caps only with Leica HDS label Reducer with caps only with Leica HDS label Elbow Reducing Elbow with caps only with Leica HDS label Group other non name Cell Headers Mesh only with Leica HDS label Contours only with Leica HDS label Not supported Smart Geometry SMSLD SMSURF Not supported other named cell headers Vertex when line length is zero Line Segment Polyline for non planar Polyline Planar Polyline only with Leica HDS label StdShape User Coordinate Systems Lvl 3 obj Aux_Coordinate Patch Group of Vertices with Annotation Text Group of Polylines and Circular Arcs Group of Polylines and Circular Arcs Circular Arc for circle Elliptical Arc for general ellipse 134 16 Arc 17 Text 18 Surface Complex 19 Solid Complex 23 Cone Cyclone Object Exchange COE Circular Arc for circular arc Elliptical Arc for general elliptic arc Vertex with Annotation Text COE tries to convert these to these Leica HDS objects Extruded Patch always capped Steel Section only with Leica HDS label Sphere Torus Elbow Mitered Elbow Reducing Elbow Cone Cylinder Reducer Revolved complex shapes as
474. pend The Import ASCII File Format dialog appears Choose the appropriate import settings and then click Import The file is imported and the Virtual Surveyor dialog appears a See the Import entry in the Commands chapter of the Cyclone User s Manual for details on import settings oP oN a Existing features and attached data may be displayed in the ModelSpace Set Feature Data The next step in the Virtual Surveyor process is setting feature data for the next feature you add Feature data include prefix starting number feature code and any custom notes that you wish to attach to the feature To set feature data 1 After selecting a file for data input output the Virtual Surveyor dialog appears 2 Enter the desired feature data 100 Sections Manager The current feature data displayed in the dialog is applied to the next feature that you add as well as all subsequent features until the feature data is changed To customize attributes push the Customize Columns button or right click the Attribute field and select Customize Text Fields The Customize Virtual Surveyor Attributes dialog appears This dialog can be used to create delete and reorder attribute fields When finished click OK The Virtual Surveyor dialog reappears 3 You are ready to begin adding features Pick and Add Features Once feature data have been set the next steps are to pick and edit candidate features and then add or confirm the ones you wa
475. per pipe The pipes must have the same outside diameter From the Create Object menu point to Region Grow and then select Pipe Run The Region Grow Pipe Run dialog appears Use the sliders to adjust the pipe run parameters Region Thickness defines the surface thickness outside of which points are excluded from the fit calculation Maximum Gap to Span defines a maximum distance between any two adjacent points included in the fit calculation Angle Tolerance is disabled Region Size defines a distance beyond the pick points at the ends of the pipe run Points within this distance are used in fitting those end pipes This can be used to control the extents of end pipes 386 Index a Details displays the fitting status 5 The Pipe menu in the dialog provides additional options a Discard Last Pipe removes the pipe grown last This can be used when you pick a suboptimal point or the region grower performs a poor fit The pipe picked last is shown in red Snap Bend Ratios when selected uses the closest bend ratio in the set 0 5xOD 0 75xOD 1 0xOD 1 5xOD 2xOD 3xOD 4xOD 5xOD when fitting elbows a Segment Points when selected segments the points used in the region grow from the rest of the cloud when the OK bution is clicked Not segmenting the points may result in better performance a Reverse Run changes the order of the pipes in the pipe run This can be used in conjunction with Discard Last Pipe to remove the p
476. pied to the ControlSpace directly from a ModelSpace using the Copy to ControlSpace command The object in the ControlSpace is independent of the object in the ModelSpace from which it originated Objects in a ControlSpace can be organized into layers or changed in appearance without affecting their counterparts in the ModelSpace To activate deactivate a constraint object from within a ControlSpace toggle the object s visibility This can be done by placing the object in a layer and turning the layer s visibility OFF Only visible objects in the ControlSpace are used in a Registration Hint For trial and error registration it may be useful to keep several versions of a constraint object organized by layers for example in the ControlSpace and hide all but one for a given trial Objects used as constraints in a frozen Registration may not be deleted from the ControlSpace until all constraints which use the object have first been deleted from the Registration Note that constraints cannot be deleted if a Registration is frozen unfreeze the Registration in order to delete constraints Note When using a database from an older version of Cyclone running the Optimize command from the Navigator window on the database automatically creates a default ControlSpace for each ScanWorld These ControlSpaces are populated with all known constraints and objects with registration labels Also a subordinate ControlSpace is created for each Registration
477. piping component information to a model in the form of annotations The component information includes piping specification line ID insulation thickness and Symbol Keys This information can be exported and mapped to various plant design software applications e Piping Mode is accessed through the Piping Mode command See the Piping Mode entry in the Commands chapter A typical workflow is as follows 1 Model objects in Cyclone 2 Using the Piping Mode dialog add piping specific information Piping specific information may also be added during the modeling process 3 Export ModelSpace to PCF 4 Using the I Convert from Alias Ltd converter process the PCF file into a format compatible with the target piping design package a l Convert currently supports PDS PDMS and AutoPlant Animation Cyclone s animation tool can be used to generate a series of frames along an editable path through a ModelSpace for a fly through animation The ModelSpace should remain static individual objects cannot be edited in any way throughout the animation However multiple animations can be created and combined to produce this effect The Animation Process Creating an animation can be accomplished in a variety of ways The following series of steps represents an outline of a typical project All animation commands and dialogs are found in the ModelSpace window within the Tools Animation submenu 1 Inthe ModelSpace window define an an
478. play the intensity or elevation map for the corresponding Mode when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter If the Global Color Map Mode is Colors from Scanner this scheme is used when the cloud mesh lacks per point color NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL INTENSITY MAP RANGE Enter an intensity range for the color map used when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL ELEVATION MAP START Enter the start elevation for the elevation map used when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL ELEVATION MAP DELTA Enter the difference in elevation represented color in the elevation map used when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL COLOR MAP NUMBER OF COLORS Enter the total number of colors used when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL COLOR MAP REPEAT COLORS OUTSIDE RANGE Select Yesto use a cyclic color scheme when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter 369 Index NEW MODELSPACE VIEW GLOBAL COLOR MAP GAMMACORRECTION Enter a value for the gamma correction used when the global color map is enabled in ModelSpace Views created thereafter NEW MODELSPACE VIEW POINT THICKNESS Specify the visual width and height in pixels of each
479. point To add a flat cap to the selected object 1 2 Pick a point on the object near the end that you want to cap From the End Caps submenu select Add Flat Cap Closest to Pick The cap appears To add flat caps to both ends of the selected object see the Add Both Flat Caps entry in this chapter To remove end caps see the Remove Cap Closest to Picks entry or the Remove Both Caps entry in this chapter Add Inside Fence Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection Action Executes command Usage The Add Inside Fence command adds any points within the fence to the sub selection set 165 Index For more information see the Advanced Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter Add Outside Fence Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection Action Executes command Usage The Add Outside Fence command adds any points outside a fence to the sub selection set For more information see the Advanced Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter Add Replace Coordinate Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS6000 Menu Project Action Opens dialog Usage The Add Replace Coordinate dialog is used to add or edit known or assumed coordinates that will be used in the Field Setup or Traverse procedures The known or assumed coordinates are saved in the Known CoordinatesScanWorld under the current Project For more information on Field Setup and Traverse see the
480. points are the points in ScanWorlds A and B respectively that are not found to be overlapping The remaining colored points are the overlapping points This gives you a better idea of what data the Optimize Cloud Alignment method is working with and what it considers overlapping If you delete or hide the dark blue and dark green points you are left with the overlapping regions of the two clouds If you see that any obvious surfaces are missing from this overlap region that may indicate that the initial alignment is inaccurate Improving Initial Alignment Hints Select the cloud constraint you want to fix and then select Show Constraint from the Constraint menu The ControlSpaces of the two ScanWorlds are shown and the Initial Alignment Hints pick points are shown as well At this time you can add or replace pick points with the goal of improving initial alignment accuracy If the initial alignment was satisfactory but you want to improve it in a single region add a pick point within that region in each Constraint viewer hold SHIFT to retain the previous picks To show the original picks again double click the constraint in the Constraint List tab When finished select Update Initial Cloud Alignment The constraint is reset to use the updated set of pick points and its status is set to not aligned 50 Registration Max Iterations Warning When running the Optimize Cloud Alignment command you may occasionally see the warning The
481. position of the selected pick point To edit the pick point s color click Color and use the color picker to select the color To edit the pick point s position click Position and enter values for X and Y coordinates The range of values is based on the number of pixels in the image Click OK Your color and position changes are made Edit Point Spot Lights Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Lighting Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Point Spot Lights command opens the Light Propertiesdialog which is used to set lighting attributes for the selected point or spot light For more information about lighting see the Lighting entry in the Modeling chapter Light Properties Dialog Options COLOR Select the amounts of red green and blue that make up the color of the light emitted ATTENUATION TYPE Select Constant light does not fade over distance Linear light fades evenly over distance or Quadratic light fades more quickly as distance from the source increases ATTENUATION FACTOR Adjust the factor used by the Linear and Quadratic attenuation settings 263 Index ORIGIN Adjust X Z and Y coordinates for the origin of the light source DIAMETER POINT LIGHT ONLY Adjust the diameter of the point light sphere It can be helpful to match the scale of your lights to that of the model The diameter of a point light does not affect the light that it casts only its visualization and ease of picking AN
482. ppears From the Scanner Model list select the model of the scanner that you are adding In the Scanner Name field type a logical name for the scanner you are adding In the IP Address field enter the IP Address for the scanner you are adding The IP Address is printed on the scanner Click OK The scanner is added To close the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close Note The Cyclone Scan Control interface with the HDS4500 is via firewire connection and no IP Address is entered Oo PON gt o To remove a scanner 1 Fromthe Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears 2 From the list of scanners select the scanner that you want to remove and then click Remove The scanner is removed a To close the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close To toggle scanner visibility a Scanners with visibility toggled OFF are not displayed in the Navigator window but are not removed 1 From the Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears a 10 toggle visibility select deselect the box below the Visibility icon next to the appropriate scanner a To close the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close Window Navigator Menu Create Action Executes command Usage The ScanWorld command creates a new ScanWorld in the selected location A new ScanWorld can be created in
483. pter 461 Index Use Fit Constraints Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Fit to Cloud Options Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Use Fit Constraints command enables disables user specified constraints used to fit a geometric object to a segmented point cloud in the ModelSpace viewer g In order to use fit constraints the Fit Constraints box must be selected and the desired constraints must be set within the Object Preferencesdialog See the Object Preferences command For an overview of fitting objects in Cyclone see the Modeling entry in the Getting Started chapter Use Parts Table Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Use Parts Table command enables disables the use of object specific parts tables when inserting objects in the current ModelSpace viewer When enabled object types that have Catalog Parts Table selected in the Object Preferences dialog present controls to select a table and part when inserting that object type When disabled no tables are used by any operation User Coordinate System Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Handles Constrain Motion to Action Executes command Usage The User Coordinate System command constrains the movement of objects relative to the specified axis of the user coordinate system The User Coordinate System command works in conjunction with axis constraints For information on constraining objec
484. pulldown menu An SKEY symbol key identifies a generic object e g a standard Cyclone flange as a specific piping component e g Slip on Flange The 2 4 characters at the end of the SKEY comprise the encoding of that SKEY Each type of piping component has its own SKEY and each type of piping component can be assigned only those SKEYs available to that type To select which SKEYs are present in the pulldown e g to limit the SKEYs to those components that will be encountered in the current project instead of all possible components right click on the row of the object type and select Customize Next indicate which SKEYs are to be available in the pulldown by checking them in the Customize SKEYs dialog Select the desired piping components and click Apply The selected piping components are re assigned the current Spec and LinelD as well as the SKEY appropriate to the type of piping component selected When finished click Close The Piping Mode dialog provides the automatic functionality only while the dialog is open For example when using cylinders and elbows to represent railing or conduit the user should close the Piping Mode dialog to avoid assigning data irrelevant to such objects Piping Takeoff Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Executes command Usage The Piping Takeoff command calculates and displays the takeoff for the selected piping run The takeoff is similar to the centerline length exc
485. r ModelSpace which may break your chain of undo and redo events if the events affect a common object Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extrude Action Executes command Usage The Unextrude command removes the selected extrusion leaving only the original patch To unextrude an extrusion 1 Select the extrusion you want to unextrude a It does not matter which side of the extrusion is picked the original patch is always the result 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Extrude and then select Unextrude The extrusion is deleted leaving only the original patch Unfreeze Registration Window Registration Menu Registration Action Executes command Usage The Unfreeze Registration command allows constraints in a previously frozen registration to be modified n After modifying constraints a new registration must be performed and a new ScanWorld frozen registration must be created in order to affect changes n For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter 457 Index Note The Unfreeze Registration command removes the created ScanWorld from above the Registration The operation is disabled if a ModelSpace exists under the created ScanWorld To unfreeze the Registration first delete the ModelSpace under the created ScanWorld in the Navigator Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Group Action Executes command Usage The Ungroup command restores a
486. r Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 From the Window menu select Pointing The Pointing panel appears in the control panel Select the pointing Method If using the Orthogonal from Station method enter the Target ID The Target ID must match a known coordinate Enter the HT of the target point if any relative to the coordinate at which to aim the laser Enter the coordinate or angles of the point at which to aim the laser If using the Orthogonal from Station method the coordinates are already known If using the Manual Polar method enter the Azimuth and Distance to the point If using the Manual Orthogonal method enter the 3D coordinate of the point If using the Pick Point method pick the point in the Scan Control viewer Push the Point button to activate the laser The scanner turns to aim the laser at the configured point Use the arrow buttons to adjust the azimuth and elevation The scanner turns to aim the laser at the new position Push the QuickScan button once to disengage the base motor and manually turn the scanner Push the QuickScan button a second time to re engage the base motor Push the Stop button to stop pointing 358 Index Polygonal Fence Mode Window ModelSpace ScanControl HDS2500 Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Polygonal Fence Mode command enters Polygonal Fence mode and selects the Polygonal Fence mode cursor For more information on working
487. r for each point assign the NormalX NormalY and NormalZ headings to the corresponding columns 2 If needed click the Options button to invoke the Range Options dialog Configure the minimum and maximum valid values for the Color and Intensity if needed Values beyond the valid ranges are clamped to the nearest minimum or maximum value Typical values for Color are 0 255 Typical values for Intensity can vary by scanner manufacturer 307 Index To import an image graphic file into Cyclone 1 Select the Database or Project into which you want to import the image file and then select Import from the File menu 2 Inthe Files of type field select All Image Formats or select a specific graphical file format then navigate to the location of the file to be imported and select the file to be imported 3 Click Open The file is imported into Cyclone Import Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Import command imports saved limit boxes from an LBX file The imported limit boxes are appended to the end of the current list Limit box names and parameters may be duplicated Import Calibration Info Window Scan Control Image Viewer Menu Scan Control Scanner Control Camera Calibration Image Viewer Image Calibration Action Opens dialog Usage The Import Calibration dialog is used to import camera calibration data from a text file
488. r has picked corresponding points and pushed the Cloud Constraints Wizard s Create Constraint button a t provides a quick way to check for overlap between two ScanWorlds Pressing the eyeglass button in the Cloud Constraint Wizard s grid control displays the corresponding ScanWorlds ControlSpaces in the Constraint viewers Manual Creation The manual process is similar to creating a sohere sphere constraint 1 In the Constraint viewers in the Registration window show two ModelSpaces or ControlSpaces that contain overlapping clouds 2 Pick three or more matching points on the two clouds See below for hints on selecting these points 3 Select the Add Cloud Constraint command If the picked points match closely enough the cloud constraint is created and the selected clouds are copied as needed into their respective ControlSpaces See the Add Cloud Constraint entry in the Commands chapter for detailed instructions Post Registration Adding Cloud Constraints to Improve an Existing Registration or Geo referenced Registration If you have pre aligned ScanWorlds ScanWorlds that are already in the same coordinate system either through registration using objects or geo referencing you can add cloud constraints and re register the ScanWorlds to optimize the registration results Since the ScanWorlds have already been pre aligned or registered each cloud constraint added uses the existing registration to derive its initial alignment Thi
489. r pick the extrusion object face from which you want to create an extrusion object 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Extrude and then select Extrude Perpendicular The Set Extrusion Thickness dialog appears 3 Enter a value for the thickness of the extrusion object and then click OK The extrusion object is created along a perpendicular axis and towards the viewpoint Extrude to Last Pick Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extrude Action Executes command Usage The Extrude to Last Pick command adds sufficient thickness to a patch or a face of an extruded object to reach the last picked point This command works with multiple selected patches or extruded object faces To create an extrusion object to a picked point 1 Select the patch or extruded object face from which you want to create an extruded object 2 Pick a point to define the thickness of the extrusion object 3 From the Edit Object menu point to Extrude and then select Extrude to Last Pick The extrusion object is created by extruding the selected patch or extrusion object face until the far face of the extrusion object lies in the same plane as the last picked point Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Fence displays submenu commands used to clear a fence and to segment and delete portions of objects relative to the fence The following commands are available from the Fence submenu From Selecti
490. r polylines to be used for creating the mesh object 2 From the Create Object menu select Create Mesh The Meshing Style dialog opens 3 Select the type of mesh object you wish to create Note When creating a TIN any selected polylines are incorporated as breaklines in the new TIN a Select Basic Meshing to create a basic mesh consisting of triangles using trios of adjacent points as triangle vertices Select Complex Meshing to create a mesh consisting of triangles using trios of adjacent points that are likely to lie on the same surface Select TIN Meshing to create a mesh such that there are no overlapping triangles with respect to the vertical direction the current coordinate system determines the up direction for a TIN Note Basic Meshing and Complex Meshing cannot be done with more than one point cloud 4 Click OK The mesh object is created a Click Cancel to abort the command a Use the ScanWorld Explorer to make the point cloud visible again See the ScanWorld Explorer entry in the Commands chapter for more information Tip If your mesh object seems to have deep shadows or what seem to be large gaps go to the ModelSpace tab in the Edit Preferences dialog change the lighting preferences to Point Source and click Apply Mesh Viewing Options Cyclone provides you with a variety of options for adjusting and fine tuning the view of your mesh object Viewing a mesh in wireframe can be helpful especially when you are edi
491. r than the Maximum are given the color at the high end of the selected color scheme GAMMACORRECTION Select this to enable gamma correction which can accentuate subtle differences in intensities A value of 1 0 is equivalent to disabling gamma correction When Mode is Image Texture Map Colors from Scanner or Intensity Map MINIMUM Enter a value for the lowest intensity to be mapped to the low end of the selected color scheme MAXIMUM Enter a value for the highest intensity to be mapped to the high end of the selected color scheme ACTUAL Displays the object s original minimum and maximum intensity values When Mode is Elevation Map START Enter a value for the elevation to be mapped to the low end of the selected color scheme DELTA Enter a value for the difference in elevation represented by each color in the selected color scheme See Number of Colors earlier Edit Measurements Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Measurements dialog is used to view save delete and copy measurements to the Windows clipboard 260 Index To customize the Edit Measurements dialog 1 Right click anywhere in the column header and select Customize from the context menu The Customize Columns dialog appears 2 Select the columns of information you wish to display in the Edit Measurements dialog and then click Exit The dialog s columns are customized to your specifications a N
492. r window 1 Select the object you want to rename 2 From the Edit menu select Rename The object s name is selected and ready for editing 3 Type a new name and then press ENTER Reset Active Alignment Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Alignment and Section Action Executes command Usage The Reset Active Alignment command clears the active alignment a Station notation values are only supported when there is an active alignment a Existing measurements are not affected Reset Alignment Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Reset Alignment command resets the selected cloud constraints to the not aligned state and resets its current alignment transform to that specified by the initial cloud alignment For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter Reset ScanWorld Coordinate System Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Executes command Usage The Reset ScanWorld Coordinate System command restores the original coordinate system and default up direction of the current ModelSpace s parent ScanWorld Reset Target Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Reset Target command deletes any existing targeting fence and replaces it 392 Index with a centered rectangular 60 x 60 fence Resolution HDS2500 Window Scan Control Menu
493. raction Action Executes command Usage The From Selection in Fence command creates a 2D line drawing from the current selection within the rectangular fence To extract 2D lines from a selection 1 Make sure that the ModelSpace is in orthographic projection See the Orthographic Perspective entry in this chapter Select the object s from which you want to extract 2D lines Using the rectangular Fence tool fence the area from which you want to extract 2D lines The fence defines the boundaries of the 2D drawing From the Tools menu point to 2D Extraction and then select From Selection in Fence The 2D drawing is created and displayed in a new window Save the new 2D drawing as a CAD file or as a new ModelSpace To save the 2D drawing as a CAD file select Save as CAD file from the File menu and then use the browser that appears to select a name and location The unit of measure in the exported file is scaled to match the current unit of measure in Cyclone Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON Usage The Front command determines the active side of the estimated surfaces in point clouds The command affects the Shaded and One Sided Point Cloud Rendering modes Get Image Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Get Image command cap
494. rain The constraint is created and the Cloud Constraints Wizard opens the next ScanWorld pair in the Constraint viewers 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each selected ScanWorld pair as needed mor Note To be used in global registration cloud constraints must be optimized via the Optimize Cloud Alignment command Codirectional Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Executes command Usage The Codirectional command aligns one or more selected objects so that they are parallel and facing in the same direction as a reference object 197 Index To make objects codirectional C Multi select the objects you want to make codirectional The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Codirectional The objects are rotated about their origins to align with their axes in the same direction as the reference object oincident Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Executes command Usage The Coincident command moves and aligns one or more objects to the corresponding axis and origin of a reference object To make objects coincident 1 2 Multi select the objects you want to make coincident The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Coincident The selected objects are moved to align
495. rameters to specific values Fitting constraints can be set for each object type in the Object Preferences dialog Each constraint may be Unspecified Initial or Fixed The value of an Unspecified constraint is found by the fitting algorithm An Initial value can help the fitter as a hint of what the value might be The fitter uses a Fixed constraint as the final value of that parameter For example if you know that a cylinder to be fit must have a certain diameter you could set the Fit Diameter to Fixed at that diameter On the other hand if you believe that the cylinder might be around a certain diameter but aren t sure you could set the Initial value to that diameter but the final cylinder may have a different diameter Finally if you don t know what the diameter is you can set the Fit Diameter to Unspecified e To fit with constraints first enable Fit Constraints with Initial or Fixed values within the Object Preferences dialog and then toggle the Use Fit Constraints command ON from the Fit to Cloud Options submenu Otherwise the fitter determines the final values entirely on its own a The Fit Constraints area of the Object Preferences dialog is disabled for objects that do not support fit constraints Point Cloud Segmentation It is often necessary to divide or segment a point cloud into one or more subsets in order to focus further operations on a subset remove unwanted data etc Segmentation provides a process for grouping diff
496. ration at least twice the size of the database being compacted OPTIMIZE The Optimize button optimizes the selected databases see the Optimize entry in the Commands chapter 96 Databases Optimizing a Database With the degree of changes in this version of Cyclone older databases must be optimized before they may be used Optimizing a database makes sure that the data in the database is consistent new objects e g ControlSpaces may be created as needed Note Optimizing a database can be a time consuming process depending on number of objects to be processed 97 Virtual Surveyor Cyclone s Virtual Surveyor tool can be used to generate traditional survey output from a scanned model in Cyclone Virtual Surveyor allows you to pick points in a ModelSpace assign feature codes and export data in custom text formats that can be imported into other software programs The Virtual Surveyor Process Creating survey data can be accomplished in a variety of ways The following series of steps represents a typical project Your specific projects may differ from the following general guidelines a All Virtual Surveyor commands and dialogs are accessed in the ModelSpace window from the Tools Virtual Surveyor command 1 Open the Select Virtual Surveyor Input Output dialog and create a new file or open an existing file for data input output The Virtual Surveyor dialog appears 2 From the Virtual Surveyor dialog set featu
497. rations D Delete the selected Reference Plane E Move the selected Reference Plane one position lower in the list F Move the selected Reference Plane one position higher in the list G Toggle the visibility of the Reference Plane H Click to use the color picker to adjust the color of the Reference Plane To rename a Reference Plane click the name of the Reference Plane to be changed click it again after a short pause to select the current name type a new name and then press ENTER 162 Index Add Edit Registration Label Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Opens dialog Usage The Registration Label dialog is used to add or edit a label to the objects involved in the selected constraint or to the object selected in the Constraint Viewer To edit the label of the object selected in the Constraint Viewer right click in the Constraint Viewer and invoke this command from the context menu The command in the main menu applies to the selection in the Constraint List For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter To add or edit the registration label of the objects involved in a constraint Select the constraint in the Constraint List From the Constraint menu select Add Edit Registration Label The Registration Label dialog appears Enter the registration label and click OK to assign the registration label to the objects involved in the selecte
498. raw Are Start End Center perioadei aeaeaei a aaa a a anaia aa a 245 Draw Circle 3 Points ON Circle scce ntancsroseneoni yasa nae A a 245 Draw Circle Point Center uc a ir a A NA A A e aat 246 Praw tubie Spine aea e E E e E OR 246 Draw Cubic Spline Loopre or rnt asete a ie ee tel AE E EAE TEES 247 Praw ENDS tad dali 247 Draw lomete FONGO ea E A A hee ae 248 Draw Line iarsin a A A N A A e iA 248 Draw Polygonia aeS a aiden Gee ian EEE E AANO PE AEN OS PASAS RENN 249 Draw Poly dia 249 Draw Rectangles ud aiii 250 Draw A aas cone dete a e Corti deere dene ety deee tl awbet ats deer E EE 250 Draw AN 251 Di Ai 251 Eccentric Reducer Connectors occcccoocccccccnocnccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanancnns 252 Edit Activo FIANO e E 252 Edit Glipping PlaneS iia iii 253 Edit GolOr MaD eeren ia ic 253 Edit Color Mateialicia an dadeh tidy elite a a E dite tean 255 viii Table Of Contents Edit Drawing Parameters oia 257 Edit Elbow BendR alse riides ieni ae KE E RNEER ENAERE E A VAENE 258 Edit Environmental Lights Srne E AO N E S ETE 258 Edit Global Color Maprani enhi Pate ia de riag PA Dad Seven TER 259 Edit Measures 260 Edit Parameters Cloud Registration ococooonncccnnonncccononnccnnnonnccnnnnnnccnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnns 262 Edit Parameters Region Grow ooooccccnonnccccnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnnccnnnnnncrnnnnnncinnns 262 ECit Point Propenles iia tr a rai 263 Edit Point Spot L
499. re data a Feature data include prefix starting number feature code and any notes that you wish to attach to the feature The prefix and number are combined into a unique Point Number for each feature e Use the polyline creation feature to define linework as a polyline or polygon as you pick each feature 3 Pick a point for a candidate feature The current feature data are attached to the candidate feature and displayed in parentheses You may edit and or lock coordinates for candidate features using the X Y and Z fields Multi pick continue picking while holding the SHIFT key to add additional features with the current feature settings Features are sequentially numbered in the order in which they were picked Confirm candidate features Confirmed features are displayed with an asterisk following the feature data Continue picking and adding sequential sets of features with the appropriate feature attributes Export all features and data to the text file Export formats can be customized to match the input format rules of your preferred survey data processing software e Click Create Vertices to create one vertex for each feature Candidate features are ignored e Click Export LandXML to export features directly into the LandXML format Candidate features are ignored e Click Export Leica System 1200 to export features as Leica System 1200 files Candidate features are ignored See Export Leica System 1200 in the Command Reference
500. re you are in the correct view before proceeding If you plan 127 Cyclone Object Exchange COE to export only selected objects make sure those selections are made now taking care to select only what you intend to export a If you do not currently have a command line interface available select Key in from the Utility menu to display the Key in dialog 2 Enter the command MDL LOAD COEOUT at the command line 3 In the file dialog enter a unique file name in the Files field select the destination folder and click OK The COEOUT Options dialog appears 4 Choose your desired options and click OK to continue or Cancel to abort The selected objects are exported to the COE FILE a The complexity of the DGN file as well as your computer s capability will determine the speed with which the objects are exported a lf an error message is displayed indicating a system fault refer to the Troubleshooting section in this appendix Mapping MicroStation Levels to COE Layers MicroStation supports as many as 63 levels with level 63 reserved as the default layer When you export a DGN FILE to a COE FILE these levels are exported as well and COEOUT intelligently maps each level containing objects to a Cyclone layer naming the Cyclone layer based on the level number or level name if you used a level name file LVL However as with COEIN you also have the option of customizing the level layer mapping process by editing the m
501. reated The branch is represented by a placeholder object to which the selected pipes are connected The placeholder for the branch is assigned the current SKEY appropriate to the type of branch represented The pipes are automatically extended or sliced as necessary and a piping connection is established see the Connect Piping entry in this chapter Create Drawing Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Create Drawing command is the final step to finish the current drawing procedure For more information on drawing see the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter Create Drawing from Object Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Executes command Usage The Create Drawing from Object command converts an existing line object back into a drawing object projecting the existing object onto the drawing plane as a polyline 212 Index The Create Drawing from Object command works with previously created line drawings including polylines arcs rectangles etc and imported line objects The Create Drawing from Object command can be used to convert a line object into a drawing to be used with the Export Template command Create Lines from Cuts Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Executes command Usage The Create Lines from Cuts command creates polylines where the active Cutplane intersects objects and meshes To create polylines where the active Cutplan
502. rection and or vertex for the inserted object to base its initial position orientation and dimensions Using this method it is possible to build a chain of objects such as a piping run from scratch The inserted object is initially selected with a pick point based on the previous selection If there was no previous selection a default pick point is provi ded To insert an object 1 Pick an existing object if you want to use it as a reference or position the ModelSpace viewpoint s focal point where you want the object to appear a To insert parts from a table enable and specify the part in the Object Preferences dialog see the Object Preferences entry in this chapter and then toggle the Use Table Parts command ON from the Create Object menu For more information on parts tables see the Using Parts Tables section in the Modeling chapter 2 From the Create Object menu point to Insert and then select the type of object you want to insert The Insertion Propertiesdialog appears and a transparent preview object appears in the ModelSpace View 3 Make desired changes to the default size position color or other properties of the selected object The preview object is updated to reflect the current settings l parts tables are enabled for the type of object being inserted select the desired selections from the Table and Item lists 312 Index a To move or rotate the object from its current position use the Move or Rota
503. red options and click OK to continue or Cancel to abort The Select World Coordinate System dialog appears a Notice that any user coordinate systems UCS you mapped while in Cyclone are listed here if you wish to use one of these Cyclone defined coordinate systems as your world coordinate system WCS in this DGN file select the desired coordinate system from the list then click gt WCS to map the selected user coordinate system to the world coordinate system making them one and the same All objects are aligned accordingly a If you do not wish to use a UCS in this DGN file click the Default button to map the COE data to the current WCS in MicroStation Note Whether selected or not all user coordinate systems contained within the COE file are imported into the DGN file as auxiliary coordinate systems ACS a Once the coordinate system has been set the COE file will be loaded into the current DGN file The complexity of the COE file as well as your computer s capability determine the speed with which the objects are brought in and displayed a lf an error message or a standard output window is displayed indicating a system fault refer to the Troubleshooting section in this document Mapping COE Layers to MicroStation Levels In Cyclone you have access to an unlimited number of layers for use in organizing your drawings When you export objects to a COE file these layers are saved to the COE file as well and when the COE
504. rences in the Scan tab of the Edit Preferences dialog 2 Set the fence to cover the area to be loaded A larger region may take more time to load Select the point cloud s to be considered for loading 4 From the Scanner Control menu select Load Points within Fenced Selection The points in the fenced region are loaded from the selected scans e Anew scan is created from each selected partially imported scan that overlaps the fence e The points within the fence are fully loaded without subsampling oo Lower Active Cutplane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Executes command Usage The Lower Active Cutplane command lowers the Cutplane by the amount specified in the Cutplanes dialog offset parameter see the Add Edit Cutplanes command Make Available Offline Window Navigator ModelSpace Menu Navigator Tools ModelSpace File Action Executes command Usage The Make Available Offline command finds any data referenced by the selected object and copies that data into the selected object s database ensuring that all data in the selected object can be accessed even if the original database is unavailable This procedure is relevant only for point clouds whose data reside on another database e g a ModelSpace created in database A that has been reference copied to database B If you attempt to open a ModelSpace when the original database or the source server is inaccessible and you
505. rizontal angle in the Scan tab updates Any dependent values e g number of points also update To cancel the QuickScan without changing any scanner settings click the Cancel button If any angles were changed the values revert back to what they were before you clicked the QuickScan button Note If you have previously set the scanner orientation all horizontal angles are relative to the current orientation See also Station Data Raise Active Cutplane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Executes command Usage The Raise Active Cutplane command raises the Cutplane by the amount specified in the Offset command see the Add Edit Cutplanes entry in this chapter 380 Index Raise Lower Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Toggles function ON OFF Usage The Raise Lower command toggles the raise lower function in Drawing mode which allows you to interactively raise or lower the active Reference Plane without changing its orientation To raise lower the Reference Plane 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Reference Plane and then select Raise Lower or click the Raise Lower icon You are now in Drawing mode The cursor changes to the Drawing Tool cursor and the raise lower function is ON 2 In the ModelSpace drag the Drawing Tool cursor up down to raise lower the active Reference Plane 3 Release the mouse button The Reference Plane is raised lowered Randomize Colors of Visibl
506. roperties dialog See the View Object As entry in the Commands chapter a For definitions of the available types of color maps see the Edit Color Map entry in the Commands chapter e To edit the color map for the selected cloud mesh select Edit Color Map from the Appearance submenu of the Edit Object menu Global Color Map settings allow users to designate the color mapping for all clouds simultaneously based not on the original or current range of its source scan but on the actual intensity value of each of its sampled points so that all points with the same intensity are drawn with the same color When Global Color Mapping is ON it overrides any individual color map parameters or point coloring for individual point clouds and meshes e To toggle Global Color Mapping ON OFF select Global Color Map from the Appearance submenu of the Edit Object menu e To edit the Global Color Map select Edit Global Color Map from the Appearance submenu of the Edit Object menu Object Preferences The Object Preferences dialog provides a central location where object modeling defaults may be configured The dialog is available from the Navigator window to set user default and session level preferences and ModelSpace Viewers to set user default session level and ModelSpace View specific preferences Object Information Cyclone displays information for any selected object within a ModelSpace when the Object Info command is selected from t
507. ror D Calculate the elevation for a selected QC point using a pick point The Method becomes User E Reset the selected QC point s Method to Auto F Delete the selected QC point G Invoke the Save Report dialog to display information about the elevation check H Select Use to include the QC point in the statistics 270 Index Il The statistics for the elevation check J Measure the relative elevation of each QC point to the cloud points in the region around that QC point K A QC point with an Error greater in magnitude than the Max Elevation Error is marked with an asterisk in the Error column M Compute the difference in elevation between each QC point and the neighboring cloud points N Close the dialog Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Enable command activates the selected constraint for use in the registration n For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter To enable a constraint 1 In either the ScanWorlds Constraints or the Constraint List tab select the constraint you want to enable 2 From the Constraint menu select Enable The constraint is enabled and its status is marked as ON Enable Dual Axis Compensator Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 Menu Scanner Action Executes command Usage When Enable Dual Axis Compensator is selected the use of the dual axis
508. row icons under either Frame Number or Parametric Time The viewpoint is moved forward back through the animation by the increment of time or frames specified in the appropriate Delta field When Auto Preview Frame Time is not selected a current frame time indicator moves along the animation path but the viewpoint does not move when the time or frame arrows are pressed 175 Index 5 Add additional keyframes if needed To add a keyframe navigate to the desired location on the animation path and then click Add Keyframe Time A new keyframe is inserted 6 When finished click OK The changes are saved to the database and the Animation Editor dialog closes The animation output process may now be started via the Animate command Annotations Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Annotations displays submenu commands used add edit and delete annotations custom annotations feature codes and camera images The following commands and dialogs are available from the Annotations submenu Add Edit Annotations Add Edit Custom Annotations Show Annotations Show Annotation Keys Add Edit Camera Images Add Edit Feature Code For Annotation submenu command details see their individual entries Appearance Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Appearance displays submenu commands used to adjust the object s display properties
509. s K Click to copy the material property to the current color swatch which in turn also changes all selected material swatches Ambient is the color reflected by an object in response to the ambient lighting See Edit Environmental Lights entry in this chapter Diffuse is the base color of an object in response to a white light source Specular is the color reflected in a surface s highlights 256 Index This setting interacts with the Shininess setting to determine the overall highlighting effect of the material Emissive is the color generated by the object lt does not need an external light source but does not necessarily emit light L Material swatches display the color of their various properties Right click to use the slider to adjust individual brightness When the current color swatch is changed any selected material swatches are also changed Color and Material Editor Menus The Edit menu contains Copy and Paste commands Copy Copies the current color to the Cyclone color clipboard Paste Copies the color from the Cyclone color clipboard to the current color swatch and any selected material swatch es The Colors menu contains commands that assign standard colors and values to the current color swatch and any selected material swatches The Palette menu contains commands used to open the Color Palette and the Material Palette see the Add Edit Colors and Add Edit Materials entries in this chap
510. s including initial viewing position n Multiple views of a ModelSpace can be saved and restored as a convenient means of storing various presentations of a ModelSpace You can save and then restore as many ModelSpace views as needed For a comprehensive list of what is saved with a ModelSpace View see the ModelSpace Views entry in the Modeling chapter 401 Index To save the current ModelSpace View 1 When you have a ModelSpace View that you want to save select Save View As from the View menu The Save ModelSpace View dialog appears a To specify a name for the view enter the name you want in the ModelSpace View Name field 2 Click OK The ModelSpace View is saved and remains the active ModelSpace View Any further changes to this View are persistent a Saved ModelSpace views are stored with their ModelSpace in the Navigator window a To open a ModelSpace View in a new ModelSpace window double click the view you want from the Navigator window To open a different ModelSpace View in the current ModelSpace window use the ModelSpace Views command Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Scan command begins a scan of the targeted area using the current settings Scanning progress is displayed in the Progress bar in the bottom of the window By default sample points are displayed in the connected ModelSpace viewer see the Open ModelSpace Viewer entry in this chapter
511. s are segmented via the Cut Sub Selection command 58 Animation To make a precise segment from a point cloud 1 Draw a rough fence around the points that you want to segment 2 Using the Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands create a temporary selection 3 Continue to refine the temporary selection add or subtract points by manipulating the viewpoint drawing a new fence and using subsequent Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu commands 4 From the Create Object menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Cut Sub Selection The points within the temporary subset are now a separate point cloud and can be selected independently Segmenting by Intensity The Cut Cloud by Intensity dialog can be used to manually segment a point cloud above and below a user specified intensity When a point cloud is viewed with an color map the Cut by Intensity command provides a slider that interactively updates the point cloud and allows you to specify an intensity range for segmentation This can be useful to separate points sampled on surfaces with different light dark etc materials Segmenting by Interfering Points The Highlight Interfering Points dialog is used to highlight points that are within a user specified distance of a selected object and segment those points from the point cloud For example if you place a beam into a ModelSpace View using the Insert Object command and you want to identify any poi
512. s are useful as constraints in the registration process If you are using either HDS Targets or spheres a good time to acquire the targets is after the initial scan of the scene Once acquired targets are automatically added to the ControlSpace Using a Scanner Script It is often necessary to scan several areas within the same scene each with different scanning parameters In these cases it can be more efficient to use a scanner script The scanner script functions allow you to queue up a batch of scans and individually adjust targets and scan densities for each of the intended target areas before beginning the actual scans This saves you the time it would otherwise take to wait for a scan to finish before setting up the next scan or perform unattended scanning For instructions on using a script see the Editor entry in the Commands chapter 32 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 Merging Sub Scans When creating a large scan Cyclone creates a sub scan each time it reaches a set increment of maximum cloud points per sub scan 1 5 million points by default This allows you to start manipulating point clouds efficiently as the remainder of the scan is being captured After the full scan is complete but before modeling or registration the sub scans should be merged When working on a project that includes multiple large scans it may be more efficient to merge sub scans while subsequent scans are being c
513. s command creates a new ModelSpace copies the fenced object s into the new ModelSpace and opens a ModelSpace View for the new ModelSpace Partially fenced objects are included in the new ModelSpace Partially fenced clouds are not segmented but only the points within the fence are copied See the Copy Fenced to New ModelSpace entry in the Commands chapter for instructions Extracting 2D Lines from the Contents of a Fence A 2D line drawing can be created from the contents of a rectangle fence using the From Fence Contents command The 2D drawing is created and displayed in a new window See the From Fence Contents entry in the Commands chapter for more information Taking Measurements Cyclone provides a variety of object and linear measurement tools in the Measure submenu Measurements can be viewed saved deleted and copied to the Windows clipboard using the Measurements dialog It is often unnecessary to save each measurement so measurements are considered temporary unless the Save Measurements option is ON Temporary measurements 69 Animation are replaced by each newly executed measurement command and can be cleared using the Clear Temporary Measurements command Some objects must be picked to display a measurement graphic Object Measurements ELEVATION This command calculates the distance between a picked point and the origin along the current vertical direction If multiple points are being measured the results are
514. s command can be used to merge contour lines as well as objects provided that the contours have compatible properties e g same major and minor elevations Merging fills in space between the merged objects in the process of creating the new object Use this command to create objects such as wide floors and ceilings or long pipes This feature is particularly useful when filling areas not scanned directly To merge objects 1 Multi select the objects that you want to merge 2 From the Create Object menu select Merge The objects are merged and the new object appears To merge contour lines 1 Multi select contour lines with similar properties that you want to merge Note You cannot merge contour lines within the same point cloud 2 Select Merge from the Create Object menu The contour lines are merged into one entity Note Use the Edit Properties dialog Edit Object Edit Properties to modify contour 324 Index line properties as well as contour label properties Merge from ModelSpace Window ModelSpace Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Select ModelSpace to Merge dialog combines two ModelSpaces This command may be used to incorporate changes made in another ModelSpace To merge ModelSpaces 1 2 Open the target ModelSpace the ModelSpace into which you want to merge From the File menu select Merge from ModelSpace The Select ModelSpace to Merge dialog appears Navigate to
515. s does not require you to open each ModelSpace to specify the initial alignment hints via pick points There are two methods for adding cloud constraints to the registration in this case 1 Using the Add Cloud Constraint command This process requires only that you select two ScanWorlds that share a common coordinate system and overlap and then select the Add Cloud Constraint command Note that you must ensure that the ControlSpaces of these ScanWorlds already contain the necessary point clouds See the Copy to ControlSpace entry in the Commands chapter for detailed instructions 2 Using the Auto Add Cloud Constraints command This command will search all pairs of ScanWOrlds for overlapping point clouds If overlap is found a cloud constraint is created and the alignment is optimized The user can reduce the number of ScanWorld pairs searched by selecting one or more ScanWorlds If a selection exists the command will create cloud constraints only for ScanWorlds that overlap the selected ScanWorlds 47 Registration In general object object constraints cover a limited area of the scene while point cloud overlap may cover a far greater extent Thus adding a cloud constraint can improve a registration in regions where shared targets or objects do not exist but where overlap between different scans does exist Picking Points for Initial Alignment Hints The initial alignment hint should be as accurate as possible to produce faster and mor
516. s from an image The colors are assigned based on the mapping defined for the image the texture in this context Cyclone supports defining and applying texture maps to point clouds and meshes The Texture Mapping Process The basic process involves 1 Adding the image from the database 2 Matching points in 3D with pixels in the image 3 Computing the optimal mapping 4 Displaying the texture map 5 Managing texture maps Most of these procedures are accessed via the Texture Map Browser command Invoke the Texture Map Browser command to open the dialog Adding the Image 1 Select one point cloud or mesh Most of the commands in Texture Map Browser support only one selected object at a time 2 Inthe Texture Map Browser click the Add toolbar button 3 Browse to and select an Image using the Select Image dialog e For convenience images can be imported into the database from this dialog Push the Import button then select one or more image files 4 Inthe Texture Map Type dialog indicate the image s type Most images will be Perspective Orthographic images include posters wallpaper or other flat images 5 A texture map is added to the object with that Image The Texture Editor dialogs appear Adding a Cube Map A cube map is a special set of images that correspond to the six faces of a cube with the camera placed at the center of the cube The six images are Up Down Front Back Left Right A cube
517. s function can also be performed after sections have been created via the Collect Points in Section in the Sections Manager dialog Sections Manager Dialog Commands The Section menu contains commands to create edit and navigate through sections CREATE SECTIONS This command opens the Create Sections dialog See the Create Sections section for details 106 Sections Manager CREATE LINES AT SECTION This command creates lines for the selected section s based on a TIN mesh temporarily created from the points within the section s extents COLLECT POINTS IN SECTION This command segments the points that fall within the extents of the selected section s DELETE SECTION This command deletes the selected selection ACTIVATE SECTION This command activates the selected section and displays the section within a limit box using the section s six dimensions The viewpoint a temporary Reference Plane and a temporary limit box are aligned to the current section Additionally the datum and coordinate system origin and axes are temporarily aligned to the section The section extents can be interactively edited by using the handles on the limit box DEACTIVATE SECTION This command deactivates the active section and returns to the ModelSpace View ACTIVATE NEXT PREVIOUS SECTION These commands are used to activate the section following or preceding the currently activated section ZOOM VIEW ALL The Zoom View All command is an ON OFF
518. s menu point to Reference Plane and then select Set Plane Origin at Pick Point The Reference Plane is moved to pass through the pick point without changing its orientation or axes centered at the pick point Set Points Selectable Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Set Points Selectable command toggles the ability to select point clouds in the ModelSpace viewers Set Rotational Spacing Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Snapping Grid Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Rotational Spacing dialog is used to set the angular interval by which an object can be rotated using its rotation handle when Snap to Grid is ON 423 Index To set rotational spacing 1 From the Edit Object menu point to Snapping Grid and then select Set Rotational Spacing The Set Rotational Spacing dialog appears 2 Inthe Rotational Spacing field enter a value for the angular interval by which an object can be rotated when Snap to Grid is ON 3 Click OK The rotational spacing is set Set Scan Filters Window Control Menu Scanner Control Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Scan Filters dialog is used to set range and or intensity parameters outside of which points sampled by the scanner are discarded without being recorded to the database To set scan filters 1 From the Scanner Control menu select Set Scan Filters The Set Scan Filters dialog appears 2 Set range and
519. s not dim with distance the cut off of the light at the edge of the cone is immediate e To insert a spot light From the Tools menu point to Lighting and then select Insert Spot Light If there is a pick point on an object the object provides the location and in most cases orientation for your spot light If there is no pick point the spot light is inserted at the current viewpoint Fog The fog setting adds a sense of depth to a ModelSpace by making more distant objects appear darker e To toggle fog ON OFF select Fog from the Lighting submenu of the Tools menu Having Fog ON while segmenting clouds may make distant points difficult to see and can lead to modeling and measurement errors Limit Box Manager Limit boxes allow you to restrict the scope of objects and points loaded improving performance and facilitating comprehension of point clouds The Cyclone Limit Box Manager accessed from the Add Edit Limit Boxes command allows you to define and edit multiple limit boxes for each ModelSpace select from among your defined limit boxes and import and export limit boxes for use in other projects a Limit Box commands are found in the View menu in the ModelSpace window Drawing In addition to creating best fit objects and inserting objects Cyclone provides interactive tools for drawing 2D objects in a 3D space This allows you to create shapes that are otherwise unavailable in Cyclone and to create shapes where fitting or o
520. s of the selected objects To measure the angle between objects 1 Pick the objects you want to measure 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Measure and then select Angle The measurement is represented graphically The measurement results are also displayed in the Output box if it is enabled a If multiple points are being measured measurements are taken from the first picked object to 171 Index all other picked objects and the results are displayed in the order in which they were picked Note When measuring the angles to the faces of extruded patches the measurement is made from to the plane of the picked face rather than the centerline of the extrusion Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Animation Action Opens dialog Usage The Animation Settings dialog is used to specify animation output options and generate animation frames For an overview of the animation process see the Animation entry in the Modeling chapter Animation Settings Dialog g Animation Settings x Output z C ToVideoFie C To File prefix y In Window Only EA Keep Current Focal Point al JE Image Pr n alasina vid 1596 t o None NEED Aspe Height s E Batic Mediam E ES alata A Output frames to the designated file folder using the indicated file name prefix B Preview the animation without generating frames 172 7 Ir O on m O r ac Index Override viewpoints de
521. s submenu commands to fit a geometric object to a point cloud To adjust fitting quality tolerances specify constraints or fit to parts tables see the Object Properties entry in this chapter The types of objects that can be fit are Patch Box Cylinder Sphere Cone Corner Line Segment Elbow Steel Section For steel section details see the Steel Section command HDS Target Sphere Target For details on HDS Targets or sphere targets see the HDS Target and Sphere Target commands To fit an object 1 From the Object Preferences dialog enable and set the fitting preferences for the object type that you want to fit See the Object Preferences dialog for details If no preferences are set objects are simply fit as closely as possible to the selected cloud a Tolerances and constraints must be enabled and set to non zero values in the Object Preferences dialog in order to be active for fitting 2 From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud Options and toggle ON the type of fitting you want to use for the current fit a Tolerances constraints and parts tables see To fit using parts tables following can be used 294 Index in different combinations depending on the object type Some objects do not support one or more of the cloud fitting options Select the point cloud s you want to use to fit a geometric shape For information on preparing point clouds for modeling see the Point Cloud Segmentation entry in th
522. sed the weight should be around 0 2 6 mm 30 mm where 6 mm is the per sample accuracy of a scan Managing ScanWorld Copies Each ScanWorld is given a unique identifier not visible to the user when it is first created When a ScanWorld is copied the new ScanWorld shares the same identifier Copying a ScanWorld behaves differently depending on whether the ScanWorld is pasted into the same source database or into a different database ScanWorld Copy Behavior within a Single Database When a ScanWorld is pasted into the same database it is created as a link to the source ScanWorld not as a new distinct entity and any change to one affects the other Example 1 Select a ScanWorld 2 From the Edit menu select Copy 3 Select a location within the same database and then select Paste from the Edit menu A copy link of the ScanWorld appears 4 Change the name of either ScanWorld 5 Notice that the name of the other ScanWorld is also updated 52 Registration ScanWorld Copy Behavior Between Databases When a ScanWorld copy is pasted from one database to another it is created as a new entity Because the ScanWorlds are in different databases each ScanWorld can be changed without affecting the other However when a ScanWorld is pasted into a database that already contains a ScanWorld with the same identifier differences in annotations ModelSpaces and ControlSpaces must be resolved before the merge copy is completed
523. sed to specify color and range settings for the global color map For an overview of color mapping in Cyclone see the Color Mapping entry in the Modeling chapter The Minimum and Maximum settings typically range from 0 to 1 These values correspond to the range from dark to bright red to blue for the Multi Hue setting For a greater difference in shades set a narrower range Color Map Parameters Dialog Options MODE From the drop down list select Image Texture Map Colors from Scanner Intensity Map Elevation Map or Single Color SCHEME From the drop down list select Multi Hue Rainbow Grayscale a topography based palette or ascaled individual color with which to display the intensity or elevation map for the corresponding Mode If the Mode is Image Texture Map or Colors from Scanner this scheme is used when the cloud mesh lacks per point color ENABLE GLOBAL COLOR MAP Select this to apply the global color map to all clouds and meshes in the ModelSpace overriding individual color map parameters 259 Index NUMBER OF COLORS Enter a value for the total number of colors that will be used by the color scheme REPEAT COLORS OUTSIDE RANGE Select this to use a cyclic color scheme For example if the Minimum is 0 and the Maximum is 1 a value of 1 3 would be same color as a value of 0 3 Otherwise values lower than the Minimum or Start are given the color at the low end of the selected color scheme and values highe
524. seekseogbor sadeneendeheusns 315 ISOMOUIC iy Sei ntetetiient Wien a den elaine ida 315 Keep Collapsed siiisc2ctcccsiegeiaesee aia a Satie a indie a dci 315 Keep Viewpoint UP Esti 315 LAU a ce Seka a caer feed Soba OS de cd de a cee 316 A O AT 316 License Mani A er E deel dagen 318 Boin inle PEE EEE AEE 319 Limit BOX Spici iren e p e A E N 319 Limit Box On Off Limit Box Manager cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee neire ta rran K anea EEE PREE KaLa E ERATE 320 Limit Box on VENET Tiresia et eea na pad AART da AEE ERARE Ren EAN TRA 320 Limit BOX ON Vi WE Li ate S RINKE NEES 320 LING SOQMONtissszcsssctvceisecanceadeadececantanec aennhice ERAEN 320 LO ad IMAGO cuicos id a cc ia ieee 321 Load Points within FENCE vivimos taa 321 Load Points within Fenced Selection ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 321 Lower Active Cutplane cit 322 Make Available Offline oooooooonnccccnnnnnnconononnconnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnns 322 Make Circula 2 A A ea eo 323 Make Rectangulat cuicos oct 323 Man iuris eine 323 Mens ii tail A E 324 LE a E EAE EEEE EAE ETNE AAPEA A T i 324 Merge from ModelSpace sopie enea ae a a a aeaeaie eE eaa KaRa 325 Mergo SUD SCANS ss eiiscccsucsscens aa TOA AE RNEER AER ii di AIER 325 Mash ica A aed ace narod ae ON a 326 Mesh to Points DeviatiOWS ccoooonncccnonnnnccnonnnncononannnononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanancnnnnnannnn
525. selected objects are extended to intersect with the Reference Plane Extract Cloud from Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Executes command Usage The Extract Cloud from Selection command creates a point cloud from a mesh object using the mesh vertices as points This command is active only for mesh objects that have been created from a point cloud as opposed to point clouds that are merely viewed as a mesh See the Create Meshcommand for more information on creating a mesh object This command does not retrieve the original point cloud used to create the selected mesh object rather it creates a new point cloud which may differ significantly from the original point cloud used to create the mesh object To retrieve the original cloud used to create a mesh object use the Insert Copy of Object s Points command Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Extrude displays submenu commands used to create an extrusion object from a patch or from a face of an extrusion Extrusions are created with a specified thickness along a user specified axis or along the patch s normal 281 Index The following commands are available from the Extrude submenu Extrude Perpendicular Extrude to Last Pick Extrude Along Axis Unextrude Extrude Along Axis Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Extrude Action Opens dialog Usage The Extrude Object dial
526. selection The orientation of the limit box is adjusted as required to produce the minimum possible volume To obtain the minimum possible limit box size without changing limit box orientation use the Collapse Limit Box command Miter Connectors Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Displays dialog Usage The Miter Connectors command displays the Number of Miter Segments dialog which is used to determine the number of segments to be used to connect two selected pipes with a mitered elbow connector To create a mitered elbow connection 1 Pick a point on the first pipe near the end you want connected 2 Multi select the second pipe near the end that you want connected 3 From the Tools menu point to Piping and then select Miter Connectors The Number of Miter Segments dialog appears 4 Enter the number of sweep segments you want to represent the elbow and click OK The mitered elbow appears 328 Index ModelSpace Window Navigator Menu Create Action Executes command Usage The ModelSpace command creates a new ModelSpace in the selected location A ModelSpace can be created in a database project directory or ScanWorld The contents of the ModelSpace are determined by the settings in the Initialization tab within the Edit Preferences dialog See the Preferences command To create a new ModelSpace 1 Inthe Navigator window select the database ScanWorld or Project into which you
527. serted object to base its initial position orientation and dimensions Using this method it is possible to build a chain of objects such as a piping run from scratch However when using auto pick see the Auto Pick Points entry in the Commands chapter the specified auto pick point overrides any selection point The inserted object is initially selected with a pick point based on the previous selection If there was no previous selection a default pick point is provided Using Parts Tables Manufacturers of standard equipment fabricate the parts based on published specifications These specifications can be formatted as tables including geometric data e g dimensions derived properties e g surface area mass and nominal information for each standard part Cyclone supports standard Parts Tables for pipes cylinder standard piping components and steel sections angle channel rectangular tube tee wide flange The tables are ASCII text files organized under the Tables subdirectory under the Library folder of the Cyclone User Configuration Manager Cyclone ships with standard tables for pipes tubes and steel sections Do not edit these standard tables Tables for other shapes are also supported although standard tables are not provided See the templates in the Lib Tables subdirectory Disclaimer Although Leica Geosystems HDS provides standard tables the contents of the tables are provided to the user as is The c
528. settings The estimate updates when the settings are changed Refer to this to gauge 376 Index the impact on disk space and or speed of downloading the TruView datasets from a network server F Include Background Image When checked the Multi lmage from a HDS3000 ScanStation or ScanStation 2 ScanWorld is used as a background image wherever points from the scan are not available This can help improve the visualization in TruView G Color Map Settings Click to invoke the Color Map Settings dialog H Owner Info Click to invoke the TruView Owner Information dialog l OK Click to accept the TruView settings and return to the Site Map Settings dialog J Cancel Click to return to the Site Map Settings dialog without accepting any changes to the TruView settings Color Map Settings Dialog The Color Map Settings dialog is used to specify how point clouds will be displayed when generating a TruView dataset See Edit Color Map in the Commands chapter for details Some options are not available when generating a TruView dataset 4 Color Map Settings Mode Paca Scheme Multi Hue Rainbow y Minimum 0 0000 Actual 0 0060 Maximum 1 0000 lt lt 1 0000 Number of Colors 256 Repeat Colors Outside Range y AG Gamma Correction 0 4500 dl Cancel A OK Click to accept the TruView color map settings and return to the TruView Settings dialog B Cancel Click to return to the TruView S
529. sh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh command To flip the edge of a triangle 1 Select the triangle edge to be flipped by clicking on the edge a Notice that the selected line is a bisector of a four sided polygon By identifying the four points of the polygon bisected by the selected line you can know beforehand what the results will be a The edge may be more obvious if viewing the mesh as wireframe 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Flip Selected Edge The selected edge is redrawn Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Lighting Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Fog command toggles the effect of more distant objects appearing dimmer When ON objects that are farther away appear darker producing a sense of depth Note Having Fog ON while modeling may make distant points difficult to see and lead to modeling errors From Curves Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to From Curvesdisplays submenu commands used to create polylines and patches from the intersections of selected objects The following commands are available from the From Curvessubmenu Polyline Patch 297 Index From Fence Contents Window ModelSpace Menu Tools 2D Extraction Action Executes command Usage The From Fence Contents command creates a 2D line drawing from the contents of a fence To extract 2D lines from the contents of a fence
530. signated by individual Camera objects and maintain the current focal point throughout the animation Enter the frame rate Generate or preview all frames Generate or preview a specified range of frames Enter a range of frames to generate or preview Enter the width and height of the output images Lock the aspect ratio for the size of the output images Begin the preview or frame generation Use the browser to select a folder for animation frames Select None Medium or High antialiasing for the output images To generate animation frames on gt NOS From the Animation submenu select Animate The Animation Settings dialog appears Select To File prefix and then click the Browse icon The Windows browser appears Navigate to the desired file folder select a file type and enter a file name The file name is used as a prefix and each frame is given a sequentially numbered suffix when frames are generated Click Save Select All or designate a range of frames you wish to generate Adjust the output image size and select the desired amount of antialiasing Click Animate A progress meter appears as the frames are generated and saved in the specified file folder To generate frames without the Camera objects or animation path use the Set Visibility command to turn visibility OFF for those object types The level of detail for objects is kept at the highest setting by default Edit the level of d
531. splays submenu commands to specify the active Cutplane as a slice based on the last two pick points See also View Slice and Add Edit Cutplanes To set the Cutplane slice from pick points 1 Pick the point through which one plane of the Cutplane slice will pass 2 Shift Pick the second point through which the other plane of the Cutplane slice will pass 3 From the Toolsmenu point to Cutplane and then point to Set Slice from Picks and select the axis to use X Y or Z Axis The active Cutplane is set perpendicular to the selected axis and its slice planes are positioned to pass through the two pick points a The active Cutplane and the View Slice option are automatically enabled Set Slice Thickness Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Slice Thickness dialog is used to set the thickness of the slice used in the Slice command see the Slice entry in this chapter When the Slice command is toggled ON all geometry beyond the slice is hidden To set slice thickness 1 From the Tools menu point to Cutplane and then select Set Slice Thickness The Set Slice Thickness dialog appears 2 Inthe Slice Thickness field enter a value 3 Click OK The slice thickness is adjusted Set Target Height Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Registration Action Executes command Usage The Set Target Height command displays the Set Target Height dialog Set the height of the targe
532. straint would be underconstrained allowing the ScanWorlds to slide along and rotate around the cylinder s center axis When a cloud constraint is underconstrained you may need additional constraints to lock down the registration of the two ScanWorlds In the planar case you may need two additional HDS Target constraints In the linear case two additional asymmetric HDS Targets would be sufficient to lock it down Weights on Constraints Cloud constraints are created such that their error contribution to the global registration is scaled relative to the error contribution of HDS Target constraints with weights of 1 0 When you create a registration with a combination of cloud constraints and HDS Target constraints we recommend that you not adjust the weights of these constraints unless you have a specific reason such as You know that a particular HDS Target or other constraint object is not as accurate as a standard HDS Target roughly 3 mm accuracy and you have a good estimate of how accurate your method for establishing the coordinate was a You used a cloud in a cloud constraint that was acquired using a scanner that has a different per sample accuracy In these cases the weight should be proportional to the accuracy of your HDS Target or scan data For example if the HDS Target was 10 mm accurate a good weight would be 0 3 3 mm 10 mm where 3 mm is the rough accuracy of a HDS Target If a scan cloud with 3 cm accuracy was u
533. sts with the desired characteristics Graphics mode characteristics Please note that some graphics modes may seem identical as presented by this program when in fact there are differences not listed MODE The number of the graphics mode 137 OpenGL Modes RGB This settings determines the number of color bits used in the graphics mode when rendering objects in color At least 15 bits is recommended for good color differentiation 2 bits black and white not recommended 4 bits 16 colors not recommended 8 bits 256 colors 15 bits 32 768 colors 16 bits 65 536 colors 24 bits 16 777 216 colors 32 bits 4 294 967 296 colors The difference between 24 bits and 32 bits for a modern display monitor is insignificant but can have a positive or negative effect on memory layout and memory usage ZBUF This setting determines the number of bits used for the depth buffer or Z buffer which is a commonly used way of rendering in 3D so that objects closer to the viewer appear on top of objects further away At least 16 bits is recommended for avoiding some rendering artifacts 24 bits is better etc On some cards the Z buffer depth is limited by the number of RGB bits so you may need to change the display settings to access a deeper Z buffer DBLBUF This setting determines whether or not the graphics mode supports double buffering which lets the system draw sequential frames without flickering Y sequent
534. sulting merged point cloud If Fit Multiple Objectsis selected an object is fit to each cloud individually From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud and then point to Steel Section and select the type of steel section you want to fit Unless you are fitting to a parts table item the steel shape appears If the point cloud varies too much from the shape of the object you are trying to create a Fit Quality warning message appears and gives you an option to keep or cancel the fit see the Fit Tolerances area of the Object Preferences entry in this chapter In this case it may help to further refine the point cloud see the Cloud Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter and retry the fit lf parts tables are enabled the Select Table Item dialog appears displaying possible matches The best match is temporarily drawn in the ModelSpace and marked with an asterisk in the dialog Matches within the set range are marked with a sign The vs Table column displays the RMS root mean squared error of the object s dimensions from the initial fit compared to the dimension in the table The vs Cloud column displays the standard deviation of point errors relative to the object best fit using the individual table item s dimensions The remaining columns indicate the per dimension difference versus the initial fit s dimensions Any enabled fitting constraints corresponding to parameters from the table are used in the initial fitting but the
535. sure then select Surface Deviation The Measure Surface Deviation dialog appears 3 Change the Grid Spacing of the active reference plane The deviations will be measured on the reference plane grid with this spacing 4 Select the form of the measurement output to be generated e Generate Contours check this to generate contours representing the cut fill regions Set the Major Interval and Minors Major parameters The contour elevations represent the differences in elevation in the current UCS e Output Table check this to display the Measure Surface Deviation Results dialog which contains a table listing the individual deviation measurements This measurement cannot be saved if this option is not selected e Generate Points check this to generate points whose coordinates and elevation in the current UCS correspond to the individual deviation measurements 5 Click OK The surface deviation is computed and the requested output is generated 449 Index Measure Surface Deviation Dialog J Measure Surface Deviation x Subtract TIN 1 Default Layer from Origin Reference Plane Measurement direction is along 2 axis Grid Spacing 1 000 m y M Output Table l Generate Points Contours Major Interval 4 000 m y Minors Major 4 Of Cancel Grid Change the Grid Spacing of the active reference plane The deviations will be Spacing measured on the reference plane grid with this spacing Ge
536. surface are merely segmented from the point cloud no object is inserted To set default region growing parameters except for Smooth Surfaces see the Region Growing section of the Preferences entry in this chapter Region growing can make use of parts tables to fit standard objects To set and enable parts tables see the Object Preferences Use Parts Table and Show Table Matches entries in this chapter The following commands are available from the Region Grow submenu Patch Cylinder Sphere Smooth Surface Pipe Run and Edit Parameters To fit a patch using region growing 1 Select a point in the center of the region of the cloud that make up the interior of the Patch you want to segment and fit A patch can often be fit with a single pick point However for best results pick three or four points no more than two collinear as far apart from each other as possible near but not on the edges of the object you want to fit If region growing is not performing adequately pick three or more points no more than two collinear When region growing multiple clouds may be selected as long as there is at least one pick point From the Create Object menu point to Region Grow and select Patch The Region Grow Patch dialog appears Use the sliders to adjust parameters Region Thickness defines a surface thickness outside of which points are excluded from the fit calculation Maximum Gap to Span defines a maximum d
537. t draw the smallest fence that completely contains the target The larger the fence is the more likely it is that the target will be missed in the coarse scan From the Scanner Control menu in the Scan Control window select Acquire Targets The 143 Index Acquire Targets dialog appears From the Acquire Targets menu in the dialog select HDS Target from Fence to list the potential HDS Target in the Acquire Targets dialog select Black White Target from Fence to list the potential black white target in the Acquire Targets dialog select Sphere from Pick Fence to list the potential sphere target in the Acquire Targets dialog View each potential target to determine which ones you want Cyclone to attempt to acquire To center the ModelSpace viewpoint on a potential target select the potential target from the list in the Acquire Targets dialog To rotate the ModelSpace viewpoint around a potential target select the potential target from the list in the Acquire Targets dialog and then press the LEFT RIGHT ARROW keys To move up down the list of potential targets and spheres press the UP DOWN ARROW keys Add an identifier or comment to potential targets to be acquired To add an identifier or comment select the target click the ID or Comment field type an identifier or comment and press ENTER Identifiers function as registration labels and can be used for automatic registration Comments function as text annotations in the ModelSpace on
538. t you want to view 2 From the Constraint menu select Show Constraint The objects involved in the constraint are displayed in the Constraint Viewer panes of the Registration window a The objects involved in the constraint are selected and centered in each ModelSpace s pane When a cloud constraint is selected the ControlSpaces referenced by the cloud constraint appear in the two Constraint viewers and the two viewers are synchronized so that the view 432 Index navigation in one viewer is matched in the other viewer All pick points from the cloud constraint appear as well Note that any of these pick points are editable and the Update Initial Cloud Alignment command can be used to modify the alignment Show Constraint Viewer 1 2 Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Constraint Viewer 1 and Show Constraint Viewer 2 commands toggle the display of the two Constraint viewer windows Show Coordinate System Axes Window ModelSpace Menu View Coordinate System Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Show Coordinate System Axes command toggles the visibility of the coordinate axes in the ModelSpace viewer When checked the coordinate system axes are displayed Depending on the coordinate system and viewpoint the origin may or may not be visible The axes may also be hidden behind objects The coordinate axes X Y and Z are always displayed in red green
539. t Cloud Rendering submenu Shaded One Sided Front Back Silhouette Increase Point Width Decrease Point Width 354 Index Point Cloud Rendering Registration Window Registration Menu Viewers Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Point Cloud Rendering displays submenu commands used to toggle different ways of drawing point clouds e The following modifiers are available from the Point Cloud Rendering submenu Shaded One Sided Front Back Silhouette Increase Point Width Decrease Point Width Point Cloud Rendering Scan Control Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Project Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Point Cloud Rendering displays submenu commands used to toggle different ways of drawing point clouds e The following modifiers are available from the Point Cloud Rendering submenu Shaded One Sided Front Back Silhouette Increase Point Width Decrease Point Width Point Cloud Sub Selection Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Point Cloud Sub Selection displays submenu commands used to make and refine point cloud selections to be used for segmentation fitting and other processes The following commands are available from the Point Cloud Sub Selection submenu Add Inside Fence Add Outside Fence Remove Inside Fence Remove Outside Fence Invert Select All For more information see the
540. t View ModelSpace The first ModelSpace that you open appears in the Constraint viewer on the bottom left side of the Registration window The next appears on the right and then each subsequently loaded ModelSpace alternates between loading in the left and right Constraint viewers Pick two or more corresponding points on meshes or point clouds in each viewer Picks on objects other than meshes clouds are ignored When picking only two points the picks must be in the same order for both ScanWorlds We recommend three or more picks since two picks are often inadequate for the Optimize Cloud Alignment command to work reliably The picking order does not matter for three or more picks except where the point layout has some symmetry and the order of the picks is used to reduce this geometric ambiguity From the Cloud Constraint menu select Add Cloud Constraint A new Cloud Constraint is added to the Constraint List labeled as a cloud mesh constraint and automatically named Picked clouds meshes are copied to the appropriate ControlSpace as needed To view the objects involved in a selected constraint see the Show Constraint entry in this chapter Bad pick points those that are further than the Max Search Distance preference in the Edit Preferences dialog are displayed in blue 147 Index If the algorithm fails to match at least two points or if the corresponding points are more than the Max Search Distance preference after alignment then a
541. t above its base point e g if the target had been placed a known height above a known survey point for use in registration 426 Index Set to X Y X Z Y Z Plane Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Reference Plane Executes command The Set to X Y X Z Y Z Plane command orients the active Reference Plane to the chosen coordinate system axes and centers the Reference Plane s origin at the focal point of the viewpoint Set to Object Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace View Coordinate System Executes command The Set to Object command aligns the coordinate system of the ModelSpace to the selected object Set to UCS Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Reference Plane Set to UCS Executes command The Set to UCS command aligns the active reference plane to the current user coordinate system of the ModelSpace Set to Viewpoint Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Tools Reference Plane Executes command The Set to Viewpoint command sets the active Reference Plane perpendicular to the current viewpoint centered on the focal point Set Up Direction Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace View Displays submenu Pointing to Set Up Direction displays submenu commands used to set the up direction to one of the major axes 427 Index The following commands are available from the Set Up Direction submenu X Axis Y Axis Z Axis
542. t be exactly opposite PIPING MIN ANGLE BRANCH CONNECTION Enter a value for the smallest angle allowed for a branching connection see Connect Piping A value of 90 means that the branching angle must be exactly perpendicular ModelSpace Tab Settings POINT CLOUD LENGTH OF GRAPHICAL NORMALS Set the scale for the display of point cloud normals 364 Index To toggle the display of point cloud normals see the View Object As entry in this chapter OBJECT SIZE CULL BIAS Set the size of objects that are too small or too far away to be loaded and drawn The value that you enter is the number of square pixels below which an object is not loaded and rendered LAYER OF NEW OBJECT Original Object s Layer places new objects on the same layer as the object from which they were created Current Layer places new objects that are created using an existing object on the current layer regardless of which layer the object is on PICKING Ignore Auto Pick overrides and disables auto picking regardless of the state of the Auto Pick Points toggle in the Selection menu Use Auto Pick Instead allows auto picking when the Auto Pick Points toggle is ON and auto picking preferences have been set for the type of object you wish to pick See the Auto Pick Points and Object Preferences entries in this chapter for more details VIEWER START WITH OUTPUT BOX ENABLED Select Yesto have the Output Box enabled when opening a new ModelSpace wind
543. t dialog is displayed Enter a new name for the lookup list or leave the default name in place as desired Click OK 156 Index to save the list and return to the Customized Annotation Keys dialog The newly saved list will now appear as a pull down option in the Lookup List column a See the Customize Lookup Lists command entry for information on editing and deleting lookup lists To delete a custom annotation key 1 Select the object s containing the annotation key to be deleted 2 From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Custom Annotations The Annotations dialog appears with the Custom tab displayed 3 Click the Add Custom Annotation Keysicon to display the Customized Annotation Keys dialog 4 Highlight the key to be removed and click the Delete icon The annotation key is removed from this dialog and the corresponding column in the Custom tab in the Annotations dialog is removed as well Note Deleting a custom annotation key as described above does not remove annotations from objects If you wish to remove actual annotations use the Delete icon in the Annotations tab To copy Custom Annotation values to the Windows clipboard 1 Select the object s containing the desired custom annotation 2 From the Tools menu point to Annotations then select Add Edit Custom Annotations The Annotations dialog appears with the Custom tab displayed 3 Multi select the entries to copy or select nothi
544. t menu point to Segment Cloud and then select Trim Edges The points along the boundary of the cloud are segmented Turn Viewpoint Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Turn Viewpoint displays submenu commands used to rotate your ModelSpace View 90 degrees to the left right up or down changing the point of focus To move your viewpoint 90 degrees to the left right up or down while maintaining your point of focus see the Move Viewpoint command The following commands are available from the Turn Viewpoint submenu Left Right Up Down Window ModelSpace Navigator Registration Scan Control Image Viewer Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Undo command reverses the most recent action 456 Index Most user actions in Cyclone can be reversed once performed there are some exceptions Cyclone provides for theoretically unlimited undo events An undo event is possible after you perform an action or provide some input that makes a change in the object database Once you ve undone an action you can move forward in the history and redo the action see the Redo command until there are no more actions to redo you get back to where you started undoing However if you undo and then perform a new action instead of a redo all events that have not been redone are discarded Due to Cyclone s concurrent modeling feature someone else may change an object in you
545. t motion to an axis see the Constrain Motion to entry in this chapter For more information on using user coordinate systems see the Save Edit Coordinate Systems command 462 Index Some handles may not be able to move according to the constraints e g rotation and other custom handles For more information on using handles see the Handles entry in the Modeling chapter User Feedback Window All windows Menu Help Action Opens dialog Usage The User Feedback dialog is provided for users to provide Leica Geosystems HDS with feedback on the use of Cyclone in your work sessions such as suggestions for future enhancements To submit user feedback 1 From the Help menu select User Feedback The User Feedback dialog appears 2 Enter personal data name company email phone etc in the appropriate fields It is important that you provide this data so we can contact you to follow up if necessary The Date and Time fields are populated automatically with the current date and time 3 Enter a summary of the feedback being reported in the Summary field followed by a detailed narrative in the Detailed Description field Provide as much detail as possible 4 Click Create Feedback to open a Save dialog enter a file name for the txt file or you can accept the default feedback txt select the folder into which you want to save the file and click Save The report is created and saved to the designated file a
546. t of the selected scanner 408 G Index Refresh all Customize columns Segments the selected scan based on each point s distance to the scanner Displays the name of the unified cloud Displays the number of points contained within the selected unified cloud H Toggles the display of the selected unified cloud To segment a scan at a user specified distance from its scanner ons gt Invoke the ScanWorld Explorer Select the Scanners or Original Scans tab Select one or more ScanWorld in the left pane If no ScanWorlds are selected in the left pane all ScanWorlds are considered to be selected Select one or more items in the Scanners or Original Scans tab If no items are selected in the right pane all Scans for the ScanWorlds selected in the left pane are considered to be selected Click the Segment Scans by Distance toolbar icon The Segment Scans by Distance dialog appears Enter the Distance at which the Scans will be segmented Each cloud will be segmented based on its points distances to the scanner that scanned the cloud Unified clouds fine coarse target scans and merged clouds are not affected Select the action that will be applied to the segmented points Select Keep Points to keep all points Select Delete Points Beyond Distance to delete all points further than the user specified distance Select Delete Points Within Distance to delete all points closer than the user specified distance
547. t of the scanner above a known point 445 Index e The scanner has a turret on the body to which a height is measured from the ground point over which the scanner is centered X Y Z Enter coordinates of the ground point SET HZ BUTTON Opens the Aim Scanner dialog used to set scanner horizontal compass direction HZ FROM TARGET BUTTON Opens the Set Horizontal from Target dialog APPLY BUTTON Applies settings to the current ScanWorld s default coordinate system DEFAULT BUTTON Resets all settings to defaults Steel Section Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Fit to Cloud Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Steel Section displays submenu commands used to fit a specified steel section to a picked point cloud The following steel shapes are available from the Steel Section submenu Angle Channel Tee Rectangular Tube Wide Flange For information on preparing point clouds for modeling see the Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter For information on using parts tables fit tolerances and fit constraints see the Object Preferences command and the Modeling entry in the Getting Started chapter To fit a steel section to the selected point cloud 1 From the Object Preferences dialog enable and set any desired fit constraints fit tolerances or parts tables for the steel type that you want to fit See the Object Preferences entry in this chapter for details If no preferences are set the sel
548. t this option to display labels for contour lines containing elevation data SHOW CONTENTS WITH POINTS EXCLUSION VOLUMES ONLY Select this option to display both objects and points within an exclusion volume View Slice Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The View Slice command toggles whether or not the active Cutplane slices through the data hiding all geometry beyond the specified thickness of the Cutplane slice See the Set Slice Thickness entry in this chapter The results resemble a cross section that can be used for quick 2D plots directly from point clouds and surfaces Virtual Surveyor Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Opens dialog Usage The Virtual Surveyor command is used to select a file for Virtual Surveyor data input output and then proceed to the Virtual Surveyor dialog 469 Index For information on the Virtual Surveyor process see the Virtual Surveyor chapter Volume Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Executes command Usage The Volume command calculates and displays the volume of the selected object To measure a volume of a mesh use the Mesh Volume command instead To measure an object s volume 1 Select the object whose volume you want to measure 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Measure and then select Volume The measurements results are displayed in cubic units The measurement results are also displayed
549. t up a target 2 Connect to the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and enable the dual axis compensator or connect to the HDS6000 and enable the tilt sensor 3 Import or add the known or assumed coordinates using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List or Import Coordinate List Leica System 1200 4 From the Window menu select Field Setup The Field Setup panel appears in the control panel 5 Select Known Azimuth Aim from the Method control Select the Station ID from the list 7 Measure and enter the HI o 289 Index 8 Measure and enter the Azimuth or bearing of the scanner to a direction in the world 9 Push the Calculate button Turn the scanner in the correct direction and push the QuickScan button on the scanner The actual orientation of the scanner towards the target s or pick point s position is computed 10 Push the Apply button to set the ScanWorld Default Coordinate System based on the calculation Fill Selected Hole Mesh Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Mesh Action Executes command Usage The Fill Selected Hole command replaces gaps in a mesh with triangles No new vertices are added Triangles are created using the existing vertices that form the boundaries of the hole Mesh editing can be performed only on a mesh object as opposed to a point cloud that is viewed as a mesh To create a mesh object from a point cloud see the Create Mesh command To fill selected holes 1 Select a
550. t viewer windows The first ModelSpace that you open appears in the subwindow on the bottom left side of the Registration window The next appears on the right and then each subsequently loaded ModelSpace alternates between loading in the left and right windows In each Constraint viewer select the object you want to constrain In order to manually add a constraint both objects must first be copied to their respective ControlSpace From the Constraint menu select Add Constraint The constraint is added and labeled as a manual constraint and given the lowest available number e g the first manually added constraint is named Manual 1 To view the objects involved in a selected constraint see the Show Constraint entry in this chapter 148 Index Note A manual constraint is not added if a constraint between the two objects already exists in the Registration Add Edit Annotations Window ModelSpace Navigator Image Viewer Menu ModelSpace Tools Annotations Navigator Edit Image Viewer Annotation Action Opens dialog Usage The Annotations dialog is used to add edit and delete annotations for selected objects Annotations can be attached to any selectable object and can consist of text numerals or file attachments In addition multiple annotations can be created for an object Annotation visibility can be adjusted globally or specifically as described below To enable the visibility of all annotations mar
551. tc to import and create a reduced copy of the cloud in the ZFS file All available point cloud data is imported by selecting 100 in the Sampling list Note To remove an HDS4500 or HDS6000 ZFS scan file from the list of available scans in the Re Import Scans dialog toggle ON Archive The ZFS scan file is moved from the Database Project Folder in the HDS4500 HDS6000 Scan Directory to the Archive subdirectory To make an Archived HDS4500 or HDS6000 scan available in the Re Import Scans dialog move the ZFS scan file from the Archive folder up into the parent Database Project Folder 24 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 The Scanning Process Scanning can be accomplished in a variety of ways but all scanning operations generally are divided into the following basic groups 1 Creating a Scanner using the Navigator window 2 Connecting to a scanner 3 Organizing Scan Data by selecting Projects and ScanWorlds Cyclone prompts you to do this automatically when you open the Scan Control window 4 Preparing to Scan by capturing images targeting and adjusting scan settings 5 Executing the scan 6 Merging sub scans as necessary Creating a Scanner The first time that you want to use a scanner it is necessary to create a persistent entry for it in the Navigator window Afterwards the scanner is available each time you start Cyclone To add a ScanStation ScanStation 2 or HDS3000 scanner 1 From t
552. te Object Action Executes command Usage The Segment Polyline command segments the selected polyline s into subsets To segment a polyline Draw a fence around the portions of the polyline that you want to segment See the Using a Fence section in the Modeling chapter From the Create Object menu point to Segment Polyline The polyline is segmented where it crosses the fence The resultant separate polylines can be selected independently 411 Index Select a Project Window Scan Control Menu Project Action Opens dialog Usage The Select a Project dialog is used to select a destination project folder for scan and image data acquired from the scanner You must select a project folder before beginning a scan or getting an image The Select a Project dialog can also be accessed by clicking the button to the right of the Project box in the Scan Control panel To select a project for your scan data 1 From the Project menu select Select a Project The Select a Project dialog appears a You can create a new project for your scan data by clicking Create you can then select the created project 2 Navigate to an existing project and then click OK Your destination project is selected Select a ScanWorld Window Scan Control Menu Project Action Opens dialog Usage The Select a ScanWorld command opens the Select a ScanWorld dialog which is used to select a destination ScanWorld for scans and imag
553. te a persistent entry for the scanner Scanners are added from the Navigator window To add a scanner From the Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears Click Add The Add Scanner dialog appears From the Scanner Model list select the model of the scanner that you are adding In the Scanner Name field type a logical name for the scanner you are adding In the IP Address field enter the IP address for the scanner you are adding Click OK The scanner is added To close the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close DARON The Scan Control Window The Scan Control window is used to control the scanning process adjust scan settings specify scan targets and organize the resulting scan data Before scanning it is necessary to connect to a known scanner one that has been entered in the database via the Scan Control window To launch a Scan Control window 1 Fromthe Navigator window expand the Scanners folder 2 Double click the scanner you want The Scan Control window appears with the Select a Project dialog open To connect to a scanner 1 Fromthe Scanner menu in the Scan Control window select Connect or click the Connect icon Connection progress is displayed in the Scanner Status bar at the bottom of the Scan Control window When a successful connection is made and the scanner is ready for commands from Cyclone the Scanner Status bar at the bottom of
554. te commands See the Move Rotate command entry in this chapter for detailed instructions a To cancel the insertion and close the dialog click Cancel 4 Click Create The object is inserted Insert Copy of Object s Points Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Executes command Usage The Insert Copy of Object s Points command inserts a copy of the points used in fitting the selected object This command creates new points that are selectable and editable and have no relation to the object If you only need to view an object s points use the Show Object s Cloud command Insert Point Light Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Lighting Action Executes command Usage The Insert Point Light command inserts a point light in your current ModelSpace View n A point light source emits light in all directions from a 3D point By default the light does not dim with distance The point light is inserted at the current pick point If there is no pick point the point light is inserted at the current viewpoint To customize point light settings see the Edit Point Spot Lights command n For more information about lighting see the Lighting entry in the Modeling chapter Insert Spot Light Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Lighting Action Executes command Usage The Insert Spot Light command inserts a spot light in the center of your current ModelSpace View 313 Index n A spot light
555. ted If a polyline polygon is also selected only the area within the polyline polygon projected onto the active reference plane is measured To measure TIN Volume Select the TIN whose surface is to be subtracted from the reference surface To measure TIN Volume against the active reference plane select only one TIN To measure TIN Volume against another reference TIN select a second TIN surface to act as the reference surface To measure TIN Volume within a specific boundary multi select a polyline or polygon object 452 Index 2 From the Toolsmenu in the ModelSpace window point to Measure then select TIN Volume The Measure TIN Volume dialog appears 3 Click OK The prismoidal TIN volume is computed e The Cut regions where the TIN is above the reference surface and Fill regions where the TIN is below the reference surface are indicated graphically Toggle ScanWorld Leveled Window Registration Menu ScanWorld Action Toggles ScanWorld property Usage The Toggle ScanWorld Leveled command toggles the leveled property of the selected ScanWorld A ScanWorld known to be leveled is registered such that its up vector remains the same This command should be used with care since an incorrect property may adversely affect the registration results The name of a ScanWorld known to be leveled is followed by Leveled in the Registration viewer To toggle the leve
556. ted texture map higher or lower in the list Texture maps higher in the last can be covered by texture maps lower in the list wherever they overlap N The name of the texture map Click to rename it O The visibility of the texture map If the texture map is visible and is valid the object s color map is Image Texture Map and Global Texture Map is enabled then the object is drawn with colors from the enabled texture map P The name of the image used for the texture map Q The size of the image used for the texture map Texture Editor Dialog Name Error use 1 0 86 52 The texture map is Close within 2 10 pixel s Z A Click to add one constraint for each pick in the ModelSpace viewer and in the Texture Editor Image dialog in sequence B Click to replace the selected constraint s 3D pick and or image pick depending on the existing pick s C Click to delete the selected constraint s D Click to focus the viewpoint on the selected constraint For a cube map the corresponding image is loaded into the Texture Editor Image dialog E Click to compute the texture mapping parameters based on the current constraints F Click to toggle the graphical display of the constraints G Click to toggle the automatic refreshing of the texture map graphics in the ModelSpace viewer whenever the texture mapping changes Toggle this OFF if you are making several computations to avoid the overhe
557. ter To edit an object s color and material 4 Select the object whose color and material you want to change 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Appearance and then select Edit Color Material The Color and Material Editor appears 3 Make the desired changes and then click OK The selected object s color and material are updated Edit Drawing Parameters Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Opens dialog Usage The Drawing Parameters dialog is used to set the color and line weight parameters for 2D drawing n Changes in the Drawing Parameters dialog are reflected in current and subsequent 2D drawings only 2D drawings created prior to any changes are not affected 257 Index To set default drawing parameters 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Drawing and then click Edit Drawing Parameters The Drawing Parameters dialog appears 2 Edit the line weight and color parameters Edit Elbow BendRatio Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Elbow Bend Ratio dialog is used to edit the ratio of elbow bend radius to pipe OD outside diameter for the selected pipes and elbows To adjust the elbow bend ratio 1 Select the objects that you want to edit in the following order pipe joining elbow pipe 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Piping and then select Edit Elbow Bend Ratio The Elbow Bend Ratio dialog appears 3 Enter a value for the ratio of e
558. ter the ambient temperature ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE Enter the atmospheric pressure PPM TOTAL ppm Total is calculated automatically To enter a value manually select the radio button to the left of the field and enter the value in the field Auto Add Cloud Constraints Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Auto Add Cloud Constraints command automatically creates cloud constraints for all pairs of ScanWorlds that have overlapping point clouds based on the current registration a The existing registration should be good enough to arrange the clouds to be constrained so their corresponding surfaces are close to each other To automatically add cloud constraints based on the current registration 1 Set up the registration so that the clouds are roughly registered a For example make use of target or geometry based registration Station Data etc 2 From the Cloud Constraint menu select Auto Add Cloud Constraints The Registration creates a cloud constraint for each pair of ScanWorlds that have overlapping point clouds and do not yet have a cloud constraint The Registration automatically optimizes the cloud 179 Index constraints This can be a time consuming process since each pair of ScanWorlds must be checked for overlapping point clouds To save time the user may select one or more ScanWorlds and select Auto Add Cloud Constraints The command will only check ScanWorlds that overlap
559. that have not changed are not duplicated in the resulting merged ModelSpace To update the original ModelSpace from the Navigator window 1 Select the ModelSpace that was created using the File Launch Copy Selection to New ModelSpace command 2 From the File menu select Update Original ModelSpace A dialog appears 3 Choose whether or not to mark the current ModelSpace for deletion after the current and original ModelSpaces have been merged a f you select Yes the current ModelSpace is marked for deletion and the original ModelSpace is updated to reflect changes a f you select No the current ModelSpace is left intact and the original ModelSpace is updated to reflect changes a f you select Cancel the update process is aborted and you are returned to the current ModelSpace The updated source ModelSpace contains all objects that were either edited or created in the descendant ModelSpace i e objects from the source ModelSpace that have not changed are not duplicated in the resulting merged ModelSpace Update Simulated Scanner Position Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Scanner Action Executes command Usage The Update Simulated Scanner Position command changes the position of the simulated scanner to match the current viewpoint of the ModelSpace from which it was launched For general information on the Scan Control window see the Scanning entry in the Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 cha
560. the Edit Preferences dialog Activate Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The Activate command activates the selected limit box 145 Index Activate Next Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The Activate Next command activates the limit box in the list position below the currently active limit box Activate Previous Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu Limit Box Action Executes command Usage The Activate Previous command activates the limit box in the list position above the currently active limit box Add Both Flat Caps Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object End Caps Action Executes command Usage The Add Both Flat Caps command creates flat end caps on both ends of the selected object To add caps to both ends of the selected object 1 Select the object that you want to cap 2 From the Edit Object menu point to End Caps and then select Add Both Flat Caps The caps appear To add a cap to only one end see the Add Flat Cap Closest to Pick entry in this chapter Add Both Semi Elliptical Heads Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object End Caps Action Executes command Usage The Add Both Semi Elliptical Heads command creates semi elliptical heads on both ends of the selected object To add semi elliptical heads to both ends of the selected object 1 Sel
561. the Scan Control window reads Connected and Ready 13 Quick Start Scanner Simulation Cyclone provides a scanner simulation for the purpose of familiarizing yourself with scan settings and procedures for the HDS2500 Any ModelSpace can be used to launch a Scan Control window for a scanner simulation using the Create Simulated Scanner command The ModelSpace from which the Scan Control window is launched serves as the scene to be scanned the viewpoint in the ModelSpace is the initial viewpoint of the simulated scanner The Scan Control window created by this command operates identically to a Scan Control window connected to a real scanner Registration Registration is the process of integrating a project s ScanWorlds into a single coordinate system as a registered ScanWorld This integration is derived by a system of constraints which are pairs of equivalent or overlapping objects that exist in two ScanWorlds The objects involved in these constraints are maintained in a ControlSpace where they can be reviewed organized and removed they cannot be moved or resized in the ControlSpace The Registration process computes the optimal overall alignment transformations for each component ScanWorld in the Registration such that the constraints are matched as closely as possible The Registration Process Registration Overview 1 From the Navigator window create a Registration object in the project that you want to register From t
562. the axes of two selected objects The following commands are available from the Set Using Two Axes submenu X then Y Axis X then Z Axis Y then X Axis Y then Z Axis Z then X Axis Z then Y Axis 428 Index To set two coordinate system axes Select the object to which you want to align the first axis in the command The first axis in the command you select is aligned exactly to the axis of the first object you select The directions in which the axes are oriented are based on the locations of the pick points on the reference objects Each axis is oriented towards the end of the reference object nearest the pick point Multi select a second object to which you want to align the second axis in the command The second axis in the command that you select is aligned as closely as possible to the axis of the second reference object while still being perpendicular to the first axis set by the command The remaining axis is made perpendicular to the other two axes From the View menu point to Coordinate System and then point to Set Using Two Axes and select the pair of axes you want X then Y Axis X then Z Axis etc The coordinate system axes are set Multiple user defined coordinate systems can be saved and restored See the Save Edit Coordinate System entry in this chapter Set Weight Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Opens dialog Usage The Set Constraint Weight dialog is used to set the relative weight of indiv
563. the current individual color map settings a This command affects all point clouds and meshes in the current ModelSpace a For information on adjusting global color map override settings see the Edit Global Color Map command a For an overview of color mapping in Cyclone see the Color Mapping entry in the Modeling chapter Global Texture Map Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Menu View Action Toggles menu item ON Usage The Global Texture Map command enables the application of texture mapping e See the Edit Object Appearance Apply Color Map Image Texture Map command 300 Index Grid Settings Window Scan Control Menu Image Action Opens dialog Usage The Grid Settings dialog is used to set horizontal and vertical spacing for grid lines as well as the font size for grid line markers Group Command Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Group Action Executes command Usage The Group command creates a link between two or more objects so they can be manipulated simultaneously Cyclone can group objects of any type Selecting one object in the group selects the entire group Group Menu Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Group displays submenu commands used to add or remove items to and from a group The following commands are available from the Group submenu Group Ungroup Remove from Group Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays subme
564. the encoding of that SKEY NOARwWH 349 Index a Each type of piping component has its own SKEY and each type of piping component can be assigned only those SKEYs available to that type n Note Spec LinelD and Type SKEY are stored as annotations on the objects that have them They are displayed in the Object Info dialog box and can be managed via the standard Annotations functionality although changing the values via the Edit Annotations dialog is not recommended 8 Enter the Insulation Thickness 9 Select the Placement method Push the button for instructions on how to use the method 10 Enter and edit the components s placement parameters 11 Preview the component s placement graphically 12 Flip the component to place the component using the other end point if needed 13 Create the component 14 Select the type of the next component to be placed and repeat 15 When finished click Close Placement Methods a Place at F F End of Pipe Appends a component to another component fitting to fitting a Place at Delta Distance Places a component at a distance from another component a Place at Position Places a component at a specified position a Connect Fittings with Pipe Places a pipe between two in line fittings such as two flanges a Insert at Pick Point Inserts a fitting into a pipe at a pick point The pipe s geometry is adjusted accordingly possibly splitting into two segments
565. the feature a Itis not necessary to pick vertices within the mesh 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Pick Points and select Polyline A polyline is drawn using the pick points as vertices and the newly created polyline remains selected a You can also use polylines created from imported files i e from survey data 3 Multi select the mesh object 4 From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh then to Breaklines and select either Project Polyline to Mesh or Extend Mesh to Polyline as appropriate The polyline is incorporated into the mesh the polyline vertices are added into the mesh and triangles are redrawn as appropriate to accommodate the breakline a See the Project Polyline to Meshand Extend Mesh to Polyline entries in the Commands chapter for more information on incorporating polylines into a mesh object The Clear Breaklines command can be used to remove all breaklines from a mesh object When decimating a mesh containing breaklines be sure to select either Maintain or Keep Exact in the Breaklines field of the Decimate Mesh dialog if you want to preserve breakline integrity Decimating Meshes Mesh decimation is the process by which the number of triangles in a mesh is reduced according to user defined parameters The Decimate Mesh dialog supports interactive decimation as you move the Percentage slider the mesh in the ModelSpace view is continually redrawn to reflect the changing percentage value when the Auto Previe
566. the folder that will contain the exported PCF files Select the assumed Gasket Thickness This is used during the export and import to introduce a space between adjacent flanges Click OK The selected piping lines are exported to PCF Export Template Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Drawing Action Opens dialog Usage The Save Edge Template dialog is used to export a 2D drawing for use with the Fit Edge command See the Fit Edge entry in the Modeling chapter for more information 278 Index To export a cross section template 1 Using the 2D drawing tools draw the desired template Alternately select an existing or imported line drawing and use the Create Drawing from Object command to convert the object into a 2D drawing see the Create Drawing from Object entry in this chapter for more information Before completing the drawing via the Create Drawing command point to Tools and then point to Drawing and select Export Template The Save Edge Template dialog appears Navigate to the desired destination directory enter a file name in the File name box and click Save The template is saved See the Fit Edge command entry in this chapter for information on using the saved template Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Extend displays submenu commands used to extend one or more objects using other objects as references The following commands are available from the
567. the list Edit Parameters Cloud Registration Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Parameters command opens the Cloud Constraint Parameters dialog which allows the cloud constraint s individual behavior to override the relevant preferences from the Registration tab of the Edit Preferences dialog See the Preferences command for details To restore the previous values click Reset To change the cloud constraint to no longer override the preferences click Default For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration section of the Registration chapter Edit Parameters Region Grow Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Region Grow Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Parameters command opens the Modeling tab within the Edit 262 Index Preferences dialog Edit Point Properties Window Image Viewer Menu Annotation Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Point Properties dialog is used to change the color and location of existing annotation pick points To edit pick point properties in the Image Viewer 1 Select the pick point you want to edit You must be in Pick mode in order to select pick points in addition the selected point must have at least one assigned annotation From the Edit menu select Edit Point Properties The Image Point Properties dialog appears Make the changes you want for the color and
568. the maximum allowable standard deviation of the unsigned point to surface distances MAXIMUM ABSOLUTE ERROR Assign a value for the maximum allowable unsigned distance between a point and the surface Fit Constraints Settings Select the Fit Constraints checkbox to access constraint settings for the selected object type and enable fit constraints for use in fitting objects n Each constraint may be Unspecified Initial or Fixed The value of an Unspecified constraint is found by the fitting algorithm An Initial value can help the fitter as a hint of what the value might be The fitter uses a Fixed constraint as the final value of that parameter The editable fitting constraints vary for each object type Creation Initial Values Settings Select the Creation Initial Values checkbox to access and enable creation and initial values settings for the selected object type All object types support the optional setting of various default parameters for use when an object of that type is inserted Some values may be overridden by the operation that creates the object Most object types support a default Insulation Thickness to represent insulation on piping spray on fire retardant on a steel section etc where the dimensions of the object are augmented by the thickness of the insulation or other such covering The insulation thickness is accounted for 337 Index when inserting fitting and editing an object When display
569. the original COE file imported into AutoCAD enabling COE to maintain as much original object information data as possible when the object is brought back into Cyclone 5 Define which objects to export by selecting one of the following options ALL OBJECTS Select this option to export all objects on all layers that are contained within the current drawing VISIBLE OBJECTS Select this option to export only those objects that belong to layers that are turned on viewable in the current view Be sure the correct view is displayed before selecting this option SELECTED OBJECTS This option is active only if there are objects currently selected in the drawing If selected only those objects currently selected in the drawing will be exported 119 Cyclone Object Exchange COE 6 Click OK to begin exporting the selected objects to the COE FILE The complexity of the objects as well as your computer s capability determine the speed with which the objects are exported Note If an error message appears during the exportation process refer to the Troubleshooting section in this appendix for information Bringing a COE File into Cyclone COE files are brought into Cyclone via Cyclone s Navigator window where a new ModelSpace is created for the imported file Most objects as well as layer functionality can be brought into Cyclone from AutoCAD Complex objects e g cubes with rounded corners objects with notches etc may n
570. the point to which you want to move the vertex If the destination point is another vertex select a point on the mesh near the target vertex To move the vertex to a point on another object pick a point on that object From the Toolsmenu point to Mesh and then select Move Vertex The vertex is translated to either the target vertex or the picked point on another object 332 Index Move Viewpoint Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Move Viewpoint displays submenu commands used to move your viewpoint 90 degrees to the left right up or down while maintaining your point of focus To rotate your point of focus see the Turn Viewpoint command The following commands are available from the Move Viewpoint submenu Left Right Up Down Multi Pick Mode Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Multi Pick Mode command enters Multi Pick mode and selects the Multi Pick mode cursor a Multi Pick mode is used to select multiple objects without holding SHIFT Multi Pick View Toggle Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Modes Action Executes command Usage The Multi Pick View Toggle command switches between Multi Pick mode and View mode The main purpose of this command is to allow for a single hotkey to toggle between the two modes To assign hotkeys see the Customize Hotkeys entry in this chapter New Limit Box Manager Window Limit B
571. their origins and axes to the reference object Colinear Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Executes command Usage The Colinear command moves and aligns one or more objects to the axis of a reference object To make objects colinear 1 Multi select the objects you want to make colinear The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Colinear The axes of the selected objects are moved and aligned to the axis of the reference object Collapse Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Exclusion Volume Action Executes command Usage The Collapse command resizes the selected exclusion volume to the minimum 198 Index required to contain its contents without changing its orientation To minimize the size of an exclusion volume 1 Select the exclusion volume 2 From the Tools menu point to Exclusion Volume and then select Collapse The sides are moved in to contain the minimum volume without changing its orientation Collapse Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Collapse command resizes the selected limit box to the minimum volume required to contain the currently selected objects if any or to contain all objects if there is no selection without changing the orientation of the limit box Collapse Limit Box Window ModelSpace Me
572. this chapter a As long as the Piping Mode dialog is open the current piping annotations are applied to new objects as they are inserted or created 2 Select the desired piping annotations a To use an object s existing piping annotations to set the fields in the Piping Mode dialog select Values from Selection and select the object with the needed values Piping annotations that are not assigned to the selected object are not changed Note Spec LinelD and SKEYs are stored as annotations on the objects that have them They are displayed in the Object Info dialog box and can be managed via the standard Annotations functionality although changing the values via the Edit Annotations dialog is not recommended 3 Select a Spec from the pulldown menu a To choose which Specs are displayed in the pull down menu right click the Spec row and select Choose Lookup List for Spec from the pop up menu If there are no lookup lists 352 oo Index available see the Customize Lookup Lists or Custom Annotations entry in this chapter to generate custom lists Select the lookup list with the relevant Specs The Spec field cannot be edited directly since only certain Specs are typically available for a given project Select a LinelD from the pulldown menu Choosing a lookup list for LinelD is similar to choosing a lookup list for Spec The LinelD field may be edited directly and the new value is added to the list Select an SKEY from the
573. this chapter or the Drawing entry in the Modeling chapter Eccentric Reducer Connectors Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Piping Action Executes command Usage The Eccentric Reducer Connectors command connects two parallel selected pipes via a reducer that has one perpendicular leg To connect parallel pipes 1 Pick a point on the first pipe near the end you want connected 2 Multi select the second pipe near the end that you want connected 3 From the Tools menu point to Piping and then select Reducer Connectors The pipes are connected with a reducer Edit Active Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Opens dialog Usage The Edit Active Plane command launches the Reference Plane Parameters dialog which is used to set various display and orientation options for the active Reference Plane Note The active Reference Plane may not be edited while a 2D drawing is in progress Reference Plane Parameters Dialog Options PLANE NORMAL Set direction vector used for the plane s normal the Reference Plane s positive Z axis PLANE ORIGIN Set coordinates for the plane s center PLANE CROSS AXIS Enter a direction vector for the cross axis the Reference Plane s positive X axis GRID SPACING 252 Index Enter the desired distance between grid lines GRID LINE WEIGHT Enter a value for the thickness of grid lines GRID COLOR Use the color picker to select the color used f
574. tically when you open the Scan Control window 3 Preparing to Scan by capturing a preview targeting and adjusting scan settings 4 Executing the scan Creating a Scanner The first time that you want to use a scanner it is necessary to create a persistent entry for it Scanners are added from the Navigator window To add an HDS6000 or HDS4500 scanner 1 From the Configure menu select Scanners The Configure Scanners dialog appears 2 Click Add The Add Scanner dialog appears 3 From the Scanner Model list select the model name of the scanner that you are adding For example select HDS4500 if the scanner is an HDS4500 or HDS6000 if the scanner is an HDS6000 4 Inthe Scanner Name field type a logical name for the scanner you are adding e g Scanner My Scanner Scanner 123 etc 5 In the IP Address field enter the IP Address for the scanner you are adding The IP address of the scanner is displayed in the built in console HDS6000 The HDS4500 does not require an IP address as it is using Firewire Technology 6 Click OK The scanner is added e Toclose the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close Organizing Scan Data Before scanning can take place you must first select or create a Project folder to store scan data and then select or create a ScanWorld within that project folder Individual scans and images are saved in this destination ScanWorld For example
575. ting individual triangles and need to see triangle vertices and edges See Illustration 1 Similarly the Per Face Normals view option displays individual triangles such that they may be easier to distinguish Each triangle is rendered as an individual surface with its own surface normal As with wireframe this is a useful view option when editing a mesh See Illustration 2 Mesh Object Illustration 1 73 Animation Mesh Object Illustration 2 Editing a Mesh Object Once created a mesh object can be edited and fine tuned to produce a specific deliverable Note Only mesh objects can be edited Point clouds viewed as meshes via the View Objects As dialog cannot be changed or edited using mesh tools Editing Triangles Each triangle in the mesh object can be edited as an individual object using commands in the Mesh submenu Use the Move Vertex command to change the shape of a triangle You can also use the Flip Selected Edge command to make subtle changes in the mesh this command flips the selected edge redrawing the two triangles sharing the selected edge Use the Delete Selection command in the Mesh submenu to remove unwanted triangles Be careful not to use the DELETE key on your keyboard It will result in deleting the entire mesh object Similarly avoid using the Cut and Copy functions in the Edit menu unless you intend to use them on the mesh object as a whole Filling in Holes Holes in the mes
576. ting where an action might take place next and is required for some operations For example if you pick an object then insert an object via Insert submenu commands the new object s position and orientation may be based upon where you picked the first object Multiple objects can be selected in Pick mode by holding SHIFT and clicking the objects you want to select or by entering Multi Pick mode and clicking objects with the Multi Pick mode cursor Holding SHIFT and clicking an object that is already selected produces additional pick points Holding CTRL and clicking an object toggles the selection state of the object without affecting the selection state of other objects Use the Select Fenced Deselect Fenced commands to select deselect every object within or overlapping the drawn rectangular data fence See the Using a Fence section in this chapter for more information Previous selections are not affected by the fence selection All objects of a specified type can be selected deselected from the Selectable Visible tab of the View Properties dialog See the Set Selectable entry in the Commands chapter All objects assigned to a layer can be selected deselected simultaneously from the Layers dialog Point Cloud Selection Selecting Whole Point Clouds A In Pick mode click the point cloud with the Pick mode cursor This is the only way to select point clouds that also allows you to indicate or pick a specific p
577. tion selects the target to display in the panel The laser will be aimed at the target s coordinates HT The height of the target above the coordinate AZIMUTH The horizontal angle towards the point at which to aim the laser STEP The change in angle when an arrow key see below is pushed DISTANCE The distance to the point at which to aim the laser 357 Index XYZ NEEL The coordinate of the point at which to aim the laser The Scan Control viewer displays a cross hair at this coordinate ARROWS UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT Push to change the elevation vertical change or azimuth of the point at which to aim the laser POINT STOP Push Point for the scanner to turn and point the laser at the configured coordinate When in this mode the button text changes to Stop Use the arrow buttons to re aim the laser Push the QuickScan button to disengage or re engage the scanner s base motor Push Stop to stop aiming the laser To point the laser 10 11 12 Connect to the scanner ScanStation 2 and ensure that it is level If desired perform a Field Setup to establish the scanner s coordinate system this is required when using the Orthogonal from Station method The azimuth and coordinates of the target point are relative to this coordinate system If using the Orthogonal from Station method import or add the known or assumed coordinate of the point using Add Replace Coordinate Import Coordinate List o
578. tion of settings applied to the particular ModelSpace from which it was created The settings controlled by the ModelSpace View include the initial viewing position and overriding settings for graphical viewing parameters such as a user coordinate system These settings are not shared among different ModelSpace Views A ModelSpace View can be viewed and manipulated via a ModelSpace window 15 Quick Start Changes to the geometry or the layer organization of the geometry in one ModelSpace View affect the ModelSpace from which it was created and all other ModelSpace Views derived from the same ModelSpace a Multiple ModelSpace Views can be created from a single ModelSpace MODELSPACE WINDOW A window that displays a ModelSpace View VIEWPOINT A viewing position or camera that determines which part of the ModelSpace is displayed Multiple viewpoints may be saved within a single ModelSpace View The ModelSpace Window The ModelSpace window provides visual access to a ModelSpace View primarily used to view manipulate and measure scan data or point clouds ModelSpace tools allow you to segment the point clouds into smaller subsets which can then be used to fit specific geometric shapes Various geometric objects can also be inserted and manipulated More complex shapes and text annotations can be added using the 2D drawing functions The Status Bar at the bottom of the ModelSpace window displays information about the current Mode
579. tions are performed N IP 389 Index Remove Both Caps Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object End Caps Action Executes command Usage The Remove Both Caps command deletes both end caps from the selected object To remove both end caps 1 Select the object from which you want to remove the caps 2 From the Edit Object menu point to End Caps and then select Remove Both Caps The caps are removed Remove Cap Closest to Pick Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object End Caps Action Executes command Usage The Remove Cap Closest to Pick command deletes the end cap nearest to the picked point on the selected object To remove the end cap closest to the pick 1 Pick a point on the object near the cap that you want to remove 2 From the Edit Object menu point to End Caps and then select Remove Cap Closest to Pick The cap closest to the pick point is removed Remove from Group Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Group Action Executes command Usage The Remove from Group command removes the picked object from an existing group To remove an object from a group 1 Pick the group member you want to remove from the group 2 From the Edit menu point to Group and then select the Remove from Group command The picked object is removed from the group and placed back into the ModelSpace a f there are only two items in a group and one is removed the single remaining item is also removed and the group is des
580. troyed a group must have at least two items Both objects are placed back into the ModelSpace 390 Index Remove Inside Fence Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection Action Executes command Usage The Remove Inside Fence command removes any points inside a fence from the sub selection set For more information see the Advanced Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter Remove Outside Fence Window ModelSpace Menu Selection Point Cloud Sub Selection Action Executes command Usage The Remove Outside Fence command removes any points outside a fence from the sub selection set For more information see the Advanced Segmentation entry in the Modeling chapter Remove Registration Label Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Registration Action Executes command Usage The Remove Registration Label command deletes the registration label from the selected object s Note Removing a registration label from an object does not remove that object from the ControlSpace To remove a registration label 1 Select the object s from which you want to remove a registration label 2 From the Toolsmenu point to Registration then select Remove Registration Label The registration label is deleted Rename Window Navigator Menu Edit Action Executes command Usage The Rename command allows you to edit the name of the selected object 391 Index To rename an object in the Navigato
581. ts This command breaks any shared connections between any two of the selected objects All other connections are unaffected To connect piping see the Connect Piping and Piping Mode commands Display License Window Navigator ModelSpace Image Viewer Registration Scan Control Menu Help Action Opens dialog Usage This command displays a dialog box containing Cyclone licensing information Licenses may be uninstalled from this dialog To uninstall the licenses click Uninstall and follow the prompts 241 Index Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Distance displays submenu commands used to measure a variety of linear distances The following commands are available from the Distance submenu Point to Point Point to Centerline Point Point to Unbounded Surface Center to Center Point to Scanner Distance of Point to Submenu Commands POINT TO POINT Calculates the distance between picked points POINT TO CENTERLINE POINT Calculates the distance between a picked point and the centerline or center point of the other selected object s The type of object selected as the second object determines whether the measurement is to a centerline or a center point For example a sphere is measured to its center point and a cylinder is measured to its centerline POINT TO UNBOUNDED SURFACE Calculates the distance between the first picked point and the nearest
582. ts a Mesh contours are broken up into polylines a Merged point clouds are broken up into individual point clouds Window ModelSpace Navigator Image Viewer Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Export to File dialog is used to export images objects and point clouds to a variety of common graphical binary and text file formats depending on the window from which the export is initiated and on the content of the export Exporting Images Images can be exported from Cyclone to a variety of image formats including JPEG jpg and Windows bitmaps bmp files Images can be exported from the Navigator and Image Viewer windows Exporting Geometric Objects and Point Clouds Geometric objects and point clouds can be exported to a variety of text and binary file formats including Leica Geosystems HDS s binary file format Cyclone Object Exchange COE which preserves more object information during the import export process than other file formats For information on the COE import export features see the COE for AutoCAD and COE for MicroStation chapters Geometric objects and point clouds can be exported from the ModelSpace and Navigator windows ModelSpace or ModelSpace View only Exporting Ortho Images Ortho images can be exported from Cyclone as GeoTIFF files accompanied by TWF and TFW parameter files Ortho images can be exported from the ModelSpace window To export an ortho image 1 Using orthographic projection set t
583. tures an image of the scene from the point of view of the currently connected scanner and displays it in the Scan Control window This image is useful for determining the field of view of the scanner as well as for specifying the areas of the scene that you want to scan 299 Index Having a valid image in the Scan Control window is not required for targeting the scanner or for scanning To capture an image of the scanner s point of view 1 When using the HDS3000 ScanStation or ScanStation 2 scanner specify a target region from which to capture an image For all other scanners start at step 2 2 From the Image menu select Get Image or click the Get Image icon The image appears in the Scan Control window and is saved in the Images folder under the parent ScanWorld a t may take the scanner several seconds to acquire and transfer the image before it is displayed Get Preview Window Scan Control HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Get Preview command captures a preview scan of the scene and displays it in the Scan Control window This preview scan is useful for determining the field of view of the scanner as well as for specifying the areas of the scene that you want to scan Global Color Map Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Appearance Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The Global Color Map command toggles the use of global color map settings or
584. tween any two points 4 Click Unify The point clouds are combined into a single efficient cloud Unify ModelSpace Window Navigator Menu Tools Action Displays dialog Usage The Unify ModelSpace command displays the Unify Clouds dialog which combines multiple point clouds into a single cloud in the selected ModelSpace or ModelSpace View In a ModelSpace containing a registered set of scans and a large number of point clouds performance is improved by the cloud unification process After the point clouds are unified you will generally want to use the Set ScanWorld Default Clouds command to designate the point cloud as the default point cloud that is loaded whenever a new ModelSpace is created from the parent ScanWorld To unify a ModelSpace 1 Inthe Navigator window select the ModelSpace or ModelSpace View containing the clouds you want to unify 2 From the Tools menu select Unify ModelSpace A warning prompt appears Click Unify The Unify Clouds dialog appears 4 Select unification options and then click Unify Note Any points not included in the unification process are removed from the ModelSpace when the cloud is unified e To reduce the number of points in the resulting unified cloud select Reduce Cloud Average Point Spacing and enter a value for the average distance between any two points 5 Click Unify The point clouds in the selected ModelSpace or ModelSpace Views are combined into a single efficient
585. type a logical name for the scanner you are adding e g Scanner My Scanner Scanner 123 etc 5 In the IP Address field enter the IP Address for the scanner you are adding The IP address of the scanner is printed on the scanner s case 6 Click OK The scanner is added e Toclose the Configure Scanners dialog and return to the Navigator window click Close Connecting to a Scanner Connecting to a known scanner one that has been entered in the database is done from a Scan Control window To launch a Scan Control window 1 Fromthe Navigator window expand the Scanners folder 2 Double click the scanner to which you want to connect The Scan Control window appears To connect to a scanner 1 Fromthe Scanner menu in the Scan Control window select Connect or click the Connect icon Connection progress is displayed at the bottom of the Scan Control window a A successful connection is made and the scanner is ready for commands from Cyclone when the Scanner Status box at the bottom of the Scan Control window reads Connected and Ready 35 Scanning with the HDS2500 Organizing Scan Data Before scanning can take place you must first select or create a Project folder to store scan data and then select or create a ScanWorld within that project folder Individual scans and images are saved in this destination ScanWorld For example all of the scans and images that are taken from one scanner position wo
586. u Create Object Slice Action Executes command Usage The by Last Selection command cuts selected object s by the patch selected last To slice objects using a selected patch 185 Index 1 Multi select the objects that you want to cut and then multi select the patch with which you want to cut them The last object selected must be a patch which is then used to cut all of the other selected objects 2 From the Create Object menu point to Slice and then select by Last Selection The objects are cut by the plane of the last patch selected by Ref Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Slice Action Executes command Usage The by Ref Plane command cuts selected object s by the active Reference Plane To slice objects using the Reference Plane 1 Multi select the objects that you want to cut 2 From the Create Object menu point to Slice and then select by Ref Plane The objects are cut by the Reference Plane Calibrate Camera Window Scan Control Menu Scanner Control Camera Calibration Action Opens dialog Usage The Calibrate Camera dialog is used to execute camera calibration for the HDS2500 For more information on camera calibration see the Camera Calibration entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 chapter To calibrate the camera 1 Place the scanner at a distance of roughly 3 to 5 meters from the wall as described in the Camera Calibration entry in the Scanning with the HDS2500 ch
587. u point to Measure and then point to Datum and select Enter Datum The Set Datum Point dialog appears 2 Enter values for the X Y and Z coordinates and then click OK The datum is reset to pass through that point perpendicular to the horizontal plane Exclusion Volume Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Exclusion Volume displays submenu commands used to create and manipulate an exclusion volume An exclusion volume is an object that encloses and replaces other objects in the ModelSpace It is typically used to contain clouds of points for which you need only a rough approximation of the volume occupied The following commands are available from the Exclusion Volume submenu Create Disassemble Collapse Minimize Keep Collapsed Window Navigator Menu File Action Executes command Usage The Exit command shuts down the Cyclone program including any open windows Explode Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Executes command Usage The Explode command creates individual components from a selected object To explode an object 1 Select the object that you want to explode a You can multi select objects for explosion 2 From the Create Object menu select Explode The selected object is broken up into 273 Index components that can be selected and manipulated individually a Extrusions are broken up into patches a Polylines are broken up into line segmen
588. uld go into one ScanWorld The scans and images from another scanner position would go into another ScanWorld possibly in another project The organization of the scans is managed by the user To select a project for your scan data 1 When you open a Scan Control window the Select a Project dialog appears To select a different project when the Scan Control window is already open from the Project Setup tab in the Scan Control window select Select a Project e You can create a new project for your scan data by clicking Create and then selecting the created project that appears 2 Navigate to an existing project and then click OK Your destination project is selected a When the scanner is not busy you can select a different destination for the next set of scan data Note If you choose a new project a new ScanWorld is created and your previous ScanWorld is no longer the destination for subsequent scan data To select a ScanWorld for your scans and images 1 From the Project Setup tab in the Scan Control window select Select a ScanWorld The Select a ScanWorld dialog appears e You can create a new ScanWorld in the currently selected Project for your scan data by clicking Create and then selecting the created ScanWorld that appears 2 Navigate to an existing ScanWorld and then click OK Your destination ScanWorld is selected e When the scanner is not busy you can select a different destination ScanWorld for the next set
589. umbers can be used as references to move objects Select the Copy at Angle tab A graphical indicator appears in the ModelSpace viewer illustrating the rotation angle and axis of the current settings Click the arrow icon to the right of the Axis of Rotation row The Axis of Rotation subdialog appears Specify the axes around which you want to rotate using standard or custom axes points or picks and then click OK The Axis of Rotation subdialog closes Click the arrow icon to the right of the Center of Rotation row The Center of Rotation subdialog appears Specify the centerpoint around which you want to rotate using picks or reference points or custom coordinates and then click OK The Center of Rotation subdialog closes Click the arrow icon to the right of the Angle of Rotation row The Angle of Rotation subdialog appears Specify the angle by which you want to rotate using reference axes points or custom values and then click OK The Angle of Rotation subdialog closes If multiple objects are selected you may specify a subset of the selected objects to be affected by the move from the Apply to list In the Number of Copies field enter the number of copies you want to create 204 Index e lf you are creating more than one copy the copies are swept so that each copy after the first is rotated from the previous copy according to the current settings 12 Select Copy Annotations to duplicate any annotations that are attached to
590. unning MicroStation SE or later Note Although COEOUT functions in MicroStation SE the translation of complex surface solid type objects into Cyclone objects e g extrusions or revolutions of complex shapes or complex strings is more likely to succeed when using MicroStation J or later The following files are required to run COEIN and COEOUT COEIN MA This MDL application is used to import a COE file into a DGN file COEOUT MA This MDL application is used to export a DGN file or selected parts to a COE file CYRACOE DLL This DLL file resides in the system directory COE INI This INI file is used to configure preference and mapping between Cyclone layers and MicroStation levels Usage The COE feature allows you to use both Cyclone and MicroStation together to maximize your modeling capabilities Not only can you translate objects from Cyclone to MicroStation but you can also make changes to those objects and even model new objects which can then be exported back to Cyclone and incorporated into the source database 123 Cyclone Object Exchange COE Translating Objects from Cyclone to MicroStation Objects modeled in a Cyclone environment can be exported to MicroStation using the COEIN MDL application COEIN can be used to import COE files into any active MicroStation DGN file that has been initialized using a 3D seed file COEIN translates objects from the Cyclone environment by calculating equivalent or near equivalent obje
591. urce object and all links are deleted is the object removed from the database Object Hierarchy In Cyclone most objects belong to another object depending on their positions in the hierarchy in the Navigator window 11 Quick Start a Servers contain Databases a Databases contain Projects a Projects contain ModelSpaces ScanWorlds Registrations Images imported files and other subordinate Projects a ModelSpaces contain ModelSpace Views By default a ScanWorld contains a default ControlSpace and three folders one each for ModelSpaces Scans and Images Each of these folders may contain additional folders as well ScanWorlds can also contain Projects A ScanWorld may contain up to one frozen Registration Creating a Database The first time you run Cyclone you need to create a new database or connect to an existing database on the desired server Databases can reside on your local server or any connected server across a network A database stores all Cyclone data including Projects ScanWorlds ModelSpaces etc a For details on using a database see the Databases section chapter To add a database Select the server to which you want to add new or existing database From the Configure menu select Databases The Configure Databases dialog appears Click Add The Add Databases dialog appears In the Database Name field type a logical name as an identifier for your logical database The logical na
592. ures 102 Sections Manager within the linework 4 Pick on points to define the features that comprise the linework Note the graphical preview of the linework 5 Click the Add Features from Picks button to add the features as well as the linework The linework is added as a polyline or polygon to the ModelSpace Export Data The final step in the Virtual Surveyor process is exporting your data To export data 1 When finished adding features click Format Output in the Virtual Surveyor dialog The Export ASCII File Format dialog appears 2 Choose the appropriate export settings and then click Save The file is exported to the selected file and the Virtual Surveyor dialog reappears a See Custom ASCII Export section of the Export entry in the Commands chapter for details on import settings Virtual Surveyor Dialog Po er ea ME ot E Prefix Number TAR Lines ts d El Available Start A C Polygon af EE Code Tags prefix x f Begin v f End e f Continue L Code Library Default Code Default Code Library y Customize Columns Attribute Feature Code Notes Value D New Features Format Output A Click to add a candidate feature with each pick 103 OZZrAL ZTOMMIOOD Jyo VU Sections Manager Show features in the ModelSpace viewer Show candidate features in the ModelSpace viewer Show unsaved features in the
593. us box at the bottom of the Scan Control window reads Connected and Ready Organizing Scan Data Before scanning can take place you must first select or create a Project folder to store scan data and then select or create a ScanWorld within that project folder Individual scans and images are saved in this destination ScanWorld For example all of the scans and images that are taken from one scanner position would go into one ScanWorld The scans and images from another scanner position would go into another ScanWorld possibly in another project The organization of the scans is managed by the user To select a project for your scan data 1 When you open a Scan Control window the Select a Project dialog appears To select a different project when the Scan Control window is already open from the Project Setup tab in the Scan Control window select Select a Project e You can create a new project for your scan data by clicking Create and then selecting the created project that appears 2 Navigate to an existing project and then click OK Your destination project is selected When the scanner is not busy you can select a different destination for the next set of scan data Note If you choose a new project a new ScanWorld is created and your previous ScanWorld is no longer the destination for subsequent scan data To select a ScanWorld for your scans and images 1 From the Project Setup tab in the Scan Control window s
594. ustomize Hotkeys The Customize Hotkeys dialog appears 2 From the Window list select the type of window that contains the command for which you want a hotkey 3 From the Category Menus list select the menu that contains the command for which you want a hotkey 4 From the Commands Menu Items list select the command for which you want a hotkey 5 Click in the Press new shortcut hotkey field and press the key or combination of keys that you want as a hotkey for the selected command a Certain key combinations must be entered using the check boxes and the drop down list in the Or use section 6 Click Assign The new hotkey appears in the Current Keys list 7 Click Apply or OK to save changes To remove a keyboard hotkey From the Edit menu select Customize Hotkeys The Customize Hotkeys dialog appears From the Current Keys list select the hotkey you want to delete Click Remove The selected hotkey is removed from the Current Hotkeys list Click Apply or OK to save changes PON gt Customize Lookup Lists Window Navigator Menu Edit Action Opens dialog Usage This command opens the Annotation Lookup Lists dialog which is used to import and export text files used as lookup list contents as well as to delete lookup lists Note Actual editing of lookup lists is not performed in this dialog Instead the editing is done using the text editor of your choice Once a lookup list is created it is available f
595. ut 277 Index To export data to Leica s System 1200 format a ou gt From the File menu select Export Leica System 1200 A folder browser appears Select the folder that will contain the exported Leica System 1200 files and click OK The Export Leica System 1200 Data Type dialog appears Click Make New Folder to create a new folder Select the type of data that will be exported If exporting a mesh the mesh should have TIN properties relative to the Z axis Click Export The Export Options Dialog appears Configure the Export Options then click Export The Leica System 1200 files are written to the selected folder Export PCF Window ModelSpace Menu File Action Opens dialog Usage The Export PCF dialog is used to specify the parameters used in the creation of Alias PCF Piping Component File files that can be imported by Alias Piping Solutions software For more information about Alias Piping Solutions visit http Awww alias ltd uk To export selected objects to PCF 1 a Multi select the piping objects to be exported to PCF Select at least one piping component e g cylinder flange valve etc in each piping line to be exported Each piping line is exported to a separate PCF file The components in the selected piping line s must have proper Spec LinelD and SKEY values See Piping Mode in the Command Reference From the File menu select Export PCF The Export PCF dialog appears Select
596. vigate to the folder containing the file and select it If you want to open an existing file navigate to the appropriate folder and select the desired file if you are opening a new drawing enter a new file name Click Open AutoCAD is launched You can open a temporary file by clicking CANCEL a file will be created in your system s TEMP directory To save any work done in a temporary file be sure to save your drawing from AutoCAD Window ControlSpace ModelSpace Registration Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS4500 HDS6000 Menu Point Cloud Rendering Action Toggles menu item ON Usage The Back command determines the active side of the estimated surfaces in point clouds The command affects the Shaded and One Sided Point Cloud Rendering modes Back Angle Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Measure Action Executes command Usage The Back Angle command calculates the back angle between the centerlines and or planes of the selected objects The back angle added to the shorter angle measured by the Angle command forms a full circle To measure the back angle between objects Pick the objects you want to measure From the Toolsmenu point to Measure and then select Back Angle The measurement is represented graphically The measurement results are also displayed in the Output box if it is enabled If multiple points are being measured measurements are taken from the first picked object to 1
597. ving or resizing snap to the reference object s snapping point at a perpendicular or parallel angle press and hold SHIFT ALT and drag the object handle towards the reference object If the angle of intersection is at least 45 degrees the second object is snapped at a perpendicular angle If the angle is less than 45 degrees the second object snaps parallel with the reference object 65 Animation Adding and Deleting Boundary Vertices to or from a Patch Extrusion Face Polygon or Polyline Vertices can be added to or deleted from a selected patch extruded face top and bottom faces polygon or polyline while in Pick mode e To add a vertex to the selected patch extrusion face polygon or polyline press and hold ALT and click along the edge of the selected object without moving the mouse A vertex and a handle is added to the object e To remove a vertex from the object press and hold ALT and click the vertex you want to remove without moving the mouse The vertex and the handle is removed Editing Objects The Color and Material Editor dialog is used to change the display properties of the selected object s Color and material settings can be adjusted individually For a vertex line or point cloud only the diffuse material property affects how it is displayed The Align submenu commands and dialogs are used to align objects in a variety of ways including aligning objects to a reference surface or axis using a refer
598. w ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Patch displays submenu commands used to edit a selected patch The following commands dialogs and submenus are available from the Patch submenu Make Rectangular Make Circular Subtract Fill Selected Hole 345 Index Window Menu Action Usage Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS6000 Scanner Control Executes command The Pause command pauses the current scanner operation scan or image acquisition Push the Resume button to continue the operation or the Stop button to discontinue the operation Perpendicular Window Menu Action Usage ModelSpace Edit Object Align Executes command The Perpendicular command aligns one or more selected objects so that their axes are perpendicular to a reference object To make objects perpendicular 1 Multi select the objects you want to make perpendicular The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align 2 From the Edit Object menu point to Align and then select Perpendicular The objects are rotated to make their axes perpendicular to the axis of the reference object Perspective Orthographic Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Action Toggles menu item Usage The Perspective Orthographic command toggles the ModelSpace View from Orthographic to Perspective n In perspective projection parallel lines may converge and re
599. w checkbox is selected You control the decimation by determining the level of decimation that is to occur and whether or not to maintain vertices breaklines and boundary edges For example when Maintain Vertices is enabled the positioning of mesh vertices is preserved as closely as possible to their original locations given the amount of decimation being performed the higher the percentage the more likely it is that vertices will remain at or near their original positions You can choose to maintain breaklines and or boundary edges The boundary edges breaklines are preserved geometrically relative to the level of decimation However you can also choose to ignore breaklines and or boundary edges in which case no attempt is made to preserve original positioning or you can choose Keep Exact in which case the vertices in breaklines and or boundary edges are frozen in place and are not modified no matter how heavily decimated the mesh is 75 Animation a For detailed instruction on decimating a mesh object see the Mesh entry in the Commands chapter Selecting Parts of a Mesh When editing a mesh object it is necessary to select triangles edges holes or vertices depending on the function to be initiated For example an edge must be selected to use the Flip Selected Edge command When a selection is made within a mesh object the triangle to which the selection pertains is shown in a different color Selection coloring can b
600. want to align the selected Cutplane M To align the selected Cutplane select an axis from the Align drop down menu and then click Align N Execute the Cutplane offset with the current settings O Choose Reference or Self from the Offset drop down list depending on whether you want to use the Reference Plane or the Cutplane itself as the offset reference point P This setting determines the increment used for the Raise Active Cutplane and Lower Active Cutplane commands in the Cutplanes submenu To offset the selected cutplane 1 From the Tools menu point to Cutplane and then select Add Edit Cutplanes The Cutplanes dialog appears 2 Choose Reference or Self from the Offset drop down list depending on whether you want to use the Reference Plane or the Cutplane itself as the reference point 3 Enter a value in the by box and then click Offset The selected Cutplane is moved and the increment for raising and lowering Cutplanes is set Add Edit Feature Code Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Annotations Action Opens dialog Usage The Add Edit Feature Code dialog is used to add and edit Feature Code annotations for a selected object Specific to surveying feature codes are used to identify specific reference objects For example toc is a feature code used to represent top of curb Measurements taken with the top of curb as a reference would be annotated with the feature code toc Cyclone Feature Codes mai
601. warning dialog appears To add a cloud constraint without initial pick hints You can create Cloud Constraints using Add Cloud Constraint without picking initial pick hints for the two following cases From the ScanWorlds Constraints tab of the Registration window select both of the ScanWorlds that contain the clouds you want to constrain From the Cloud Constraint menu select Add Cloud Constraint The Add Cloud Constraint dialog appears Select the appropriate initial alignment method and then click OK A new Cloud Constraint is added to the Constraint List labeled as a cloud mesh constraint and automatically named Add Constraint Window Registration Menu Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Add Constraint command creates a constraint between two ScanWorlds from two selected objects For more information on the registration process see the Registration entry in the Getting Started chapter Adding a constraint defines two objects as having similar size and shape and being located in the overlapping area of the ScanWorlds that you are registering To manually add a constraint 1 From the ModelSpaces tab of the Registration window load both of the ModelSpaces that contain the objects you want to constrain To vew a ModelSpace In the upper pane select the ModelSpace you want to view and then go to the ScanWorld menu and select View ModelSpace The ControlSpace appears in one of the two Constrain
602. window area Note that the top and bottom limits should be defined before acquiring images Resolution After determining the area of the scene that you want to scan adjust the range sample spacing and or number of points Probe e To measure the range and horizontal and vertical direction from the scanner to a point position the target cross hair on the point and click the Probe button Scan Filter Range and or intensity parameters can be set via the Scan Filter control Points sampled outside these parameters are discarded without being recorded to the database Atmosphere Environmental conditions ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure can affect the range computations by a small amount Although any differences are minuscule over the ranges and environmental tolerances supported by the scanners controls are provided to compensate for such atmospheric conditions The default values should be acceptable to most users using the Atmosphere control e 10 adjust the atmosphere enter values for ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure in the appropriate fields in the Atmosphere tab 28 Scanning with the ScanStation ScanStation 2 and HDS3000 Station Data HDS3000 The default scanner coordinate system is based on an origin point within the scanner The Station Data control allows you to enter known or assumed real world coordinates to establish a relationship between the scanner and that coordinate system See the
603. wing commands submenus and dialogs are available from the Align submenu Align Surfaces Align to Axis Coincident Colinear Coplanar Parallel Perpendicular Codirectional Put at Angle Put at Distance 168 Index For Align submenu command submenu and dialog details see the individual command entries Align Surfaces Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Executes command Usage The Align Surfaces command aligns the surface of one or more selected objects to the surface of a reference object To align the surfaces of objects 1 Multi select the objects you want to align a The last object selected is the reference object the one to which the others align 2 From the Align submenu select Align Surfaces The surface of the object s is aligned to the surface of the reference object Align to Axis Window ModelSpace Menu Edit Object Align Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Align to displays submenu commands to align one or more selected objects to the current X Y Z or XYZ axis The following commands are available from the Align to Axis submenu X Axis Y Axis Z Axis XYZ Axes To align the selected object to the current X Y Z or XYZ axes 1 Select the object s you want to align 2 From the Align to Axis submenu select the axis to which you want the selected object aligned The object is rotated about its center until its principal direction matches the select
604. with fences see the Using a Fence entry in the Modeling chapter To draw a polygonal fence 1 From the Edit menu point to Modes and then select Polygonal Fence Mode The Polygonal Fence cursor appears 2 Click to place the first vertex a Drag to adjust the vertex position a To continuously add vertices as you move the mouse press and hold CTRL and drag the cursor 3 Continue adding vertices as needed A vertex can also be added by clicking anywhere along the line segment between existing vertices An existing vertex can be deleted by clicking the vertex without moving the mouse a The newly drawn fence can adjusted by dragging its vertices with the Polygonal Fence cursor a To clear the newly drawn fence select Clear from the Fence submenu Polyline From Curves Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Curves Action Executes command Usage The Polyline command creates a polyline from a series of selected lines or curves To create a polyline from intersecting curves 1 Select a sequence of lines or curves that are to form the polyline you want to create 2 From the Create Object menu point to From Curves and then select Polyline The polyline is created 359 Index Polyline From Pick Points Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object From Pick Points Action Executes command Usage The Polyline command creates line segments that connect a series of picked points To create a polyline
605. wn fence select Clear from the Fence submenu Fence Operations Deleting with a Fence When a fence has been drawn cloud points mesh triangles and line segments in contour lines and polylines can be deleted relative to the fence and according to their selection status using the Fence submenu commands in the Edit menu Point clouds meshes contour lines or polylines that are overlapping a fence are first segmented and then the appropriate segment is deleted Other objects are not affected by these fence operations The Delete Inside command removes all cloud points mesh triangles or line segments within or partially within the data fence a The Delete Outside command removes all cloud points mesh triangles or line segments entirely outside of the data fence If a triangle or line segment is partially within the fence it is not deleted The Delete Selected Inside command removes every selected cloud point mesh triangle or line segment within or partially within the data fence a The Delete Selected Outside command removes every selected cloud point mesh triangle or line segment entirely outside of the data fence If a triangle or line segment is partially within the fence it is not deleted a When enabled only those portions within the Limit Box are affected by these operations 68 Animation Selecting Objects with a Fence A fence can be used as a boundary for selecting objects including mesh triangles and line se
606. x A vertex is created at each pick point View All Window ModelSpace Registration Menu ModelSpace Viewpoint Registration Viewers Action Executes command Usage The View All command adjusts the viewpoint so that the entire scene is visible in the current window View Half Space Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Cutplane Action Toggles menu item ON OFF Usage The View Half Space command hides all geometry below the active Cutplane This can be useful to see inside the surfaces that are left visible To toggle whether the geometry above below the Cutplane is hidden use the Flip command in the Cutplanes dialog View Interim Results Window Registration Menu Registration Action Executes command Usage The View Interim Results command creates a temporary ModelSpace to display an interim registration of the selected ScanWorlds Constraints ModelSpaces or ControlSpaces 465 Index For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter The View Interim Results command allows for the visual inspection of the current state of registration for any selected subset of registration objects ScanWorlds Constraints ModelSpaces or ControlSpaces without having to first freeze the ScanWorld and create a ModelSpace see Create ScanWorld Freeze Registrationand Create ModelSpace commands To view interim results 1 Select the ScanWorlds
607. xact number in this field Note that entering the target number automatically adjusts the value in the of Original field Note also that the value in this field is automatically updated when the slider is used 233 Index D Displays the original number of triangles in the selected mesh object E When selected original vertices are maintained as much as possible When unselected vertices may be moved to maintain the overall shape of the mesh more accurately F Use this slider to adjust the percentage of decimation If Auto Preview is selected see B the viewer is automatically updated as you move the slider G Displays the percentage of the original number of triangles by which the mesh is to be decimated You may also enter an exact number in this field Note that entering a value in this field automatically adjusts the value in the Target Number field Note also that the value in this field is automatically updated when the slider is used H When Ignore is selected the integrity of the mesh object s boundary is not protected When Maintain is selected added weight is given to maintaining boundary edge shape during decimation When Keep Exact is selected the mesh object s boundaries remain intact no matter how much the mesh is decimated I When Ignore is selected breakline integrity is not protected When Maintain is selected added weight is given to maintaining breakline shape during decimation When Keep Exact is
608. xecutes command Usage The Optimize command performs general consistency checking updating and reorganizing of the selected object Different objects in the Navigator optimize differently 339 Index Optimizing can improve loading browsing and editing speed Note Depending on the size and complexity of the object being optimized this operation can be time consuming Note When a database from an older version of Cyclone is optimized a new ControlSpace is created for each ScanWorld These ControlSpaces are populated with scanned HDS Targets and all objects used in registration constraints Optimize Cloud Alignment Window Registration Menu Cloud Constraint Action Executes command Usage The Optimize Cloud Alignment command is used to adjust cloud constraint alignments for use in global registration For more information on the cloud registration process see the Cloud Registration entry in the Registration chapter To optimize cloud alignments 1 2 From the Constraint List tab select the cloud constraints to be optimized From the Cloud Constraint menu select Optimize Cloud Alignment A progress dialog appears and displays an estimate of percentage completed and a continuously updated error histogram To set the optimization parameters see the Cloud Reg Subsampling Percentage and Cloud Reg Max Iterations parameters in the Preferences entry in this chapter To display the continuously updated error histogr
609. y images without a corresponding Image in the selected Project are unaffected Saving the Texture Map Loading texture maps for point clouds incurs some additional cost in the computer s resources Once the texture mapping is satisfactory the colors displayed by the Colors from Scanner color map mode can be replaced by the colors from texture mapping and then texture mapping can be disabled 1 Select one point cloud with a valid texture map 2 Inthe Texture Map Browser select a valid texture map and click the Save toolbar button e Saving does not work for point clouds copied by reference from another database 3 Confirm the saving then restart Cyclone when prompted e The saved texture map appears in the Texture Map Browser saved texture maps always appear at the bottom of the list but it can no longer be edited or enabled as a texture map However the saved texture map can be copy pasted as a new texture map that can then be edited and activated e g for updating the texture mapping and then re saving it Texture Mapping Hints and Tips e Source images For best results use images that are taken from positions and orientations close to the scanner position and orientation This minimizes the effects of parallax where the image contains elements that were not visible from the scanner e When to create texture maps Create and save the texture mapping before any other modeling e Computation 1 Pick points that are well
610. y and click on a nodal point to delete it To clear the current template including nodal points click the Clear All icon Click Fit to fit the template to the selected point cloud Preview results are displayed in the ModelSpace Viewer and then the Fit Edge Results dialog appears To adjust the maximum distance between the polyline and the nearest point on the original point cloud use the sliders If the preview results are not satisfactory click Back The Fit Edge dialog reappears Adjust the template and nodal points as needed Click Create The polylines are created 293 Index Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Fit Fenced displays submenu commands to fit a geometric object to a fenced point cloud The Fit Fenced commands function identically to Fit to Cloud except that only the fenced portion of the point cloud is used to calculate the fit bypassing the need to first segment the point cloud Also it cannot be used to fit a HDS Target or sphere target If any clouds are selected only the points from selected clouds that lie within the fence are used If no clouds are selected then any points that lie within the fence are used Fitting steel sections additionally requires at least one pick point See the Steel Section command for details Fit to Cloud Window ModelSpace Menu Create Object Action Displays submenu Usage Pointing to Fit to Cloud display
611. y exist in the ControlSpace Window Scan Control ScanStation ScanStation 2 HDS3000 HDS6000 Menu Scanner Control Action Executes command Usage The Resume command continues the currently paused scanner operation scan or image acquisition 395 Index Right Isometric Window ModelSpace Menu Viewpoint Standard Views Action Executes command Usage The Right Isometric command moves the current viewpoint to the standard isometric viewing position vector 1 1 1 at a distance where the entire scene is visible The Isometric command moves the current viewpoint to the standard isometric viewing position vector 1 1 1 Rotate Reference Plane Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Reference Plane Action Toggles function ON OFF Usage The Rotate command toggles the rotate function in Drawing mode which allows you to interactively rotate the active Reference Plane about its origin To rotate the Reference Plane 1 From the Toolsmenu point to Reference Plane and then select Rotate or click the Rotate icon You are now in Drawing mode The cursor changes to the Drawing Tool cursor and the Rotate function is ON 2 In the ModelSpace drag the Drawing Tool cursor to rotate the active Reference Plane The Reference Plane is rotated about its origin such that the cross axis the positive X axis passes beneath the cursor 3 Release the mouse button The active Reference Plane is rotated Rotate View Lo
612. yer functions are controlled from the Layers tab of the View Properties dialog From this dialog layers can be created merged renamed deleted and designated as the current layer the layer to which new objects belong by default Additionally the visibility and selectability of layers can be toggled ON OFF Finally selected objects in the ModelSpace can be assigned to a layer and all of an existing layer s visible objects can be selected deselected To assign selected objects in the ModelSpace to a specific layer 1 Select the desired objects and then select the layer you want in the Layers tab of the View Properties dialog 2 Click the Assign button The objects are assigned to the selected layer To select or deselect all objects in a layer 1 From the Layers tab of the View Properties dialog select the relevant layer 2 Click the Select Deselect button All of the layer s visible objects are selected deselected in the ModelSpace If the layer or object type is unselectable or invisible then selecting the layer has no effect Assigning Colors to Layers Each layer is assigned a default color that can be edited A layer s objects can be displayed using either the layer s color or the objects individual colors e To display a layers objects using the layer s color select the box next to the layer s color box When this box is not selected objects maintain their individual color and material properties To edit a
613. yle setting in the Fitting tab of the Edit Preferences dialog determines the results If Fit Single Object default is selected the clouds are first merged and then a single object is fit to the resulting merged 295 Index point cloud If Fit Multiple Objectsis selected an object is fit to each cloud individually From the Create Object menu point to Fit to Cloud and then select the type of object you want to fit The Select Table Item dialog appears displaying possible matches The best match is temporarily drawn in the ModelSpace and marked with an asterisk in the dialog Matches within the Match Table Item Within value are marked with a The Match Table Item Within value is initially set to the corresponding value in the Object Preferences The vs Table column displays the RMS root mean squared error of the object s dimensions from the initial fit compared to the dimension in the table The vs Cloud column displays the standard deviation of point errors relative to the object best fit using the individual table item s dimensions Any enabled fitting constraints corresponding to parameters from the table are used in the initial fitting but only the selected table entry is used when creating the actual object To update the dialog s values click Refresh Clicking Refresh also calculates any missing vs Cloud values To edit the range of potential matches enter a new value in the Match Table Items Within field and then click
614. yor are the current candidate features Inthe Virtual Surveyor dialog select the prefix and number of the feature to be edited in the Prefix and Number fields Edit the feature Edited features are displayed with an asterisk following the point number To edit the coordinate data for the current feature click the arrow icon PI next to the X Y or Z field and enter the desired data To change the feature code or notes for the current feature enter the new code or notes in the appropriate field To back out of an edit without applying it press ESC Create Polyline You can simultaneously define a polyline or polygon as you pick features To create a polyline or polygon 1 In the Create Lines area of the Virtual Surveyor dialog click Polyline or Polygon to select the type of linework to be created Push the Start button in the Create Lines area The button text changes to Cancel Push this button again to discard the linework before the features are committed To use a different prefix or starting number for the next candidate feature change the appropriate field and pick a new feature Previously picked candidate features are not affected Edit the code tags which will be prepended to the feature code of each of the corresponding features The Begin tag is prepended to the first feature in the linework The End tag is prepended to the last feature in the linework The Continue tag is prepended to the remaining feat
615. you are editing in order to effect a change For example if you want to change the diameter of two selected cylinders of differing diameters you must Select both cylinders open the Edit Propertiesdialog open the Diameter tab check the Value Override box and then enter a new value The diameters of both cylinders are changed to reflect the new value regardless of their original values 3 Make the changes you want to the size position or other properties of the selected object A transparent preview object appears in the ModelSpace View a lf the selected object supports the use of parts tables you may make selections from the Table and Item fields See the Modeling chapter for more information on parts tables 4 Click Apply to apply the changes and continue in the Object Propertiesdialog 5 Click on Close to close the Object Properties dialog The dialog is closed Edit Properties Limit Box Manager Window Limit Box Manager Menu View Action Executes command Usage The Edit Propertiescommand displays the Object Properties dialog for the selected limit box Note This dialog differs from the Object Properties dialog accessed through the ModelSpace Edit Object menu because it only displays the properties of the selected limit box in the Limit Box Manager even if other objects in the ModelSpace are currently selected Edit Redlines Window ModelSpace Menu Tools Redlining Action Opens dialog Usage The Redlines di
616. zing the ModelSpace Coordinate systems are stored with the ModelSpace View a The current coordinate system for a ModelSpace View can be copied into its parent ScanWorld This is done via the Set ScanWorld Coordinate System command After a ScanWorld s coordinate system is reset any subordinate ModelSpace Views are created using the new coordinate system Editing the Coordinate System Individual coordinate system axes can be set to the axis of a reference object using the Set Using One Axis submenu commands while the remaining two axes are arbitrarily assigned perpendicular to the one axis Using the Set Using Two Axes submenu commands all three coordinate system axes can be set at once to the axes of two reference objects With the Using Two Axes submenu commands the first reference axis is used exactly and the second is used to find an axis perpendicular to the first axis as close to the second reference axis as possible The third axis is set perpendicular to the first two and ensures that a right handed coordinate system is created Additionally the coordinate system s origin can be set to a picked point via the Set Origin command in the Coordinate System submenu The Set Origin procedure does not affect the orientation of the axes a The coordinate system can also be edited via the Set from Points command using pick points This command allows you to set any or all of the following reference point coordinate system origin az

Cyclone 5.8.1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents